這是用戶在 2025-7-7 5:54 為 https://app.immersivetranslate.com/pdf-pro/06538a85-c9e9-4e42-8412-9c4280762f57/ 保存的雙語快照頁面,由 沉浸式翻譯 提供雙語支持。了解如何保存?
CANADIAN ASSOCIATION OF加拿大協會

CANADIAN ASSOCIATION OF SNOWBOARD INSTRUCTORS
加拿大滑雪板教練協會

CANADIAN ASSOCIATION OF SNOWBOARD INSTRUCTORS
加拿大滑雪板教練協會

186 Hurontario Street, Suite 201
186 Hurontario 街,201 室

Collingwood, ONCollingwood,安大略省
L9Y 4T4
CANADA加拿大
www.casi-acms.com
/casiacms/ casiacms
PRODUCED IN CANADA加拿大製造
© 2021 Canadian Association of Snowboard Instructors All rights reserved.
© 2021 加拿大單板滑雪教練協會 版權所有。

CASI-ACMS

The purpose of this Reference Guide is to serve as the resource manual of the Canadian snowboarding technique for snowboard instructors.
本參考指南的目的是作為加拿大滑雪板技術的資源手冊,供滑雪板教練使用。

PREFACE前言

Because technique is constantly changing with advances in snowboarding, it is the responsibility of each member of the Canadian Association of Snowboard Instructors to change and update their riding and teaching methods.
由於隨著滑雪板運動的進步,技術不斷變化,因此加拿大滑雪板教練協會的每位成員都有責任改變並更新他們的滑行及教學方法。
This guide is made up of the following sections:
本指南由以下幾個部分組成:

INTRODUCTION簡介

Provides a short overview of the Canadian Association of Snowboard Instructors (CASI), its mandate, and a list of the people responsible for the operation of the Association. It also includes the Code of Ethics for CASI members to follow.
提供加拿大滑雪板教練協會(CASI)的簡要概述、其使命,以及負責協會運作的人員名單。內容亦包含 CASI 會員應遵守的道德守則。

RISK MANAGEMENT風險管理

An instructor’s first and foremost concern. This section outlines some safety and risk management considerations for instructors to be aware of when teaching.
教練最重要的關注事項。本節概述教練在教學時應注意的一些安全與風險管理考量。

TEACHING THEORY教學理論

Introduces the instructor to various skills, attributes, and tools, which will assist in becoming an effective instructor.
介紹教練各種技能、特質與工具,協助成為一位有效率的教練。

THE SKILLS CONCEPT技能概念

This is an outline of the five basic riding skills, as well as their application to snowboarding.
這是五項基本滑行技能的概要,以及它們在滑雪板運動中的應用。

TEACHING BEGINNER SNOWBOARDERS
教學初學者滑雪板者

An instructor’s guide to teaching the QuickRide System TM TM  ^("TM "){ }^{\text {TM }} - CASI’s beginner teaching methodology. The QuickRide System provides a comprehensive framework for progressing new snowboarders through the early stages of learning.
教練指南:QuickRide 系統 TM TM  ^("TM "){ }^{\text {TM }} — CASI 的初學者教學方法。QuickRide 系統提供一個完整的架構,幫助新手滑雪板者順利通過學習的早期階段。

SKILL DEVELOPMENT技能發展

This is a combination of teaching methods (through explanation and illustration), skill development manoeuvres, progressions, tactics and outcomes for intermediate, advanced and expert riders. It is designed as a reference, to assist instructors in teaching snowboarders beyond the novice stages.
這是結合教學方法(透過解說與示範)、技能發展動作、進階步驟、策略與成果,適用於中級、高級及專家級滑雪者。此指南設計為參考用,協助教練教授滑雪板者超越初學階段。

APPENDICES附錄

Includes information regarding Physics & Biomechanics in Snowboarding, Basic Anatomy, Teaching Children, Instructor Training, Terrain As a Teaching Tool, Equipment Considerations, and any supplementary information to the other sections.
包含有關滑雪板物理與生物力學、基礎解剖學、兒童教學、教練培訓、地形作為教學工具、裝備考量,以及對其他章節的補充資訊。

COMMENT:評論:

This guide is only one of many resources for understanding snowboarding technique and teaching others. Experience, exposure to other professionals, certification courses, clinics, seminars, and other reading material all contribute to the on-going development of a proficient
本指南僅是理解滑雪板技巧及教學的眾多資源之一。經驗、與其他專業人士的交流、認證課程、研習會、研討會及其他閱讀資料,皆有助於持續提升專業能力。

TABLE OF CONTENTS目錄

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION第一章:簡介
What is CASI? … 7
什麼是 CASI? … 7

CASI’s Organizational Structure … 7
CASI 的組織架構 … 7

Code of Ethics … 8
道德守則 … 8

CHAPTER 2: RISK MANAGEMENT
第二章:風險管理

Safety Rules. … 9
安全規則 … 9

The Alpine Responsibility Code … 10
阿爾卑斯責任守則 … 10

Slope Designations … 11
坡度標示 … 11

Smart Style … 11
智慧風格 … 11

Teaching in Freestyle Terrain … 12
自由式地形教學 … 12

Duty of Care. … 13
注意義務 … 13

Accidents on the Slopes. … 14
滑雪坡道上的意外……14

CHAPTER 3: TEACHING THEORY
第三章:教學理論

The Role of the Snowboard Instructor. … 16
滑雪板教練的角色……16

Principles of Learning … 17
學習原則……17

The Practical Teaching Skills … 18
實用教學技巧 … 18

Guest Service & Safety … 18
賓客服務與安全 … 18

Communication & Lesson Structure … 20
溝通與課程結構 … 20

Learning Styles. … 21
學習風格 … 21

Using Questions … 22
使用提問 … 22

Setting Goals & Objectives … 22
設定目標與宗旨 … 22

Methods of Presentation … 24
簡報方法 … 24

The Training Cycle. … 27
訓練循環 … 27

The Lesson Format … 28
課程格式 … 28

Demonstrations … 29示範 … 29
Analysis & Improvement. … 30
分析與改進 … 30

The “TT-PP-EE” Model … 32
「TT-PP-EE」模型 … 32

The PTT Format … 32
PTT 格式 … 32

Technical Content … 35
技術內容 … 35

People Skills And The Guest Experience … 36
人際技巧與顧客體驗 … 36

CHAPTER 4: THE SKILLS CONCEPT
第四章:技能概念

The CASI Technical Model … 41
CASI 技術模型 … 41

Position & Balance … 43
位置與平衡 … 43

Pivot. … 47樞軸 … 47
Edging … 49刃邊控制 … 49
Pressure. … 51壓力……51
Timing & Coordination … 55
時機與協調……55

The Core Competencies … 57
核心能力……57

The Advanced Competencies … 58
進階能力……58

Other Applications of the Skills Concept … 59
技能概念的其他應用 … 59

Turn Types … 60
轉彎類型 … 60

CHAPTER 5: TEACHING BEGINNER SNOWBOARDERS
第五章:教學初學者滑雪板者

Choice of Terrain … 64
地形選擇 … 64

The QuickRide System … 65
QuickRide 系統 … 65

The S.A.F.E. Concept … 65
S.A.F.E. 概念 … 65

QuickRide System Overview … 66
QuickRide 系統概述 … 66

1: Basics … 67
1:基礎知識 … 67

2: Sliding … 73
2:滑動 … 73

3: Control … 75
3:控制 … 75

4: Turning … 77
4:轉向 … 77

5: Flow … 87
5:流動 … 87

Customizing Quickride For Different Students … 89
為不同學生自訂 Quickride … 89

CHAPTER 6: SKILL DEVELOPMENT
第六章:技能發展

Teaching Beyond Novice … 91
超越新手的教學 … 91

The Skill Development Model … 92
技能發展模型 … 92

The 3 Teaching Realms: Piste, Off-Piste & Freestyle … 94
三大教學領域:滑雪道、非滑雪道與自由式 … 94

Level 2 Instructor: Intermediate Skill Development … 95
二級教練:中階技能發展 … 95

Developing Sliding Turns … 95
滑行轉彎技巧的培養 … 95

Introducing Carving … 97
雕刻式滑行入門 … 97

Introduction to Terrain Adaptation … 99
地形適應入門 … 99

Introducing Switch Riding … 101
切換騎乘介紹 … 101

Basic Flatland Tricks … 103
基礎平地技巧 … 103

Introducing Jumping … 105
跳躍介紹 … 105

Level 3 Instructor: Advanced Skill Development … 107
三級教練:進階技能發展 … 107

Refining Advanced Turns on Groomed Runs … 107
精進整備雪道上的進階轉彎技巧 … 107

Refining Terrain Adaptation Skills … 109
精進地形適應技能 … 109

Refining Freestyle Riding … 111
精進自由式滑行技巧 … 111

Level 4: Expert Skill Development … 119
第四級:專家技能發展 … 119

Expert Carving … 119
專家雕刻技巧 … 119

Expert Freeriding Skills … 121
專家自由騎乘技巧 … 121

Creating Variation in Freestyle Riding … 122
創造花式騎乘變化 … 122

APPENDICES附錄
Appendix 1: Teaching Children … 123
附錄 1:教導兒童 … 123

Appendix 2: Instructor Training … 135
附錄 2:教練培訓 … 135

Appendix 3: Physics & Biomechanics in Snowboarding … 143
附錄 3:滑雪板運動中的物理與生物力學 … 143

Appendix 4: Basic Anatomy & Movements For Snowboarding … 151
附錄 4:滑雪板的基本解剖與動作 … 151

Appendix 5: Terrain As A Teaching Tool … 161
附錄 5:地形作為教學工具 … 161

Appendix 6: Freestyle Terrain … 165
附錄 6:自由式地形 … 165

Appendix 7: Tactics Glossary … 173
附錄 7:戰術詞彙表 … 173

Appendix 8: Equipment Set-Up. … 179
附錄 8:設備設置……179

Appendix 9: Terminology … 187
附錄 9:術語……187

Appendix 10: CADS: Fun, Inclusion, Respect … 190
附錄 10:CADS:樂趣、包容、尊重……190

INTRODUCTION簡介

What is CASI?什麼是 CASI?

The Canadian Association of Snowboard Instructors (CASI) was formed in 1994 and incorporated in 1995.
加拿大單板滑雪教練協會(CASI)成立於 1994 年,並於 1995 年正式註冊成立。
CASI trains and certifies Canada’s snowboard instructors. It ensures that a national standard of safe and efficient snowboard instruction is maintained to serve Canadian snowboarders and the snowboarding industry.
CASI 培訓並認證加拿大的單板滑雪教練。它確保維持全國統一的安全且有效的單板滑雪教學標準,以服務加拿大的單板滑雪者及單板滑雪產業。
CASI has four regions across Canada:
CASI 在加拿大劃分為四個區域:
  • British Columbia West /NWT/ Yukon
    卑詩省西部 / 西北地區 / 育空
  • Alberta / British Columbia East
    亞伯達省 / 卑詩省東部
  • Ontario / Manitoba /
    安大略省 / 曼尼托巴省 /
Saskatchewan薩斯喀徹溫省
  • Quebec / Atlantic魁北克 / 大西洋地區

CASI'S ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE
CASI 的組織架構

WHO GOVERNS CASI?誰管理 CASI?

CASI is one of the only professional snowboard instruction certification bodies in the world that is run entirely by snowboarders. It has a seven-member national Board of Directors; six elected by the membership, plus the Executive Director (who is a non-voting member). The Board conducts CASI’s affairs and business, which are then administered by the Executive Director.
CASI 是全球少數由滑雪板運動員全權運營的專業滑雪板教學認證機構之一。它擁有一個由七名成員組成的全國董事會;其中六名由會員選出,另有一名執行董事(無投票權成員)。董事會負責 CASI 的事務和業務,隨後由執行董事執行管理。

CODE OF ETHICS道德規範

Each Member shall be governed by this Code of Ethics and shall adhere to the following articles at all times, both on and off duty. The rigid observance of the Code will bring prestige and honor to the organization and help to build the profession into one that will stand high in the opinion of the general public and the snowsports industry.
每位會員皆應遵守本道德規範,並於執勤及非執勤時刻始終遵循以下條款。嚴格遵守本規範將為組織帶來聲望與榮譽,並有助於將本職業塑造成在大眾及雪上運動產業中享有高度評價的專業。
ARTICLE 1: The public expects and deserves the safest, most effective lessons. Being a Member shall be synonymous with the finest aspects of the sport of snowboarding; namely integrity, honor and respect at all times to those who have placed their trust in you and your teaching ability. Further, as snowboarding is a sport enjoyed by many in their formative years, Members have a responsibility to the youth of this country by setting an example for them to follow.
第一條:大眾期望並應享有最安全、最有效的教學。成為會員即代表雪板運動中最優秀的特質;即誠信、榮譽與尊重,始終對那些信任您及您的教學能力的人保持敬意。此外,鑑於滑雪板運動為許多年輕人在成長階段所喜愛,會員對本國青少年負有責任,應以身作則,成為他們的榜樣。
ARTICLE 2: A Member must always strive to further develop their technical and teaching abilities to be the best instructor they can be. Continual self-progression is essential if a Member is to remain current, up-to-date, and relevant as a professional snowboard instructor.
第二條:會員必須持續努力提升其技術與教學能力,成為最優秀的教練。持續自我進步對於會員保持專業雪板教練的時效性、最新性及相關性至關重要。
ARTICLE 3: Members are continuously in the public eye as instructors and so must act responsibly, fairly, and professionally at all times. A Member has a responsibility to themselves, their colleagues, and the public to set the best example at all times within the snowsports community.
第三條:會員作為教練,持續處於公眾視野中,因此必須時刻以負責任、公正及專業的態度行事。會員對自己、同事及公眾負有責任,必須在滑雪運動社群中隨時樹立最佳典範。
ARTICLE 4: No Member shall misrepresent him/herself as to their level of certification or membership status within the organization. Members must not teach outside of their certification level while working as a snowboard instructor. Each Member must respect the limits of their training, knowledge, and experience, as per their certification level.
第四條:任何會員不得誤導他人其認證等級或組織內的會員身份。會員在擔任滑雪板教練時,必須遵守其認證等級,不得超出資格範圍授課。每位會員必須尊重其培訓、知識及經驗的限制,依照其認證等級行事。
ARTICLE 5: Upon being hired as a snowboard instructor, Members must interact with their employer in a professional, competent and timely manner at all times - representing the association to the best of their abilities, and must meet professional financial obligations promptly and conduct all their business dealings in a manner befitting the standards of the organization.
第五條:會員一旦被聘為滑雪板教練,必須始終以專業、勝任且及時的態度與雇主互動,盡其所能代表協會,並且必須準時履行專業財務義務,以符合組織標準的方式處理所有商務事務。
ARTICLE 6: Members may have the opportunity to represent products or brands in a sponsorship or pro-deal setting. Endorsing products purely for personal gain, without true knowledge and conviction of the products’ benefits, is a misrepresentation of the ethos of the association, and misleading to colleagues and the general public.
第六條:會員可能有機會以贊助或專業合作的形式代表產品或品牌。純粹為個人利益而代言產品,卻對產品的效益缺乏真正的了解和信念,違背本協會的精神,且會誤導同事及大眾。
ARTICLE 7: Members must not jeopardize or in any way abuse the promotional relationships between suppliers or other supporters and the association. These relationships are in place to support snowboard instructors working in the industry.
第七條:會員不得危害或以任何方式濫用供應商或其他支持者與本協會之間的推廣關係。這些關係的設立是為了支持在業界工作的滑雪教練。
ARTICLE 8: At no point can a Member be involved with any illegal or criminal activities. The use of alcohol or any prohibited substances, under any circumstances, while working is not permitted.
第八條:會員在任何時候不得涉及任何非法或犯罪活動。工作期間,無論任何情況,均不得使用酒精或任何禁用物質。
ARTICLE 9: Members conducting training courses, lessons, or other programs or administering programs must ensure that they have the necessary approvals and land use agreements in place for the areas in which they operate, and have the proper insurance coverages in place for the activities being performed.
第九條:會員在進行訓練課程、教學或其他計畫,或管理相關計畫時,必須確保已取得其經營區域所需的批准及土地使用協議,並為所執行的活動投保適當的保險。
ARTICLE 10: The Board of Directors shall take appropriate disciplinary action should any breach of the Articles of the Code occur. Action can vary from a simple reprimand to lifetime suspension of membership.
第 10 條:董事會應對任何違反本守則章程的行為採取適當的紀律處分。處分措施可從簡單的警告到終身停權不等。

RISK MANAGEMENT風險管理

We work in an often-unpredictable outdoor mountain environment.
我們的工作環境常常是在不可預測的戶外山區。

Managing risk is our primary concern as snowboard instructors. Teaching snowboarding comes with a long list of potential risks. A good instructor should not only be aware of these risks, but also have the knowledge, training and experience to be able to manage them appropriately to maximize the student’s safety, enjoyment and progression.
風險管理是我們作為滑雪板教練的首要關注。教授滑雪板運動伴隨著長長的潛在風險清單。一位優秀的教練不僅應該了解這些風險,還應具備相應的知識、訓練和經驗,能夠適當管理這些風險,以最大化學生的安全、樂趣和進步。
Instructor certification is one step towards being able to perform proper risk management. Staff training, emergency action plans, medical response protocols, first aid training, practice teaching, teaching experience, equipment assessment and terrain knowledge are just some other examples of the type of knowledge required for instructors to perform proper risk management.
教練認證是能夠執行適當風險管理的一個步驟。員工訓練、緊急行動計畫、醫療應變程序、急救訓練、教學實習、教學經驗、設備評估及地形知識,都是教練執行適當風險管理所需具備的部分知識範例。

SAFETY RULES安全規則

Keeping people safe not only involves informing them of common riding safety rules and mountain etiquette, but also ensuring these rules are adhered to throughout the lesson. Teaching students about the safety rules (including the Alpine Responsibility Code) through clear explanations, good examples and constant reminders, is an essential teaching skill.
保障人員安全不僅包括告知他們常見的騎乘安全規則與山區禮儀,還要確保這些規則在整堂課程中被遵守。透過清楚的說明、良好的示範及不斷的提醒,教導學生安全規則(包括高山責任守則)是重要的教學技巧。

THE ALPINE RESPONSIBILITY CODE
高山責任守則

There are elements of risk that common sense and personal awareness can help reduce. Please adhere to the code listed below and share with others the responsibility for a safe outdoor experience.
有些風險因素可以透過常識和個人警覺來降低。請遵守以下守則,並與他人共同承擔安全戶外活動的責任。
  1. ALWAYS STAY IN CONTROL. YOU MUST BE ABLE TO STOP, OR AVOID OTHER PEOPLE OR OBJECTS.
    始終保持控制。你必須能夠停下來,或避開其他人或物體。
  2. PEOPLE AHEAD OF YOU HAVE THE RIGHT OF WAY. IT IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY TO AVOID THEM.
    前方的人擁有優先通行權。你有責任避開他們。
  3. DO NOT STOP WHERE YOU OBSTRUCT A TRAIL, OR ARE NOT VISIBLE FROM ABOVE.
    請勿在阻礙步道或從上方無法被看見的地方停留。
  4. BEFORE STARTING DOWNHILL OR MERGING ONTO A TRAIL, LOOK UPHILL AND YIELD TO OTHERS.
    在開始下坡或合流進入步道前,請先向上坡方向觀察並禮讓他人。
  5. IF YOU ARE INVOLVED IN OR WITNESS A COLLISION/ACCIDENT YOU MUST REMAIN AT THE SCENE AND IDENTIFY YOURSELF TO THE SKI PATROL.
    如果您捲入或目擊碰撞/事故,必須留在現場並向滑雪巡邏隊員表明身分。
  6. ALWAYS USE PROPER DEVICES TO HELP PREVENT RUNAWAY EQUIPMENT.
    務必使用適當裝置以防止裝備失控。
  7. OBSERVE AND OBEY ALL POSTED SIGNS AND WARNINGS.
    遵守並服從所有張貼的標誌和警告。
  8. KEEP OFF CLOSED TRAILS AND OBEY AREA CLOSURES.
    請勿進入封閉的步道,並遵守區域封閉規定。
  9. YOU MUST NOT USE LIFTS OR TERRAIN IF YOUR ABILITY IS IMPAIRED THROUGH THE USE OF ALCOHOL OR DRUGS.
    若因酒精或藥物影響能力,禁止使用纜車或滑雪場地。
  10. YOU MUST HAVE SUFFICIENT PHYSICAL DEXTERITY, ABILITY, AND KNOWLEDGE TO SAFELY LOAD, RIDE, AND UNLOAD LIFTS. IF IN DOUBT, ASK THE LIFT ATTENDANT.
    您必須具備足夠的身體靈活度、能力及知識,才能安全地搭乘、乘坐及下纜車。如有疑問,請詢問纜車工作人員。

KNOW THE CODE. BE SAFETY CONSCIOUS!
了解規則,保持安全意識!

CLASS MANAGEMENT課堂管理

Organizing a group of students is a key component to keeping them safe and helping the lesson run smoothly. Arrange the group in a way that helps set the class up for them to be able hear you explain and watch up demonstrate, while also keeping them safe from traffic and terrain risks. Be clear in your directions to the group:
組織一群學生是確保他們安全並幫助課程順利進行的關鍵。將學生安排成一個有助於他們聽你講解和觀看示範的隊形,同時也能避免交通和地形的危險。對學生的指示要清楚明確:
  • What are they expected to do as they ride down the run?
    他們在下坡時應該做什麼?
  • Where will they meet?
    他們會在哪裡集合?
  • When and how should they proceed (following each other, one at a time, in pairs, etc.)?
    他們應該何時以及如何前進(依序跟隨、一次一人、兩人一組等)?
Without this essential teaching skill, lessons can quickly become disorganized and unsafe.
沒有這項基本的教學技巧,課程很快就會變得混亂且不安全。

Terrain Choice & Communication
地形選擇與溝通

Once you have assessed your student’s skills, fitness, and lesson goals, choosing the appropriate terrain is the next step. Knowing the available options and being aware of how the conditions can change in different weather conditions are both very important. Great teaching skills mean little without ensuring the students are safe.
在評估完學生的技能、體能和課程目標後,選擇適合的地形是下一步。了解可用的選項並且意識到不同天氣條件下地形狀況可能的變化,這兩點都非常重要。再好的教學技巧,如果無法確保學生安全,也毫無意義。

Outdoor Skills戶外技能

Teaching snowboarding naturally involves being outside in an alpine environment. An instructor must therefore possess some basic, yet very important outdoor skills. Being prepared, checking the weather forecast and dressing appropriately are simple examples. Consult your resort’s grooming report in the morning, so you can be sure of your terrain choices. Also, having well-maintained equipment, resort knowledge, first aid training and general outdoor experience all help you provide a safe riding experience to your guests.
教學滑雪板自然涉及在高山環境中進行戶外活動。因此,教練必須具備一些基本但非常重要的戶外技能。做好準備、查看天氣預報以及穿著得當都是簡單的例子。早上查閱滑雪場的整地報告,這樣你就能確定地形的選擇。此外,擁有良好維護的裝備、熟悉滑雪場資訊、急救訓練和一般的戶外經驗,都有助於你為客人提供安全的滑行體驗。

SLOPE DESIGNATIONS滑道標示

COLOUR ABILITY LEVEL能力等級 SYMBOL
Green綠色 Beginner初學者
Blue藍色 Intermediate中級
Black黑色 Advanced進階 - Black Diamond- 黑鑽石
Black黑色 Expert專家 \checkmark Double Black Diamond \checkmark 雙黑鑽石
Orange橘色 Freestyle Terrain自由式地形 Orange Oval橘色橢圓形
COLOUR ABILITY LEVEL SYMBOL Green Beginner https://cdn.mathpix.com/cropped/2025_07_06_f1b2e3468211ae9ef45ag-011.jpg?height=65&width=52&top_left_y=236&top_left_x=1322 Blue Intermediate https://cdn.mathpix.com/cropped/2025_07_06_f1b2e3468211ae9ef45ag-011.jpg?height=55&width=52&top_left_y=297&top_left_x=1322 Black Advanced - Black Diamond Black Expert ✓ Double Black Diamond Orange Freestyle Terrain Orange Oval| COLOUR | ABILITY LEVEL | SYMBOL | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | Green | Beginner | ![](https://cdn.mathpix.com/cropped/2025_07_06_f1b2e3468211ae9ef45ag-011.jpg?height=65&width=52&top_left_y=236&top_left_x=1322) | | Blue | Intermediate | ![](https://cdn.mathpix.com/cropped/2025_07_06_f1b2e3468211ae9ef45ag-011.jpg?height=55&width=52&top_left_y=297&top_left_x=1322) | | Black | Advanced | - Black Diamond | | Black | Expert | $\checkmark$ Double Black Diamond | | Orange | Freestyle Terrain | Orange Oval |
Freestyle terrain may include halfpipes, as well as terrain parks and natural terrain features. They are provided for your enjoyment and offer adventure, challenge and fun. However, freestyle terrain use, like all riding, exposes you to the risk of serious injury. Prior to using freestyle terrain, it is your responsibility to familiarize yourself with all instructions and warnings and to follow “your responsibility code”.
自由式地形可能包括半管、地形公園以及自然地形特徵。這些設施是為了讓您享受樂趣,並提供冒險、挑戰與娛樂。然而,自由式地形的使用,和所有滑行活動一樣,會使您面臨嚴重受傷的風險。在使用自由式地形之前,您有責任熟悉所有指示和警告,並遵守「您的責任守則」。
  1. FREESTYLE TERRAIN CONTAINS MAN-MADE AND NATURAL TERRAIN VARIATIONS.
    自由式地形包含人造及自然地形變化。
  2. FREESTYLE TERRAIN CHANGES CONSTANTLY DUE TO WEATHER AND USE.
    自由式地形會因天氣和使用狀況不斷變化。
  3. INSPECT FREESTYLE TERRAIN BEFORE USING AND THROUGHOUT THE DAY.
    使用前及全天候請檢查自由式地形。
  4. IN JUMPING AND USING THIS TERRAIN, YOU ASSUME THE RISK OF SERIOUS INJURY.
    在跳躍和使用此地形時,您須承擔嚴重受傷的風險。
  5. BE COURTEOUS AND RESPECT OTHERS.
    請保持禮貌並尊重他人。
  6. ONE USER ON A TERRAIN FEATURE AT A TIME.
    同一時間僅允許一位使用者在地形設施上。
  7. NEVER JUMP BLINDLY - USE A SPOTTER WHEN NECESSARY. LOOK BEFORE YOU LEAP!
    切勿盲目跳躍——必要時請使用觀察員。跳躍前請先觀察!
  8. IT IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY TO CONTROL YOUR BODY ON THE GROUND AND IN THE AIR.
    控制你在地面及空中的身體是你的責任。
  9. ALWAYS CLEAR THE LANDING AREA QUICKLY.
    務必迅速清理降落區域。
  10. ALWAYS RIDE IN CONTROL AND WITHIN YOUR ABILITY.
    始終保持控制並在你能力範圍內騎乘。

TEACHING IN FREESTYLE TERRAIN
自由式地形教學

When teaching in the terrain park, safety is paramount, and the various points of safety and etiquette should be discussed with riders prior to entering the park:
在地形公園教學時,安全是最重要的,進入公園前應與騎乘者討論各項安全與禮儀要點:
  • Respect the Alpine Responsibility Code
    遵守高山責任守則
  • Use spotters on jumps and hand signals (“O” for jump open, “X” for jump not open).
    在跳台使用觀察員並以手勢示意(「O」表示跳台開放,「X」表示跳台未開放)。
  • Take a warm-up / park familiarity run.
    進行熱身/熟悉公園路線的練習。
  • Do not stop below the landings of jumps; using “stop zones” to stop safely out of the flow of traffic.
    不要在跳躍的落地區域下方停留;使用「停止區」安全地停在交通流之外。
  • Always call your drop-ins.
    務必提前喊出你的下滑動作。

BLIND SPOT AWARENESS盲點意識

When introducing a new manoeuvre, tactic, or terrain, students should be made aware of their reduced field of vision. Fear, uncertainty, environmental aspects, speed and the complexity of the manoeuvre can lead to “tunnel vision”. Even for experienced riders, peripheral vision is narrowed down to the required task. Therefore, raising this point is fundamental to the safe execution of new tasks.
在介紹新的動作、戰術或地形時,應讓學員意識到他們視野的縮減。恐懼、不確定性、環境因素、速度以及動作的複雜性都可能導致「隧道視野」。即使是經驗豐富的滑雪者,周邊視野也會縮小至所需的任務範圍。因此,強調這一點對於安全執行新任務至關重要。

DUTY OF CARE注意義務

As a snowboard instructor, when you agree to undertake the instruction of a person (adult or child), you enter into a relationship with that individual out of which the courts will impose a duty of care for the safety of that student. This commences when you first meet your student at the beginning of the lesson, and ends when the lesson is completed.
作為滑雪教練,當你同意指導某人(成人或兒童)時,你與該個人建立了一種關係,法院將因此對該學員的安全施加注意義務。這種義務從你在課程開始時首次見到學員起算,直到課程結束為止。
In the eyes of the law, your role is not simply to teach your students the technical points of riding a snowboard, but to act as a knowledgeable, responsible and vigilant guide to your student while on the mountain. Instructors must teach with the Alpine Responsibility Code in mind, and ensure that students are riding under full compliance with the code. Students should also understand the reasons for doing so.
在法律眼中,你的角色不僅是教導學生滑雪板的技術要點,更是作為一位知識豐富、負責且警覺的嚮導,陪伴學生在山上活動。教練必須以《高山責任守則》為教學依據,確保學生在完全遵守該守則的情況下滑行。學生也應該理解這樣做的原因。
Instructors must exercise good judgment in selecting the terrain on which the lesson will take place, and ensure that it matches the student’s ability level, minimizing risks arising from natural hazards.
教練必須謹慎判斷選擇課程進行的地形,確保其符合學生的能力水平,並將因自然危險產生的風險降至最低。
When working with children, the courts will impose and expect a greater duty of care. This duty increases as the age of your student decreases. Courts in Canada hold that the duty of care owned by a person charged with the supervision of children is that of a “careful or prudent parent”. Knowing this, it’s important to remember that
在與兒童工作時,法院會施加並期望更高的照顧義務。隨著學生年齡的降低,這項義務也會增加。加拿大法院認為,負責監督兒童的人所承擔的照顧義務,是一種「謹慎或審慎的父母」義務。了解這一點後,重要的是要記住

the actual act of snowboarding may be only a small part of an instructor’s responsibilities during a lesson. Instructors will not have this duty of care discharged until such time that the child has been safely released into the care of another responsible adult (depending on snow school policies).
實際的滑雪板教學行為可能只是教練在課程中責任的一小部分。教練的照顧責任,直到孩子安全交由另一位負責任的成人照顧(依雪地學校政策而定)之前,才算完成。

A genuine concern for the well being of students, as well as a knowledge of resort / snow school policies will ensure that this responsibility is respected at all times.
對學生福祉的真誠關心,以及對度假村/雪地學校政策的了解,將確保這項責任在任何時候都受到尊重。

The Instructor's Obligation
教練的義務

It is important for an instructor to find a location that offers the best possible terrain for the exercise or skill being attempted. The area chosen should:
教練必須找到一個提供最佳地形以進行所嘗試的動作或技巧的地點。所選擇的區域應該:
  • Be sufficiently wide to accommodate skier/snowboarder traffic and a snowboarding class.
    寬度足夠容納滑雪者/滑雪板使用者的通行及滑雪板課程。
  • Be free of drop-offs or blind spots.
    無落差或視線死角。
  • Have easy access and low skier/rider traffic.
    易於進入且滑雪者/騎乘者流量低。
  • Be free of intrusive equipment such as lift line towers and snowmaking guns.
    無干擾設備,如纜車塔柱和造雪槍。
  • Be properly illuminated to minimize shadows
    適當照明以減少陰影

CLASS MANAGEMENT課堂管理

Avoiding any incidents is the best strategy to keep everyone happy and safe.
避免任何意外是讓每個人都快樂且安全的最佳策略。
  • Know how many students you have in your class.
    了解你班上有多少學生。
  • Stop and count your students often.
    經常停下來點算你的學生。
  • Ensure students are warm and comfortable. Learn to recognize signs of distress - shivering, lack of talking, etc. and ask students often if they are comfortable.
    確保學生保持溫暖和舒適。學會辨識不適的徵兆——發抖、不說話等,並經常詢問學生是否感到舒適。
  • Know where you are on the mountain at all times.
    隨時知道自己在山上的位置。
  • Choose runs that are within your students’ range of abilities.
    選擇符合學生能力範圍的滑雪路線。
  • Carry some form of communication device (cell phone, radio) with you, so you can inform ski patrol of any incidents.
    隨身攜帶某種通訊設備(手機、無線電),以便在發生意外時通知滑雪巡邏隊。
  • Keep all students within eyesight at all times - especially with children!
    隨時保持所有學生在視線範圍內——尤其是小朋友!
  • When stopping on the trail, ensure all group members are to the side of the run, away from any potential risk of collision.
    在步道上停下時,確保所有團員都站在路邊,遠離任何可能的碰撞風險。
  • Know the Alpine Responsibility Code, and follow it!
    了解並遵守高山責任守則!

ACCIDENTS ON THE SLOPES
滑雪坡道上的意外事故

If an incident occurs...
如果發生意外...

Even the most responsible instructor can have a mishap during his/ her lesson. Every instructor should be aware that, although injuries in snowboarding classes are extremely rare, they do occur, and there are some immediate actions the professional instructor should take.
即使是最負責任的教練,在授課時也可能發生意外。每位教練都應該知道,雖然滑雪板課程中的受傷情況極為罕見,但仍有可能發生,專業教練應採取一些即時的應對措施。

Note: The policy of your ski / snowboarding school and ski area supersedes this guideline.
注意:您的滑雪/滑雪板學校及滑雪場的政策優先於本指引。

Report any and all injuries to yourself or members of your class immediately and in the prescribed manner.
請立即並依規定方式,向相關單位報告您本人或班上學員的任何受傷情況。

a) Take care of the injured person. DO NOT MOVE an injured person, unless there is a high risk of further injury or death. In this case, the instructor must first protect himself/herself and then remove the patient from further danger, regardless of the injuries.
a) 照顧受傷者。除非有高度風險會導致進一步受傷或死亡,否則請勿移動受傷者。在此情況下,教練必須先保護自己,然後將患者移離危險區域,不論其受傷程度。
  • If you choose to intervene on the scene of on an incident, immediately establish a security perimeter to keep yourself safe. Placing someone or something uphill from the incident to clearly signal the situation to oncoming guest.
    如果你選擇在事故現場介入,請立即建立安全警戒區以確保自身安全。可將某人或物放置在事故上方,明確向來訪的客人示警。
  • Keep patient warm.保持患者溫暖。
  • Contact Ski Patrol immediately either via cell phone or radio, or if necessary by sending two of the stronger riders in your group to the bottom of the closest lift. Be sure they are capable and know how to get to that lift, and that they have an adequate description of the location of the accident.
    立即透過手機或無線電聯絡滑雪巡邏隊,或必要時派遣你團隊中兩位體力較佳的滑雪者前往最近的纜車底站。確保他們有能力且知道如何前往該纜車,並且能清楚描述事故地點。
  • If it will take a long time for the Ski Patrol to arrive, the instructor should arrange to meet the remainder of the group at a specific time and place.
    如果滑雪巡邏隊需要很長時間才能抵達,教練應安排在特定的時間和地點與其餘的團隊會合。

    b) Make notes as to the situation at the time of the accident, including:
    b) 記錄事故發生時的情況,包括:
  • Snow conditions.雪況。
  • Instructor’s location.教練所在位置。
  • Student’s location.學生所在地。
  • How the accident occurred.
    事故發生的經過。
  • Name, address, local address and telephone number of any other person involved (e.g. a collision).
    其他相關人員的姓名、地址、當地地址及電話號碼(例如碰撞事故)。
  • A statement from anyone who can do so.
    任何能夠提供陳述者的說明。
  • Any necessary measurements (e.g.: if student has gone off a run, hit something, etc.). Use board length as a measuring device.
    任何必要的測量(例如:學生是否偏離跑道、撞到什麼東西等)。使用滑雪板長度作為測量工具。
  • Any relevant information in regard to your instructions to the class and the injured person’s response to such instructions.
    有關您對班級的指示以及受傷者對該指示的反應的任何相關資訊。
  • The date and time the notes were taken (they may be needed in court).
    記錄筆記的日期和時間(可能在法庭上需要)。

    c) If the injured person is taken by the Ski Patrol, check what the injury was and what steps the Ski Patrol has taken. Do not voice any speculation or judgment to anyone or make any statements in public.
    c) 如果受傷者由滑雪巡邏隊帶走,請確認受傷情況及滑雪巡邏隊所採取的措施。不要對任何人發表任何猜測或評斷,也不要在公開場合發表任何聲明。

TEACHING THEORY教學理論

This chapter outlines some basic teaching principles and illustrates how to apply them to teaching snowboarding. These are the keys to becoming an effective instructor. Your number one goal in teaching should be to create a positive, fun, and memorable experience!
本章概述了一些基本的教學原則,並說明如何將它們應用於滑雪板教學。這些是成為有效教練的關鍵。你教學的首要目標應該是創造一個積極、有趣且令人難忘的體驗!

THE ROLE OF THE SNOWBOARD INSTRUCTOR:
滑雪板教練的角色:

A snowboard instructor doesn’t just teach the technical aspects of snowboarding. As an instructor, you are in a unique position, and often looked at as a peer, friend, or a guide. Instructors can be the deciding factor in whether or not a beginner chooses to become a snowboarder, and as such you have an impact on the future of snowboarding. You can create life-long snowboarders!
滑雪板教練不僅僅是教授滑雪板的技術面。作為教練,你處於一個獨特的位置,常被視為同儕、朋友或嚮導。教練往往是初學者是否選擇成為滑雪板愛好者的決定性因素,因此你對滑雪板運動的未來有著深遠的影響。你可以培養出終身的滑雪板愛好者!
The following skills and attitudes will help make you more effective as an instructor:
以下技能與態度將有助於提升您作為教練的教學效能:
  1. An understanding of the information you want to transfer. Instructors must have credibility. You must be able to “do as you say.” It is important to demonstrate adequate skill in your riding, and a thorough understanding of your sport. This includes a sound knowledge of snowboarding technique and equipment. These subjects all are covered in this Reference Guide. You are the primary source of information for your students, so know your subject!
    對您想傳授的資訊有充分的理解。教練必須具備可信度,您必須能做到「言行一致」。展現足夠的騎乘技巧及對運動的深入了解非常重要。這包括對滑雪板技術與裝備的紮實認識。這些主題皆涵蓋於本參考指南中。您是學生獲取資訊的主要來源,因此務必熟悉您的專業領域!
  2. A positive attitude. Instructors must build a positive attitude towards learning. A student trying to acquire new skills or to apply new techniques can become frustrated and anxious. You, as the instructor, must be patient and supportive. The Principles of Learning and techniques of training outlined in this section will help you to build and maintain a positive attitude in the teaching environment.
    積極正向的態度。教練必須建立學生對學習的正向態度。學生在嘗試習得新技能或應用新技巧時,可能會感到挫折與焦慮。作為教練的您,必須保持耐心並給予支持。本節所述的學習原則與訓練技巧將幫助您在教學環境中建立並維持正向態度。
  3. Effective communication. Approximately 60 % 60 % 60%60 \% of all communication is altered in some way as a result of interpretation, misconception, or some other factor. Your students can easily misinterpret what you say. To avoid confusion, make your message as clear and direct as possible.
    有效溝通。大約有 60 % 60 % 60%60 \% 的所有溝通會因詮釋、誤解或其他因素而有所改變。你的學生很容易誤解你所說的話。為避免混淆,請使你的訊息盡可能清晰且直接。
  4. Ability to analyze performance. You will be required to analyze each student’s performance by pinpointing the cause of a problem (cause and effect relationship). Based on your analysis, you will set performance goals and make sure the students understand their performance objectives.
    分析表現的能力。你將需要透過找出問題的原因(因果關係)來分析每位學生的表現。根據你的分析,你將設定表現目標,並確保學生了解他們的表現目標。
  5. Leadership in coaching and guiding your students. An understanding of snowboarding theory and practice is fundamental to being a good instructor. The best instructors also develop good leadership skills so that they can communicate more effectively with their students, and pass on their information and skills. The instructor who can take the teaching material and tailor it to the needs of the individuals in the group will achieve better results.
    在指導和引導學生方面的領導能力。了解滑雪板理論與實務是成為優秀教練的基礎。最好的教練也會培養良好的領導能力,以便能更有效地與學生溝通,並傳授他們的知識與技能。能夠將教學內容依照團體中個別學生的需求進行調整的教練,將會取得更佳的成果。

PRINCIPLES OF LEARNING學習原則

The following principles will help you in creating a valuable lesson experience.
以下原則將幫助你創造有價值的課程體驗。
  1. Telling Doesn’t Ensure Learning. One of the most common errors made in teaching is to tell students something, and assume that they have learned it! They may not have understood the information in the first place. Telling is not teaching and it does not ensure learning. It is simply one-way communication. Have students put ideas into practice to demonstrate that they have learned. Help them to learn by having them use the information or skill that you have described.
    告訴並不等於學習。教學中最常見的錯誤之一是告訴學生某件事,卻假設他們已經學會了!他們可能根本沒有理解這些資訊。告訴不是教學,也無法保證學習。它只是單向的溝通。讓學生將想法付諸實踐,以證明他們已經學會。透過讓他們使用你所描述的資訊或技能,幫助他們學習。
  2. People Learn By Doing. People only learn once they have processed information in some way. Practice makes perfect - doing makes sense.Encourage students to try the skills you are teaching, and accept failed attempts as part of the learning process.
    人們透過實作學習。人們只有在以某種方式處理資訊後才會學習。熟能生巧——實作才有意義。鼓勵學生嘗試你所教的技能,並接受失敗的嘗試是學習過程的一部分。
  3. What People Do First, They Learn Best. Teach a student one thing at a time, to ensure understanding and correct performance of a manoeuvre before going on to the next. If we learn the correct technique first, we will continue to use it throughout our riding. Unfortunately, people can learn incorrect methods just as easily as correct methods - explaining, no matter how accurate, is no substitute for seeing, doing, and feeling with the right guidance.
    人們先做什麼,就學得最好。一次教學生一件事,確保他們理解並正確執行動作後,再進行下一步。如果我們一開始就學會正確的技巧,騎乘時就會持續使用它。不幸的是,人們學錯方法和學對方法一樣容易——無論解釋多麼準確,都無法取代在正確指導下的觀察、實作與感受。
  4. Small Steps Are The Best Way To Learn. Break your information down into small steps. This allows the student to absorb each new piece of information and to experience it correctly before he/she is presented with another piece to be learned. Organize these small steps, or “building blocks”, into a logical order that allows for cumulative, sequential learning. Through observation and questioning you can check the student’s learning and understanding on the building blocks before proceeding to the next step.
    小步驟是學習的最佳方式。將資訊拆解成小步驟,讓學生能吸收每一個新知識,並正確體驗後,再學習下一個部分。將這些小步驟或「基礎單元」依邏輯順序排列,讓學習能累積且循序漸進。透過觀察與提問,你可以在進入下一步前,檢視學生對基礎單元的學習與理解。
  5. Immediate Feedback Improves Learning. Give positive feedback to let students know what is being performed correctly, so that they have a basis for evaluating their own performance. Also provide them with tips and suggestions to improve the next attempt. The sooner students receive feedback about their performance, the more effective the learning will be. For example: after observing one or two turns made by the student, review the specific skill, provide positive reinforcement and tips for improvement, and give a demonstration of the skill. As you demonstrate, have the student pay particular attention to what it is he/she is being asked to do. Prior to the next run, quickly review that specific technique again, and have them try it.
    即時回饋提升學習效果。給予正向回饋,讓學生知道哪些表現是正確的,讓他們有依據評估自己的表現。同時提供他們改進下一次嘗試的建議和提示。學生越早收到關於表現的回饋,學習效果就越好。例如:在觀察學生完成一兩次動作後,回顧該特定技能,給予正向強化和改進建議,並示範該技能。示範時,讓學生特別注意他/她被要求做的動作。在下一次嘗試前,快速再回顧該技巧,並讓他們嘗試。

THE PRACTICAL TEACHING SKILLS
實用教學技巧

The following teaching skills will assist you in structuring an effective lesson.
以下教學技巧將協助您結構有效的課程。

Practical Teaching Skill #1
實用教學技巧 #1

GUEST SERVICE & SAFETY
顧客服務與安全

  1. Choose safe and suitable teaching terrain, with the following points in mind:
    選擇安全且適合教學的地形,請注意以下要點:
  • The ability level of the student
    學生的能力等級

    \square Use questions to assess student ability, but don’t rely on answers only! Follow up by checking your student’s skills on easy terrain.
    \square 使用提問來評估學生能力,但不要僅依賴答案!接著在簡單的地形上檢查學生的技能。
  • It’s always a good idea to start on easier terrain for the level of the student and only increase the difficulty once you have assessed their riding.
    對於學生的程度,從較簡單的地形開始總是個好主意,並且只有在評估過他們的騎乘狀況後才增加難度。
  • Even with more advanced students it is important that the instructor act as a guide throughout the lesson. Choose terrain that is safe and point out any potential hazards along the way.
    即使是較進階的學生,教練在整堂課中擔任引導者的角色仍然很重要。選擇安全的地形,並指出沿途可能的危險。
  • The learning stage of the student in relation to the skill/manoeuvre (see Skill Development Model)
    學生在技能/動作學習階段的狀況(參見技能發展模型)
  • Instructors must understand that students continually move up and down through the various stages of the skill development model as we introduce new challenges to the lesson, and we must adjust the terrain accordingly. When introducing a new skill or movement it is important to adjust the terrain and/or speed accordingly to help ensure safety and success for your students.
    教練必須了解,學生在技能發展模型的各個階段中會不斷上下波動,因為我們會在課程中引入新的挑戰,因此必須相應調整地形。當引入新技能或動作時,調整地形和/或速度以確保學生的安全與成功非常重要。
  1. Create a positive and student-centered learning environment.
    營造一個積極且以學生為中心的學習環境。
  • Our number one priority as instructors is to provide positive and memorable experiences for our students so that they will come back for more, and tell their friends! In order to do this we must adjust our approach for each lesson; some students will require a greater focus on safety while others will need a stronger focus on technical improvements, still others will prefer the priority to be placed on mileage and exploring new terrain. The combinations and ratios are almost endless and it is your job as an instructor to find the perfect mix for each student.
    作為教練,我們的首要任務是為學生提供正面且難忘的體驗,讓他們願意持續回來學習,並且推薦給朋友!為了達成這個目標,我們必須針對每堂課調整教學方式;有些學生需要更注重安全,有些則需要強化技術提升,還有些學生則偏好以增加里程數和探索新地形為優先。這些組合和比例幾乎無限,而作為教練的你,必須找到每位學生的完美平衡。
  • Ask questions to find out what they want from their lesson.
    透過提問了解他們對課程的期望。
  • Find out what motivates them.
    找出他們的動力來源。
  • Try to identify their dominant learning style (thinker, watcher, or doer).
    嘗試辨識他們的主要學習風格(思考型、觀察型或實踐型)。
  • Ask them about their best previous snowboarding or lesson experience.
    詢問他們過去最棒的滑雪板或課程經驗。
  • Check with them regularly throughout the lesson to see if you are on the right track.
    在整堂課中定期與他們確認,看看你是否走在正確的方向上。
  • Remember - it’s about them, not you!
    記住——重點是他們,不是你!
  • Be encouraging! Regardless of what you are teaching or how quickly they are picking it up, you need to be encouraging your students at every step. What may seem routine for you can appear a huge challenge for your students, from straight running to their first 360 . Your attitude will set the tone for the lesson. You need to be as enthusiastic about your 5th lesson of the day or your 100th lesson of the season as you are about your first.
    要充滿鼓勵!無論你教的是什麼,或學生學得多快,你都需要在每個階段給予鼓勵。對你來說看似例行公事的事情,對學生來說可能是巨大的挑戰,從直線滑行到他們的第一個 360 度旋轉。你的態度將決定課程的氛圍。無論是一天中的第 5 堂課,還是一季中的第 100 堂課,你都需要像對待第一堂課一樣充滿熱情。
  • Set an appropriate pace. There is not one ideal pace of learning. It’s different for everyone and can even differ for individuals with different tasks and different environments. A single student may progress quickly in a groomed environment but freeze up off piste or in the park. Your goal as an instructor is to adjust the pace of your lesson so that your students can feel comfortable and unintimidated, and can celebrate accomplishments while experiencing the right amount of challenge and improvement. This is not always easy and you will need to be keenly aware of your students’ emotions to gauge where they fall on the scale between boredom and fear.
    設定適當的節奏。沒有一個理想的學習節奏。每個人都不同,甚至同一個人在不同任務和環境下也會有所不同。學生在整齊的場地中可能進步迅速,但在非整備區或滑雪公園中可能會緊張。作為教練,你的目標是調整課程節奏,讓學生感到舒適且不害怕,能在適當的挑戰和進步中慶祝成就。這並不容易,你需要敏銳地察覺學生的情緒,判斷他們是在無聊與恐懼之間的哪個位置。
Try to find that “sweet spot” between boredom and fear, where students will be motivated and challenged enough to improve their skills, but not so much that they are apprehensive or scared.
嘗試找到介於無聊與恐懼之間的「黃金平衡點」,讓學生既有動力又受到挑戰,能夠提升技能,但又不至於感到擔憂或害怕。


3) Ensure that you manage risk in your teaching at all times.
3) 確保你在教學過程中隨時管理風險。
  • Snowboarding has inherent safety risks. As the instructor you are responsible for the wellbeing of your students at all times during your lesson. Take steps ahead of time to manage this risk, creating a safer learning experience. Regardless of the age of your students you are bound by Duty of Care to keep them safe at all times. Safety must be at the forefront of every decision you make during your lessons.
    滑雪板運動本身具有安全風險。作為教練,你在課程中始終負責學生的安全。事先採取措施來管理這些風險,創造更安全的學習環境。無論學生年齡大小,你都有照顧義務(Duty of Care)確保他們時刻安全。安全必須是你在課堂上每個決策的首要考量。
  • Structure your lesson in small, manageable steps. It is important that you do not progress the technical content of your lesson or the terrain you use too quickly for your students. Allow them to become comfortable with their current abilities before challenging them with anything new.
    將課程結構分成小而可控的步驟。重要的是不要讓課程的技術內容或使用的地形進展得太快。讓學生先熟悉現有的能力,再挑戰他們學習新的內容。
  • Anticipate safety concerns ahead of time. Try to plan a few steps ahead in your lesson, so you are prepared for what you will do next.
    提前預見安全問題。嘗試在課程中提前規劃幾個步驟,這樣你就能準備好接下來要做的事情。
  • Is the tactic or exercise you are teaching appropriate for the slope you are on and the traffic volume of the day?
    你所教的策略或練習是否適合你所在的坡度以及當天的交通量?
  • Have you identified safe stopping locations at the side of the slope, well in view of downhill traffic?
    你是否已經確定了坡邊的安全停靠地點,且這些地點能讓下坡的交通清楚看到?
  • Have you shared a common rendezvous spot with your students in the event that you get separated?
    如果你和學生走散了,你是否已經和學生約定了一個共同的集合地點?
  • Have you reviewed lift use and safety with your students?
    你是否已經和你的學生討論過纜車的使用及安全事項?
Do you know and have you taught your students the Alpine Responsibility Code? The Smart Style program in parks?
你是否知道並已教導你的學生阿爾卑斯責任守則?以及雪場中的 Smart Style 計畫?
  • Are there weather considerations to be aware of? Icy snow, poor visibility, etc.
    有沒有需要注意的天氣因素?結冰的積雪、能見度差等等。

COMMUNICATION & LESSON STRUCTURE
溝通與課程結構

  1. Effective communication is the key to ensuring understanding in your lessons.
    有效的溝通是確保課程理解的關鍵。
It’s important to remember that not all communication comes from what you say. The way you interact with your students starts from the moment they meet you at the lesson meeting area.
重要的是要記住,溝通不全然來自你所說的話。你與學生的互動方式,從他們在課程集合地點見到你的那一刻就開始了。

Verbal Communication口語溝通

Some tips for effective verbal communication:
有效口語溝通的小技巧:
  • Say what you mean in a concise and simple manner.
    用簡潔明瞭的方式表達你的意思。
  • Use plain language that non-snowboarders can understand. Avoid the technical terms - find a way to relay these concepts in a simple way.
    使用非滑雪板運動者也能理解的簡單語言。避免使用專業術語——想辦法用簡單的方式傳達這些概念。
  • Respect the diverse backgrounds and experiences of your group members.
    尊重團隊成員多元的背景與經驗。
  • Ask the group if they understand.
    詢問團隊成員是否理解。

Non-Verbal Communication
非語言溝通

A large part of what we say can be misinterpreted, which is why non-verbal communication is so important.
我們所說的大部分內容可能會被誤解,因此非語言溝通非常重要。
  • Maintain an “open” posture - make eye contact, keep arms uncrossed and not near the mouth or face, and smile.
    保持「開放」的姿態——保持眼神交流,雙臂不要交叉,也不要靠近嘴巴或臉部,並且微笑。
  • Minimize any negative facial expressions.
    盡量減少任何負面表情。
  • Touch can be a useful tool in communication - through a handshake, a high-five, or a tap on the shoulder. Use touch sparingly and careful however, particularly if you have just met your student. If using hands-on assistance to help students, ask first if it’s OK with them.
    觸碰可以是溝通中的有用工具——透過握手、擊掌或輕拍肩膀。不過,使用觸碰時要謹慎且節制,尤其是剛認識學生時。如果要用實際接觸來協助學生,事先要徵求他們的同意。
  • Give adequate personal space.
    保持適當的個人空間。

LEARNING STYLES學習風格

Everyone has their own way of learning new skills. In general there are a few types of learners:
每個人都有自己學習新技能的方式。一般來說,有幾種類型的學習者:
  • Cognitive Learners (“Thinkers”)
    認知型學習者(「思考者」)
  • Experiential or Kinaesthetic Learners (“Doers”)
    體驗型或動覺型學習者(「實踐者」)
  • Visual or Observational Learners (“Watchers”)
    視覺或觀察型學習者(「觀察者」)
We are all a blend of each style, but in each of us one type tends to be dominant. Each style has advantages and disadvantages. Be aware of the differences - teach effectively by tailoring the lesson to the needs of each rider.
我們每個人都是各種學習風格的混合體,但在每個人身上,通常會有一種風格佔主導地位。每種風格都有其優點和缺點。了解這些差異,並根據每位學員的需求調整教學內容,才能有效教學。

COGNITIVE LEARNERS ("THINKERS")
認知型學習者(「思考者」)

Characteristics:特徵:

  • Curious.好奇。
  • Asks questions.提出問題。
  • Over-Analyzes things.過度分析事情。
  • Resists immediate action.
    抗拒立即行動。
  • Underplays emotion/enthusiasm.
    情感/熱忱表現較為內斂。

Instructional approaches:
教學方法:

  • Provide ample reading material and time for reading and reviewing.
    提供充足的閱讀材料及閱讀與複習時間。
  • Need detailed descriptions of tasks.
    需要詳細的任務描述。
  • Provide time for adequate discussion and debate.
    提供足夠的時間進行討論和辯論。
  • Devise alternative plans and strategies.
    設計替代方案和策略。
  • Ride the lift with them to “talk technique”.
    與他們一起搭乘電梯,進行「技術交流」。

EXPERIENTIAL OR KINAESTHETIC LEARNERS ("DOERS")
體驗式或動覺學習者(「實踐者」)

Characteristics:特徵:

  • Keen to try.熱衷嘗試。
  • Can be impatient.可能會不耐煩。
  • Learns from mistakes.從錯誤中學習。
  • Constantly refines performance.
    持續精進表現。
  • Explanations have little meaning.
    解釋意義不大。
  • Attempts to do things without help.
    嘗試獨立完成事情。
  • Usually first to ride behind instructor.
    通常是第一個跟在教練後面騎的人。

Instructional approaches:
教學方法:

  • Provide opportunity for “safe” experiments.
    提供「安全」實驗的機會。
  • Encourage repetition of successful action.
    鼓勵重複成功的行動。
  • Give short, precise explanations.
    給予簡短且精確的說明。
  • Reinforce positive results.
    強化正面結果。
  • Provide guided mileage.提供引導里程。

VISUAL OR OBSERVATIONAL LEARNERS ("WATCHERS")
視覺或觀察型學習者(「觀察者」)

Characteristics:特徵:

  • Avoids making mistakes.避免犯錯。
  • May hang back, watching others first.
    可能會先觀望,觀察他人。
  • Imitates success, adapts easily.
    模仿成功,適應力強。
  • Good listeners.善於傾聽。
  • Needs repeated demonstrations.
    需要反覆示範。

Instructional approaches:
教學方法:

  • Explanations must create images.
    解釋必須能形象化。
  • Demonstrations are important.
    示範很重要。
  • Allow time for mental “rehearsal”.
    留出時間進行心理「排練」。
  • Discuss analytical and abstract material.
    討論分析性和抽象性材料。
  • Reward innovation.獎勵創新。
  • Encourage activity.鼓勵行動。
  • Build on results.建立在成果之上。
Consider the learning style of each student, as well as the lesson content, in selecting a teaching approach. Whatever the method of teaching, adapt to the needs of your students and involve them in the planning process. Students who “buy into” the program will learn more effectively.
在選擇教學方法時,請考慮每位學生的學習風格以及課程內容。無論採用何種教學方式,都要適應學生的需求,並讓他們參與規劃過程。願意「投入」課程的學生將學得更有效率。

USING QUESTIONS - "FACILITATION"
使用提問——「引導」

All good instructors interact with their students. This interaction can be taken on in the form of questions, but really you’re facilitating learning.
所有優秀的講師都會與學生互動。這種互動可以透過提問的形式進行,但實際上你是在引導學習。

Questions raise the level of attention of most students. It also gives you immediate feedback on how your information is being received. Try to not let the same person answer every time. Ask each person specific questions (e.g.: “John, what movement could we use on this kind of terrain to improve our absorption?” or “Jan, how did it feel when you made that turn?”) If there are good ideas, get the student to elaborate by demonstrating them or expanding on them. This is a good way to involve the students, in an informal way, in their own learning. It also can help you build a rapport with your students.
提問能提升大多數學生的注意力,同時也能讓你立即了解你的資訊是如何被接收的。盡量不要讓同一個人每次都回答。對每個人提出具體的問題(例如:「John,在這種地形上我們可以用什麼動作來改善吸收效果?」或「Jan,當你轉彎時感覺如何?」)。如果有好的想法,讓學生透過示範或進一步說明來闡述。這是以非正式的方式讓學生參與自己學習的好方法,也能幫助你與學生建立良好關係。

Asking questions takes into account the concept of “facilitation”. By incorporating effective questioning, you convey leadership, raise awareness, and ensure understanding. Tied to this concept of facilitation is the idea of “pacing”, and ensuring that your lesson isn’t moving ahead at an unreasonable speed. Use your Analysis & Improvement skills as well as your use of questioning to gauge this.
提問考量了「引導」的概念。透過有效的提問,你展現領導力、提升覺察度,並確保理解。與引導概念相關的是「節奏」的想法,確保你的課程不會以不合理的速度前進。利用你的分析與改進技巧以及提問技巧來評估這一點。

Types of Questions問題類型

  • Open Questions: Invite a large range of answers including, unexpected or unwanted ones! Example: “What was different between this one and the last one?”
    開放式問題:邀請多元的回答,包括意料之外或不理想的答案!例如:「這次和上次有什麼不同?」
  • Closed Questions: Simple yes/no type answers. Example: “Did that movement make a difference?”
    封閉式問題:簡單的是/否回答。例如:「那個動作有產生效果嗎?」
  • Leading Questions: Intended to facilitate or lead the group on a new tangent. Example: “Now that we are using our shoulders less, what body part we can use instead?”
    引導式問題:旨在促使或引導團體進入新的話題。例如:「既然我們現在較少使用肩膀,還能用身體的哪個部位來代替呢?」

2) Structure your lesson with the content in mind.
2) 根據內容來規劃你的課程結構。

SETTING GOALS AND OBJECTIVES
設定目標與目的

This is a key to building a successful lesson - without goals, how will you know what to teach? Goal setting is a shared responsibility between you and your students.
這是建立成功課程的關鍵——沒有目標,你怎麼知道該教什麼?設定目標是你和學生共同的責任。

Establishing performance goals and objectives is an important part of the teaching process, because it forces you to define the level of performance you want to achieve by the end of the lesson. Once the goals have been set, you can decide on a student-oriented lesson plan.
訂立表現目標和目的,是教學過程中重要的一環,因為它迫使你明確定義希望在課程結束時達到的表現水準。一旦目標設定完成,你就能決定以學生為中心的課程計畫。

The entire lesson focuses on an objective (a level of performance, outcome, or manoeuvre). It’s not an arbitrary collection of skills and drills that have no relevance to the students’ needs. There should be focus!
整堂課都圍繞著一個目標(表現水準、成果或操作技巧)進行。它不是一堆與學生需求無關的技能和練習的任意組合。課程應該有明確的焦點!

Advantages:優點:

  • Good for applying a focus to your lesson.
    有助於為您的課程設定重點。
  • All lessons can benefit from a clear goal!
    所有課程都能從明確的目標中受益!
  • Makes delivery of your lesson simpler to follow for students, and simpler for you to deliver.
    讓學生更容易跟隨您的課程內容,也讓您更輕鬆地進行教學。
  • Provides clarity - ensure that each segment of the lesson relates back to your original focus.
    提供清晰度—確保課程的每個部分都與您最初的重點相關。

Good goals should be "S.M.A.R.T.":
好的目標應該是「S.M.A.R.T.」:

SPECIFIC具體的

Both you and your student should identify and specify the performance level expected by the end of the lesson.
你和你的學生都應該明確指出課程結束時期望達到的表現水準。

MEASURABLE可衡量的

Both the student and instructor should establish the yardstick for measuring the performance.
學生和教師雙方都應該訂立衡量表現的標準。

ACHIEVABLE可達成的

Both should make certain the performance requirements are achievable within that time frame, given the student’s current skills.
雙方應確保在該時間範圍內,根據學生目前的技能,表現要求是可達成的。

REALISTIC現實的

Are the goals realistic based on the terrain available, snow conditions, student skill level, etc.?
根據可用的地形、雪況、學生技能水平等,目標是否現實可行?

TIME-BASED以時間為基準

Try to determine an acceptable time frame for your goals. Remember the need for mileage and practice!
嘗試為你的目標訂定一個可接受的時間範圍。記得需要累積里程和練習!
When setting the objectives for the lesson, employ your communication skills:
在設定課程目標時,運用你的溝通技巧:
  • Inquire about previous snowboarding experiences and successes.
    詢問過去的滑雪板經驗和成就。
  • Listen to your students.
    傾聽你的學生。
  • Choose objectives that you feel fit well with their current skills and abilities.
    選擇你認為與他們目前技能和能力相符的目標。
  • Review the chosen goals with the student, to make sure they match up with what your student wants to learn.
    與學生一起檢視所選目標,確保這些目標符合學生想學習的內容。
Following your lesson, take some time to evaluate the effectiveness of your goals, and refine for the next time.
在課程結束後,花些時間評估你的目標是否有效,並為下次做出調整。

Student Goals vs. Instructor Goals
學生目標與教練目標

As an instructor, it’s important to take your student’s goal (e.g.: improving carving, or riding the trees), and translate that goal into the technical focus for your lesson. Some examples:
作為教練,重要的是要將學生的目標(例如:提升切邊技巧,或是在樹林間騎乘)轉化為課程的技術重點。以下是一些範例:
STUDENT'S DESIRED IMPROVEMENT
學生期望的進步
INSTRUCTOR FOCUS教練重點
Improve my carving提升我的雕刻技巧 Develop edging skills發展邊緣控制技能
Riding the trees在樹林間滑行 Improving timing & coordination skills
提升時機掌握與協調能力
Learning to do a 360
學習做 360 度旋轉
Develop rotation skills發展旋轉技巧
Improving my toeside turns
提升我的腳尖轉彎技巧
Improving position and / or balance
改善姿勢及/或平衡
STUDENT'S DESIRED IMPROVEMENT INSTRUCTOR FOCUS Improve my carving Develop edging skills Riding the trees Improving timing & coordination skills Learning to do a 360 Develop rotation skills Improving my toeside turns Improving position and / or balance| STUDENT'S DESIRED IMPROVEMENT | INSTRUCTOR FOCUS | | :--- | :--- | | Improve my carving | Develop edging skills | | Riding the trees | Improving timing & coordination skills | | Learning to do a 360 | Develop rotation skills | | Improving my toeside turns | Improving position and / or balance |

METHODS OF PRESENTATION呈現方法

Once the goal of the lesson is determined, we need a way to transmit our chosen information to our students. This is the second decision to make in planning your lesson - which of the following methods will your students respond to most successfully? The common thread between each of the following Methods of Presentation is the goal of the lesson. The following are methods of presenting your goal, in an instructional approach.
一旦確定了課程目標,我們需要一種方式將所選資訊傳達給學生。這是規劃課程時的第二個決定——以下哪種方法能讓你的學生最成功地回應?以下各種呈現方法的共同核心是課程目標。以下是以教學方式呈現你的目標的方法。

BUILING BLICK

The Building Block approach involves a series of small steps, each building on the previous. Once the student is capable of performing one step, they are ready for the next, and the instructor can move forward (or backward) in the progression, in response to student performance.
積木式方法包含一連串的小步驟,每一步都建立在前一步的基礎上。當學生能夠完成某一步驟時,他們就準備好進行下一步,教師可以根據學生的表現,向前或向後調整教學進度。

Advantages:優點:

  1. The step-by-step approach calms apprehensive students and students with confidence issues.
    逐步教學法能安撫焦慮的學生以及缺乏自信的學生。
  2. Good for introducing new material, or something the student hasn’t tried before.
    適合用來介紹新教材,或是學生之前未曾嘗試過的內容。
  3. Helps to reduce the potential consequences of new manoeuvres or skills. Keeps students safe.
    有助於減少新動作或技巧可能帶來的後果。保障學生安全。

Example:範例:

  • Intro to edging exercise (Gas Pedal).
    邊緣控制練習(油門踏板)。
  • Sideslip with one foot attached.
    一腳固定的側滑。
  • Assisted sideslip with both feet attached.
    雙腳固定輔助側滑。
  • Unassisted sideslip.無輔助側滑。

Additional Considerations:
其他考量:

  • Building Block progressions are not set in stone! Instructors must be aware of the progress of students when choosing what the next step will be. For example, are students struggling with the current step? Will be they benefit from moving backwards in the progression in order to re-establish skills that aren’t yet present? Or, perhaps students need to move ahead in the progression more quickly.
    基礎訓練的進展並非一成不變!教練在選擇下一步時,必須了解學生的學習進度。例如,學生是否在目前的步驟遇到困難?他們是否需要退回進度,以重新建立尚未具備的技能?或者,學生是否需要更快地推進訓練進度。
  • Building Block lessons aren’t just for beginners - any time a student is learning a new skill, or there is an element of danger or consequence involved, it’s a good idea to break the skills down into smaller, more manageable chunks.
    基礎課程不僅適用於初學者——任何時候學生在學習新技能,或涉及危險或後果時,都建議將技能拆解成較小且易於掌握的部分。
  • Building block progressions may be based around one of the three components of Terrain, Manoeuvre or Development. For example, using progressing terrain to advance the skill level of the student.
    基礎進階課程可能圍繞地形、操作或發展三個要素之一設計。例如,利用逐步進階的地形來提升學生的技能水平。

WHOLE, PART, WHOLE整體、部分、整體

This method of presenting a lesson involves looking at the rider’s overall skills (the “Whole”), and deciding which skill needs to be developed further (the “Part”). After some development of the “part”, the exercises or tactics are then put back into their riding (the final “Whole”). During the “part”, continuous analysis is required, as further development may be necessary.
這種授課方法包括觀察騎士的整體技能(「整體」),並決定哪項技能需要進一步發展(「部分」)。在對「部分」進行一定的訓練後,將練習或策略重新應用於騎乘中(最終的「整體」)。在「部分」階段,需要持續分析,因為可能需要進一步的發展。

Advantages:優點:

  • Good with private or semi-private lessons.
    適合私人或半私人課程。
  • Good for mobile students - students who have some experience and can get around the mountain already.
    適合行動靈活的學生——已有一定經驗,能夠自行在山區移動的學生。
  • No need for prior knowledge of the student and their riding level or style.
    不需要事先了解學生的騎乘水平或風格。
  • Helps in both refining skills with mobile riders, and introducing a new aspect to their riding.
    有助於提升移動騎乘者的技巧,並引入他們騎乘的新面向。

Example:範例:

Have your student complete a warm-up run at their level of comfort and confidence, and on terrain that they would typically ride. After watching and analyzing their riding during this run, you decide they can benefit from working on improving edging performance for carved turns. Demonstrate and have students try a static edging exercise, highlighting the movements required to establish a “pure edge”. Following this, you may ask the student to try a series of traverses, just focusing on leaving a pencil line in the snow.
讓你的學生在他們感到舒適且有信心的程度,以及他們通常會騎乘的地形上完成熱身跑。觀察並分析他們在這次跑程中的騎乘後,你判斷他們可以透過改善刻邊轉彎的表現來受益。示範並讓學生嘗試靜態刻邊練習,強調建立「純刻邊」所需的動作。接著,你可以請學生嘗試一系列的橫越動作,專注於在雪地上留下鉛筆線。
Once you are happy with their grasp of this new sensation of “pure edge”, re-visit terrain similar to the warm-up run. Conclude the lesson by having students use this concept in their own riding, using structured freeriding that allows them to feel this new aspect of the skill of edging in their riding, with the goal of leaving pencil lines in the snow.
當你對他們掌握這種「純刻邊」新感受感到滿意後,重新回到與熱身跑相似的地形。結束課程時,讓學生在自己的騎乘中運用這個概念,透過結構化的自由騎乘,讓他們感受刻邊技巧的新面向,目標是在雪地上留下鉛筆線。

Additional Considerations:
其他考量事項:

  • The initial “Whole” phase of W.P.W. requires the instructor to analyze the student’s current level of ability, and establish a plan for the “Part”.
    W.P.W. 的初始「整體」階段需要教練分析學生目前的能力水平,並為「部分」階段制定計畫。
  • Within a “Whole, Part, Whole” sequence, it may be possible to have smaller sub-sequences. For example, when choosing a number of tactics to have your students try during the “Part”, you may have to progress them in such a way that allows them to have the most success, similar to a Building Block progression. Alternatively, you may choose to present the tactics in a way that allows them to feel alternate feelings or analogies, similar to Guided Discovery.
    在「整體、部分、整體」的流程中,可能會有較小的子流程。例如,在選擇多種策略讓學生在「部分」階段嘗試時,您可能需要以一種讓他們能夠獲得最大成功的方式逐步推進,類似於建構積木的進展方式。或者,您也可以選擇以讓學生感受不同情境或類比的方式呈現策略,類似於引導式探索。

CUIDED DISCOVERY引導式探索

In this method, a couple of different approaches can be useful.
在此方法中,有幾種不同的方式可能會很有幫助。

Approach #1: The instructor sets the riding goal in his/her head, depending upon the needs and objectives of the class. Although the goal for the lesson should be clear, students may not always know your chosen approach to achieving that goal. The instructor then “guides” them through the process of achieving that goal through a trial of various tactics, terrain situations, or manoeuvres.
方法一:教練根據課程的需求和目標,在腦中設定騎乘目標。雖然課程的目標應該是明確的,但學生可能不總是知道你選擇達成該目標的方法。接著,教練會透過嘗試各種策略、地形狀況或動作,來「引導」學生完成達成目標的過程。
Questioning the students after trials, and prior to the end of the lesson will ensure that learning happens.
在嘗試之後、課程結束前對學生進行提問,能確保學習的發生。
Approach #2: The instructor may specify a goal or challenge for the riders, but not the method to get there. He/she then tasks the students to try to come up with a solution for that technical challenge, with input from the instructor. Questioning the students during the development of their riding, and prior to the end of the lesson will ensure that learning happens.
方法二:教練可能會為騎士指定一個目標或挑戰,但不指定達成目標的方法。接著,他/她會要求學生嘗試為該技術挑戰提出解決方案,並由教練提供意見。在騎乘過程中及課程結束前對學生進行提問,能確保學習的發生。

Advantages:優點:

  • Good with large groups, schools, etc. Also good for experiential learners (“doers”), children, and high-energy students.
    適合大型團體、學校等。同時也適合體驗式學習者(「實踐者」)、兒童及精力充沛的學生。
  • Provides lots of mileage and movement.
    提供大量的行走距離與活動量。

Example of approach #1:
方法一的範例:

The instructor decides that absorption skills are lacking in the students. He has the students ride over bumpy terrain with stiff legs, and then asks whether they felt any positive or negative effect of riding this way. He may then ask students to ride similar terrain with “soft” legs. Again, he will ask students to highlight the different sensations.
教練判斷學生缺乏吸收衝擊的技巧。他讓學生用僵硬的雙腿騎過顛簸的地形,然後詢問他們是否感受到這種騎乘方式帶來的正面或負面影響。接著,他可能會請學生用「放鬆」的雙腿騎過類似的地形,再次請學生強調不同的感受。
Asking leading questions helps to ensure students recognize the skills that they learned. (e.g.: “Did you find you were smoother with your legs flexible?” and “Which allowed you to stay in control?”)
透過引導性問題,有助於確保學生能認識到他們所學到的技巧。(例如:「你覺得雙腿放鬆時騎乘會更順暢嗎?」以及「哪一種方式讓你更能掌控車輛?」)

Additional Considerations:
其他考量:

  • The use of questions is crucial to a successful Guided Discovery lesson. How can questions ensure learning? Consider the difference between types of questions. (See “Questions” above).
    提問的運用對於成功的引導式探索課程至關重要。問題如何確保學習?請思考不同類型問題的差異。(參見上方「問題」章節)
  • Try to use the varied conditions available to you on a particular day to help give your Guided Discovery lesson some real-world credibility. For example, pressure distribution on a powder day, or angulation in icy conditions. Keep the pace fast, and allow students time to really try new feelings. At the end of the lesson they should feel that they’ve learned, but without being taught.
    嘗試利用當天可用的各種條件,為你的引導式探索課程增添真實世界的可信度。例如,在粉雪天的壓力分布,或冰面條件下的角度調整。保持節奏快速,並給學生足夠時間真正體驗新的感受。課程結束時,他們應該感覺自己學到了東西,但又不會覺得是被教導的。

THE TRAINING CYCLE訓練循環

The Training Cycle will help to ensure that your lessons follow a clear format. The Training Cycle is a systematic approach which:
訓練循環將幫助確保您的課程遵循清晰的格式。訓練循環是一種系統化的方法,能夠:

  • Provides for immediate two-way communication and feedback.
    提供即時的雙向溝通與反饋。
  • Gives you a formula to ensure your teaching is effective.
    給您一個確保教學有效的公式。
  • Gives the student a positive framework for learning.
    給學生一個正向的學習架構。
  • Ensures learning without unnecessary training.
    確保學習過程中不進行不必要的訓練。
  • Assists in diagnosing the learning progress, and offering feedback on performance.
    協助診斷學習進度,並提供表現反饋。
  • Facilitates re-teaching of missed or misunderstood information.
    促進對遺漏或誤解資訊的再教學。

1. EXPLANATION 10%1. 說明 10%

Give the students a clear verbal picture of the skill to be learned and encourage a questioning attitude. Use plain, uncomplicated language, and keywords to help keep ideas simple. Try using the “What, Why, How, Where, When” approach to keep explanations simple:
給學生一個清楚的口頭描述,說明要學習的技能,並鼓勵他們保持質疑的態度。使用簡單明瞭的語言和關鍵詞,幫助保持想法的簡潔。嘗試使用「什麼、為什麼、如何、在哪裡、何時」的方法來保持說明簡單:
  • What is it that you want to get across? What’s the goal?
    你想傳達的是什麼?目標是什麼?
  • Why will this benefit the student’s riding?
    這對學生的騎乘有什麼好處?
  • How is it accomplished? What are the movements, feelings and body parts involved?
    這是如何完成的?涉及哪些動作、感覺和身體部位?
  • Where is it used?
    它被用在哪裡?
  • Where will this be practiced (class management)?
    這將在哪裡進行練習(課堂管理)?
  • When should students begin (class management)?
    學生應該何時開始(課堂管理)?

2. DEMONSTRATION 10%2. 示範 10%

Demonstrate the skill to the students. Follow the pattern of the explanation closely and, if the opportunity presents itself, explain again. If explaining while demonstrating, ensure the class can hear you - or use only key words. Through both seeing and hearing simultaneously, the student receives a lasting impression. Ask appropriate questions about the methods used to check the students’ understanding immediately following the demonstration.
向學生示範該技能。緊密遵循說明的模式,如果有機會,再次解釋。若在示範時同時解說,確保全班能聽見你的聲音,或僅使用關鍵字。透過視覺與聽覺的同步刺激,學生能留下深刻印象。示範結束後,立即提出適當問題,檢查學生對所用方法的理解。
  • Is your demonstration performed at the skill level of the student? Can they copy it?
    你的示範是否符合學生的技能水準?他們能模仿嗎?
  • Can the class see your demonstration?
    全班能看見你的示範嗎?
  • Does your demonstration reflect your explanation?
    你的示範是否反映了你的解說?

3. STUDENT TRIAL 50%
3. 學生嘗試 50%

Have the students try the skill, tactic or manoeuvre you have demonstrated. Don’t keep them waiting! Remember, they learn far more from actually doing than they do from watching. Try to maximize the student’s trial time by doing the following:
讓學生嘗試你所示範的技巧、戰術或動作。不要讓他們等太久!記住,他們從實際操作中學到的遠比觀看多。試著透過以下方式最大化學生的嘗試時間:
  • Use all available terrain - be aware of opportunities that the terrain provides to teach or reinforce a point. For example, a dip or bump in terrain can be perfect to illustrate the need for flexion.
    利用所有可用地形——注意地形提供的教學或強化重點的機會。例如,地形中的凹陷或隆起非常適合用來說明彎曲的必要性。
  • Offer repeated or familiar feedback in short bursts, or single words, which have meaning for the student without forcing them to stop to listen to you.
    以短促的方式或單字重複提供學生熟悉的回饋,這些回饋對學生有意義,且不會強迫他們停下來聆聽你。
  • Keep explanations brief, simple, and to the point.
    保持解釋簡短、簡單且切中要點。

4. FEEDBACK (ANALYSIS & IMPROVEMENT) 30%
4. 回饋(分析與改進)30%

Analyze and provide critique of the student’s performance. First, point out the specific things that have been done well and then give them something to think of or work on for the next attempt. There is no need for negative comments, or comments which focus on the previous attempt. Keep your comments “future-focused”. This way the students accept and continue to use the good skills and work to improve their weaknesses without negative feelings. Finish with positive reinforcement. Critiquing the students must immediately follow their practice to be of maximum value. (See “Improvement” below).
分析並提供學生表現的評論。首先指出已做得好的具體事項,然後給予他們下一次嘗試時可以思考或改進的方向。無需負面評論或針對先前嘗試的評論。保持評論「以未來為焦點」。這樣學生能接受並持續使用良好的技巧,並努力改進弱點而不產生負面情緒。最後以正向強化作結。對學生的評論必須緊接在他們練習之後進行,才能發揮最大效益。(參見下方「改進」)。
Using the Training Cycle allows you to move from one step to another, or go back to previous steps, depending upon the circumstances or the progress of your student. Make certain that the student is doing most of the riding, not you!
使用訓練循環可以讓你根據情況或學生的進度,從一個步驟移動到另一個步驟,或回到先前的步驟。務必確保學生是大部分時間在騎乘,而不是你!

THE LESSON FORMAT課程格式

The following lesson plan may provide a sample of how the training cycle and other teaching tactics apply to a group lesson scenario, with students who are already mobile on a snowboard.
以下的課程計畫範例,展示了訓練循環及其他教學策略如何應用於一個團體課程情境,學生已經能在滑雪板上移動。
  1. Introduction: Smile and greet your guests. If you are teaching children, greet the child first (at their eye level) and then the parents. Introduce yourself and get to know your students. Learn their names; and find out interests and other sporting activities, etc. Plan the lesson by getting a feel for the students’ expectations. What do they want to learn? Share your plan with them. Check their equipment. Are they dressed appropriately? If not, recommend that they make a change to their equipment for the day.
    介紹:微笑並向來賓問候。如果你教的是兒童,先與孩子打招呼(與他們視線平齊),然後再向家長問好。自我介紹並了解你的學生。記住他們的名字;了解他們的興趣及其他運動活動等。透過了解學生的期望來規劃課程。他們想學什麼?與他們分享你的計畫。檢查他們的裝備。他們穿著合適嗎?如果不合適,建議他們當天更換裝備。
  2. Warm-Up Run & Assessment: If your students are beginners, you’ll start in on the beginner progression. If they are more experienced, take them to easy terrain for their ability. Determine their riding level and decide what the technical scope of the lesson should be. Based of your assessment of the group’s ability and the objectives set out by the class during the introductions, determine the terrain and tactics you will use to ensure the objectives are met. Review your strategy with the class and get their approval for your plan. A good warm-up is crucial to a successful and safe lesson - take the time to ensure that your students are physically and mentally activated (by slowly progressing the pace and intensity of riding, as well as starting on easy terrain and progressing to more difficult). Avoid static stretching in the warm up, and instead focus on dynamic movements that help to get blood flowing to the main muscle groups.
    熱身跑與評估:如果你的學生是初學者,請從初學者進階課程開始;如果他們較有經驗,則帶他們到符合能力的簡易地形。評估他們的騎乘水平,並決定課程的技術範圍。根據你對團體能力的評估以及課堂介紹時設定的目標,決定將使用的地形和策略,以確保達成目標。與全班檢視你的策略,並取得他們對計畫的認可。良好的熱身對於成功且安全的課程至關重要——請花時間確保學生在身體和心理上都已啟動(透過逐漸加快騎乘速度與強度,並從簡單地形開始,逐步進入較困難的地形)。避免在熱身時進行靜態伸展,改以動態動作為主,幫助主要肌群促進血液循環。
  3. Riding Improvement Segment (Training Cycle): Work on the skills that will allow the students to reach their lesson objectives. Do personal as well as group analysis and improvements. Use aids and/or exercises where needed, but try to avoid teaching tactics only. There should always be a reason to use a tactic. Encourage lots of class participation. Work on their strengths to improve their weaknesses.
    騎乘提升階段(訓練週期):專注於讓學員達成課程目標的技能。進行個人及團體的分析與改進。必要時使用輔助工具和/或練習,但盡量避免只教戰術。使用戰術必須有明確的理由。鼓勵大量的課堂參與。利用學員的優勢來改善其弱點。
  4. Mileage: Allow the students time to investigate their own “feelings” of the skills by using the tactics and terrain both on their own, and in the group. Provide time for “guided freeriding” to maximize the practice time. This is a good opportunity for individual tips and feedback.
    騎乘里程:給予學員時間透過使用戰術和地形,無論是獨自或團體中,去探索自己對技能的「感受」。安排「引導式自由騎乘」的時間,以最大化練習效果。這是提供個別建議和回饋的好機會。
  5. Lesson Summary: Summarize what was accomplished during the lesson as it pertained to their originally stated goals. When teaching children, ensure that they know what was accomplished, and if possible, communicate this to the parent’s as well. Review the positive things to work on for improvement as they relate to each student. Review what they will be working on next (when they come out for another lesson). Thank your class for coming out. Invite them to sign up for another lesson and suggest a good time when you would be available
    課程總結:總結課程中達成的目標,並與學生最初設定的目標相符。教導兒童時,確保他們了解所完成的內容,並盡可能將此訊息傳達給家長。回顧每位學生需要改進的正面事項。回顧他們下一次課程將要學習的內容。感謝學生的參與,邀請他們報名下一堂課,並建議一個你方便的時間。

DEMONSTRATIONS示範

When demonstrating, be aware of the following guidelines listed below and make full use of your demos. Remember - “a picture is worth a thousand words”. Your knowledge, experience and planning ensure that your demos are a successful means of teaching new riding techniques. Be confident, but remember that the objective of your demo is to teach, but not to impress.
示範時,請注意以下指導原則,並充分利用你的示範。記住——「一圖勝千言」。你的知識、經驗和規劃確保示範成為教學新騎乘技巧的有效方式。要有自信,但請記得示範的目標是教學,而非炫耀。
Here are some guidelines for giving a demonstration:
以下是進行示範的一些指導原則:
  • Make good use of terrain.
    善用地形。
  • Keep it simple.保持簡單。
  • Appropriate riding level
    適當的騎乘等級
  • Emphasize the part of the skill where improvement is needed.
    強調需要改進的技能部分。
  • Relates to explanation (do what you said you would do).
    與解釋相關(做到你所承諾的事)。
  • Ensure everyone in the group can see you! If not, move the group as needed. Position yourself to ensure that the group can see you from a safe vantage point.
    確保團體中的每個人都能看到你!如果看不到,請根據需要移動團體。將自己定位在一個安全的有利位置,確保團體能看到你。
  • Offer various viewpoints for your demo.
    為你的示範提供多種觀點。
  • Have the students try the movements while standing still, to feel new feelings and visualize them in their own riding.
    讓學生在原地嘗試動作,感受新的感覺並在自己的騎乘中想像這些感覺。
  • Take into account the students’ equipment, the snow conditions/environment, and other factors. (See “Analysis” below)
    考慮學生的裝備、雪況/環境及其他因素。(參見下方「分析」)
  • Repeat your demo as needed…remember, the “watchers” (visual learners) in your group will need multiple demonstrations.
    根據需要重複示範……記得,你團隊中的「觀察者」(視覺學習者)需要多次示範。
Talking While Demonstrating
示範時的講解

“Don’t talk when you slide, don’t slide when you talk… mostly” - talking through demos, particularly for new snowboarders, can detract from their focus on the visual. Often, snow and weather conditions make the instructor difficult to hear, or the instructor is facing or riding away from the student(s).
「滑行時不要講話,講話時不要滑行……大致上是這樣」——在示範時講解,特別是對新手滑雪板者,可能會分散他們對視覺的注意力。通常,雪況和天氣會讓教練難以被聽見,或者教練面向或背對學生。

Finish your explanation, stop talking, and let the picture your demo creates do the talking. “Actions speak louder than words”.
完成你的解說,停止講話,讓你的示範畫面自己說話。「行動勝於言辭」。
A keyword repeated can help to highlight a demo, if volume, conditions and student type are taken into account - this can be very effective.
重複關鍵字可以幫助強調示範內容,但需考慮音量、條件和學生類型——這樣會非常有效。
Exaggeration in demos: Good for beginners; less so for experienced riders.
示範中的誇張動作:對初學者有幫助;對有經驗的騎士則較少。

Exaggerated movements or highlighting movements by moving the arms can be useful for beginner snowboarders to help them make sense of a picture that’s new to them, and great for kids.
誇張的動作或透過揮動手臂來強調動作,對初學單板滑雪者有助於他們理解全新的畫面,對小朋友更是非常適合。
As rider skill improves, demos should show a clear, precise picture without the need for exaggeration or movement of the arms to mimic the lower body. A clear un-exaggerated demo will give better snowboarders information on what & how to move, but also the magnitude of the movement needed to be effective.
隨著騎乘技巧的提升,示範應該呈現清晰且精確的畫面,無需誇張或用手臂動作來模仿下半身。清晰且不誇張的示範能讓較優秀的滑雪板手了解該如何移動,以及為達到效果所需的動作幅度。

Practical Teaching Skill #4
實用教學技巧 #4

ANALYSIS & IMPROVEMENT分析與改進

ANALYZING PERFORMANCE表現分析

Analysis & Improvement (“A & I”) is a key part of any lesson, as it provides many benefits for the student:
分析與改進(“A & I”)是任何課程中的關鍵部分,因為它為學生帶來許多好處:
  • Personal, individualized feedback. Students generally crave this personalized improvement - we all want to know exactly what we need to do to improve.
    個人化、量身訂做的回饋。學生通常渴望這種個人化的改進——我們都想確切知道自己需要做什麼才能進步。
  • Real tactics for improvement. An instructor who can effectively analyze and improve will get much better results in the form of improvement from students.
    實際的改進策略。能夠有效分析與改進的講師,將從學生身上獲得更顯著的進步成果。
  • An overall quality lesson experience. If students feel that their lesson was high quality, they are more likely to return again. It’s important to remember that the act of developing A & I skills is something that trainers will work on with instructors only.
    整體高品質的課程體驗。如果學生感受到課程的高品質,他們更有可能再次回來。值得記住的是,發展 A & I 技能的工作,是訓練師專門與講師共同進行的。

Where To Stand?站在哪裡?

Your choice of vantage point for watching your students can make analysing their riding much easier. When choosing where to watch from, keep in mind the goal of the run. Is the student working on fore/aft pressure distribution? If so, you may want to stand at a spot where they will ride past you, so that you can see the relationship between their front and back foot. If you are looking for symmetry in turning, you may stand near the bottom of the run, from a further distance away, so that you can see the relationship between turns. In general, we can see larger, gross movements from further away, and small, refined movements as students get closer to us.
你選擇觀察學生的視角,能讓你更輕鬆地分析他們的騎乘狀況。選擇觀察位置時,請記得本次練習的目標是什麼。學生是否在練習前後腳的壓力分布?如果是,你可能想站在學生會經過的位置,這樣你就能看到他們前腳與後腳的關係。如果你想觀察轉彎的對稱性,可以站在練習路線的底部,稍微遠一點的位置,這樣你能看到轉彎之間的關係。一般來說,從較遠的距離可以觀察到較大、粗略的動作,而當學生靠近時,則能看見較小、精細的動作。

The A & I Sequence of Events
A & I 事件序列

We can think of analysis as the part that happens internally - in your head as you are watching your student ride or attempt a skill or manoeuvre. When performing analysis of a student’s riding, there are numerous methods we can use.
我們可以把分析視為在你腦中進行的過程——當你觀看學生騎乘或嘗試某項技巧或動作時所進行的思考。分析學生騎乘時,有許多方法可以使用。

1. Establish the ideal performance.
1. 建立理想的表現。

We can begin by developing a picture of the “ideal performance”. What will the skill look like when performed correctly? This step gives us a model to compare to. When determining the ideal, it may be helpful to refer to the Core and Advanced Riding Competencies, depending on the ability level of your student.
我們可以先描繪出「理想表現」的樣貌。當技巧正確執行時會是什麼樣子?這一步驟為我們提供一個可供比較的範本。在確定理想表現時,根據學生的能力層級,參考核心與進階滑雪能力可能會有所幫助。

2. Compare the performance to the ideal.
2. 將表現與理想進行比較。

Once the ideal picture is developed, we can then begin to watch our students ride. Now we can compare their trial to the picture in our minds. When watching students ride, it may help to begin by watching the snowboard. Is it doing what you want? Is the goal of the tactic or manoeuvre being attained in the form of board performance? If not, we can begin to progress up the body and relate what we’re seeing to each of the skills. For example: the ankles and knees for Edging and Steering performance; hips and arms for Position & Balance or Pivot; lower joints (hips, knees, ankles) for pressure management. You may also look for other cues, such as snow spray coming from the board, or the track left in the snow by the snowboard.
一旦理想的畫面建立起來,我們就可以開始觀察學生的滑行。現在我們能將他們的嘗試與心中所想的畫面做比較。觀察學生滑行時,可以先從滑雪板開始看起。滑雪板是否達到你想要的效果?戰術或動作的目標是否透過滑雪板的表現達成?如果沒有,我們可以逐步往上觀察身體,並將所見與各項技巧對應。例如:腳踝與膝蓋對應邊緣控制與轉向表現;臀部與手臂對應姿勢與平衡或轉向;下肢關節(臀部、膝蓋、腳踝)對應壓力管理。你也可以觀察其他線索,例如滑雪板噴出的雪霧,或滑雪板在雪地上留下的軌跡。

Using the Riding Competencies as your “filter” when analysing students will help to provide a systematic format for analysis:
以騎乘能力作為分析學生的「篩選標準」,將有助於提供系統化的分析架構:

核心能力:居中且靈活的姿勢
Core Competency:
CENTRED & MOBILE POSITION
Core Competency: CENTRED & MOBILE POSITION| Core Competency: | | :--- | | CENTRED & MOBILE POSITION |

- 騎士是否保持肩膀、臀部與膝蓋的旋轉對齊? - 騎士是否保持雙腳均等受力? - 關節在左右兩側是否大致均勻彎曲? - 騎士是否保持板上鬆弛放鬆的姿勢,以促進隨時準備和持續調整的狀態?
- Does the rider maintain rotational alignment between shoulders, hips and knees?
- Does the rider maintain equal weight over both feet?
- Are joints generally flexed evenly between left and right sides?
- Does the rider maintain a loose, relaxed position on the board which promotes a state of readiness / constant adjustment.
- Does the rider maintain rotational alignment between shoulders, hips and knees? - Does the rider maintain equal weight over both feet? - Are joints generally flexed evenly between left and right sides? - Does the rider maintain a loose, relaxed position on the board which promotes a state of readiness / constant adjustment.| - Does the rider maintain rotational alignment between shoulders, hips and knees? | | :--- | | - Does the rider maintain equal weight over both feet? | | - Are joints generally flexed evenly between left and right sides? | | - Does the rider maintain a loose, relaxed position on the board which promotes a state of readiness / constant adjustment. |

核心能力:以下半身轉動滑板
Core Competency:
TURNING THE BOARD WITH THE LOWER BODY
Core Competency: TURNING THE BOARD WITH THE LOWER BODY| Core Competency: | | :--- | | TURNING THE BOARD WITH THE LOWER BODY |

- 騎乘者是否以臀部和膝蓋來引導滑雪板,在較高技巧層級時是否以雙腳引導? - 是否使用旋轉和側向動作來引導滑雪板(而非反向旋轉動作)? - 轉彎是否呈圓形且大致對稱,透過可預測的動作時機和多重動作的協調,形成單一的努力?
- Does the rider direct the snowboard with hips and knees, and with the feet at the higher skill levels?
- Are rotational and lateral movements used to direct the board (instead of counter rotational movements)?
- Are turns round in shape and generally symmetrical, through predictable timing of movements and coordination of multiple movements into a singular effort?
- Does the rider direct the snowboard with hips and knees, and with the feet at the higher skill levels? - Are rotational and lateral movements used to direct the board (instead of counter rotational movements)? - Are turns round in shape and generally symmetrical, through predictable timing of movements and coordination of multiple movements into a singular effort?| - Does the rider direct the snowboard with hips and knees, and with the feet at the higher skill levels? | | :--- | | - Are rotational and lateral movements used to direct the board (instead of counter rotational movements)? | | - Are turns round in shape and generally symmetrical, through predictable timing of movements and coordination of multiple movements into a singular effort? |

核心能力:在工作刃上的平衡
Core Competency:
BALANCE OVER THE WORKING EDGE
Core Competency: BALANCE OVER THE WORKING EDGE| Core Competency: | | :--- | | BALANCE OVER THE WORKING EDGE |

- 騎乘者是否在轉彎開始時使用傾斜動作,接著以角度調整來維持刃口抓地力並控制與速度及地形相關的壓力? - 騎乘者是否引導並維持其質心位於轉彎內側,與速度和雪況保持平衡關係? - 轉彎形狀和雪地上留下的軌跡是否顯示出刃口抓地力?
- Does the rider use a blend of inclination at the start of the turn followed by angulation to maintain edge hold and control pressures associated with speed and terrain?
- Does the rider direct and maintains his/her centre of mass to the inside of the turn in a balanced relationship to speed and snow conditions?
- Is edge grip apparent in turn shape and track left in the snow?
- Does the rider use a blend of inclination at the start of the turn followed by angulation to maintain edge hold and control pressures associated with speed and terrain? - Does the rider direct and maintains his/her centre of mass to the inside of the turn in a balanced relationship to speed and snow conditions? - Is edge grip apparent in turn shape and track left in the snow?| - Does the rider use a blend of inclination at the start of the turn followed by angulation to maintain edge hold and control pressures associated with speed and terrain? | | :--- | | - Does the rider direct and maintains his/her centre of mass to the inside of the turn in a balanced relationship to speed and snow conditions? | | - Is edge grip apparent in turn shape and track left in the snow? |
"Core Competency: CENTRED & MOBILE POSITION" "- Does the rider maintain rotational alignment between shoulders, hips and knees? - Does the rider maintain equal weight over both feet? - Are joints generally flexed evenly between left and right sides? - Does the rider maintain a loose, relaxed position on the board which promotes a state of readiness / constant adjustment." "Core Competency: TURNING THE BOARD WITH THE LOWER BODY" "- Does the rider direct the snowboard with hips and knees, and with the feet at the higher skill levels? - Are rotational and lateral movements used to direct the board (instead of counter rotational movements)? - Are turns round in shape and generally symmetrical, through predictable timing of movements and coordination of multiple movements into a singular effort?" "Core Competency: BALANCE OVER THE WORKING EDGE" "- Does the rider use a blend of inclination at the start of the turn followed by angulation to maintain edge hold and control pressures associated with speed and terrain? - Does the rider direct and maintains his/her centre of mass to the inside of the turn in a balanced relationship to speed and snow conditions? - Is edge grip apparent in turn shape and track left in the snow?"| Core Competency: <br> CENTRED & MOBILE POSITION | - Does the rider maintain rotational alignment between shoulders, hips and knees? <br> - Does the rider maintain equal weight over both feet? <br> - Are joints generally flexed evenly between left and right sides? <br> - Does the rider maintain a loose, relaxed position on the board which promotes a state of readiness / constant adjustment. | | :--- | :--- | | Core Competency: <br> TURNING THE BOARD WITH THE LOWER BODY | - Does the rider direct the snowboard with hips and knees, and with the feet at the higher skill levels? <br> - Are rotational and lateral movements used to direct the board (instead of counter rotational movements)? <br> - Are turns round in shape and generally symmetrical, through predictable timing of movements and coordination of multiple movements into a singular effort? | | Core Competency: <br> BALANCE OVER THE WORKING EDGE | - Does the rider use a blend of inclination at the start of the turn followed by angulation to maintain edge hold and control pressures associated with speed and terrain? <br> - Does the rider direct and maintains his/her centre of mass to the inside of the turn in a balanced relationship to speed and snow conditions? <br> - Is edge grip apparent in turn shape and track left in the snow? |
Your answers to the above questions will help determine your plan of action going forward.
您對上述問題的回答將有助於決定您未來的行動計畫。

3. Decide on cause / effect & tolerance
3. 決定原因/結果與容忍度

When watching our students ride, we generally see outcomes - the snowboard carving, or chattering, or the student crashing. In analyzing performance, it’s important to separate the effect (the outcome) from the cause. This is the challenge in analysis - separating what we see from what is causing the outcome.
當觀察學生滑雪時,我們通常會看到結果——滑雪板的刻滑、震動,或是學生摔倒。在分析表現時,重要的是要將結果(效果)與原因分開。這正是分析的挑戰——分辨我們所見與導致結果的原因。
The other factor at play here is tolerance. Tolerance simply refers to whether your student is performing the skill well enough, or not, given the other factors. There may be times where you would like to see a skill performed better, but something such as snow conditions indicate to you that it simply won’t happen during the allotted lesson time. In this case, it may not be perfect, but it’s good enough given the other factors. Other times, your tolerance may be small, in which case you will proceed to step four - delivering improvement.
另一個影響因素是容忍度。容忍度簡單來說是指,考量其他因素後,學生的技能表現是否足夠好。有時你可能希望看到技能表現得更好,但像是雪況等因素告訴你,在有限的課程時間內這是不可能達成的。在這種情況下,雖然不完美,但考量其他因素已經足夠好。其他時候,你的容忍度可能較低,這時你就會進入第四步——提供改進建議。
Note: You may see many things happening that need to be addressed. Choose the one that you think will have the biggest impact on their riding and progress from there.
注意:你可能會看到許多需要處理的問題。請選擇你認為對他們的滑行和進步影響最大的問題,然後從那裡開始。

THE "TT-PP-EE" MODEL「TT-PP-EE」模型

When we watch our students ride, we may tend to focus simply on the technical portion of their performance - how well they are performing the skill we are asking them to attempt. But, there are many other factors that will affect this performance.
當我們觀察學生滑雪時,往往會傾向只關注他們技術表現的部分——他們執行我們要求的技巧有多好。但其實,還有許多其他因素會影響這項表現。
  • Equipment: In order to perform at our best, our equipment needs to be optimized to give us the best performance. Are your student’s boots too big? Are their edges sharp or dull?
    裝備:為了達到最佳表現,我們的裝備需要被優化以提供最佳效能。你的學生的靴子是否太大?他們的滑刃是鋒利還是鈍了?
  • Environment: Refers to the external influences such as weather, snow conditions, visibility and temperature. Is the snow icy? Is the run too steep?
    環境:指的是外在影響因素,如天氣、雪況、能見度和溫度。雪地是否結冰?滑道是否過於陡峭?
  • Tactical: The physical way you are asking students to move down the mountain. Does the student need to ride faster or slower? Make rounder or more open turns? Turn less or more?
    戰術面:你要求學生下山時的實際動作方式。學生需要騎得更快還是更慢?轉彎要更圓滑還是更開放?轉彎要少一點還是多一點?
  • Technical: The techniques and movements that you are asking the student to perform, in relation to their actual skill level and abilities. Do they actually have the skill to perform the task you are assigning them?
    技術面:你要求學生執行的技巧和動作,與他們實際的技能水平和能力相關。他們是否真的具備完成你指派任務的技能?
  • Psychological: The student’s present mental state. Are they happy, confident, scared, intimidated, or nervous?
    心理面:學生當前的心理狀態。他們是快樂、自信、害怕、受威脅還是緊張?
  • Physical: The student’s physical capabilities. This could include fitness level, flexibility, strength, weight, height, etc.
    身體面:學生的身體能力。這可能包括體能水平、柔軟度、力量、體重、身高等。
Each of the above factors will influence our student’s performance. It’s easy to just focus on the technical, but we must address to the others as well. In the model above, these factors have been arranged starting with the ones that are the easiest to alter in the shortest amount of time, giving the most bang for your buck when it comes to Analysis & Improvement! For example, students will often have great success in simply changing equipment (or adjusting their set-up to fit better) before trying to make complex technique changes. On the other end of the spectrum, changing a student’s physical characteristics is generally beyond the scope of a typical snowboard lesson.
上述每個因素都會影響我們學生的表現。專注於技術面固然容易,但我們也必須同時處理其他因素。在上述模型中,這些因素依照從最容易在最短時間內改變的開始排列,這樣在分析與改進時能獲得最大的效益!例如,學生通常會在單純更換裝備(或調整裝備以更合身)後,取得很大的成功,這比嘗試做複雜的技術改變來得容易。相反地,改變學生的身體特徵通常超出一般滑雪板課程的範圍。

DELVERING MPROVEMENT提供改進

Different students require feedback to be delivered in different ways. Using your communication and interpersonal skills, you can make sure that the feedback that you deliver “works” for your students.
不同的學生需要以不同的方式接收回饋。運用你的溝通與人際技巧,你可以確保所提供的回饋對學生「有效」。

THE P.T.T. FORMATP.T.T. 格式

P.T.T. refers to “Positive - To - Try”. It is simply a method of phrasing our feedback to ensure that our improvements are given in a way that is:
P.T.T. 指的是「正向嘗試」。這只是一種表達回饋的方法,確保我們的改進建議是以以下方式呈現:
  • Positive and specific.正面且具體。
  • Encouraging鼓勵性。
  • Future focused (as opposed to focused on previous “mistakes”)
    著眼未來(而非聚焦於過去的「錯誤」)。
  • Consequence free無後顧之憂
THESE FACTORS HAVE BEEN ARRANGED STARTING WITH THE ONES THAT ARE THE EASIEST TO ALTER IN THE SHORTESTAMOUNT OF TIME, GIVING THE MOST BANG FOR YOUR BUCK WHEN IT COMES TO ANALYSIS & IMPROVEMENT!
這些因素已依照從最容易在最短時間內改變的開始排列,當涉及分析與改進時,能帶來最高的效益!
When we deliver feedback using this method, we simply start with a positive element that was observed, followed by an aspect to be improved: “to accomplish X, try Y”. This format allow us to avoid mentioning or dwelling on mistakes, and instead focus on the next trial or attempt. Also, it helps to create a level playing field between student and instructor. Here’s an example of PTT feedback:
當我們使用此方法提供回饋時,我們會先從觀察到的正面元素開始,接著提出需要改進的部分:「為了達成 X,試試 Y」。這種格式讓我們避免提及或糾結於錯誤,而是專注於下一次嘗試。此外,它有助於在學生與教練之間建立公平的互動環境。以下是一個 PTT 回饋的範例:

“Great riding! Your balance during that run was excellent! To improve your riding in that steep section, let’s try riding the next part of the run with softer legs - using them as shock absorbers to keep our board in contact with the snow, so that we can control our speed.”
「騎得很棒!你在那次滑行中的平衡非常出色!為了在那段陡坡中提升騎乘技巧,我們試著用較柔軟的雙腿來騎接下來的路段——利用雙腿作為避震器,讓滑板保持與雪面的接觸,這樣我們就能更好地控制速度。」
Notice how in the feedback above, the instructor starts with a positive, and relevant, aspect of the performance (“nice jacket” doesn’t cut it!). Letting students know what they did well is just as important as highlighting the elements to improve. Following this, the instructor moves on to the next run or attempt, and outlines a tactic, feeling or movement that the student can focus on to get better in the future.
注意上方的回饋中,教練是從正面且相關的表現開始(「漂亮的外套」可不算!)。讓學生知道他們做得好的地方,和指出需要改進的部分一樣重要。接著,教練會進入下一次的練習或嘗試,並說明學生可以專注的策略、感受或動作,以便未來能有所進步。

The P.T.T. format of feedback works well for the following:
P.T.T. 回饋格式適用於以下情況:

  • New or less-experienced instructors. The P.T.T. format provides a kind of “script” for delivering feedback. As you become more experienced, it becomes easier to deliver feedback in this way.
    新手或經驗較少的教練。P.T.T. 格式提供了一種「腳本」來進行回饋。隨著經驗累積,使用這種方式給予回饋會變得更加容易。
  • New snowboarders and students who may be less confident.
    新手滑雪者以及可能較缺乏自信的學生。
  • Students who prefer to hear what they are doing well, as opposed to what they need to improve on.
    學生較喜歡聽到自己做得好的地方,而非需要改進的部分。
POSITIVE... T0... TRY...
- What should they continue doing?
- 他們應該繼續做什麼?
- What will help them to improve?
- 什麼會幫助他們進步?
- How will they make the change?
- 他們將如何做出改變?
- Be encouraging, relevant and specific.
- 要鼓勵人心、切合主題且具體明確。
- Build on the positive.
- 以正面角度為基礎。

- 要具體。使用「藉由」和「以便」等片語。- 著重行動,並有明確的任務可嘗試。
- Be specific. Use "by" and "so that" phrases.
- Movement focused, with a clear task to try.
- Be specific. Use "by" and "so that" phrases. - Movement focused, with a clear task to try.| - Be specific. Use "by" and "so that" phrases. | | :--- | | - Movement focused, with a clear task to try. |
POSITIVE... T0... TRY... - What should they continue doing? - What will help them to improve? - How will they make the change? - Be encouraging, relevant and specific. - Build on the positive. "- Be specific. Use "by" and "so that" phrases. - Movement focused, with a clear task to try."| POSITIVE... | T0... | TRY... | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | - What should they continue doing? | - What will help them to improve? | - How will they make the change? | | - Be encouraging, relevant and specific. | - Build on the positive. | - Be specific. Use "by" and "so that" phrases. <br> - Movement focused, with a clear task to try. |

WORDS & PHRASES TO AVOID
避免使用的詞彙與片語

The following words and phrases can take positive, encouraging feedback, and make it negative and discouraging:
以下詞語和片語本可用於正面、鼓勵性的回饋,卻可能使其變成負面且令人沮喪的表達:
  • “But”: As in, “that was really good, BUT…”
    「但是」:例如,「那真的很好,但是……」
  • “You should”: It’s not about what the student should, or must, do.
    「你應該」:重點不在於學生應該或必須做什麼。
  • “I want you to”: Again, it’s not about what you want, but should be about what the student wants.
    「我希望你」:同樣地,重點不在於你想要什麼,而應該關注學生想要什麼。
Instead, try:相反地,試試看:
  • “Let’s try”: This helps to keep the consequences low. Trying implies that there is not penalty of it doesn’t work out the first time.
    「我們來試試看」:這有助於降低後果的嚴重性。嘗試意味著如果第一次不成功,並不會有懲罰。
  • “We”: Instead of “you”, “we” helps to keep a level playing field between instructor and student.
    「我們」:取代「你」使用,「我們」有助於在指導者與學生之間保持公平的關係。

Other Types of Improvement
其他類型的改進

Keep in mind - different students will react differently to feedback. Recognize that some students want to hear what they are doing wrong, while other students need feedback catered in a more positive/nurturing way. Try to read your students, or better yet, ask them! That way you can make their experience more valuable.
請記住——不同的學生對回饋的反應會有所不同。要了解有些學生希望聽到自己做錯了什麼,而另一些學生則需要以更正面/關懷的方式給予回饋。試著觀察你的學生,或者更好的是,直接問他們!這樣你就能讓他們的學習經驗更有價值。
Depending on your student’s personality, motivations and attitude, you may wish to use the following types of feedback as an alternative to the P.T.T. method:
根據學生的個性、動機和態度,你可能會想使用以下類型的回饋,作為 P.T.T.方法的替代方案:

EVALUATIVE評價性回饋

The instructor assesses the quality of the performance; he or she makes some kind of assessment or judgement.
講師評估表現的品質;他或她會做出某種評價或判斷。
  • “That’s fine!”「沒關係!」
  • “Good job!”「做得好!」
  • “No, not like that!”
    「不,不是那樣!」
  • “Not good enough!”「還不夠好!」

PRESCRIPTIVE規範式

The instructor tells the student how to execute the skill next time.
教練告訴學生下次如何執行這項技能。
  • “Jump higher!” (general)
    「跳得更高!」(一般性指示)
  • “Bend your knees more!” (specific)
    「膝蓋彎曲更多!」(具體指示)

DESCRIPTIVE描述性

The instructor describes to the student what he or she has just done.
講師向學生描述他或她剛剛所做的事情。
  • “The build-up was too slow” (general)
    「準備動作太慢了」(一般性)
  • “Your legs were really extended” (specific)
    「你的雙腿伸得很直」(具體)

THE FINAL STEP: EVALUATE
最後一步:評估

Once you’ve given your feedback, take the time to stop and reflect on the effectiveness. Ask yourself the following questions:
在你給出反饋後,花點時間停下來反思其效果。問問自己以下問題:
  • Specific, not general? For example: “You did qquad\qquad perfectly!” instead of “That’s fine!”
    具體,而非籠統?例如:「你在 qquad\qquad 做得非常好!」而不是「那還不錯!」
  • Positive and constructive, not negative and humiliating?
    正面且具建設性,而非負面且羞辱?
  • Directly linked to the skill to be improved?
    是否直接與需提升的技能相關?
  • Informative and relevant to the most important skills or movements?
    是否具資訊性且與最重要的技能或動作相關?
  • Balanced? Did it contain information on what the student did well and on what still needs improvement? For example: “Your qquad\qquad (movement) is much better than last time. The next thing to do would be to qquad\qquad (add another level of complexity to the movement, or a particular piece to refine)”.
    是否平衡?是否包含學生表現良好及仍需改進的部分?例如:「你的 qquad\qquad (動作)比上次好多了。接下來要做的是 qquad\qquad (為動作增加另一層複雜度,或精進某個細節)」。
  • Clear, precise, and easy to understand? Did I use simple words?
    是否清楚、精確且易於理解?我是否使用了簡單的詞彙?

General Comments About Analysis and Improvement
關於分析與改進的一般建議

  • Timing is everything when giving feedback; the student needs to be open to hearing it and near enough to hear you.
    給予回饋時,時機至關重要;學生需要願意聆聽,且距離要夠近才能聽見你的話。
  • Draw the student’s attention to some element external to his or her body or to the anticipated effect of the movement, rather than to the way the movement is being done.
    將學生的注意力引導至身體外的某個元素或動作預期的效果,而非動作本身的執行方式。
  • Whenever possible, let students practice without always interrupting them. The more you talk, the less they can practice!
    盡可能讓學生持續練習,不要總是打斷他們。你講得越多,他們練習的時間就越少!
  • Avoid repeating the same general comments (e.g. “That’s great!”,
    避免重複相同的一般性評論(例如「那真棒!」),

    “Keep going!”) Effective feedback is more than general encouragement.
    「繼續努力!」有效的回饋不僅僅是一般的鼓勵。
  • To promote acquisition and development of skills, you must provide specific information (e.g.: “You did
    為了促進技能的獲取與發展,您必須提供具體資訊(例如:「你做得很好」)

    qquad\qquad perfectly” instead of “That’s great!”).
    qquad\qquad 完美無缺」而不是「太棒了!」)。
  • To be useful, feedback must also be accurate. To be accurate, you must: (1) really know the skills the student is working on; (2) have a clear reference point as far as correct execution is concerned; and (3) be in the right place to observe the student’s performance.
    要有用,回饋也必須準確。要準確,你必須:(1)真正了解學生正在練習的技能;(2)對正確執行有明確的參考標準;以及(3)處於能觀察學生表現的適當位置。
  • In the case of motor skills, a demonstration (i.e.: non-verbal feedback or the execution of a very precise movement) is often useful feedback to give to the student.
    在動作技能的情況下,示範(即:非語言回饋或執行非常精確的動作)通常是給學生的有效回饋。
  • Feedback given to the whole group is often effective.
    給整個團體的回饋通常也很有效。
  • Although feedback is important and contributes to learning, avoid giving feedback too often or giving too much at once.
    雖然回饋很重要並有助於學習,但避免過於頻繁或一次給予過多回饋。
  • Remember that it is always the quality and not the quantity of feedback that determines its effectiveness.
    請記住,決定回饋效果的永遠是品質,而非數量。

TECHNICAL CONTENT技術內容

Effective instructors present technical concepts in their lessons in a clear, coherent, and technically correct fashion. The use of the Skills Concept and Riding Competencies will help in this area.
有效的講師會以清晰、一致且技術正確的方式呈現課程中的技術概念。運用技能概念與騎乘能力將有助於這方面的表現。

It is important to remember that students don’t want to learn all of the technical knowledge that we as instructors have. Students are motivated by real world outcomes, not by learning about all of the skills and competencies. For example:
重要的是要記住,學生並不想學習我們作為講師所擁有的所有技術知識。學生的動機來自於真實世界的成果,而非學習所有技能與能力。例如:
  • “I want to have more control on the steeps”
    「我想對斜坡有更多的控制」
  • “I want to stomp backside 360 s”
    「我想學會後腳踩踏 360 度旋轉」
  • “I want to learn to turn”
    「我想學會轉彎」
EFFECTIVE INSTRUCTORS PRESENT CONCEPTS INA CLEAR, COHERENT, AND TECHNICALLY CORRECT FASHION.
有效的教練以清晰、一致且技術正確的方式呈現概念。
When we teach we must use our technical knowledge to help our students achieve their desired outcomes without baffling with our technical knowledge. Once you have determined what the student wants to achieve during the lesson, watch them ride and decide on an overall technical theme that will help them achieve their desired outcome. Use your knowledge of the competencies and skills to provide focus, but don’t overload the lesson with technical info! For example:
當我們教學時,必須運用我們的專業知識來幫助學生達成他們期望的目標,而不是用專業術語讓他們感到困惑。一旦你確定學生在課程中想要達成的目標,就觀察他們的滑行,並決定一個整體的技術主題,幫助他們實現期望的結果。利用你對能力和技巧的了解來聚焦重點,但不要讓課程充斥過多技術資訊!例如:
Student Goal: Better speed control on steeper pitches.
學生目標:在較陡的坡面上更好地控制速度。
Instructor Analysis: A lack of a centered and mobile position is not allowing them to edge the snowboard effectively on steep terrain, resulting in a loss of control.
教練分析:缺乏居中且靈活的姿勢,導致他們無法有效地在陡峭地形上用邊緣控制滑雪板,進而失去控制。
Lesson Content: Focus on correcting and/or refining their ability to maintain a stable, balanced position over the snowboard, using a variety of exercises or tactics. Test the improvement on steep terrain after some time for practice / mileage.
課程內容:著重於修正和/或精進他們保持穩定、平衡姿勢於滑雪板上的能力,透過各種練習或策略來達成。經過一段時間的練習/累積里程後,在陡峭地形上測試其進步。
The technical content of your lesson should contribute to the overall improvement of your students, but don’t neglect the other non-technical aspects of the lesson!
您的課程技術內容應有助於學生整體的提升,但也別忽略課程中其他非技術面的部分!

PEOPLE SKILLS AND THE GUEST EXPERIENCE
人際技巧與來賓體驗

Creating a fun and rewarding experience for your students will help to create the same experience for yourself.
為學生打造有趣且有成就感的體驗,也將幫助您自己獲得同樣的體驗。

A. DURING THE LESSON
A. 課程進行中

The “S.P.I.T.” acronym can help you plan your interactions with new students throughout the lesson.
“S.P.I.T.” 這個縮寫可以幫助你在整堂課中規劃與新學生的互動。

S.P.I.T:S.P.I.T:

SMILE: When students approach you at the meeting area, take a second to smile, and read them. You can easily identify some key emotions simply by looking at them. What is their state of mind? Are they happy, scared or apprehensive?
微笑(SMILE):當學生走到會面區時,花一秒鐘微笑並觀察他們。你可以透過觀察輕易辨識出一些關鍵情緒。他們的心情如何?是開心、害怕還是擔憂?
  • Greet your guests with openness and positivity. Smile!
    以開放和積極的態度迎接你的來賓。微笑吧!
  • Make eye contact, observe body language, gear check, and look on their face.
    保持眼神接觸,觀察肢體語言,檢查裝備,並注意他們的表情。
  • Learn your students’ names, and use them!
    記住學生的名字,並且要使用他們的名字!
  • Be friendly and agreeable in your overall approach.
    整體態度要友善且和藹可親。
PLAN: Welcome them and plan the lesson with your students. Remember, learning to snowboard can be intimidating, and many students can feel intimidated by a lesson environment. Do what you can to reduce the stress of the situation.
計畫:歡迎他們並與學生一起規劃課程。請記得,學習滑雪板可能會讓人感到害怕,許多學生在課堂環境中可能會感到緊張。盡你所能減輕這種壓力。
  • Engage them immediately. (Fun games, dynamic warm ups, conversation)
    立即讓他們參與其中。(有趣的遊戲、動態暖身、對話)
  • Think carefully about your first question…try something not snowboard related that may help relieve any anxiety they may have.
    仔細思考你的第一個問題……嘗試問一些與滑雪板無關的問題,可能有助於緩解他們的焦慮。
  • Ask your class about their backgrounds, interests, and expectations for the day.
    詢問你的班級關於他們的背景、興趣以及對今天課程的期望。
  • Establish a personal connection to build on during the lesson.
    建立個人連結,作為課程中的基礎。
  • Share your thoughts for the lesson with your student, or class and get their input.
    與你的學生或班級分享你對課程的想法,並聽取他們的意見。
INQUIRE: Talk to your students with interest and sincerity!
詢問:以關心和真誠的態度與學生對話!
  • To maintain a high level of engagement, try using questions, individual feedback, and generally developing a personal connection.
    為了保持高度的參與度,嘗試使用提問、個別回饋,並且一般性地發展個人連結。
  • Terrain can be a useful tool to engage students in the lesson - use terrain as a teaching tool when possible.
    地形可以是吸引學生參與課程的有用工具——盡可能將地形作為教學工具使用。
  • Keep the action coming! Be positive and upbeat - engagement depends on continuous stimulation (every 2-3 minutes if possible).
    保持行動不斷!保持積極和愉快的態度——參與度取決於持續的刺激(如果可能,每 2-3 分鐘一次)。
  • Teach for student-centered success. Students should leave the lesson knowing that you were there for them, and truly wanted to see them progress.
    以學生為中心進行教學。學生應該在課程結束時知道你是為他們而在,並且真心希望看到他們進步。
TALK: How is the lesson going? Are the students progressing and enjoying themselves?
談話:課程進行得如何?學生是否有進步並且玩得開心?
  • Maintain an open dialogue throughout.
    保持全程開放的對話。
  • Ask questions.提出問題。
  • Re-visit the previous three steps to ensure progress.
    重新檢視前面三個步驟以確保進展。

B. ATTITUDEB. 態度

While you, as the instructor, may be the “alpha dog” in terms of your group of new snowboarders, it is important to realize that your students excel in other fields of their lives…be it as a surgeon, academic, comic book collector - whatever!
雖然你作為教練,可能是這群新手滑雪板者中的「老大」,但重要的是要明白你的學生在生活的其他領域也很優秀……無論是外科醫生、學者、漫畫收藏家——不管是什麼!
No matter what your students may do in their lives, one has to realize that snowboarding is just one area of life. Keep it in perspective. Be confident, but not arrogant. Be enthusiastic, and be interested in what your guests have to say. The goal is take them on a good experience around the mountain.
無論你的學生在生活中從事什麼工作,都必須明白滑雪板只是生活中的一個面向。保持正確的觀點。要有自信,但不要傲慢。要充滿熱情,並且對客人所說的話感興趣。目標是帶給他們一次愉快的山上體驗。

Ensure Mutual Respect Between You and Your Clients
確保你與客人之間的相互尊重

Mutual respect comes from the development of a relationship that is lasting and sound…understanding that a “lesson” is just a code word for long term development of a productive teacher/ student relationship. It is geared toward continual growth and development of both the student and the teacher.
相互尊重來自於建立一段持久且穩固的關係……理解「課程」只是長期發展有效師生關係的代名詞。這是為了促進學生和教練雙方的持續成長與發展。

C. KNOW YOUR STUFF!
C. 了解你的內容!

The small talk…it’s an art. Some tips for constant and consistent interest in conversation:
閒聊……這是一門藝術。以下是一些保持對話持續且穩定興趣的小技巧:

Know the basics:了解基本知識:
  • The name of the runs you will be using, what level of difficulty to prepare them for, how many runs are there?
    你將使用的滑雪道名稱,為何種難度等級做準備,有多少條滑雪道?
  • What’s the altitude at the top?
    頂部的海拔高度是多少?
  • Is this run a black diamond?
    這條滑道是黑鑽級嗎?
  • Good spots for lunch/coffee?
    有推薦的午餐或咖啡好去處嗎?
  • Is there anything going on after the lifts close?
    纜車關閉後有什麼活動嗎?
  • Good bar around? (if appropriate!)
    附近有不錯的酒吧嗎?(如果合適的話!)
  • Where are the biggest jumps?
    哪裡的跳躍最大?
Teaching isn’t just about the tech-talk. Chairlift time and rest stops are a good time to become a great guide for your class.
教學不只是技術講解。搭乘纜車和休息時間是成為班級優秀導遊的好時機。

Keep them entertained! It’s not just about the on-snow portion…use chairlifts, lunch, coffee time, etc. to show them a good time.
讓他們保持娛樂!不只是雪地上的時間……利用纜車、午餐、喝咖啡時間等,讓他們玩得開心。
  • Where are you from?
    你來自哪裡?
  • What do you do?
    你是做什麼工作的?
  • What’s your favorite animal?
    你最喜歡的動物是什麼?
  • What grade are you in?
    你讀幾年級?
  • Do you do any other sports?
    你還有參加其他運動嗎?
  • Isn’t Optimus Prime the coolest, or what?
    擎天柱是不是超酷的,對吧?

Weather天氣

Know it - for you and for your clients. You can then recommend clothing adjustments or sunscreen before the start of the lesson. Is it going to snow this week? Are we going to get some spring skiing?
了解天氣狀況——為了你自己,也為了你的客戶。這樣你就能在課程開始前建議調整穿著或使用防曬乳。這週會下雪嗎?我們會有春季滑雪的機會嗎?

Snow Conditions雪況

You have to be aware of this one to plan a good lesson and you might have to change your plan. Was this run groomed last night? How was the snow yesterday? Was it warm last night and cold this morning?
你必須注意這點才能規劃出一堂好的課程,有時也可能需要調整你的計畫。這條滑道昨晚有整地嗎?昨天的雪況如何?昨晚是暖和還是冷,今早又如何?

Adaptability適應能力

With kids or with adults, everyone in the group is different; they all have their own personality. It is your task to adapt, and relate to all of them individually in one way or another. That’s when the small talk comes in. Use it to figure out what you have to work with for all the guests - some will be easier than others!
無論是帶小孩還是成人,團體中的每個人都不同;他們各有自己的個性。你的任務是適應並以某種方式與每個人建立關係。這時候就會用到閒聊。利用閒聊來了解你要面對的每位客人——有些會比其他人容易相處!

D. THE LESSON WRAP UP
D. 課程結束總結

The goal of the end of the lesson (which should not really be called the end, but rather the start of the next step) should be in getting the student to come back!
課程結束的目標(其實不應該稱為結束,而應該是下一階段的開始)應該是讓學生願意回來!
Remember to “S.P.I.N.” at the end of the lesson:
記得在課程結束時使用「S.P.I.N.」:

S.P.I.N.:S.P.I.N.:

SKILLS: What they have accomplished (technical skill, terrain, safety, finding their way around)?
技能(SKILLS):他們完成了什麼(技術技能、地形、安全、尋路能力)?

PERSONAL: Show your student that you know them, and have an interest in tailoring any future lessons to them.
個人化:向你的學生展示你了解他們,並且有興趣為他們量身打造未來的課程。
IMPROVEMENTS: Highlight and review any technical points to continue working on after the lesson. Give some suggestions on safe terrain and movements or feelings that they should practice while out freeriding on their own.
改進建議:強調並回顧課後需要持續練習的技術要點。提供一些安全地形、動作或感受上的建議,讓他們在自由滑行時能夠自行練習。
NEXT: What will the next lesson hold in store? Tell them what level they should sign up for next (be honest and realistic) or recommend terrain choice. Make sure you let them know that you’re available and would love to teach them again. And don’t forget to thank them for riding with you!
下一步:下一堂課會有哪些內容?告訴他們應該報名的等級(誠實且務實),或推薦適合的地形。務必讓他們知道你隨時歡迎並樂意再次教導他們。別忘了感謝他們與你一同滑行!

E. MARKETING & RETENTION
E. 行銷與留存

Know the Product了解產品

Knowing the offering from your ski and snowboard school and general resort offerings are vital to your employer. Ski and snowboard school instructors are the front line of the resort; we are visible, approachable, and we should be knowledgeable about our business. The idea is not to turn you into a used car salesman, but to just be friendly and informed about what is on offer for your clients.
了解滑雪和滑雪板學校的課程以及度假村的一般服務對您的雇主至關重要。滑雪和滑雪板學校的教練是度假村的第一線人員;我們是可見的、親切的,並且應該對我們的業務有所了解。重點不是要把你變成二手車銷售員,而是要對客戶提供的服務保持友善且有資訊。

Selling the Product銷售產品

Suggesting or selling the right product to the right people - that’s what your snow school wants. For example, trying to sell a full-day private at $500 to the folks in your discover group that just paid $39 might be a far fetch. Simply try to keep them around. Suggest the next upgrade in price and ability - upgrade to a 3-day package or maybe a multi-week program. If you have a highpriced, private lesson, then you know they are able to afford the top of the line product. This is a good chance to re-book them for another lesson and earn yourself a request rate of pay that most schools have in place.
向合適的人推薦或銷售合適的產品——這正是您的雪地學校所期望的。例如,試圖向剛付了 39 美元的初學者團體推銷 500 美元的全天私人課程,可能不太現實。只要試著讓他們繼續留下來。建議下一個價格和能力的升級方案——升級為三天套票或多週課程。如果您有高價位的私人課程,那麼您就知道他們有能力負擔頂級產品。這是重新預約另一堂課的好機會,並為自己爭取大多數學校所設的報酬率。
Tips:小提示:
  • Carry business cards, and use them! Hand them out at the end of the lesson. The idea is to make it easy for your clients to book again.
    隨身攜帶名片,並且要使用它們!在課程結束時發給學生。目的是讓客戶能輕鬆再次預約。
  • Reserve time at the end of the lesson to give an overview of the lesson, and suggest another lesson as a great way to build on what was learned.
    在課程結束時預留時間,回顧本次課程內容,並建議安排下一堂課,作為鞏固所學的好方法。
  • In the case of kids lessons, ensure that you meet with the parents at the end of the lesson they are ones paying for the lessons, and most likely to decide to take another one!
    針對兒童課程,務必在課程結束時與家長會面,因為他們是付費者,也最有可能決定是否繼續報名下一堂課!

Building A Clientele建立客戶群

It’s important to focus on the process as a whole - the lesson is simply a part of this ongoing relationship that we’re trying to develop. So, excluding the actual lesson, what are some ways to go about building return clients?
重要的是要專注於整個過程——課程只是我們試圖建立的持續關係中的一部分。所以,除了實際的課程之外,有哪些方法可以用來建立回頭客呢?
Before the lesson, (particularly if it’s a private lesson) we may have the opportunity to know the clients’ names. With this info, and if you have time, go to the rental shop and see if there is any way you can help your clients get prepared…help during a busy and stressful time at a resort is always appreciated! A full-day private at many resorts now is in the $ 500 $ 500 $500\$ 500 range, so what do people
在課程之前,(特別是如果是私人課程)我們可能有機會知道客戶的名字。掌握這些資訊後,如果你有時間,可以去租借店看看是否有什麼方式能幫助客戶做好準備……在度假村忙碌且壓力大的時候提供協助總是備受感激!現在許多度假村的一整天私人課程價格約在 $ 500 $ 500 $500\$ 500 範圍內,那麼人們會……

AS LOCALS, WE HAVE KNOWLEDGE OF THE RESORTAND THE SURROUNDING AREA THAT HAS AN IMMENSE VALUE TO A PERSON OR FAMILY ON VACATION.
作為當地人,我們對度假村及周邊地區的了解,對於度假中的個人或家庭來說具有極大的價值。

expect for this? Obviously they expect a professional appearance, demeanour and capability as instructors, but there truly is nobody at a resort who spends as much time with a guest as their instructor.
除了這些呢?顯然,他們期望教練具備專業的外表、舉止和能力,但事實上,度假村裡沒有任何人比教練花更多時間陪伴客人。

As locals, we have knowledge of the resort and the surrounding area that has an immense value to a person or family on vacation - this can range from where is a great place to take the kids in town, to who has the best happy hour at the bars. An instructor should be expected to share their locals knowledge of the area. Every client should leave a lesson feeling that they got the “special treatment”.
作為當地人,我們對度假村及周邊地區有豐富的了解,這對度假中的個人或家庭來說非常有價值——這些資訊可能包括哪裡是帶小孩去玩的好地方,或是哪家酒吧的快樂時光最棒。教練應該被期望分享他們對當地的熟悉知識。每位客戶在課程結束時都應該感受到自己得到了「特別待遇」。

There are lots of little things that an instructor can and should do. Carry a client’s gear if needed; offer them assistance wherever necessary (perhaps loading a lift, carry a bag, open doors, etc.). Invite them out for a beer or hot chocolate (if appropriate!) at the end of the day to go over some of the things they learned. Time invested will nearly always be rewarded in some way.
教練可以且應該做很多小事。必要時幫客人提裝備;在需要時提供協助(例如協助搭乘纜車、提包、開門等)。在一天結束時邀請他們一起喝杯啤酒或熱巧克力(如果合適的話!),回顧他們學到的東西。投入的時間幾乎總會以某種方式得到回報。

When we get return clients, what are the advantages? Why do we want to see the same faces again and again? The answers are fairly obvious:
當我們有回頭客時,有什麼優勢?為什麼我們想一再見到同樣的面孔?答案相當明顯:
  • We’ll teach higher end lessons.
    我們將教授高階課程。
  • We’ll see the real development of people’s snowboarding.
    我們將見證人們滑雪板技術的真正成長。
  • We’ll develop not just relationships, but friendships.
    我們將不僅建立關係,更建立友誼。
The benefits are endless, and include increased earnings!
好處無窮無盡,還包括收入增加!

Private lessons/return clients are the meat and potatoes of a clientele, which is a prerequisite for making a living in this business. Clients will return to the same resorts year after year, simply because “their” instructor is there. They will return to see you if they know that they are guaranteed a great time, progress, a comfortable fit with a pro that knows their riding and personalities, and all the little secrets that they may not get with a new pro.
私人課程/回頭客是客源的核心,也是從事這行業謀生的必要條件。客人會年復一年地回到同一家度假村,原因很簡單,就是「他們的」教練還在那裡。如果他們知道能保證有美好的時光、進步、與熟悉他們騎乘風格和個性的專業教練相處得舒適,以及掌握所有那些新教練可能不會告訴他們的小秘密,他們就會回來找你。

One final note. Be sure that your guests have a way to keep in touch with you, and you with them. Be sure to have contact information on hand or social media details, so that you can keep in touch with clients in the off-season. Hand out a business card at the end of each lesson (ask your director for resort-sponsored cards, or print your own from the CASI web site). Send an email/update once in a while letting them know where you are and that you’re looking forward to working with them again. People will truly appreciate this kind of personal service, and they will return week after week, and year after year.
最後一點提醒。務必確保你的客人有辦法和你保持聯繫,你也能和他們保持聯繫。準備好聯絡資訊或社群媒體資料,這樣你才能在淡季時與客戶保持聯繫。每堂課結束時發一張名片(可向你的主管索取度假村贊助的名片,或從 CASI 網站自行列印)。偶爾寄送電子郵件或更新,告訴他們你在哪裡,並期待再次與他們合作。人們會非常感激這種個人化的服務,並會一週又一週、一年又一年地回來。

NOTES:備註:

THE SKILLS CONCEPT技能概念

The CASI Technical Model
CASI 技術模型

Analysis of snowboard technique has led to the isolation of the Skills Concept in snowboarding. This chapter outlines the skills individually, as well as in combination with each other. The Skills Concept attempts to create a snowboarding technical framework that is:
對滑雪板技巧的分析導致了滑雪板技能概念的獨立提出。本章節將個別說明各項技能,並探討它們之間的組合。技能概念試圖建立一個滑雪板技術框架,該框架具有:
  • OUTCOME BASED: Riders should display the ability to use the various skills and movements appropriately to achieve the desired results in their riding (e.g.: increased fluidity, refined absorption skills, etc.).
    以結果為導向:騎乘者應展現出適當運用各種技能與動作的能力,以達成騎乘中期望的效果(例如:提升流暢度、精進吸收技巧等)。
  • PERFORMANCE DRIVEN: The driving force behind many of the concepts is the development of board performance; the element that lends a dynamic and often powerful element to snowboarding.
    以表現為驅動:許多概念背後的推動力是板面性能的發展;這是賦予滑雪板動態且常帶有力量感的重要元素。
  • EFFICIENT: “Maximum performance with minimum effort”. Riders should have the ability to select and match their movements to the effort that the situation requires.
    高效能:「以最小的努力達到最大效能」。騎乘者應具備根據情況需求選擇並調整動作的能力。
  • ADAPTABLE TO VARIED TERRAIN AND CONDITIONS: Riders employing this technical model should be able to adapt techniques to the ever-changing canvas that snowboarding takes place on, whether it be powder, ice, steeps, trees, freestyle or groomed terrain.
    適應多變地形與條件:採用此技術模式的騎乘者應能將技巧調整至滑雪板所處的多變環境中,無論是粉雪、冰面、陡坡、樹林、自由式或整備過的地形。

The Skills Concept is made up of five elements - each can be considered to be movement-based skills:
技能概念由五個元素組成——每個元素皆可視為基於動作的技能:

POSITION & BALANCE姿勢與平衡
PIVOT樞紐
EDGING邊緣處理
PRESSURE壓力
TIMING & COORDINATION時機與協調

POSITION & BALANCE姿勢與平衡

The ability to maintain balance in a variety of situations while sliding down a hill remains one of the most obvious objectives in snowboarding. Balancing is a dynamic process requiring continuous muscular activity involving the centre of mass (COM). Balancing ensures that the resultant force acting on the body’s COM goes through the base of support (BOS) - the board, in turn making the rider more stable on top of the snowboard.
在滑雪板運動中,能夠在各種情況下保持平衡,尤其是在下坡滑行時,仍然是最明顯的目標之一。平衡是一個動態過程,需要持續的肌肉活動來控制質心(COM)。保持平衡確保作用於身體質心的合力通過支撐基底(BOS)——即滑雪板,從而使騎乘者在滑雪板上更加穩定。
Position & Balance is the fundamental skill in snowboarding. For a rider to be stable and balanced on the board, a comfortable, athletic riding position is essential. Teaching snowboarding often begins with getting your students to find a stable position on the board. A stable position will make it easier for them to balance and stay in control. Encouraging your students to be relaxed is also important so they can move, react, and adjust accordingly.
姿勢與平衡是滑雪板運動的基本技能。為了讓騎乘者在滑雪板上保持穩定和平衡,舒適且具運動性的騎乘姿勢是必須的。滑雪板教學通常從讓學生找到滑雪板上的穩定姿勢開始。穩定的姿勢會讓他們更容易保持平衡並掌控滑行。鼓勵學生保持放鬆也很重要,這樣他們才能靈活移動、反應並做出相應調整。

THE NEUTRAL POSITION中立姿勢

A good position helps improve a rider’s stability and balance and includes the following:
良好的姿勢有助於提升騎乘者的穩定性和平衡感,包含以下要點:
  • A ready position with the ankles, knees, and hip joints equally flexed. This position optimizes the length and strength of key muscles so a rider can be both stable and maximize mobility, as needed.
    準備姿勢時,腳踝、膝蓋和髖關節應同時彎曲。此姿勢能優化關鍵肌肉的長度與力量,使騎乘者既穩定又能在需要時發揮最大靈活度。

    \square Shoulders and hips positioned square to the front foot angle.
    \square 肩膀與髖部與前腳角度保持正對。

    \square Arms relaxed, and in a natural position alongside the body.
    \square 手臂放鬆,自然垂放於身體兩側。
  • Directing the head and eyes to face the direction of travel.
    將頭部和眼睛朝向行進方向。


In snowboarding, we are rarely totally stable or completely balanced.
在滑雪板運動中,我們很少能完全穩定或完全平衡。

Therefore, the act of balancing requires constant movement, or adjustment, of our body position. By maintaining a dynamic state of constant movement (balancing), a rider is able to maintain the appropriate amount of stability, at any given moment, for controlled, efficient snowboarding.
因此,保持平衡的動作需要不斷地移動或調整我們的身體姿勢。透過維持一種持續動態的移動(平衡)狀態,滑雪者能在任何時刻保持適當的穩定度,以達到受控且高效的滑雪。

Position & Balance and the Planes of Movement
姿勢與平衡及運動平面

When improving the balance skills of our students, we can isolate them into following planes:
在提升學生的平衡能力時,我們可以將其分離到以下幾個平面:
  1. Fore & Aft Balance: Movement on the Frontal Plane, or “Nose-Tail Plane”.
    前後平衡:在額狀面上的運動,或稱「鼻尾平面」。
  2. Lateral Balance: Movement forward and backward on the Sagittal Plane, or “Toe- Heel Plane”.
    側向平衡:在矢狀面上前後的運動,或稱「腳趾-腳跟平面」。
  3. Vertical Balance: Movement up and down along the Sagittal Plane.
    垂直平衡:沿矢狀面上下的運動。
  4. Rotational Balance: Movement (or resistance to movement) on the Transverse Plane, or “Twisting Plane”.
    旋轉平衡:在橫向平面上的動作(或對動作的阻力),亦稱為「扭轉平面」。

Components of Position & Balance:
位置與平衡的組成要素:

1. Position1. 位置

The ability to resist external forces through a “strong” riding position. A good position makes the rider more stable.
透過「穩固」的騎乘姿勢抵抗外力的能力。良好的姿勢使騎士更加穩定。

Key points:重點:

  • The more stable the rider, the “stronger” they are; the harder it is for them to be knocked over or lose balance.
    騎士越穩定,他們就越「強壯」;越不容易被撞倒或失去平衡。
  • Body position impacts stability - riders who can maintain a position with the C.O.M. directly over the B.O.S. will be more stable.
    身體姿勢會影響穩定性——能將重心(C.O.M.)直接保持在支撐基底(B.O.S.)上的騎士會更穩定。
  • Lowering the C.O.M. closer to the base of support can increase stability.
    將重心(C.O.M.)降低至更接近支撐基底的位置,可以增加穩定性。
  • Stability is achieved when we can assume a position in which the forces acting upon us are equal.
    當我們能採取一個作用於我們的力相等的姿勢時,即達到穩定。
  • A stable position also provides good range of movement, in all planes. It is a “neutral” position from which a ride can move, react and balance, in any direction.
    一個穩定的位置同時提供良好的各平面活動範圍。這是一個「中立」位置,騎乘者可以從此位置移動、反應並保持平衡,朝任何方向皆可。

2. Balance ("balancing")
2. 平衡(「保持平衡」)

The ability to maintain stability or manage instability, through range of movement.
透過活動範圍維持穩定或管理不穩定的能力。

Key points:重點:

  • Balancing involves constant movement to help you:
    保持平衡涉及持續的動作,幫助你:

    Maintain a stable or balanced position
    保持穩定或平衡的姿勢
  • Recover from an unstable or unbalanced position
    從不穩定或不平衡的姿勢中恢復

    \square Keep riding in an unstable or unbalanced position
    \square 持續在不穩定或不平衡的姿勢中騎乘
  • The forces acting on a rider are constantly changing. Therefore in order to maintain stability a rider needs to constantly move, adapt and react.
    騎士所受的力道不斷變化。因此,為了維持穩定,騎士需要不斷移動、調整並反應。
  • These movements can be small, large, fast or slow, and in any direction. The movements are called balance or “balancing”.
    這些動作可以是小幅度、大幅度、快速或緩慢,且可以朝任何方向進行。這些動作稱為平衡或「保持平衡」。

Balancing can be enhanced by:
平衡可以透過以下方式增強:

  1. Adopting a neutral riding position in which a rider can move freely in all four planes.
    採取中立的騎乘姿勢,使騎士能在四個平面自由移動。
  2. Being relaxed, loose and mobile - ready to adapt as needed, can also enhance balance. A good position means little if the rider is stiff and unable to adjust and react.
    保持放鬆、靈活且具備行動力——隨時準備根據需要調整,也能增強平衡。若騎士僵硬且無法調整與反應,再好的姿勢也毫無意義。
  3. The larger the access to range of movement and the more “free” this range of movement is, the better a rider can manage instability. Expert riders have a much larger ROM and therefore require less stability to ride efficiently.
    活動範圍越大且該活動範圍越「自由」,騎士就越能有效地控制不穩定性。專業騎士擁有更大的活動範圍,因此需要較少的穩定性即可有效騎乘。

Stability & Balance Together:
穩定性與平衡共同作用:

The more stable a rider, the less balancing (movement) is required to not fall over or regain stability (the more stable the easier it is to be balanced). The less stable a rider, the more balancing is required to not fall over or regain stability (the less stable the harder it is to be balanced). Standing on two legs (feet apart) you are balanced and stable. You are not falling over (balanced) and it is harder to push you over (stable).
騎士越穩定,為了不跌倒或恢復穩定所需的平衡(動作)就越少(越穩定越容易保持平衡)。騎士越不穩定,為了不跌倒或恢復穩定所需的平衡動作就越多(越不穩定越難保持平衡)。雙腳站立(雙腳分開)時,你是平衡且穩定的。你不會跌倒(平衡),且較難被推倒(穩定)。
“DRIVING, NOT SURVIVING.” A MORE STABLE RIDER CAN MAKE THE MOVEMENTS THEY WANT, TO CONTROL, MANIPULATE AND DIRECT THE BOARD. “SURVIVING, NOT DRIVING.” A LESS STABLE RIDER MUST FIRST MAKE BALANCING MOVEMENTS TO RECOVER, BEFORE THEY CAN MAKE THE MOVEMENTS THEY WANT.
「駕馭,而非求生。」較穩定的騎士能做出他們想要的動作,以控制、操控並引導滑板。「求生,而非駕馭。」較不穩定的騎士必須先做出平衡動作來恢復,才能做出他們想要的動作。

Stance & Binding Set Up
站姿與綁定設置

The set up of equipment can play a role in a student’s stability and ability to balance effectively. The following elements should be explored:
裝備的設置會影響學生的穩定性及有效平衡的能力。應該探討以下幾個要素:
  • Binding Width: How far apart the bindings (and feet) are placed on the snowboard. A wider stance increases stability by widening the base of support, however it can limit mobility (balancing movements). A narrow stance promotes mobility but may lack stability by creating an insufficient base of support.
    綁定寬度:綁定(及雙腳)在滑雪板上的間距。較寬的站姿透過擴大支撐基底來增加穩定性,但可能限制活動性(平衡動作)。較窄的站姿促進活動性,但可能因支撐基底不足而缺乏穩定性。
  • Binding Angle: A set up with the bindings angled towards the nose of the snowboard promotes a forward orientation of the body (E.g.: alpine or snowboard cross racing). This may allow riders to maintain their centre of mass closer the base of support during vertical movements (flexion of the hips). Bindings placed at lower angles across the board, or angles equal on front and back foot (E.g.: 15/-15 degrees) promote efficiency riding in both directions (forward and switch) and a very neutral alignment of the shoulders, hips and knees, however may hinder the rider’s ability to move efficiently in the vertical direction turn to turn while riding in the forward direction.
    綁定角度:綁定朝向滑雪板前端(鼻端)角度的設置,促進身體向前的姿態(例如:高山滑雪或單板越野賽)。這可能讓騎士在垂直動作(臀部屈曲)時,能將重心維持在較接近支撐基底的位置。綁定角度較低,且前後腳角度相等(例如:15/-15 度)的設置,促進雙向(正向與反向)騎乘的效率,並使肩膀、臀部與膝蓋保持非常中立的排列,但可能會妨礙騎士在正向騎乘時,於轉彎間垂直方向的有效移動能力。
Riders may need to experiment with equipment set-ups, and take into account their riding style, goals, and terrain being ridden.
騎士可能需要嘗試不同的裝備設定,並考慮他們的騎乘風格、目標以及所騎乘的地形。

NOTES:備註:

PIVOT

Rotational movements allow a rider to develop an effective steering angle, by using rotating movements towards the toeside or heelside edges, placing the board across the line of momentum (direction of travel). It will cause the rider’s course to be deflected in a new direction.
旋轉動作讓騎士能夠透過向腳趾側或腳跟側邊緣的旋轉動作,發展出有效的轉向角度,將滑板置於動量線(行進方向)之上。這將使騎士的路線偏轉到新的方向。
Steering angle is present in sliding, or skidded turns, but not in purely carved turns. In a carved turn, the board’s tail follows the path of the nose exactly. Also, a greater steering angle is achieved when the board’s edge angle is low.
轉向角存在於滑行或打滑轉彎中,但純粹雕刻轉彎中則不存在。在雕刻轉彎中,滑板的尾部會完全跟隨前端的路徑。此外,當滑板的邊緣角度較低時,能達到較大的轉向角。

Components of Pivot:樞軸的組成部分:

Steering angle can be created through the following movements:
轉向角可以透過以下動作產生:
  1. Rotation (Upper Body, Lower Body, or Full Body Rotation)
    旋轉(上半身、下半身或全身旋轉)
  2. Counter Rotation反向旋轉

Upper Body Rotational Movements
上半身旋轉動作

The upper body, including the head and shoulders, are rotated against the grip of the edge in the snow in the desired direction of the turn. The energy created through rotation is transmitted through the body, and affects the path of the snowboard.
上半身,包括頭部和肩膀,會朝著轉彎的期望方向,與雪板邊緣的握持方向相反地旋轉。透過旋轉產生的能量會傳遞到全身,並影響滑雪板的行進路徑。
The further rotation is initiated far away from the snowboard, the longer time it will take to impact the path of travel. Upper body rotation may result in slower reaction from the snowboard, but can generate significant power.
越遠離滑雪板開始旋轉,影響行進路徑所需的時間就越長。上半身旋轉可能導致滑雪板反應較慢,但能產生顯著的力量。

Key points:重點:

  • Upper-body rotation can generate more rotational force, but is generally an inefficient movement in turning because the effects of rotation take a long time to affect the snowboard. Also, excessive upper body rotational movements can compromise Position & Balance.
    上半身旋轉可以產生較大的旋轉力,但通常在轉彎時是一種效率較低的動作,因為旋轉的效果需要較長時間才能影響滑雪板。此外,過度的上半身旋轉動作可能會影響姿勢與平衡。

Lower Body Rotational Movements
下半身旋轉動作

The joints of the lower body (hip, knees & ankles) are used together in a rotational path to guide the snowboard in the desired direction. The use of lower body joints is an efficient movement, because of the close proximity to the snowboard.
下半身的關節(臀部、膝蓋與腳踝)會一起沿旋轉路徑引導滑雪板朝向所需方向。使用下半身關節是一種有效率的動作,因為它們與滑雪板的距離較近。
The use of the lower joints can result in a precise and efficient movement to turn the snowboard.
使用下半身關節可以產生精確且有效率的動作來轉動滑雪板。

Key points:重點:

  • Lower body rotational movements will have a quicker effect on the path of the snowboard, but will result in less rotational force.
    下半身的旋轉動作會更快影響滑雪板的路徑,但會產生較小的旋轉力。
  • Riders must be aware that lower body rotational movements can unintentionally compromise the position and alignment of the upper body, for example if turns are initiated with the lower body, and the upper body does not maintain alignment between shoulders, hips, knees, and feet.
    騎乘者必須注意,下半身的旋轉動作可能會無意間影響上半身的位置與對齊,例如當轉彎是由下半身發起,而上半身未能保持肩膀、臀部、膝蓋與腳的對齊。

Full Body Rotational Movements
全身旋轉動作

The use of both upper and lower body rotation together can be an
上下半身旋轉同時使用可以是一種

THE PEN ANALOGY筆的比喻

When we hold a pen near the top, our level of precision is low compared to holding the pen at the bottom (close to the writing tip). The same concept applies when we compare upper vs. lower body rotational movements. effective way to generate steering angle and a powerful change in direction. However, full body rotation is only effective once the snowboard’s edge is engaged in the snow and moving.
當我們握筆靠近筆桿頂端時,精確度較低;相比之下,握在筆尖附近(靠近書寫端)時,精確度較高。相同的概念也適用於比較上半身與下半身的旋轉動作。這是產生轉向角度和強力改變方向的有效方式。然而,只有當滑雪板的邊緣接觸雪面並且在移動時,全身旋轉才有效。

Key Points:重點:

The most powerful way to create direction change or spinning force.
產生方向改變或旋轉力的最強大方式。
Relies on the snowboard being edged to provide a platform to spin or rotate against.
依賴滑雪板的邊緣提供一個旋轉或轉動的支點。

Counter Rotational Movementsv
反向旋轉動作 v

During counter rotation, the upper and lower body move in opposition to each other. The upper body mass, through its own muscular effort, turns simultaneously in the opposite direction to the lower body.
在反向旋轉時,上半身和下半身會相互對立地移動。上半身的質量透過自身的肌肉力量,同時向與下半身相反的方向轉動。

Counter rotation is a quick way to pivot the board, for a limited distance (up to a maximum of 180 degrees), because action and reaction occur at the same time. There is no preparation (wind-up) needed as there is in rotation, and counter rotation can happen nearly instantaneously. A ‘speed check’ or emergency stop is a good example of counter rotation, as well as some boardslides.
反向旋轉是一種快速轉動滑板的方法,轉動距離有限(最多可達 180 度),因為動作與反作用同時發生。與旋轉需要的準備動作(預備動作)不同,反向旋轉幾乎可以瞬間完成。『速度檢查』或緊急停止是反向旋轉的好例子,滑板上的某些滑行動作也是如此。

Counter rotation is not recommended for novice snowboarders, because of it’s effect on balance and stability. When the upper and lower body move in opposite directions, it can compromise the position required to be stable, and will require excessive correction to return to the neutral position.
不建議初學滑雪板者使用反向旋轉,因為它會影響平衡與穩定性。當上半身和下半身朝相反方向移動時,會破壞保持穩定所需的位置,並且需要過度調整才能回到中立位置。

Key Points:重點:

  • Quickest way to change the direction of the snowboard.
    改變滑雪板方向最快的方法。
  • Only effective up to 180 degrees.
    僅在 180 度以內有效。
  • Can compromise the balance and stability of the rider.
    可能會影響騎乘者的平衡與穩定性。

EDGING邊緣處理

Edging is involved any time there is a change of direction.
只要有方向改變,就會涉及壓邊動作。

For effective edging, use of the ankle, knee, and/or hip joints is required to increase the edge angle (the angle between the base of the board and the snow). Edge control is a direct response to the rider’s ability to manipulate the board’s edge angle. This angle varies depending on:
為了有效壓邊,需要使用腳踝、膝蓋和/或臀部關節來增加壓邊角度(板底與雪面的夾角)。壓邊控制直接反映騎乘者操控板邊角度的能力。此角度會根據以下因素而有所不同:
  • The steepness of the slope
    坡度的陡峭程度
  • The radius of the turn
    轉彎的半徑
  • The speed of the turn
    轉彎的速度
  • Snow and terrain conditions, and terrain features
    雪況與地形條件,以及地形特徵
During the edging phase of a turn, external forces affect the rider. Through a mostly isometric effort, the rider uses these forces to create a turn. This idea of an “isometric effort” simply describes the relatively tense body position needed in the edging phase of a turn, resisting these forces. However the rider does not hold a static position. There is continuous reflex movement to maintain balance and to respond to varying terrain and snow conditions.
在轉彎的傾斜階段,外力會影響騎乘者。騎乘者透過大多是等長收縮的努力,利用這些力量來完成轉彎。這個「等長收縮的努力」的概念,簡單來說就是指在轉彎的傾斜階段,身體需要保持相對緊繃的姿勢,以抵抗這些力量。然而,騎乘者並非保持靜止不動,而是持續透過反射動作來維持平衡,並應對不同的地形和雪況。
FOR EVERY CHANGE OF DIRECTION, RIDERS NEED TO LEAN, OR TILT THEIR MASS TO THE INSIDE OF THE TURN TO REMAIN BALANCED AGAINST THE TURNING FORCES.
每次改變方向時,騎乘者都需要向轉彎內側傾斜或傾倒身體質量,以保持對抗轉彎力量的平衡。

Components Of Edging:傾斜的組成要素:

1. Inclination1. 傾斜角度

2. Angulation2. 角度調整

Inclination傾斜角

For every change of direction, riders need to lean, or tilt their mass to the inside of the turn to remain balanced against the turning forces - just as we would do on a bicycle to both initiate a change in direction and resist the forces associated with angular motion. This movement to the inside is called “inclination”. The use of inclination at the beginning of the turn is important to get the body moving in the desired direction of the new turn (generally downhill), and effectively leading the snowboard.
每次轉向時,騎士都需要傾斜身體,將重心向轉彎內側傾斜,以保持平衡,抵抗轉彎時的離心力——就像我們騎自行車時,為了啟動轉向並抵抗角動作相關的力量所做的動作一樣。這種向內側的動作稱為「傾斜」。在轉彎開始時使用傾斜動作非常重要,能使身體朝向新轉彎的期望方向(通常是下坡)移動,有效地引導滑雪板。

IT IS IMPORTANT TO
這一點很重要

UNDERSTAND THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN INCLINATION (LEANING)AND ANGULATION (BENDING).
了解傾斜(傾倒)與角度(彎曲)之間的關係。
With inclination only, the edge angle is equal to the amount of inclining (leaning). This technique allows a very limited variety of turns to be performed in ideal snow conditions.
僅靠傾斜時,邊緣角度等於傾斜的角度(傾斜量)。此技巧僅能在理想的雪況下執行非常有限的轉彎種類。

Key points:重點摘要:
  • Riders must incline inside the turning arc to counteract the turning forces.
    騎士必須在轉彎弧線內側傾斜,以抵銷轉彎時的力量。

  • Edging purely through inclination is only achievable with a limited number of factors (snow conditions, speed, slope).
    僅靠傾斜來壓邊,只能在有限的因素下實現(雪況、速度、坡度)。
As speed and performance increases, the amount of inclination increases as well.
隨著速度和表現的提升,傾斜的角度也會增加。

Angulation角度

Edging with angulation uses the ankle, knee and hip joints to increase the edge angle while maintaining balance over a relatively small base of support (the edged board). The COM stays closer to the centre line of the board (the BOS), thus increasing stability.
利用角度調整的壓邊技巧,透過腳踝、膝蓋和臀部關節來增加邊緣角度,同時在相對較小的支撐基底(壓邊的滑板)上保持平衡。重心(COM)保持靠近滑板中心線(支撐基底,BOS),從而提升穩定性。
Using inclination and angulation together, the rider is able to increase the edge angle beyond that obtained by inclination only. With this stance, it is possible to adjust pressure along the length of the board. For effective angulation, the shoulders should be as close to parallel to the snow as possible, depending on speed and slope. Generally, as the slope increases, more angulation is needed in order to maintain edge grip. As well, at higher speeds on flatter slopes, more inclination can be used, as the forces of speed will help to hold the rider up.
結合傾斜與角度調整,騎士能夠將邊緣角度提升至僅靠傾斜無法達到的程度。採用這種姿勢,可以調整整塊滑雪板的壓力分布。為了有效的角度調整,肩膀應盡可能與雪面保持平行,具體取決於速度與坡度。一般來說,坡度越陡,需要更多的角度調整以維持邊緣抓地力。此外,在較平緩的坡面上高速滑行時,可以使用更多的傾斜,因為速度產生的力量有助於支撐騎士。

Effective use of inclination and angulation requires a constant adjustment, taking into account the “cues” from the terrain - steepness, snow conditions, speed travelled, intended outcome, etc.
有效運用傾斜與角度調整需要不斷調整,並考量地形的「提示」——坡度、雪況、滑行速度、預期結果等因素。

Edging may be applied progressively through the turn, using refined movements with the feet, ankles and knees to allow the forward section of edge to “hook-up” in the snow (by flexing the snowboard torsionally), while the trailing section of the board is completing the previous turn.
轉彎時,邊緣壓力可逐步施加,透過腳部、腳踝與膝蓋的細微動作,使滑雪板前段的邊緣能在雪面上「掛鉤」(透過滑雪板的扭轉彎曲),同時滑雪板後段完成前一個轉彎。

Key points:重點摘要:
  • Angulation allows for the increase in edge angle while maintaining the rider’s COM closer to the BOS (for stability).
    角度調整能在提升邊緣角度的同時,保持騎士的重心(COM)更接近支撐基底(BOS),以增強穩定性。
  • Angulation combined with inclination will provide the best results when it comes to reliable edge grip.
    角度調整與傾斜結合,能在可靠的刃邊抓地力方面提供最佳效果。

GENERALLY, AS THE SLOPE INCREASES, MORE ANGULATION IS NEEDED IN ORDER TO MAINTAIN EDGE GRIP.
一般來說,隨著坡度增加,為了維持邊緣抓地力,需要更多的傾斜角度。

AS WELL, AT HIGHER SPEEDS ON FLATTER SLOPES, MORE INCLINATION CAN BE USED, AS THE FORCES OFSPEED WILL HELP TO HOLD THE RIDER UP.
此外,在較平緩的坡道上以較高速度滑行時,可以使用較多的傾斜角度,因為速度產生的力量會幫助支撐騎乘者。

PRESSURE壓力

Pressure is a sensory skill in which the rider moderates the forces acting on the board using movements in the lower joints to manage the changes under the snowboard due to terrain, speed and deformation of the snowboard.
壓力是一種感知技巧,騎乘者透過下肢關節的動作來調節作用於滑雪板上的力量,以應對地形、速度及滑雪板變形所帶來的變化。
The rider can moderate the pressures by adjusting fore/aft (left-right) body positions, bending or extending the legs (or one leg at a time), changing the amount of edge angle, changing the amount of steering, or by any combination of these things. Because pressure is difficult to master, it is the skill that defines the expert rider, and truly adds performance to our riding.
騎乘者可以透過調整前後(左右)身體位置、彎曲或伸直雙腿(或單腿)、改變邊緣角度、改變轉向幅度,或以上各種方式的組合來調節壓力。由於壓力難以掌握,它是區分專家騎乘者的技巧,並真正提升我們的滑行表現。
Some forms of pressure management are more obvious and easier to understand than others.
有些形式的壓力管理比其他形式更明顯且更容易理解。

UP UN-WEIGHTING向上減重

Whenever the mass is moved on a vertical trajectory (through extension of the lower joints), resulting in a temporary release of pressure at the top of the extension that coincides with the edge change, we call this “up un-weighting”. Think of performing a small hop from a standing position.
每當質量沿垂直軌跡移動(透過下肢關節的伸展),導致在伸展頂端出現暫時的壓力釋放,且此時恰好與邊緣變換同時發生,我們稱之為「向上減重」。可以想像從站立姿勢做一個小跳躍。

During extension, the body initially accelerates upward, causing a temporary increase in the pressure (“weighting”) on the board between the base of the board and the snow. The amount of increase in the pressure on the board depends on how quickly the extension is executed. If this motion is executed quickly enough, the body will experience total un-weighting briefly at the top of the extension. When the extension stops, the upward inertia causes a temporary decrease in the pressure (lightening) on the board.
在伸展過程中,身體最初會向上加速,造成板子底部與雪面之間的壓力(「加重」)暫時增加。板子上壓力增加的程度取決於伸展動作執行的速度。如果動作執行得夠快,身體會在伸展頂端短暫經歷完全的減重。當伸展停止時,向上的慣性會導致板子上的壓力暫時減少(變輕)。
Pressure can be increased at the beginning or end of a turn by extending the lower joints (“pushing” the board into the snow), thus establishing a reliable path of travel and edge grip early in the turn.
在轉彎的開始或結束時,可以透過伸展下方關節(「將板子推入雪中」)來增加壓力,從而在轉彎初期建立可靠的行進路徑和邊緣抓地力。
Release of the edge and pressure happens when the extension movements reach their maximum, and “max out” (think of hopping again) - ideally at the edge change.
當伸展動作達到最大值並「達到極限」(想像再次跳躍)時,邊緣和壓力的釋放就會發生——理想情況是在換邊時。

DOWN UN-WEIGHTING下壓卸重

Down un-weighting can allow the rider to stay in control of the pressures being exerted on the board at higher speeds during early stages of the turn, and maintain consistent pressure throughout the complete turning arc. In bumpy terrain, down un-weighting can be an efficient way to absorb pressures from terrain and deal with obstacles while maintaining contact between the board and the snow.
下壓卸重可以讓騎士在轉彎初期以較高速度控制施加在滑板上的壓力,並在整個轉彎弧線中保持穩定的壓力。在崎嶇地形中,下壓卸重是吸收地形壓力和應對障礙物的有效方式,同時保持滑板與雪面的接觸。

During flexion, the body accelerates downward, and the feet and board are retracted vertically off the snow. This temporarily decreases the pressure on the board (lightening) - the opposite movements of up un-weighting. The amount of pressure decrease depends on how quickly the flexion is executed. The movement can be done fast enough to eliminate all pressure on the board, resulting in complete loss of contact between the base of the board and the snow. When flexion is stopped, the body decelerates, causing a temporary increase of the pressure on the board.
在屈膝時,身體向下加速,雙腳和滑雪板垂直向上離開雪面。這會暫時減少滑雪板上的壓力(減輕重量)——與向上減重的動作相反。壓力減少的程度取決於屈膝動作執行的速度。動作可以快到完全消除滑雪板上的壓力,導致滑雪板底部與雪面完全失去接觸。當屈膝停止時,身體減速,造成滑雪板上的壓力暫時增加。

Extending the lower joints during the turning phase allows the rider to create pressure between the base / edge of the board throughout the turn, enhancing edge grip.
在轉彎階段伸展下肢關節,讓騎乘者能在整個轉彎過程中於滑雪板底部/邊緣施加壓力,增強邊緣抓地力。

COMBINING UP & DOWN UN-WEIGHTING ("MID-WEIGHTING")
結合向上與向下減重(「中間減重」)

Efficient and skilled riders will have the ability to employ aspects of both up and down un-weighting at the edge change phase of the turn, depending on the intended outcome of the turn or situation. This is sometimes referred to as a “mid-weighting” movement.
高效且技術純熟的騎乘者能在轉彎的換邊階段,根據轉彎或情境的預期結果,運用向上與向下減重的動作元素。這有時被稱為「中間減重」動作。
This combination of movements involves a coordinated effort of moving the COM “up and over” at the edge change, establishing pressure early in the new turn, while simultaneously retracting the lower body joints to quickly lighten and re-direct the snow-
這一連串動作結合了協調的努力,在邊緣轉換時將重心(COM)「向上並越過」,在新轉彎初期建立壓力,同時收回下半身關節,以迅速減輕重量並重新引導雪板—

MID-WEIGHTING中等權重
UP UN-WEIGHTING取消加權
DOWN UN-WEIGHTING board at the edge change.
邊緣變化時的下壓減重板。

This movement relies on the rider to use a relatively relaxed and tall position inside the turning arc, and loads the snowboard using the forces of turning and edging. Riders should avoid using excessive flexion or extension to attempt to generate pressure, and should instead focus on using these movements to moderate the loading of the board as it exits the turn.
這個動作依賴騎士在轉彎弧線內採用相對放鬆且挺直的姿勢,並利用轉彎和壓邊的力量來施加壓力於滑雪板。騎士應避免使用過度屈曲或伸展來嘗試產生壓力,而應專注於利用這些動作來調節滑雪板在出彎時的壓力。

PRESSURE CONTROL FOR SPEED MANAGEMENT
速度管理的壓力控制

In general, more skilled riders will have the ability to create pressure earlier in the turning arc. This pressure phase corresponds with the change of the edge as the rider progresses from beginner through to more advanced turns (i.e.: Later during beginner turns, and earlier in advanced turns).
一般來說,技術較高的騎士能夠在轉彎弧線的較早階段產生壓力。這個壓力階段與騎士從初學者到較高級轉彎時邊緣變換的時機相對應(例如:初學者轉彎時較晚,進階轉彎時較早)。

The application of pressure during the turn can affect the downward momentum (speed) of the rider.
轉彎時施加的壓力會影響騎士的向下動能(速度)。
In the diagram, notice how pressures applied higher in the turn will “project” the rider downhill, causing an increase in speed. Applying pressure later in the turn (after the fall line) will resist this downward momentum, thus slowing the rider’s speed. During the intermediate phase of a rider’s skill, instructors will often promote maximum pressure at the apex of the turning arc, and therefore a consistent speed from turn to turn.
在圖中,注意到在轉彎較高處施加壓力會將騎士「投射」向下坡,導致速度增加。在轉彎較後期(過了落線)施加壓力,則會抵抗這股向下的動能,從而減緩騎士的速度。在騎士技能的中階階段,教練通常會鼓勵在轉彎弧線的頂點施加最大壓力,因此能保持轉彎間的穩定速度。
Fore and aft pressures can also be used to manage speed in various terrain and snow conditions. For example, in soft or powder snow, a rider may pressure the back foot to temporarily slow the speed of the snowboard, similar to a surfer on a wave.
前後壓力也可以用來控制不同地形和雪況下的速度。例如,在鬆軟或粉雪中,騎士可能會施壓於後腳,以暫時減緩滑雪板的速度,類似衝浪者在浪上滑行的方式。

GREEN= ACCELERATION YELLOW = CONSTANT RED = DECELERATION
綠色 = 加速 黃色 = 穩定 紅色 = 減速

TERRAIN地形

THE TERRAIN ITSELF CAN CAUSE AN INCREASE OR DECREASE IN PRESSURE. IN THIS EXAMPLE, THE RIDER ADJUSTS TO TERRAIN CHANGES WITH FLEXION AND EXTENSION OF THE LEGS TO MAINTAIN CONSTANT PRESSURE ON THE BOARD.
地形本身會導致壓力的增加或減少。在此範例中,騎士透過腿部的屈曲與伸展來調整地形變化,以維持對滑板的恆定壓力。

IF THE RIDER STAYED IN A FIXED POSITION, THE PRESSURE WOULD VARY NOTICEABLY ON UNEVEN TERRAIN, CAUSING DIFFICULTY IN MAINTAINING CONTROL.
如果騎士保持固定姿勢,在不平坦的地形上壓力會明顯變化,導致難以維持控制。

RESULTANT FORCES合力

Accompanying the edging phase is a compression force - the creation of pressure. The magnitude of this force is a direct result of the radius of the turn, the steepness of the slope and the speed at which the rider is travelling. Controlling these forces relies on the rider’s ability to change the position of the lower joints as required.
伴隨著壓邊階段的是壓縮力——壓力的產生。此力的大小直接取決於轉彎半徑、坡度的陡峭程度以及騎士行進的速度。控制這些力量依賴於騎士根據需要改變下肢關節位置的能力。
With increased pressure along the length of the board, the more the board will deform, and bend against its
隨著沿著滑板長度的壓力增加,滑板會越來越變形,並且彎曲抵抗其

natural flex. This pressure may release unexpectedly during the final stages of a turn, commonly referred to as “rebound”. Skilled riders can use this “rebound” result to aid in performance, and project the board directly into the next turn - demonstrating a mastery of the “create, control & release” concept.
自然彎曲。這種壓力可能會在轉彎的最後階段意外釋放,通常稱為「反彈」。熟練的騎士可以利用這種「反彈」效果來提升表現,並將滑板直接投射到下一個轉彎——展現出「創造、控制與釋放」概念的精通。

Components Of Pressure:壓力的組成部分:

The following components of this skill will assist in planning lessons geared towards Pressure. Each of the following components has a direct impact on both the pressures felt from terrain, and resultant pressures built up in the snowboard.
以下這些技能組成部分將有助於規劃針對壓力的課程。每個組成部分都直接影響地形所感受到的壓力,以及滑雪板內累積的壓力。
  1. Reactive (“Control”)反應式(「控制」)
  2. Proactive (“Create & Release”)
    主動式(「創造與釋放」)

Reactive Pressure Management ("Control")
反應式壓力管理(「控制」)

Reactive pressure management involves the rider reacting to the pressures felt in the board due to terrain, slope, snow texture, or speed.
反應式壓力管理是指騎士根據地形、坡度、雪質或速度所感受到的板面壓力做出反應。

Key points:重點:

  • Riders will feel the need to control pressures due to slope, speed and/or terrain.
    騎士會因坡度、速度和/或地形而感受到需要控制壓力。
  • Reactive pressure control involves mostly vertical adjustments in the lower joints in relation to the forces that are felt by the rider.
    反應式壓力控制主要涉及下肢關節在垂直方向上的調整,以應對騎士感受到的力量。
  • Controlling pressures will enhance the rider’s ability to keep the snowboard in contact with the snow.
    控制壓力將提升騎士保持滑雪板與雪面接觸的能力。

Proactive Pressure Management ("Create & Release")
主動壓力管理(「創造與釋放」)

Proactive pressure management involves the rider planning ahead to proactively create pressure changes as a means of either control, creating or releasing the pressure in the snowboard.
主動壓力管理指的是騎士提前規劃,主動製造壓力變化,作為控制、創造或釋放滑雪板壓力的手段。

Key points:重點:

  • Once riders are comfortable controlling pressures, they will begin to move more dynamically with the goal of creating pressure for board performance.
    當騎士能夠熟練控制壓力後,他們將開始更具動態地移動,目標是為滑雪板性能創造壓力。
  • Up, down, and mid-weighting movements can be employed to create pressure at various points in the turn or manoeuvre.
    可運用上壓、下壓及中等重量的動作,在轉彎或動作的不同階段創造壓力。
  • Allowing for a total pressure release will put the rider into the air, as a means of avoiding terrain obstacles or simply as a way to jump/generate lift.
    完全釋放壓力會使騎士飛離地面,這是一種避開地形障礙或單純用來跳躍/產生升力的方法。
COMMENT: Flexion and extension are mostly pressure adjustments but they must consider the unique situation of each turn and are therefore hard to define. In general the extension is in a lateral direction and flexion is only to control pressure, not eliminate it. Minimizing excessive flexion will add pressure to the board and liveliness to your riding.
評論:屈曲與伸展大多是壓力的調整,但必須考慮每個轉彎的獨特情況,因此難以定義。一般而言,伸展是朝側向進行,屈曲僅用於控制壓力,而非消除壓力。減少過度屈曲會增加板上的壓力,並提升騎乘的活力。

TIMING & COORDINATION時機與協調

Timing & Coordination refers to the skill of harmonizing skills and movements so that they are performed at the appropriate time and for the appropriate duration (Timing) and that multiple movements are combined into a common effort (Coordination). In a sport such as snowboarding, where the very essence of the sport is balancing while moving over ever-changing terrain, this skill is crucial to progress beyond the beginner stage.
時機與協調指的是將技巧與動作和諧結合,使其在適當的時間和持續適當的時間內完成(時機),並將多個動作結合成共同努力的能力(協調)。在像滑雪板這樣的運動中,運動的本質是平衡並在不斷變化的地形上移動,這項技能對於超越初學者階段至關重要。

Initially, the student learns to do such things as edge the board at the right time, extend or flex at the right time, and later, to do several of these actions at the same time (coordinate the movements). In expert riding, Timing & Coordination is that magical element that makes riding appear effortless and fluid.
最初,學生會學習在正確的時機壓邊、在正確的時機伸展或屈曲,之後再學習同時執行多個動作(協調動作)。在專業滑行中,時機與協調是那個讓滑行看起來輕鬆流暢的神奇元素。

Components of Timing & Coordination:
時機與協調的組成部分:

  1. Timing時間
  2. Coordination協調

Timing時間

Timing refers to the process of selecting a movement and/or action at the appropriate time, for an appropriate duration and amount within a manoeuvre. The snow, slope, pitch, the speed at which the rider is travelling, and the intended outcome affect both the timing and the duration of the movement/action.
時機指的是在適當的時間內,選擇適當的動作和/或行動,並以適當的持續時間和程度執行的過程。雪況、坡度、斜度、滑行速度以及預期的結果都會影響動作/行動的時機和持續時間。

Key points:重點:

  • Successful timing relies on using the appropriate movement for the appropriate duration, given the intended outcome.
    成功的時機掌握依賴於根據預期結果,使用適當的動作並持續適當的時間。
  • Starting and stopping a selected movement at the appropriate point in the turn or manoeuvre is also an important element of timing.
    在轉彎或操作的適當時機開始和停止所選動作,也是時機掌握的重要元素。

Coordination協調

Coordination refers to the blending and synchronization of multiple movements in the correct order to be effective and efficient. Essentially, this is the skill of making many actions appear to be one fluid effort.
協調指的是多個動作以正確順序融合並同步,以達到有效且高效率的效果。基本上,這是一種讓多個動作看起來像是一個流暢動作的技巧。

Key points:重點:

  • Advanced coordination skills will make many complex movements appear as one single effort.
    高階的協調能力能讓許多複雜動作看起來像是一氣呵成。
  • Riders can develop coordination skills by challenging themselves with the speed and combination / sequence of movements.
    騎士可以透過挑戰自己在速度及動作組合/順序上的表現來培養協調能力。

SEQUENCING MOVEMENTS動作排序

Riders should be aware of the consequences of varied approaches to coordinated movements. See the following example of an optimum “order of operations” for an advanced level turn:
騎乘者應該了解不同協調動作順序所帶來的影響。以下是一個高階轉彎的最佳「操作順序」範例:

What may change if these movements were performed in a different order? For example, if the rider was to pivot the snowboard prior to setting the edge, the outcome may be a skidded turn, rather than a carved turn.
如果這些動作以不同的順序執行,結果會有什麼變化?例如,若騎乘者在設定邊緣前先旋轉滑雪板,結果可能會是滑移轉彎,而非刻滑轉彎。

APPLYING THE SKILLS CONCEPT
應用技巧概念

The Skills Concept provides instructors with a common language to describe the various movements that make up snowboarding. The application of these skills can create various outcomes.
技巧概念為教練提供了一套共同語言,用以描述組成滑雪板運動的各種動作。這些技巧的運用可以產生多種不同的結果。

PHASES OF THE TURN
轉彎階段

When applying the five skills to teaching, we can divide the turns into three phases:
在將這五項技巧應用於教學時,我們可以將轉彎分為三個階段:
  • Phase 1: Initiation第一階段:起始
  • Phase 2: Execution第二階段:執行
  • Phase 3: Completion第三階段:完成
In turning, the phases look like this:
在轉彎時,階段如下:

Phase 1: The snowboard flattens and loses its edge angle gradually, which makes it easier to re-direct in the new desired direction. The body moves across the snowboard, as the centre of mass moves toward the next turn or arc.
第一階段:滑雪板逐漸變平,失去邊緣角度,使其更容易朝新的目標方向重新導向。身體沿著滑雪板移動,重心朝向下一個轉彎或弧線。

Phase 2: The body mass moves inside and toward the direction of the new turn. Establishing edge grip creates a platform. Pressuring of the board begins depending on the goal of the turn - to increase speed, decrease speed, or control speed. The rider finds balance inside the turning arc, and prepares for the forces that will be generated in Phase 3.
第二階段:身體質量向內移動並朝向新轉彎的方向。建立邊緣抓地力形成一個平台。根據轉彎的目標——增加速度、減少速度或控制速度,開始對滑板施加壓力。騎士在轉彎弧線內找到平衡,並為第三階段將產生的力量做準備。

Phase 3: Through movement in the lower joints, the board is either loaded or unloaded, depending on whether the lower joints are flexed or extended. Steering movements (blending edging, pressure, and rotational movements in the lower body) help to set the desired shape of the turn. As the snowboard bends, energy is stored, which can be used to transfer into the next turn.
第三階段:透過下肢關節的動作,滑板會被加載或卸載,取決於下肢關節是屈曲還是伸展。轉向動作(結合邊緣抓地、壓力及下半身的旋轉動作)有助於設定理想的轉彎形狀。隨著滑雪板彎曲,能量被儲存,這些能量可用於轉移到下一個轉彎。
NOTE: During isolated turns or the beginning of linked turns, or during basic movements, the phases of the turn are easy to see, and a fourth phase may be apparent - the preparation for the turn or manoeuvre. When the turns are linked or manoeuvres become more complex, the completion of one turn or manoeuvre prepares the rider for the next so it may be difficult to see this phase. In some instances, phases maybe skipped or eliminated entirely (for example, during extremely short radius turns).
注意:在單獨轉彎或連續轉彎的開始階段,或在基本動作中,轉彎的各個階段很容易看出,且可能會出現第四個階段——轉彎或動作的準備階段。當轉彎連續進行或動作變得更複雜時,一個轉彎或動作的完成會為騎士準備下一個動作,因此這個階段可能較難察覺。在某些情況下,階段可能會被跳過或完全省略(例如,在極短半徑的轉彎中)。

PHASES OF MANOEUVRES / TRICKS
動作/技巧的階段

When applying the five skills to teaching manoeuvres or tricks, we can use 4 phases:
在將五項技能應用於教學動作或技巧時,我們可以使用四個階段:
  • Phase 1: Preparation第一階段:準備
  • Phase 2: Initiation階段二:啟動
  • Phase 3: Execution階段三:執行
  • Phase 4: Completion階段四:完成
If we take the example of a rider performing a 360 off of a jump, we can examine the following phases:
如果我們以騎士在跳躍時做出 360 度旋轉為例,我們可以檢視以下階段:
PHASE 1: The rider approaches the jump focusing on establishing the correct body position for a balanced take-off, as well as the optimum speed based on the size of the jump.
階段一:騎士接近跳台,專注於建立正確的身體姿勢以達到平衡的起跳,以及根據跳台大小調整最佳速度。
PHASE 2: The rider initiates the spin by creating an edged platform to spin against, and through a wind-up of the upper body in the opposite direction of the intended spin.
階段二:騎士透過創造一個有邊緣的支點來啟動旋轉,並以上半身向預定旋轉方向的相反方向繞轉。
PHASE 3: As the rider leaves the take-off of the jump, the energy stored in the wind-up is released in the opposite direction, creating the execution of the spin. The head/eyes are used to control the amount of spin, and look for the landing.
階段三:當騎士離開跳台起跳點時,先前繞轉所儲存的能量會向相反方向釋放,完成旋轉動作。頭部和眼睛用來控制旋轉的幅度,並尋找著陸點。

T T T\mathbf{T} At the completion, or landing, or the jump, the rider extends the legs in preparation for landing and absorbs the forces that occur when he makes contact with the snow.
T T T\mathbf{T} 在跳躍完成或著陸時,騎士會伸展雙腿準備著陸,並吸收與雪面接觸時產生的力量。

THE RIDING COMPETENCIES騎乘能力

We can use the Skills Concept to highlight and identify common movements that create desired outcomes in our students’ riding. These outcomes are useful as an analysis tool to determine deficiencies that may require improvement - a kind of “check list” to use in prioritizing areas for skill development.
我們可以利用技能概念來強調並識別學生騎乘中產生理想結果的共通動作。這些結果作為分析工具非常有用,可用來判斷可能需要改進的不足之處——一種用於優先排序技能發展領域的「檢查清單」。

Novice & Intermediate Riders:
初學者與中階騎士:

THE CORE COMPETENCIES核心能力

The five riding skills blend to create snowboarding. When we apply the five riding skills to our novice and intermediate student’s riding, we can focus on three fundamental riding outcomes.
這五項騎乘技巧融合成為滑雪板運動。當我們將這五項騎乘技巧應用於初學者和中級學生的騎乘時,我們可以專注於三個基本的騎乘成果。

The three Core Competencies:
三大核心能力:

CENTRED & MOBILE POSITION
居中且靈活的姿勢

The rider maintains a relaxed, adaptable position with weight generally centred over both feet.
騎乘者保持放鬆且適應性強的姿勢,重量通常集中在雙腳之上。

How?如何?

  • The rider maintains rotational alignment between shoulders, hips and knees.
    騎士保持肩膀、臀部與膝蓋之間的旋轉對齊。
  • The rider maintains equal weight over both feet.
    騎士保持雙腳承受的重量均等。
  • Joints are generally flexed evenly between left and right sides.
    關節左右兩側通常均勻彎曲。
  • The rider maintains a loose, relaxed position on the board which promotes a state of readiness / constant adjustment.
    騎手保持在滑板上的姿勢鬆弛放鬆,有助於隨時準備和不斷調整。

TURNING THE BOARD WITH THE LOWER BODY
用下半身轉動滑板

When we turn the snowboard, efficiency requires that we use the hips, knees, and feet (or a combination of these).
當我們轉動滑雪板時,效率要求我們使用臀部、膝蓋和腳(或這些的組合)。

How?怎麼做?

  • The rider directs the snowboard with hips and knees, and with the feet at the higher skill levels.
    騎乘者以臀部和膝蓋來引導滑雪板,在較高的技巧層級則以雙腳引導。
  • Rotational and lateral movements are used to direct the board (instead of counter rotational movements).
    使用旋轉和側向動作來引導滑雪板(而非反向旋轉動作)。
  • Turns are round in shape and generally symmetrical through predictable timing of movements and coordination of multiple movements into a singular effort.
    轉彎呈圓形,通常透過可預測的動作時機和多重動作的協調,合而為一的努力來達成對稱。

BALANCE ALONG THE WORKING EDGE
沿著工作刃保持平衡

Using a combination of inclination (leaning) and angulation (bending) movements will help the rider to achieve edge grip and round turn shape.
結合傾斜(身體傾向)與角度調整(彎曲)動作,能幫助騎士達成刃口抓地力及圓滑的轉彎形狀。

How?如何做到?

  • Riders should use a blend of inclination at the start of the turn followed by angulation to maintain edge hold and control pressures associated with speed and terrain.
    騎士應在轉彎開始時運用傾斜動作,接著透過角度調整來維持刃口抓地力,並控制與速度及地形相關的壓力。
  • The rider directs and maintains his/her centre of mass to the inside of the turn in a balanced relationship to speed and snow conditions.
    騎乘者將其重心引導並維持在轉彎內側,與速度及雪況保持平衡的關係。
  • Edge grip is apparent in turn shape and track left in the snow.
    邊緣抓地力可從轉彎形狀及雪地上留下的軌跡中明顯看出。
These three Core Competencies assist us in looking for outcomes in our students’ riding. When we determine if there are deficiencies in the riding (areas for improvement), we can isolate one of the five riding skills to develop. For example, students who are using excessive movements in the arms and shoulders to turn the snowboard may require improvement in their balancing skills, prior to working on the skill of pivoting with the lower body.
這三項核心能力幫助我們觀察學生騎乘的成果。當我們判斷騎乘中存在不足(需改進的部分)時,可以針對五項騎乘技巧中的其中一項進行培養。例如,使用過多手臂和肩膀動作來轉動滑雪板的學生,可能需要先提升平衡技巧,再進一步練習下半身的轉動技巧。

Advanced & Expert Riders:
進階與專家級騎乘者:

THE ADVANCED COMPETENCIES
進階能力

Advanced and expert riders show skilled refinement of the Core Competencies in all terrain and conditions, and can work to apply the following four Advanced Competencies to their riding:
進階及專家級騎士在各種地形與條件下,展現出核心能力的熟練精進,並能努力將以下四項進階能力應用於騎乘中:

STRENGTH & FLOW力量與流暢

Adopting a position of strength while maintaining agility (constant movement) is crucial to directing the body through the turn in a fluid manner.
採取強而有力的姿勢,同時保持靈活(持續移動),對於以流暢的方式引導身體完成轉彎至關重要。

How?如何?

  • The rider uses a strong body position that allows mobility.
    騎士採用強而有力的身體姿勢,以保持靈活性。
  • The rider is in a position to resist the forces associated with advanced and expert speeds.
    騎士處於能抵抗高級和專家速度相關力量的位置。
  • The five skills are blended effectively to display fluidity and power.
    五項技能有效融合,展現流暢與力量。
  • The rider looks ahead to upcoming terrain features and plans his/her line with fluidity in mind.
    騎士前瞻即將到來的地形特徵,並以流暢性為考量規劃路線。

LOADING AND DEFLECTION載重與偏轉

Establishing edge grip and resisting the forces in the turn creates bend in the snowboard and builds pressure, which can then be used to deflect the rider across the slope, increasing speed.
建立邊緣抓地力並抵抗轉彎時的力量,使滑雪板產生彎曲並累積壓力,進而可用來將騎士偏轉穿越斜坡,提升速度。

How?如何做到?

  • The rider displays rhythm and rebound by allowing the snowboard to release pressure, and directing that release of pressure into the next turn or manoeuvre.
    騎乘者透過讓滑雪板釋放壓力,展現節奏感與反彈力,並將這股釋放的壓力引導至下一個轉彎或動作中。
  • The rider directs the resultant forces that are built up in the snowboard in a deliberate manner, aiding board performance.
    騎乘者有意識地引導滑雪板中累積的合力,協助滑雪板的表現。
  • The rider allows the snowboard to load and in turn release, accelerating the rider across the slope at the exit of the turn.
    騎乘者讓滑雪板承載壓力,隨後釋放,推動騎乘者在轉彎出口加速滑行。

ARC TO ARC弧線對弧線

Using the snowboard’s geometry creates forces in the turn. Round turns help direct those forces into the next turn, creating efficiency and performance.
利用滑雪板的幾何形狀在轉彎時產生力量。圓弧轉彎有助於將這些力量導向下一個轉彎,提升效率與表現。

How?怎麼做到的?

  • Edge grip is established above the fall line using inclination combined with refined ankle / foot movements, resulting in round turn shape / loading above the fall line.
    透過傾斜結合精細的腳踝/腳部動作,在落線上方建立邊緣抓地力,形成落線上方的圓弧轉彎形狀與負載。
  • The rider links turns in a way that aids performance by moving the centre of mass through the neutral position at edge change.
    騎士透過在換邊時將質心移動至中立位置,串連轉彎,從而提升表現。
  • The rider uses the snowboard’s sidecut to achieve arcs in the path of travel, which increases board performance.
    騎乘者利用滑雪板的側切線來達成行進路徑上的弧線,從而提升滑雪板的性能。

STEERING VERSATILITY操控多樣性

Advanced riders are able to blend movements to allow the snowboard to slide or carve, or a range in between. Efficient steering movements create varied turn shapes and sizes, based on the rider’s specific goals.
進階騎乘者能夠融合動作,使滑雪板滑行或刻滑,或介於兩者之間的多種狀態。有效的操控動作能根據騎乘者的特定目標,創造出多樣的轉彎形狀與大小。

How?如何?

  • The rider selects the appropriate amount of edge, pivot and pressure to create a variety of turn shapes and sizes.
    騎士選擇適當的刃角、轉軸和壓力,以創造各種不同形狀和大小的轉彎。
  • The rider can increase or decrease edge angle to change the turn size and/or shape in the midst of a single turn.
    騎士可以在單一轉彎過程中增加或減少刃角,以改變轉彎的大小和/或形狀。
  • The rider effectively uses pivot, edge and pressure to control, maintain, or increase speed.
    騎士有效運用轉軸、刃角和壓力來控制、維持或增加速度。

OTHER APPLICATIONS OF THE SKILLS CONCEPT
技能概念的其他應用

STEERING轉向

Steering refers to a combination of movements used to “guide” the snowboard in the intended direction within a turn, and is an outcome of a combination of these movements. In general, steering movements are a combination of:
轉向是指用於在轉彎時「引導」滑雪板朝預定方向前進的一組動作,這是這些動作組合的結果。一般而言,轉向動作是以下動作的組合:
  • Pivoting movements旋轉動作
  • Edging movements邊緣動作
  • Pressuring movements施壓動作
The use of these movements allows for more efficient direction change, loading/unloading (bending) of the snowboard within the turning arc, and more board performance and variety of turn shape in general. Students with good steering skills will show round turn shapes, and varied radius turns, while maintaining speed or accelerating.
運用這些動作可以更有效地改變方向、在轉彎弧線內對滑雪板進行負載/卸載(彎曲),並且整體上提升滑雪板的性能與轉彎形狀的多樣性。具備良好操控技巧的學生會展現圓滑的轉彎形狀及多變的半徑轉彎,同時保持速度或加速。
Intermediate students will begin to incorporate steering efforts with the lower joints (e.g.: rotating the legs/knees against the edge grip in the turn), while more advanced students can begin to experiment with separation in the lower joints to apply steering movements where they are most beneficial (e.g.: steering with the front foot at the beginning of the turn, and completing the turn by steering more with the rear foot).
中階學生將開始結合下肢關節的操控(例如:在轉彎時旋轉腿部/膝蓋以對抗邊緣抓地力),而較高階的學生則能開始嘗試下肢關節的分離,將操控動作應用於最有利的位置(例如:在轉彎開始時以前腳操控,並在轉彎結束時更多地以後腳操控)。

SEPARATION分離動作

PEDALLING踩踏

BOARD PERFORMANCE板子性能

Separation refers to the ability to coordinate different movements in the upper body from the lower body. As skills progress, riders will become more comfortable with this concept.
分離動作是指能夠協調上半身與下半身不同動作的能力。隨著技巧的進步,騎士將會對這個概念更加熟悉。
Once riders have grasped the concepts of position and alignment (for balance and stability) as well as the various aspects of rotation, we can begin to experiment with separation. This rotational separation creates tension in the torso when the upper body is oriented towards the nose of the board while in the midst of the turn. This tension stores energy, which can then be released into the new turn, to add power and loading at the completion of the turn.
一旦騎乘者掌握了姿勢與對齊(為了平衡與穩定)以及旋轉的各種面向,我們就可以開始嘗試分離動作。這種旋轉分離會在上半身朝向滑板鼻端時,在軀幹產生張力。這股張力儲存能量,然後可以在新一個轉彎中釋放,為轉彎結束時增加力量與負載。
Pedalling refers to the use of the torsional flex in the snowboard to generate a desired outcome. While standing on the snowboard, the left or right ankle can be flexed or extended in opposition to the other foot. This will create a “twisting” effect in the snowboard, which can be useful in engaging the edge at the front or back of the board, and building torsional energy in the snowboard.
踩踏指的是利用滑雪板的扭轉彎曲來產生預期效果。在站立於滑雪板上時,左腳或右腳的腳踝可以與另一隻腳相反方向地屈曲或伸展。這會在滑雪板上產生「扭轉」效果,有助於啟動滑板前端或後端的邊緣,並在滑雪板中累積扭轉能量。
Board performance is one of those concepts in snowboarding that is largely an abstract idea - difficult to pinpoint the exact movements that increase or decrease it. In general, board performance can be used to describe the bending/loading of the snowboard that happens as a result of turning the board. This can be accomplished due to:
滑雪板性能是滑雪中一個較為抽象的概念——很難精確指出哪些動作會提升或降低它。一般而言,滑雪板性能可用來描述因轉動滑雪板而產生的彎曲/負載。這可以透過以下方式達成:
  • Efficient steering movements.
    有效率的轉向動作。
  • Well-timed fore/aft pressure control adjustments.
    適時的前後壓力控制調整。
  • Independence in the lower body movements (pedalling).
    下半身動作(踩踏)獨立自主。
When the rider is showing effective board performance, it will be evident in the following ways:
當騎士展現出有效的滑板表現時,將會從以下幾方面看出:
  • The shape of turn - round arcs, with grip above the fall line.
    轉彎弧形,握把位於落線上方。
  • Snow spray - above the fall line.
    雪霧噴射—位於落線上方。
  • Torsional flex (twisting of the snowboard).
    扭轉彎曲(滑雪板的扭轉)。
  • Pressure release or rebound from the snowboard.
    滑雪板的壓力釋放或反彈。

TURN TYPES轉彎類型

SLIDING TURNS滑行轉彎

Any turn which has any degree of skidding, can be described as a sliding turn. Sliding is evident when the tail of the snowboard takes a wider arc than the nose (see “Steering Angle”, above).
任何帶有一定程度打滑的轉彎,都可以稱為滑行轉彎。當滑雪板尾部的弧線比前端更寬時,即可明顯看出滑行現象(參見上方「轉向角」)。

CARVED TURNS刻滑轉彎

A turn that leaves a “pencil line” in the snow can be described as a Carved Turn. Carved Turns have no steering angle, as the tail follows the exact path of the nose.
在雪地上留下「鉛筆線」的轉彎可以稱為雕刻轉彎。雕刻轉彎沒有轉向角度,因為尾部會精確地跟隨前端的路徑。

As students progress, students will become more proficient at both types of turns, and eventually blend skills to be able to use either turn where necessary (E.g.: In
隨著學生進步,學生將會更熟練於兩種轉彎方式,並最終融合技能,能在必要時使用任一種轉彎(例如:在

all-mountain free riding, we wouldn’t typically complete an entire run of only carved turns.)
全山地自由滑行中,我們通常不會只完成一整趟全是雕刻轉彎的滑行。)

Different levels of student ability will produce different visual cues in turning. Each of the following categories of turns should be thought of as “snap shots” of the rider’s skill level at a certain point in time. Avoid thinking of the following turns as stand-alone manoeuvres. There are no clear lines that distinguish where one turn-type begins and another ends. Rather, the skills of the student simply progress over time, many times at different rates, leading up to the next “snap shot”.
不同程度的學生能力會產生不同的轉彎視覺訊號。以下每一類轉彎都應被視為騎乘者在某一時間點技能水平的「快照」。避免將以下轉彎視為獨立的動作。沒有明確的界線區分一種轉彎類型何時開始、另一種何時結束。學生的技能隨時間逐步進展,且常常以不同速度發展,最終形成下一個「快照」。

BEGINNER TURNS初學者轉彎

NOVICE TURNS新手轉彎

At the beginner level, the emphasis is on balance and body position, as well as rotational movements to produce a change in direction. Other than direction and edge change, very little performance is achieved. Beginner turns could be described as little more than linked sideslipping*.
在初學者階段,重點在於平衡與身體姿勢,以及透過旋轉動作來改變方向。除了方向和刃邊的變換外,幾乎沒有其他表現。初學者的轉彎可以說不過是連續的側滑動作*。
Rotation of the body around the COM (using hips, knees, and ankles) is used to initiate the turn, as well as slight edging movements with the leading knee and ankle joints, to allow the snowboard to enter and exit the fall line. Edge change occurs at or below the fall line, through a concerted effort to follow three distinct phases of the edge change: 1) starting edge, 2) flat base, and 3) finishing/new edge.
身體圍繞重心(利用臀部、膝蓋和腳踝)旋轉來啟動轉彎,並配合前方膝蓋和腳踝關節的輕微刃邊動作,使滑雪板能進入並離開落線。刃邊變換發生在落線處或以下,透過有意識地遵循刃邊變換的三個明確階段:1) 起始刃邊,2) 平底,3) 結束/新刃邊。

*Terrain will have a large effect on the shape and appearance of a beginner’s sliding turns. For example, a wide, shallow slope will allow beginners to make turns with a round shape, and traverse between edge changes. On a steeper, or narrower beginner run, the turns will take on the appearance of linked sideslips, with little traverse between turns.
*地形會對初學者滑行轉彎的形狀和外觀產生很大影響。例如,寬闊且坡度較淺的斜坡,讓初學者能夠做出圓形的轉彎,並在換邊時進行橫移。在較陡或較窄的初學者滑道上,轉彎則會呈現連續側滑的樣貌,轉彎間幾乎沒有橫移。
In the novice phase, students are introduced to the concept of flexion to aid stability after the fall line, when speed may become a concern. By controlling the amount of flexion applied during the later part of the turn, the student is now capable of both maintaining balance and stability, and increasing the edge angle to control speed.
在新手階段,學生會被引導了解屈膝的概念,以幫助在過落線後保持穩定,當速度可能成為問題時。透過控制轉彎後半段施加的屈膝程度,學生現在能夠同時維持平衡與穩定,並增加刃角以控制速度。

Increased edging also creates a change in turn shape. Following the flexion phase, the rider should return to a Balanced Body Position prior to starting the next turn. The turns are still initiated with the core of the body, and basic edging movements. Edge change occurs at or below the fall line.
增加刃角也會改變轉彎的形狀。屈膝階段結束後,騎乘者應回到平衡的身體姿勢,準備開始下一個轉彎。轉彎仍由身體核心和基本的刃邊動作發起。換邊發生在落線處或落線以下。

INTERMEDIATE TURNS中級轉彎

In the intermediate phase, the students’ edging skills are developed by moving the ankles, knees and hips to the inside of the turn more aggressively together with inclination of the body. They refine pressure control skills through the use of flexion and extension movements. Students learn to use a forward movement of the body in the direction of the new turn (anticipation) to link the turns, as well as steering movements. This gives them better speed and directional control, and enables them to handle steeper intermediate slopes with confidence. Edge change becomes more efficient, moving further up in the arc (slightly above the fall line), and the compression or flexion phase of the turn happens earlier, as well. This creates the beginnings of board loading (bending / flexion), which will lead to increased performance later on.
在中階階段,學生的刃邊技巧透過更積極地將腳踝、膝蓋和臀部向轉彎內側移動,並配合身體傾斜來發展。他們透過屈伸動作來精進壓力控制技巧。學生學會利用身體向新轉彎方向的前移(預判)來連結轉彎,以及轉向動作。這讓他們擁有更好的速度和方向控制,並能自信地應付較陡的中階坡道。刃邊切換變得更有效率,移動到弧線更高的位置(略高於落線),轉彎的壓縮或屈曲階段也提早發生。這創造了板子負載(彎曲/屈曲)的初步階段,將在後續提升表現。
Intermediate students may also be introduced to carving. The goal of carving is to link a series of “pencil line” arcs (no skidding). At this stage, a series of gentle open arcs is the easiest to perform. As in all carved turns, pivoting of the board is eliminated. The radius and the precision of the turn will depend on:
中階學生也可能會接觸雕刻滑行。雕刻滑行的目標是連結一系列「鉛筆線」弧線(無滑移)。在此階段,一連串溫和的開放弧線是最容易執行的。與所有雕刻轉彎一樣,板子的旋轉被消除。轉彎的半徑和精確度將取決於:
  • Edge angle.刃邊角度。
  • The sidecut of the board.
    滑雪板的側切角。
  • The amount and duration of pressure that is applied throughout the turn (bending the board).
    在整個轉彎過程中施加的壓力大小與持續時間(彎曲滑雪板)。

ADVANCED TURNS進階轉彎

During the advanced stages, the student will concentrate more on the Timing & Coordination of all the movements, so that they can perform various sizes and shapes of turns, negotiate a wide range of terrain and snow conditions, and handle various speeds. Edging skills at this level are even more refined, allowing the new edge to be engaged somewhere near the top of the arc so that the rider can balance on an edge at the top of the turn. Also, compression, or flexion, begins early in the turn, roughly corresponding with the edge change, and steering skills are refined, creating a deformation of the snowboard, both longitudinally and torsionally, and translates into increased board performance Riders at this level may use up un-weighting, down un-weighting, or a combination of both to achieve the desired outcome.
在進階階段,學員將更專注於所有動作的時機與協調,以便能夠執行各種大小與形狀的轉彎,應對各種地形與雪況,並掌控不同速度。此階段的刃邊技巧更加精細,能讓新刃邊在弧線頂端附近啟動,使騎乘者能在轉彎頂端保持刃邊平衡。此外,壓縮或彎曲動作會在轉彎初期開始,大致與換刃同步,轉向技巧也更加精準,造成滑雪板在縱向與扭轉方向的變形,進而提升滑雪板的性能。此階段的騎乘者可能會使用上壓力釋放、下壓力釋放,或兩者結合的方式來達成理想效果。

When carved turns are the focus for the advanced student, they may work on adding more pressure (through increased lateral movement) and steering to their carved turns. This requires more concentration on the timing and coordination of all the skills. This will also allow them to negotiate a wide range of terrain and snow conditions, and vary the radius of turns. They learn symmetry and speed control through the use of dynamic flexion and a strong edge angle.
當進階學員專注於雕刻轉彎時,他們可能會練習透過增加側向動作來加大壓力,並加強對雕刻轉彎的操控。這需要更專注於所有技巧的時機與協調。這也能讓他們應付各種地形和雪況,並變化轉彎的半徑。他們透過動態屈曲和強烈的邊緣角度來學習對稱性與速度控制。

EXPERT TURNS專家轉彎

Expert riders have the skills necessary to manage a variety of terrain and snow conditions, and will comfortably switch from sliding to carved turns as needed, with a maximum of speed. The focus of teaching for this level will be on adding variation to their movements and creating situations that require them to adjust their application of the skills to their riding.
專家騎士具備管理各種地形和雪況的技能,能夠在需要時自如地從滑行轉換到雕刻轉彎,並達到最高速度。此階段的教學重點將放在增加動作變化,並創造需要他們調整技巧應用的情境。

NOTES:備註:

TEACHING BEGINNER SNOWBOARDERS
教導初學者滑雪板者

The QuickRide System m ^("m "){ }^{\text {m }}QuickRide 系統 m ^("m "){ }^{\text {m }}

www.quickride.ca

CHOICE OF TERRAIN地形選擇

The choice of appropriate terrain for teaching beginners is crucial. For safety, choose a gentle slope, wide enough to accommodate both your group and the other people on the hill. It should be free from distractions, dangerous intersections and blind spots, and should be well groomed without ice or bumps.
為初學者選擇合適的地形至關重要。為了安全起見,應選擇坡度平緩、寬敞的坡面,足以容納您的團體及山上的其他人。地形應避免干擾、危險的交叉路口和盲點,且應經過良好整修,無冰面或顛簸。

Choose terrain that has the right degree of slope for the group’s ability level - terrain that is steep enough to allow for sideslipping, but not so steep that there is any risk of the students gaining excessive speed. If the slope is right, the students will experience success and will gain confidence. Look for a slope with a single fall line.
選擇坡度適合團體能力水平的地形——坡度要足夠陡峭以便進行側滑,但又不能太陡,以免學生速度過快而有危險。如果坡度合適,學生將會體驗成功並建立信心。尋找具有單一落差線的坡面。

The terrain you choose must be accessible to the group. Constant evaluation of your terrain is necessary. Is it safe? Does is allow students to progress and learn? If not, move to a better area on the mountain.
您選擇的地形必須方便團體進入。需持續評估所選地形。它安全嗎?是否能讓學生進步並學習?如果不行,請移動到山上更合適的區域。

USE OF MECHANICAL LIFTS
機械升降設備的使用

It’s crucial to teach students how to use lifts safely before they ride on one. Give explanations, point out some of the features, and ask them to observe others who are already on the lift as you explain.
在學生搭乘纜車前,教導他們如何安全使用纜車是非常重要的。請先做說明,指出一些纜車的特徵,並在解說時請他們觀察已經在纜車上的其他人。

Be sure the students understand how to load the chair at the bottom, and how to unload from the lift once they arrive at the top. In general, before progressing to riding lifts, students should have mastered the basic mobility skills of skating, straight running and climbing / descending. This is to ensure that they are capable of loading and unloading the lifts.
務必讓學生了解如何在底部上椅子,以及抵達頂端後如何從纜車上下。一般來說,在進階搭乘纜車之前,學生應該已經掌握滑行、直線滑行及上下坡的基本移動技能。這是為了確保他們能夠順利上下纜車。

Use of Carpet/Conveyor Lifts
地毯式/輸送帶纜車的使用

Carpet lifts are ideal for beginners, as they are simple to load, unload, and ride. With only the front foot attached:
地毯式纜車非常適合初學者,因為它們簡單易上、易下且易搭乘。只需將前腳固定:
LOOK: Look at the loading area and at the moving carpet.
觀察:觀察裝載區及移動的地毯。

WAIT: Wait until the loading area is clear to move into.
等待:等待裝載區清空後再移入。

LOAD: Skate forward and allow the lift to move you forward onto the carpet.
裝載:向前滑行,讓升降機將你推到地毯上。
STAND: Stand on the carpet, with a minimum of 5 metres between each person.
站立:站在地毯上,每人間距至少 5 公尺。
UNLOAD: Allow the carpet to send you off of the lift, and slide into the unload area.
卸載:讓地毯將你從升降台上送下,並滑入卸載區。
LEAVE: Clear the unload area as soon as possible.
離開:盡快清空卸載區。

Use of T-BAR Lifts
T 型桿升降台的使用

With only the front foot attached:
僅前腳固定時:

LOOK: Look for the approaching t-bar.
觀察:注意接近的 T 型纜車。

LOAD: Skate forward into the loading area, and place the T either behind your hip, or between the legs against the lead thigh.
上纜:滑行前進至上纜區,將 T 型杆放置在臀部後方,或夾在雙腿之間靠近前腿大腿的位置。
STAND: Stand and allow the T to pull you up the hill. Keep the free foot on the snowboard, against the back binding.
站立:站穩,讓 T 型杆拉你上坡。保持空著的腳踩在滑雪板上,靠近後綁帶的位置。
RIDE: Ride the lift to the top.
乘坐:搭乘纜車到達山頂。

UNLOAD: When the lift reaches the top, remove it and unload the lift.
卸載:當吊椅到達頂端時,將其取下並卸載吊椅。
LEAVE: Clear the unload area as soon as possible. Skate away to a safe area.
離開:盡快清理卸載區域。滑行至安全區域。

Use of Chair Lifts
使用吊椅纜車

With the front foot attached:
前腳固定時:

LOOK: Look for the preceding chair.
LOOK:尋找前方的吊椅。

LOAD: Skate forward into the loading area turn and look for the approaching chair, and sit when it arrives. Keep your board flat and pointed in the line of travel.
LOAD:滑行至上車區,轉身尋找即將到來的吊椅,並在吊椅抵達時坐上。保持滑板平放並朝行進方向指向。
LOWER: Lower the safety bar.
LOWER:放下安全桿。

RIDE: Ride the lift to the top.
RIDE:搭乘吊椅到達山頂。

LIFT: When the lift is near the top, lift the safety bar.
纜車:當纜車接近頂端時,抬起安全桿。

STAND: Point the board straight uphill, and stand when it touches the unload ramp.
站立:將滑雪板指向正上坡,當滑雪板觸及卸載坡道時站立。
LEAVE: Clear the unload area as soon as possible. Keep in mind that riding lifts with children requires more caution, and resorts may have specific policies regarding taking children on lifts.
離開:盡快清空卸貨區。請記住,帶著小孩搭乘纜車時需要更加小心,且滑雪場可能對帶小孩搭乘纜車有特定規定。

EQUIPMENT CONSIDERATIONS FOR BEGINNERS
初學者的裝備考量

Students who start out on equipment that promotes learning will meet with more success. In general, beginner students will benefit from equipment that features the following:
初學者若使用有助於學習的裝備,通常會更容易成功。一般來說,初學者會受益於具備以下特性的裝備:
  • Snowboards with softer flex patterns.
    彈性較軟的滑雪板。
  • Snowboard that is approximately as tall as the student’s chin, or slightly below, when standing.
    滑雪板高度約與學生站立時的下巴齊平,或略低於下巴。
  • Top-sheet traction, either in the form a stomp pad between the bindings, or traction that is embedded into the top of the snowboard, to reduce slipping.
    頂板防滑設計,可能是綁帶間的止滑墊,或嵌入滑雪板頂部的防滑材質,以減少滑動。
  • Stance angles initially set at equal angles (e.g.: +9/-9 degrees) will facilitate movement in both directions. Once students are confident in their chosen direction (regular or goofy footed), they may experiment with different angles.
    站姿角度初始設定為相等角度(例如:+9/-9 度),有助於雙向移動。一旦學生對所選方向(正常腳或反腳)有信心後,可嘗試不同的角度。
  • Bevelled base profile, to help reduce edges catching in the snow, and promote the snowboard pivoting during turns.
    底部斜角設計,有助於減少邊緣在雪地中卡住,並促進滑雪板在轉彎時的旋轉。
The right equipment can make or break the first time experience of your students. At the beginning of the lesson, be sure to inspect your student’s equipment - check for loose connections, working straps and buckles, and proper fit.
合適的裝備能決定學生的初次體驗成敗。在課程開始時,務必檢查學生的裝備——確認連接是否鬆動、背帶和扣環是否正常運作,以及裝備是否合身。

THE QUICKRIDE SYSTEM

Teaching beginners is a continuous decision-making process. Your actions will be determined by what you see in your students’ progress. Don’t be afraid to change your approach if things aren’t working! Remember, your goal is to introduce your students to snowboarding in a positive and fun way, and have your students return to snowboard with you again.
教導初學者是一個持續的決策過程。你的行動將取決於學生的進展狀況。如果方法不奏效,不要害怕改變!請記住,你的目標是以正面且有趣的方式讓學生認識滑雪板,並讓他們願意再次與你一同滑雪。
The goal of the QuickRide System is to create mobility, control, and enjoyment on the snowboard as quickly as possible. Your student and situation will ultimately determine your approach, however, the progression is laid out in a series of five goals, or milestones.
QuickRide 系統的目標是盡快在滑雪板上建立流動性、控制力與樂趣。你的學生和情況最終會決定你的教學方式,但整個進程是依照五個目標或里程碑來規劃的。

The recommended steps to achieve each goal are supplemented with additional tactics, to assist in reaching each goal. As you gain teaching experience, you will begin to customize the progression to fit the students that you are working with (see “Customizing QuickRide” later in this chapter). The five phases of the QuickRide System, and their corresponding goals are:
為達成每個目標所建議的步驟,附有額外的策略,以協助達成各項目標。隨著教學經驗的累積,您將開始根據所教學生的需求,客製化教學進度(詳見本章後段「客製化 QuickRide」)。QuickRide 系統的五個階段及其對應目標如下:
STEPS STUDENT'S GOAL學生目標
1. BASICS1. 基礎階段 To learn to use the equipment, and gain comfort moving around on the snowboard with one foot attached.
學習使用裝備,並習慣單腳綁定滑雪板時的移動。
2. SLIDING2. 滑行 To become comfortable standing on the snowboard while it is sliding.
習慣在滑雪板滑行時站立。
3. CONTROL3. 控制 To learn to control both speed and direction with both feet attached to the snowboard.
學習在雙腳固定於滑雪板上時,控制速度與方向。
4. TURNING4. 轉彎 To learn to turn (changing edges in the fall line).
學習轉彎(在落線上變換邊緣)。
5. FLOW5. 流暢 To learn to explore the mountain safely.
學習如何安全地探索山區。
STEPS STUDENT'S GOAL 1. BASICS To learn to use the equipment, and gain comfort moving around on the snowboard with one foot attached. 2. SLIDING To become comfortable standing on the snowboard while it is sliding. 3. CONTROL To learn to control both speed and direction with both feet attached to the snowboard. 4. TURNING To learn to turn (changing edges in the fall line). 5. FLOW To learn to explore the mountain safely.| STEPS | STUDENT'S GOAL | | :--- | :--- | | 1. BASICS | To learn to use the equipment, and gain comfort moving around on the snowboard with one foot attached. | | 2. SLIDING | To become comfortable standing on the snowboard while it is sliding. | | 3. CONTROL | To learn to control both speed and direction with both feet attached to the snowboard. | | 4. TURNING | To learn to turn (changing edges in the fall line). | | 5. FLOW | To learn to explore the mountain safely. |

THE S.A.F.E. CONCEPTS.A.F.E. 概念

When presenting new manoeuvres or movements, the S.A.F.E. approach will provide a progression for effective presentation. The S.A.F.E. acronym stands for:
在介紹新的動作或動作組合時,S.A.F.E. 方法將提供一個有效的呈現進程。S.A.F.E. 縮寫代表:

STATIC (Skill Development Model: Initiation)
靜態(技能發展模型:啟動階段)

When introducing a new movement, have students visualize/feel the sequence of movements on flat ground.
在介紹新動作時,讓學生在平地上想像/感受動作的順序。
Active (Skill Development Model: Acquisition & Consolidation)
主動(技能發展模型:習得與鞏固)

Students learn by doing - give a tactic or manoeuvre to try. During the initial trials, pay close attention to the terrain and situation to help ensure success.
學生透過實作學習——給予一個策略或動作來嘗試。在初期嘗試階段,密切注意地形和情況,以協助確保成功。
Free (Skill Development Model: Refinement)
自由(技能發展模型:精進)

Focused mileage and practice. During this stage, mileage is the key. Allow students to practice, and allow them to make mistakes - just ensure that positive feedback / correction is given when mistakes are made.
專注的練習與累積經驗。在此階段,累積經驗是關鍵。允許學生練習,並允許他們犯錯——只要在犯錯時給予正向回饋或修正即可。
Experimentation (Skill Development Model: Creative Variation)
實驗(技能發展模型:創意變化)

Change the situation to encourage adaptation - vary the terrain, speed or movements.
改變情境以鼓勵適應——變換地形、速度或動作。
Remember, beginner snowboarders are acquiring the necessary movement patterns and working up to linking turns. Don’t expect perfection, but rather focus on mileage and practice. People learn by doing!
請記住,初學滑雪板者正在習得必要的動作模式,並逐步連接轉彎。不要期望完美,而是專注於累積時間和練習。人是透過實踐來學習的!

USING HANDS-ON ASSISTANCE
使用實際輔助

We must remember that we want our students to be self-sufficient on their snowboards. However, being ready to offer your help is an important part of avoiding crashes and potential injuries. Not all students welcome, or need, hands-on assistance. Remember the following:
我們必須記住,我們希望學生能夠在滑雪板上自給自足。然而,隨時準備提供幫助是避免摔倒和潛在受傷的重要一環。並非所有學生都歡迎或需要實際的身體協助。請記住以下事項:
  • ASK before providing hands-on help.
    在提供實際協助前,請先詢問。
  • Be mindful of HOW you are providing assistance.
    注意你提供協助的方式。
Hands-on assistance can be a valuable tool in your toolbox, particularly if you are working with a single student. However, remember that in a group lesson setting, while you are helping one student, the rest of the class is likely sitting and waiting for your help. Focus on providing alternate methods of balance and mobility (e.g.: one foot unattached, giving alternate ways to stand up) to allow the whole class to practice without your continual assistance.
實際的身體協助可以是你教學工具箱中寶貴的工具,特別是當你只教一位學生時。然而,請記得在團體課程中,當你幫助一位學生時,其他學生很可能正在坐著等待你的幫助。請專注於提供替代的平衡和移動方法(例如:一腳不綁板,提供不同的站立方式),讓整個班級能在沒有你持續協助的情況下練習。
Flatter terrain, balance aids, and benches to assist in strapping in are all potential tools to help the student become self-sufficient. When teaching children, a hula-hoop can act as a balance tool for the child to hold on to, if needed.
較平坦的地形、平衡輔助器以及協助綁帶的椅凳,都是幫助學生達到自立的潛在工具。教導兒童時,呼拉圈可以作為孩子握持的平衡工具(如有需要)。

THE QUICKRIDE SYSTEM OVERVIEW
快速騎乘系統概述

GOALS KEY CONCEPTS關鍵概念 AVAILABLE TACTICS*可用策略*
BASICS: To learn to use the equipment, and gain comfort moving around on the snowboard with one foot attached.
基礎:學習使用裝備,並習慣單腳綁定時在滑雪板上移動。
裝備移動性
EQUIPMENT
MOBILITY
EQUIPMENT MOBILITY| EQUIPMENT | | :--- | | MOBILITY |
Introductions Equipment: Parts Of The Board Attaching The Front Foot Equipment Familiarity & Mobility "The Neutral Position" Skating Climbing & Descending
介紹 裝備:滑雪板的各部分 綁定前腳 裝備熟悉度與移動性「中立姿勢」滑行 攀爬與下坡
SLIDING: To become comfortable standing on the snowboard while it is sliding.
滑行:習慣在滑雪板滑行時站立。
STRAIGHT RUNNING直線滑行 "Push-Push-Glide" Straight Running Experiment With Varied Body Positions Toe/Heel Drag J-Turns
「推-推-滑行」直線滑行實驗,搭配不同身體姿勢、腳尖/腳跟拖行、J 型轉彎
CONTROL: To learn to control both speed and direction with both feet attached to the snowboard.
控制:學習在雙腳固定於滑雪板上時,同時控制速度與方向。
側滑擺盪
SIDESLIPPING
PENDULUM
SIDESLIPPING PENDULUM| SIDESLIPPING | | :--- | | PENDULUM |
- Intro To Edging (Gas Pedal Exercise) One-Foot Attached Sideslipping & Drift Left / Right One-Foot Attached Traverse Attaching The Board On A Slope Sideslipping (two feet attached) Pendulum (two feet attached) Power Pendulum
- 邊緣控制入門(油門練習)單腳固定側滑與左/右漂移 單腳固定橫越 在斜坡上固定滑板 側滑(雙腳固定) 擺盪(雙腳固定) 力量擺盪
TURNING: To learn to turn (changing edges in the fall line).
轉彎:學習轉彎(在落線上變換邊緣)。
BEGINNER TURNS初學者轉彎 Static Rotation Exercise (board off) Garland Exercise J-Turns (revisit from Sliding) Walking Through Turns Beginner Turns
靜態旋轉練習(不帶滑板) 花環練習 J 型轉彎(滑行回顧) 走路式轉彎 初學者轉彎
FLOW: To learn to explore the mountain safely.
流程:學習如何安全地探索山區。
NOVICE TURNS初學者轉彎 Add Traverse Between Turns ("release" the COM from one turn to the next) Traverse with Flexion/Extension Novice Turns (flex after fall line) Speed Control: 4 S's (Speed = Shape, Size, Slope) Sliding 360's
在轉彎間加入橫移(將重心從一個轉彎「釋放」到下一個轉彎) 彎曲/伸展的橫移 初學者轉彎(在落線後彎曲) 速度控制:4S(速度 = 形狀、大小、坡度) 滑行 360 度轉彎

注意 可用的策略旨在支持 QuickRide 系統每個階段目標的發展。請記住,所呈現的策略創造了一個清晰的學習階梯,然而,許多學生在課程中並不需要所有策略。一位優秀的教練會知道如何以及何時加快或放慢進度,以配合學生的能力。(參見「客製化 QuickRide」)
NOTE
Available tactics are meant to support the development of the goal of each stage of the QuickRide System. Keep in mind, the tactics as presented create a clear building block progression to learning, however, many students will not require all of the tactics in their lessons. A good instructor will know how and when to speed up or slow down the progression to match the student's abilities. (See "Customizing QuickRide").
NOTE Available tactics are meant to support the development of the goal of each stage of the QuickRide System. Keep in mind, the tactics as presented create a clear building block progression to learning, however, many students will not require all of the tactics in their lessons. A good instructor will know how and when to speed up or slow down the progression to match the student's abilities. (See "Customizing QuickRide").| NOTE | | :--- | | Available tactics are meant to support the development of the goal of each stage of the QuickRide System. Keep in mind, the tactics as presented create a clear building block progression to learning, however, many students will not require all of the tactics in their lessons. A good instructor will know how and when to speed up or slow down the progression to match the student's abilities. (See "Customizing QuickRide"). |
GOALS KEY CONCEPTS AVAILABLE TACTICS* BASICS: To learn to use the equipment, and gain comfort moving around on the snowboard with one foot attached. "EQUIPMENT MOBILITY" Introductions Equipment: Parts Of The Board Attaching The Front Foot Equipment Familiarity & Mobility "The Neutral Position" Skating Climbing & Descending SLIDING: To become comfortable standing on the snowboard while it is sliding. STRAIGHT RUNNING "Push-Push-Glide" Straight Running Experiment With Varied Body Positions Toe/Heel Drag J-Turns CONTROL: To learn to control both speed and direction with both feet attached to the snowboard. "SIDESLIPPING PENDULUM" - Intro To Edging (Gas Pedal Exercise) One-Foot Attached Sideslipping & Drift Left / Right One-Foot Attached Traverse Attaching The Board On A Slope Sideslipping (two feet attached) Pendulum (two feet attached) Power Pendulum TURNING: To learn to turn (changing edges in the fall line). BEGINNER TURNS Static Rotation Exercise (board off) Garland Exercise J-Turns (revisit from Sliding) Walking Through Turns Beginner Turns FLOW: To learn to explore the mountain safely. NOVICE TURNS Add Traverse Between Turns ("release" the COM from one turn to the next) Traverse with Flexion/Extension Novice Turns (flex after fall line) Speed Control: 4 S's (Speed = Shape, Size, Slope) Sliding 360's "NOTE Available tactics are meant to support the development of the goal of each stage of the QuickRide System. Keep in mind, the tactics as presented create a clear building block progression to learning, however, many students will not require all of the tactics in their lessons. A good instructor will know how and when to speed up or slow down the progression to match the student's abilities. (See "Customizing QuickRide")." | GOALS | KEY CONCEPTS | AVAILABLE TACTICS* | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | BASICS: To learn to use the equipment, and gain comfort moving around on the snowboard with one foot attached. | EQUIPMENT <br> MOBILITY | Introductions Equipment: Parts Of The Board Attaching The Front Foot Equipment Familiarity & Mobility "The Neutral Position" Skating Climbing & Descending | | SLIDING: To become comfortable standing on the snowboard while it is sliding. | STRAIGHT RUNNING | "Push-Push-Glide" Straight Running Experiment With Varied Body Positions Toe/Heel Drag J-Turns | | CONTROL: To learn to control both speed and direction with both feet attached to the snowboard. | SIDESLIPPING <br> PENDULUM | - Intro To Edging (Gas Pedal Exercise) One-Foot Attached Sideslipping & Drift Left / Right One-Foot Attached Traverse Attaching The Board On A Slope Sideslipping (two feet attached) Pendulum (two feet attached) Power Pendulum | | TURNING: To learn to turn (changing edges in the fall line). | BEGINNER TURNS | Static Rotation Exercise (board off) Garland Exercise J-Turns (revisit from Sliding) Walking Through Turns Beginner Turns | | FLOW: To learn to explore the mountain safely. | NOVICE TURNS | Add Traverse Between Turns ("release" the COM from one turn to the next) Traverse with Flexion/Extension Novice Turns (flex after fall line) Speed Control: 4 S's (Speed = Shape, Size, Slope) Sliding 360's | | NOTE <br> Available tactics are meant to support the development of the goal of each stage of the QuickRide System. Keep in mind, the tactics as presented create a clear building block progression to learning, however, many students will not require all of the tactics in their lessons. A good instructor will know how and when to speed up or slow down the progression to match the student's abilities. (See "Customizing QuickRide"). | | |
The first step in the progression is to develop familiarity with equipment and mobility with one foot strapped to the snowboard.
進階的第一步是熟悉裝備並學習在一隻腳綁在滑雪板上的情況下移動。

INTRODUCTIONS介紹

Armed with the right attitude, you are ready to meet your class!
帶著正確的態度,你已經準備好迎接你的課程了!

a) Instructor Introduction
a) 教練介紹

Your introduction should be brief. It should not take more than a minute. Its purpose is to inform, reassure, and to set the mood. Include:
你的自我介紹應該簡短。時間不應超過一分鐘。目的是提供資訊、讓人安心並營造氛圍。內容包括:
  • Your name你的名字
  • A welcome message to the group
    對團體的歡迎詞
  • Your professional background
    你的專業背景
  • Snowboarding and teaching experience
    滑雪板和教學經驗
  • Any other pertinent information
    其他相關資訊

b) Student Namesb) 學生姓名

Learn your student’s names. These introductions will initiate participation and facilitate communication. Ask for their names, snowboarding or related sports experience, and their motivation for taking the lesson.
記住你的學生姓名。這些介紹將促進參與並便利溝通。詢問他們的姓名、滑雪板或相關運動經驗,以及他們參加課程的動機。

c) Lesson Goalsc) 課程目標

If your students do not know what they are expected to learn, both students and instructor will fall short of their objectives. For an introductory lesson, the goals should be:
如果學生不知道他們應該學習什麼,學生和教師都無法達成目標。對於入門課程,目標應該是:
  • To have fun享受樂趣
  • To develop an appreciation for snowboarding
    培養對滑雪板運動的欣賞
  • To learn how to stop on both sides (toe edge and heel edge)
    學習如何在雙側(腳尖邊和腳跟邊)停下來
  • To learn how to become mobile on the snowboard - controlling speed and direction
    學習如何在滑雪板上移動—控制速度和方向
  • To learn how to use mechanical lifts
    學習如何使用機械吊椅
  • To develop safety awareness
    培養安全意識
  • Again, to have fun! And to leave with plans to return and snowboard again
    再說一次,為了玩得開心!並且帶著計畫再回來滑雪板的打算離開

d) Durationd) 時間長度

This will depend on a variety of factors including local arrangements with your snow school. Ideally, introductory lessons should be at least two hours.
這將取決於多種因素,包括您與當地滑雪學校的安排。理想情況下,入門課程應至少持續兩小時。

e) Equipment / Safety Check
e) 裝備/安全檢查

The equipment your students use will be a significant factor in their ability to learn. Equipment factors to consider are:
學生使用的設備將是影響他們學習能力的重要因素。需要考慮的設備因素包括:
  • Boots should provide good ankle support and offer some forward flexibility. They should be comfortable, and should be tightened enough to avoid excessive foot movement. Check that your student’s boots fit properly and are done up.
    雪鞋應提供良好的腳踝支撐並具備一定的前方彈性。應該穿著舒適,並且繫緊到足以避免腳部過度移動。檢查學生的雪鞋是否合腳且已繫好。
  • The snowboard should be suited to the size, weight and boot size of the student and should be appropriately tuned for slow, sliding turns. Boards with top sheet traction, as well as a bevelled base profile are ideal. Also, bindings set to + 9 / 9 + 9 / 9 +9//-9+9 /-9 degrees work well for beginners. Check that your student’s board is set up correctly, with bindings centred between the toe and heel edges, and all hardware is tight.
    滑雪板應適合學生的身高、體重及雪鞋尺寸,並應適當調整以利緩慢滑行轉彎。具有頂板防滑設計及斜角底部輪廓的滑雪板是理想選擇。此外,綁帶設定為 + 9 / 9 + 9 / 9 +9//-9+9 /-9 度對初學者來說效果良好。檢查學生的滑雪板是否正確安裝,綁帶是否置中於腳趾與腳跟邊緣之間,且所有硬體是否緊固。
  • The students should be dressed appropriately for the day’s conditions. Helmets are definitely recommended.
    學生應根據當天的天氣條件穿著適當。強烈建議佩戴安全帽。

EQUIPMENT裝備

To enhance efficient communication, the following terms should be introduced and used throughout the lesson:
為了提升溝通效率,課程中應引入並使用以下術語:
  • The Toeside: The side of the board where the toes are positioned.
    腳趾側:板子上腳趾所處的一側。
  • The Heelside: The side of the board where the heels are positioned.
    腳跟側:板子上腳跟所處的一側。
  • Nose of the board (or “Tip”): This is the end of the board that closest to the front foot.
    板頭(或稱「尖端」):指靠近前腳的板子端部。
  • Tail of the board (or simply “Tail”): The end of the board that is closest to the back foot.
    滑雪板尾端(或簡稱「尾端」):靠近後腳的一端。
  • Base: The bottom of the board - the part that slides on the snow.
    底板:滑雪板的底部——與雪面接觸並滑行的部分。
  • Bindings: High-backs, base plates, heel cup, ankle strap and toe strap.
    綁帶:包括高背板、底座板、後跟杯、腳踝帶和腳趾帶。
  • Goofy Foot*: When you prefer to have your right foot as the leading foot, you’re a goofy-footed snowboarder.
    右腳領先*:當你習慣以右腳作為領先腳時,你就是一位右腳領先的滑雪板手。
  • Regular Foot*: When you prefer your left foot as the leading foot, you’re a regular-footed snowboarder.
    常規腳*:當你偏好以左腳為前腳時,你就是一位常規腳的滑雪板手。

GOOFY OR REGULARPGOOFY 或 REGULARP

When determining whether a student should stand goofy (right foot forward) or regular footed (left foot forward), there are a few options to try to test this:
在判斷學生應該採用 goofy(右腳在前)還是常規腳(左腳在前)站姿時,有幾種方法可以嘗試測試:
  • Have them envision sliding on a patch of ice. Many students will lead with their natural lead foot.
    讓他們想像在一塊冰面上滑行。許多學生會以他們自然的前腳領先。
  • Ask them which foot they would likely kick a soccer ball with. Most students will place their stronger foot (their kicking foot) at the back of the snowboard.
    問他們通常會用哪隻腳踢足球。大多數學生會將較強壯的腳(踢球腳)放在滑雪板的後方。
  • With students standing facing away from you and feet together, give them a light push, forcing them to take a step. Many times, the foot that steps out first to stop the fall will be the front foot.
    讓學生面向遠離你的方向站立,雙腳併攏,輕輕推他們一下,迫使他們踏出一步。很多時候,第一個踏出的腳會是前腳,用來阻止跌倒。

    Keep in mind that often these tests will not yield a clear front and back foot, and experimentation might be needed during the first lesson. When in doubt, you’ll need to make an educated guess, and adjust from there as the student becomes more comfortable.
    請記住,這些測試常常無法明確判斷前腳和後腳,可能需要在第一堂課中進行嘗試。若有疑慮,你需要做出有根據的判斷,並隨著學生越來越熟悉再做調整。

ATTACHING THE FRONT FOOT
固定前腳

The first step is to try to determine the forward foot. Any previous experience surfing, skateboarding, water- skiing or similar activity will help the student to decide which foot should go forward. Let the students determine which stance feels more comfortable.
第一步是嘗試判斷前腳。任何先前衝浪、滑板、水上滑雪或類似活動的經驗,都能幫助學生決定哪隻腳應該放在前面。讓學生自己判斷哪種站姿較為舒適。
Be creative, but be efficient also. Many students won’t know whether they are goofy or regular footed until they have tried both. Have students strap in their chosen front foot, and offer assistance when necessary - they may decide later that they have the wrong foot forward.
要有創意,但也要有效率。許多學生在嘗試過兩種站姿之前,並不知道自己是「goofy」還是「regular」腳。讓學生綁上他們選擇的前腳,並在必要時提供協助——他們可能之後會決定自己前腳綁錯了。
When attaching the board, the following sequence should be respected:
在固定滑板時,應遵循以下順序:
  • If equipped with one, fasten the safety leash first to avoid a run-away board while you are attempting to attach the front foot.
    如果有配備安全繩,請先繫上安全繩,以避免在嘗試固定前腳時滑板失控跑走。
  • Remove the snow from the bottom of the front boot and from the front binding, and place the front foot in the front binding.
    將前靴底部及前綁帶上的積雪清除乾淨,然後將前腳放入前綁帶中。
  • Attach the ankle strap of the forward binding snugly so that the heel of the boot rests firmly against the back of the binding, in the heel cup.
    將前綁帶的腳踝帶緊密固定,使靴子的後跟牢牢靠在綁帶後方的後跟杯中。
  • Attach the toe buckle snugly.
    將腳趾扣緊密固定。

EQUIPMENT FAMILIARITY & MOBILITY
裝備熟悉度與行動能力

With the front foot attached to the board, have students experiment with various challenges:
前腳固定在滑板上後,讓學生嘗試各種挑戰:
  • Sliding the board back and forth.
    將滑板前後滑動。
  • Balancing on one foot (both the attached and free foot).
    單腳平衡(包括固定腳和自由腳)。
  • Turning in circles - “pushing” the board, and “pulling” the board, clockwise and count-er-clockwise directions.
    繞圈轉動——「推動」滑板和「拉動」滑板,順時針及逆時針方向。
  • Stepping the rear/free foot from the toeside to the heelside - try with eyes closed and open.
    將後腳/自由腳從腳尖側移至腳跟側——嘗試閉眼和睜眼操作。
  • Lift the board up with the front leg in front of the body; lift the board behind the body.
    用前腳將滑雪板抬起至身體前方;將滑雪板抬起至身體後方。
  • Small hops with the back foot placed against the back binding.
    後腳輕輕跳躍,腳放在後綁帶上。
Each of these tasks will help students to become familiar with the snowboard, and get to know their equipment.
這些練習將幫助學生熟悉滑雪板,並了解他們的裝備。

THE NEUTRAL POSITION中立姿勢

The neutral position is an athletic stance common to most sports. This position is stable and allows for quick reaction.
中立姿勢是一種在多數運動中常見的運動員站姿。此姿勢穩定且能快速反應。

Explanation說明

On a snowboard, this is a neutral position:
在滑雪板上,這是中立姿勢:
  • A ready position with the ankles, knees, and hip joints equally flexed. This position optimizes the length and strength of key muscles so a rider can be both stable and maximize mobility, as needed.
    腳踝、膝蓋和髖關節同時彎曲的準備姿勢。此姿勢能優化關鍵肌肉的長度與力量,使騎士既能保持穩定,又能在需要時最大化活動力。
  • Shoulders and hips positioned square to the front foot angle.
    肩膀與髖部與前腳角度保持正對。
  • Arms relaxed, and in a natural position alongside the body.
    手臂放鬆,自然垂放於身體兩側。
  • Directing the head and eyes to face the direction of travel.
    頭部與眼睛朝向行進方向。
  • Distributing the body weight evenly between both feet.
    將體重均勻分配在雙腳之間。

Demonstration示範

On flat terrain, with the front foot attached, assume the neutral position. Place emphasis on this position as a “ready” position. The rear foot should not be strapped in, but placed on
在平坦地形上,前腳固定後,採取中立姿勢。將此姿勢強調為「準備」姿勢。後腳不應綁定,而是放置於


role of equipment set-up, and its influence on the neutral position. Binding width and stance angles will affect the student’s ability to maintain a natural position on the snowboard. For beginners,
裝備設定的角色及其對中立姿勢的影響。綁帶寬度和站姿角度會影響學員維持自然姿勢的能力。對初學者而言,
CASI recommends starting with a stance width slightly wider than shoulder-width, and bindings set at angles of approximately +9 degrees on the front foot, and -9 degrees on the back foot. Once students are linking turns, this stance may be altered to be more “directional” - oriented towards the nose of the board (e.g.: +18 /-6). the board against the back binding.
CASI 建議起始站姿寬度略寬於肩寬,綁帶角度前腳約為 +9 度,後腳約為 -9 度。當學生能連續轉彎後,這個站姿可以調整為更「定向」的姿勢——朝向滑板前端(例如:+18 / -6)。滑板靠近後綁帶。

Student Trial學生試驗

On flat terrain, have the students place their boards in a circle and stand in the neutral position to visualize and feel this athletic position.
在平坦地形上,讓學生將滑板排成一圈,並站在中立姿勢,以視覺化並感受這個運動姿勢。

KEY WORDS: NEUTRAL POSITION
關鍵詞:中立姿勢

  • Joints slightly flexed關節微彎曲
  • Equal weight重量均分
  • Head up抬頭
  • “Ready” position「準備」姿勢

THE NEUTRAL POSITION中立姿勢

IS AN ATHLETIC STANCE
是一種運動員的站姿

COMMON TO MOST SPORTS. THIS POSITION IS STABLE AND ALLOWS FOR QUICK REACTION.
大多數運動中都常見。這個姿勢穩定且能快速反應。

SKATING滑冰

Movement of the snowboard on flat terrain requires skating strides.
在平坦地形上滑雪板的移動需要滑行步伐。

Explanation說明

What: Moving around on flat ground, with one foot attached to the snowboard.
什麼:在平地上移動,一隻腳固定在滑雪板上。

Why: To get from point ‘A’ to point ‘B’, and to be mobile with the board attached.
為什麼:為了從「A 點」移動到「B 點」,並且在滑雪板固定的情況下保持行動能力。
How: Starting from a neutral position, orient the head and eyes in the direction of travel, toward the nose of the board. Place the back foot on the snow either on the toeside or the heelside of the snowboard, with the front leg slightly bent. Take a small pushing step with the rear foot, and allow the snowboard to slide on the base. Repeat these small steps.
方法:從中立姿勢開始,將頭部和眼睛朝向行進方向,即滑雪板的前端方向。將後腳放在雪地上,位置可在滑雪板的腳尖側或腳跟側,前腿微微彎曲。用後腳輕輕推一步,讓滑雪板底部滑行。重複這些小步伐。

KEY WORDS: SKATING關鍵字:滑行

  • Upper body aligned with front foot angle
    上半身與前腳角度對齊
  • Eyes looking forward眼睛向前看
  • Balanced over front foot
    重心平衡於前腳
  • Small steps between bindings
    綁定板之間的小步伐

Demonstration示範

On flat terrain do a series of small steps. Do a simple turn by lifting the board and pivoting around on your free foot. Repeat the steps back toward the students.
在平坦地形上做一連串的小步伐。透過抬起滑板並以空著的腳為軸心旋轉,完成簡單的轉向。重複這些步伐,朝學生方向返回。

Student Trial學生試滑

Spread the students out and have everyone skate back and forth either in a line parallel to each other or in a line following the leader, or in a circle - be creative! Ensure students try skating with the rear foot on both the toeside and heelside of the snowboard.
將學生分散開,讓每個人來回滑行,可以是彼此平行的一列,或是跟隨領隊的一列,或是圍成一個圓圈——發揮創意!確保學生嘗試用後腳在滑雪板的腳尖側和腳跟側滑行。

Feedback回饋

Key points to look for:
重點觀察項目:
  • Neutral position - eyes up, arms relaxed, joints flexed.
    中立姿勢-眼睛向上,手臂放鬆,關節彎曲。
  • Weight distribution - changes from front foot to pushing foot, and back.
    重量分配-從前腳到推進腳,再到後腳變換。
  • Edging - used as needed, according to terrain / slope / snow.
    邊緣控制-根據地形/坡度/雪況需要使用。

Other suggested tactics:
其他建議策略:

  • Skate with the rear foot on both the toeside and heelside of the snowboard. Start with the free foot behind or in front of the front binding. Advanced the snowboard until the free foot is in line with the back binding, and replace the foot near the front binding. This will help avoid steps that are too large.
    用後腳在滑雪板的腳尖側和腳跟側滑行。開始時,空著的腳放在前綁帶的前方或後方。將滑雪板向前推進,直到空著的腳與後綁帶對齊,然後將腳放回靠近前綁帶的位置。這有助於避免步伐過大。
  • Obstacle course - follow the leader.
    障礙賽 - 跟隨領隊。
  • Skate to a target object and back.
    滑向目標物再滑回來。
  • “Push-Push-Glide” - as balance progresses, have students try to take larger pushes with the free foot, and allow the board to glide on the base for longer periods.
    「推-推-滑」— 隨著平衡能力的進步,讓學生嘗試用空著的腳做更大幅度的推動,並讓滑雪板在底部滑行更長時間。

CLIMBING / DESCENDING攀爬 / 下降

In addition to moving on flat terrain, students will sometimes have to climb up or down small inclinations.
除了在平坦地形移動外,學員有時也需要攀爬或下降小斜坡。

Explanation說明

What: Moving up and down a slope, with the snowboard across the fall line.
內容:沿著斜坡上下移動,滑雪板橫跨落差線。

Why: To assist in negotiating varying sloped terrain with one foot attached to the board.
為什麼:協助在一隻腳固定於滑板上時,應對不同傾斜的地形。

How: Climbing如何做:攀爬
  • Start in a basic standing position with the front foot attached, facing up the slope, and the free foot uphill above the toeside of the board.
    從基本站立姿勢開始,前腳固定,面向坡上,空著的腳放在滑板腳尖側的坡上方。
  • Extend the front ankle and knee to engage the toe edge of the board.
    伸展前腳踝和膝蓋,使滑板的腳尖邊緣接觸地面。
  • Take a medium sized step with the free foot, up the hill.
    用空著的腳踏出中等大小的一步,向上坡走。
  • Follow by taking a small step with the attached foot, lifting the snowboard. Engage the edge into the snow to prevent slipping backwards.
    接著用綁著的腳踏出小步,抬起滑雪板。將邊緣壓入雪中,以防止向後滑動。

How: Descending方法:下坡

  • Start in a standing position, facing down the slope, with the free foot uphill on the snow.
    從站立姿勢開始,面向坡下,空著的腳放在上坡的雪地上。
  • Flex the front knee and ankle to engage the heel edge into the snow.
    彎曲前膝和腳踝,使後跟邊緣壓入雪面。
  • Take a step with the snowboard, downhill, and follow with the free foot, lifting the board.
    用滑雪板向下坡邁出一步,接著抬起滑雪板,跟上空著的腳。

Demonstration示範

On a gentle slope, do a series of uphill steps. Turn around and descend the hill by stepping downwards.
在緩坡上,做一連串向上的踏步。轉身後,透過向下踏步下坡。

Student Trial學生試練

Direct the student(s) to practice stepping up (and down) the hill. Choose a formation that will not interfere with skier/rider traffic.
指導學生練習上下山坡。選擇一個不會干擾滑雪者/騎乘者交通的隊形。

Feedback回饋

Points to look for:
注意事項:
  • Board perpendicular to the fall line.
    滑板垂直於落線。
  • Neutral position, looking in the direction of travel.
    中立姿勢,面向行進方向。
  • Adequate edging to prevent slipping.
    適當的刃邊角度以防止打滑。

²SLIDING To become comfortable standing on the snowboard while it is sliding.
²滑行 在滑雪板滑行時,習慣站立姿勢。

The second step in the progression is to help the student gain comfort on the snowboard while it is sliding on a flat base.
第二個進階步驟是幫助學生在滑雪板平滑滑行時獲得舒適感。

STRAIGHT RUNNING直線滑行

This exercise introduces the student to using the Neutral Position while sliding, as well as the sensation of moving down a slope. It helps to build confidence through repetition on a slight grade or incline.
這個練習讓學生在滑行時使用中立姿勢,並體驗下坡移動的感覺。透過在緩坡或斜面上的反覆練習,有助於建立信心。

Remember to use the S.A.F.E. approach, to ensure students accomplish their goal safely and successfully.
請記得使用 S.A.F.E.方法,確保學生能安全且成功地達成目標。

Explanation說明

What: Sliding down a slope with one foot attached to the snowboard.
什麼:用一隻腳固定在滑雪板上,沿斜坡滑下。

Why: To gain comfort and balance on the snowboard.
為什麼:為了在滑雪板上獲得舒適感和平衡感。

How:如何:

  • After climbing a slight incline, turn so that the nose of the board is pointing down the slope, with the base flat on the snow, in the fall line.
    爬上一個緩坡後,轉動身體,使滑雪板的板頭朝向坡下,底部平貼雪面,沿著落差線方向。
  • Place the free foot in the snow, to stop you from sliding.
    將空著的腳放在雪地上,以防止自己滑動。
  • Look down the slope and when ready, place the back foot on the snowboard (against the back binding) to begin sliding.
    朝坡下看,準備好後,將後腳放在滑雪板上(靠近後綁帶)開始滑行。
  • Maintain the neutral position while sliding, with knees slightly flexed, eyes looking forward, and arms comfortably to the sides.
    滑行時保持中立姿勢,膝蓋微彎,眼睛向前看,雙臂自然放在身側。
  • As the terrain flattens, and the speed reduces to a stop, step off of the board and skate to a safe area.
    當地形變平,速度減至停止時,請從滑板上跳下,滑行至安全區域。

Demonstration示範

Perform each of the above steps as explained on terrain that allow you to come to a stop naturally. Remember, you are trying to build their confidence and they do not know how to stop yet!
在允許你自然停下的地形上,依照上述步驟逐一執行。請記住,你的目標是建立他們的信心,而他們還不會停下來!

Note: Terrain choice is key - if your first demonstration goes any further than 4-5 metres, or if you are forced to use your foot to stop yourself, the incline is too steep. Look for terrain that has a slight slope with a single fall line, followed by a flat area or even a slight up-slope incline to help stop. Be aware of snow conditions, speed may vary.
注意:地形的選擇非常重要——如果你的第一次示範滑行超過 4-5 公尺,或是你必須用腳來停止自己,表示坡度太陡。請尋找有輕微斜度且只有一條落差線的地形,接著是平坦區域或甚至是稍微向上的斜坡,這樣有助於停下。並且要注意雪況,速度可能會有所不同。

Student Trial學生試跑

KEY WORDS: STRAIGHT RUNNING
關鍵詞:直線跑

Have the students follow after each
讓學生依序跟隨
  • Place board in fall line and flat based
    將滑雪板放置於落線及平底位置
  • Place back foot against back binding demonstration.
    將後腳放回後綁帶示範位置。
  • Look ahead向前看

Feedback回饋

  • Maintain neutral position
    保持中立姿勢
Points to look for:
注意事項:
  • Board sliding flat on the base (have students feel their foot flat in the boot).
    滑雪板平貼在底部(讓學生感受靴子內腳掌的平貼感)。
  • Neutral position, looking in the direction of travel, with the shoulders in line with the snowboard - not rotated toward the nose.
    保持中立姿勢,目光朝向前進方向,肩膀與滑雪板保持同一線上—不要朝向滑雪板前端旋轉。
  • Weight distribution even over both feet - a common occurrence is leaning back, on the rear foot.
    體重均勻分布在雙腳上—常見的錯誤是身體向後傾,重心落在後腳。

Other suggested tactics:
其他建議策略:

  • “Push-Push-Glide”: Start with a small skate, or push, to increase the sliding speed as students become more comfortable. Add a second push to build some speed, and then place the free foot against the back binding and enjoy the glide!
    「推-推-滑行」:從小幅度滑行或推進開始,隨著學生越來越熟悉,增加滑行速度。再加上第二次推進以增加速度,然後將空著的腳放在後綁帶上,享受滑行的樂趣!
  • Experiment with various body positions:
    嘗試各種身體姿勢:
  • Fore and aft balance (front foot - back foot movement)
    前後平衡(前腳-後腳移動)
  • Lateral balance (towards the toe and heel edges)
    側向平衡(朝向腳尖和腳跟邊緣)
  • Rotational balance (upper body rotation)
    旋轉平衡(上半身旋轉)

    \square Vertical (tall and small positions)
    \square 垂直(高姿勢與低姿勢)
  • Toe/Heel Drag: While sliding, have the student move the free foot slightly off of the snowboard, on either toe or heelside, and gradually drag it in the snow. This will help with stopping, and cause a slight change in direction.
    腳尖/腳跟拖曳:滑行時,讓學生將空著的腳稍微移離滑雪板,放在腳尖或腳跟邊,並逐漸在雪地上拖曳。這有助於停止,並會造成輕微的方向改變。
  • J-Turn: As the student is sliding, have them slightly head as well as hips towards the heel edge as they drag their heel in the snow. Their path of travel should follow a broad heelside arc as they do this, introducing them to the concept of rotation, and eventually turning. Ask them to try to turn until they stop on the heel edge. Try the same on the toe edge.
    J-Turn:當學生在滑行時,讓他們的頭部和臀部稍微朝向後跟邊,同時將後跟拖曳在雪地上。他們的行進路徑應該沿著一個寬廣的後跟邊弧線,藉此讓他們了解旋轉的概念,並最終完成轉彎。請他們嘗試轉彎直到在後跟邊停下。接著在前腳趾邊嘗試相同動作。

The third goal of the QuickRide System is to give students control over their snowboard with it positioned across the fall line. By the end of this phase, they should be able to control their speed and their direction and use momentum to assist in this.
QuickRide 系統的第三個目標是讓學生能夠控制滑雪板,並將滑雪板置於落線橫向。到這個階段結束時,他們應該能夠控制速度和方向,並利用動量來輔助控制。
It may be helpful to separate this stage into two stages:
將此階段分成兩個階段可能會比較有幫助:
  1. Introduction of speed and direction control with one foot attached, using the Gas Pedal, Sideslipping and Pendulum exercises.
    介紹速度和方向控制,並且只綁定一隻腳,使用油門踏板(Gas Pedal)、側滑(Sideslipping)和擺盪(Pendulum)練習。
  2. Refinement of speed and direction control with both feet attached, using the Sideslipping, Pendulum and Power Pendulum exercises.
    利用側滑、擺動及強力擺動練習,精進雙腳固定時的速度與方向控制。

INTRODUCTION TO EDGING (THE "GAS PEDAL" EXERCISE)
邊緣控制入門(「油門踏板」練習)

With the “Gas Pedal” exercise, students are introduced to edge angle’s effect on speed. Increased edge angle de-
透過「油門踏板」練習,學生將了解邊緣角度對速度的影響。增加邊緣角度會降低速度,

creases speed, and decreased edge angle increases speed. This is done in a controlled environment, on a relatively flat slope, where the apprehension of falling is minimized.
而減少邊緣角度則會增加速度。此練習在相對平緩的坡面上進行,環境受控,降低了跌倒的恐懼感。
The Gas Pedal Exercise can be introduced on flat terrain, and simply illustrates how an edged board will slow and stop, while a flat board slides.
油門踏板練習可以在平坦地形上進行,簡單說明有刃的滑雪板會減速並停止,而平板則會滑行。

Explanation說明

What: Introduction to edging and speed control.
內容:介紹刃邊控制與速度控制。

Why: To gain control over the snowboard and our speed.
目的:掌握滑雪板及速度的控制。

How: On flat terrain, lean slightly toward the heel edge. While leaning, flex the ankle and knee of the attached (front) leg, while flexing the muscle that runs up the shin, to increase the edge angle on the heel edge. Relax the joints to flatten the edge angle. With the board flat, use the rear (unattached) foot to push the board and body forward. Edge the board to resist the push. Try this on both the heel and toeside edges.
方法:在平坦地形上,身體稍微向後跟邊傾斜。傾斜時,彎曲前腳(綁定腳)的腳踝和膝蓋,同時收縮小腿前側的肌肉,以增加後跟邊的邊緣角度。放鬆關節以使邊緣角度變平。當滑板平放時,使用後腳(未綁定腳)將滑板和身體向前推。利用邊緣抵抗推力。嘗試在後跟邊和腳尖邊兩側進行練習。

KEY WORDS: GAS PEDALINTRO TO EDGING
關鍵詞:油門 踩邊入門

  • Front foot attached前腳綁定
  • Lean body inside board slightly
    身體稍微向滑板內側傾斜
  • Flex hip, knee, ankle to increase or decrease edge angle and feel snowboard slide / stop
    屈曲髖關節、膝蓋、腳踝以增加或減少邊緣角度,感受滑雪板滑行/停止

Student Trial學生嘗試

Have students experiment with this exercise on flat terrain.
讓學生在平坦地形上嘗試此練習。

PROGRESSING FROM THE GAS PEDAL EXERCISE TO ONE-FOOTED SIDESLIPPING
從油門練習進階到單腳側滑

With students comfortable with Straight Running, the Toe/Heel Drag, and now the Gas Pedal Exercise, we can use these skills to gradually introduce Sideslipping. On mellow terrain (similar to Straight Running terrain) students may start by orienting the board across the fall line, on the heel edge. Facing down hill, with their rear (unattached) foot in the snow on the heel edge of the board for control, students can begin to push the board downhill to slide on the heel edge. As they become more comfortable, they will allow the snowboard to slide, rather than pushing it. Ask them to feel equal weight on both the front and rear foot as they slide.
當學生已熟悉直線滑行、腳尖/腳跟拖曳,以及現在的油門練習後,我們可以利用這些技巧逐步引入側滑。在平緩的地形(類似直線滑行的地形)上,學生可以先將滑雪板橫向擺放於落線上,使用腳跟邊。面向下坡,後腳(未綁定的腳)放在雪地上,踩在滑雪板的腳跟邊以控制,學生可以開始推動滑雪板向下滑行,讓滑雪板在腳跟邊滑動。隨著熟練度提升,他們會讓滑雪板自然滑行,而非用力推動。請他們感受滑行時前後腳的重量均勻分布。
To control speed or stop, flex the ankle, knee and hip of the front leg (as in the Gas Pedal Exercise). Allow students the time and repetition to practice this on both the heel and toe edges. When sliding on the toe edge, students will be facing uphill, and the rear foot will be positioned over the toe edge, with the toes dragging in the snow. Once successful, students should be able to achieve a smooth slide with the back foot resting against the back binding.
要控制速度或停下來,前腿的腳踝、膝蓋和臀部要彎曲(如同油門練習中)。讓學生有足夠的時間和反覆練習,在腳跟邊和腳尖邊都能做到這點。當在腳尖邊滑行時,學生會面向上坡,後腳會放在腳尖邊,腳趾拖曳在雪地上。成功後,學生應能順暢滑行,後腳靠在後綁帶上。

ONE-FOOT ATTACHED SIDESLIPPING & "DRIT" LEFT/RIGHT
單腳綁定側滑與「DRIT」左右轉

As students become with the Gas Pedal exercise, they will naturally become more comfortable allowing the board to slide. Encourage them to experiment with sideslipping with the free foot placed against the back binding, and the heel (or toe) slightly off the board to assist with speed control.
隨著學生們越來越熟悉油門踏板練習,他們自然會更自在地讓滑板滑動。鼓勵他們嘗試側滑,將空著的腳放在後綁帶旁,並讓腳跟(或腳尖)稍微離開滑板,以協助控制速度。

Once they are sliding smoothly, have them start to move diagonally across the slope by shifting weight over the foot in the direction they would like to travel, as well as allow that end of the board to move downhill slightly.
當他們能順暢滑行後,讓他們開始沿斜坡斜向移動,方法是將重心移向想要前進的方向的腳,同時讓滑板的那一端稍微向下坡方向移動。

Having the back foot unattached gives students the option to step out away from the board, catching themselves if they happen to fall or catch an edge.
後腳不綁定讓學生有機會在跌倒或刮邊時,能夠跳離滑板並自我保護。

ATTACHING THE BOARD ON A SLOPE
在斜坡上綁定滑板

Before continuing with Sideslipping and learning to control direction, students will need to have both feet attached to the snowboard. To accomplish this safely, keep in mind the following points:
在繼續學習側滑及控制方向之前,學生需要雙腳都固定在滑雪板上。為了安全達成此目標,請記住以下要點:
  • Arrange students in an area free of excessive traffic, standing with the front foot attached, facing down the hill.
    安排學生在一個無過多人流的區域,前腳固定,面向山下站立。
  • Ensure students have enough room between each other to move around.
    確保學生之間有足夠的空間可以活動。
  • Using the heel edge of the snowboard, students can “dig” a platform in the snow, which will allow them to stand without sliding.
    利用滑雪板的後跟邊緣,學生可以在雪地上「挖」出一個平台,讓他們能夠站穩而不滑動。
  • Clear any snow from the rear binding, and place the foot in the binding.
    清除後綁帶上的積雪,然後將腳放入綁帶中。
  • Attach the ankle strap, and then the toe strap.
    先扣上腳踝帶,再扣上腳趾帶。
  • Be ready to help students - they may require assistance strapping in for the first couple times!
    準備好協助學生——他們在前幾次綁帶時可能需要幫忙!

Alternative Methods:替代方法:

  1. Facing uphill, use the attached foot to dig in the heel edge (downhill edge). Use this platform to strap in the rear foot. This method may be easier for students in harder snow.
    面向上坡時,使用附帶的腳踏將後腳跟邊(下坡邊)挖入雪中。利用這個平台來綁上後腳。這種方法對於在較硬雪地上的學生可能較為容易。
  2. Sitting on the snow. If the situation (terrain, snow conditions) don’t allow students to strap in while standing, ask them to sit on the snow facing downhill, to strap in the rear foot.
    坐在雪地上。如果情況(地形、雪況)不允許學生站立時綁上雪板,請他們面向下坡坐在雪地上,綁上後腳。

HOW TO STAND UP
如何站起來

Standing up on the heel edge (facing downhill) can be difficult for some students. There are a couple of options that may help:
面向下坡時,站在後腳跟邊對某些學生來說可能很困難。有幾種方法可能會有所幫助:

Standing Up - Option 1:
站立 - 選項一:

  • Facing downhill, slide the hips close to the snowboard.
    面向下坡,將臀部靠近滑雪板。
  • Place the back hand on the snow next to the hips and reach forward/up with the other arm.
    將後手放在臀部旁的雪地上,另一隻手向前/向上伸展。
  • In one quick motion, rock forward and stand quickly.
    以一個快速動作向前搖擺並迅速站起。
  • It may be helpful to reach forward and grab onto the toe edge in this method.
    在此方法中,向前伸手抓住腳尖邊緣可能會有所幫助。
Standing Up - Option 2:
站立方式 - 選項二:
  • From the seated position, students can roll onto their knees. Turning the snowboard at a 45 degree angle to the slope may help them roll.
    從坐姿開始,學生可以滾動到跪姿。將滑雪板以 45 度角轉向坡面,可能有助於他們滾動。
  • Once they are on their knees and facing uphill, it will be easier for them to stand and begin sliding on the toe edge.
    一旦他們跪著面向上坡,站起來並開始用腳尖邊滑行會比較容易。
  • If students can preform a small turn, they can stand up to the toeside, and immediately pivot the snowboard to the heel edge.
    如果學生能做出小轉彎,他們可以站起來到腳尖邊,並立即將滑雪板轉向腳跟邊。

SIDESLIPPING (TWO FEET ATTACHED)
側滑(雙腳綁定)

With their experience sideslipping with the rear foot out of the binding, students should now be able to easily transition into sideslipping with both feet attached.
在有了後腳脫離綁定側滑的經驗後,學生現在應該能輕鬆過渡到雙腳綁定側滑。

Explanation: Heelside Sideslipping
說明:腳跟側側滑

What: Sliding on the heelside edge, with both feet strapped to the board. The board is kept across the fall line as it slides down the hill.
內容:雙腳綁定在滑雪板上,利用腳跟側邊緣滑行。滑雪板保持橫跨下坡線滑下山坡。

Why: To begin to use our edges to control speed, and gain comfort sliding with both feet attached to the snowboard.
為什麼:開始使用雪板邊緣來控制速度,並習慣雙腳固定在雪板上滑行的感覺。
How: Begin facing down the slope, with both feet strapped to the snowboard. With weight evenly distributed over both heels, relax the ankles to reduce edge angle and begin sliding down the hill. Maintain a neutral position, arms out and within eyesight. To slow and stop, flex the hips and knees slightly (as if sitting down on a tall stool), and flex the ankles to engage the edge and slow the snowboard.
如何做:面向坡下,雙腳綁緊在雪板上。將體重均勻分布在兩腳後跟,放鬆腳踝以減少邊緣角度,開始沿坡面滑行。保持中立姿勢,雙臂張開並在視線範圍內。要減速和停止時,稍微屈曲臀部和膝蓋(如同坐在高腳椅上),並屈曲腳踝以啟動邊緣,減緩雪板速度。

Explanation: Toeside Sideslipping
說明:腳尖側側滑

What: Sliding down the hill on the toeside edge, with both feet strapped to the board. The board is kept across the fall line.
內容:雙腳綁緊在雪板上,利用腳尖側邊緣沿坡面滑行。雪板保持橫跨落線方向。
Why: To begin to use our edges to control speed, and gain comfort sliding with both feet attached to the snowboard.
為什麼:開始使用雪板邊緣來控制速度,並習慣雙腳綁在雪板上滑行的感覺。
How: Begin facing up the slope, with both feet strapped to the snowboard. With weight evenly distributed over both feet and the eyes looking uphill, relax the ankles to allow the edge angle to reduce, and begin sliding down the hill. Maintain a neutral position, arms out and within eyesight. To slow and stop, push the knees forward slightly and extend ankles into the slope to engage the edge and slow the snowboard.
如何做:面向坡頂站立,雙腳綁好在雪板上。將體重均勻分配在雙腳上,眼睛望向坡頂,放鬆腳踝以降低邊緣角度,開始順坡滑行。保持中立姿勢,雙臂張開並在視線範圍內。要減速和停止時,稍微向前推膝蓋,並將腳踝伸展向坡面,使邊緣咬住雪面以減慢速度。

Demonstration示範

Assemble the students so that they are able to see your demonstration. Sideslip down the hill in front of the students. Incorporated gentle stops every 1 to 2 metres.
將學生集合起來,讓他們能清楚看到你的示範。在學生面前沿坡面側滑下坡。每隔 1 到 2 公尺輕柔地停下。

Student Trial學生試練

Have the students try this exercise one by one. Remind them to check for oncoming traffic before heading out. Allow sufficient space between students to avoid collisions. Repeat the exercise until the students are relatively comfortable with it before moving on.
請學生依序嘗試此練習。提醒他們在出發前注意來車。保持學生間足夠距離以避免碰撞。重複練習直到學生相當熟悉後再繼續進行。

KEY WORDS: SIDESLIPPING關鍵字:側滑

  • Board across fall line
    橫跨落線滑行
  • Neutral position with head up, eyes looking forward
    中立姿勢,頭部抬起,眼睛向前看
  • Arms relaxed in front of body
    雙臂放鬆置於身體前方
  • Relax ankles to slide
    放鬆腳踝以滑行
  • Flex hips, knees, ankles to slow down
    屈曲臀部、膝蓋和腳踝以減速

Feedback回饋

Look for and correct:
尋找並修正:
  • Neutral position - eyes looking up or downhill, back tall, position relaxed, and arms controlled.
    中立姿勢——眼睛向上或向下看,背部挺直,姿勢放鬆,手臂控制穩定。
  • Weight distributed evenly to keep the board perpendicular to the fall line.
    體重均勻分布,保持滑雪板垂直於落線。
  • Sufficient edge angle to control speed.
    足夠的邊緣角度以控制速度。
  • Sufficient speed and momentum to aid balance.
    足夠的速度和動量以協助保持平衡。
  • Arms controlled and in front of body within periferal vision.
    手臂受控且位於身體前方的周邊視野範圍內。

Other suggested tactics:
其他建議策略:

  • “Stop & Go”, “Red Light / Green Light” exercises encourage comfort stopping and starting.
    「停—走」和「紅燈/綠燈」練習鼓勵舒適地停止與起步。
  • “Ballerina / Cowboy” Analogy: On the toeside edge, have students experiment with “standing like a ballerina” (with the ankles extended and on the toes). This position is unstable, and causes difficulty in moderating the amount of edge used. Encourage them to “stand like a cowboy”, with the ankle relaxed, and the weight centred over the balls of the feet. This “cowboy” position is helpful on the heelside edge, encouraging a wide base of support with the knees, and weight distributed evenly over the snowboard.
    「芭蕾舞者/牛仔」比喻:在腳尖邊緣時,讓學生嘗試「像芭蕾舞者一樣站立」(腳踝伸展並站在腳尖上)。這個姿勢不穩定,且難以控制使用的邊緣力度。鼓勵他們「像牛仔一樣站立」,腳踝放鬆,重心集中在腳掌前端。這個「牛仔」姿勢在腳跟邊緣時特別有幫助,能促進膝蓋寬闊的支撐基底,並使重量均勻分布在滑雪板上。

The purpose of this exercise is to experiment with pressure distribution and fall-line, and their influence on direction and speed control.
此練習的目的是嘗試壓力分布與落線,及其對方向與速度控制的影響。

Explanation說明

What: Moving side-to-side in a diagonal direction on the snowboard.
什麼:在滑雪板上以斜向左右移動。

Why: To learn to control and use our pressure distribution, and to control the side-to-side direction of travel.
為什麼:學習控制並運用壓力分布,以及控制左右移動的方向。

How:如何:
  • Begin on either the heel or toeside edge, in a sideslip.
    從腳跟邊或腳尖邊的側滑開始。
  • Initiate the diagonal movement by shifting slight pressure to the foot in the direction you want to move, and slightly extending the ankle on that lead foot, causing the board’s edge angle to reduce slightly. On the heelside edge, it may be helpful to relate to the Gas Pedal exercise - “push on the left foot gas pedal to go to the left, push on the right gas pedal to go to the right”.
    開始斜向移動時,將輕微的壓力轉移到你想移動方向的腳上,並稍微伸展該前腳的腳踝,使滑板的邊緣角度略微減小。在後跟邊緣時,將此動作與油門踏板練習聯想會有幫助——「踩左腳油門踏板向左移動,踩右腳油門踏板向右移動」。
  • Allow the snowboard to slide in a diagonal sideslip, maintaining pressure on the lead foot (approximately 60 / 40 60 / 40 60//4060 / 40 split between lead and rear foot).
    讓滑雪板以斜向側滑方式滑動,保持對前腳的壓力(前後腳約分配為 60 / 40 60 / 40 60//4060 / 40 )。
  • To stop, shift pressure back to even distribution over both feet, and resume sideslipping. Repeat in the opposite direction.
    要停止時,將壓力回復到兩腳均勻分布,並繼續側滑。然後換相反方向重複。

Demonstration示範

Demonstrations should be performed as close as possible to the students without jeopardizing their safety. The demonstration should consist of the following:
示範應盡可能靠近學生進行,但不得危及他們的安全。示範內容應包括以下項目:
  • Sideslip for approximately 1-2 metres.
    側滑約 1 至 2 公尺。
  • Increase pressure on one foot and relax the edge angle of that foot, causing the board to slide gently across the hill.
    加大一隻腳的壓力,並放鬆該腳的邊緣角度,使滑板輕輕滑過斜坡。
  • Gently shift pressure to the other foot, causing the board to slow, and sideslip.
    輕輕將壓力轉移到另一隻腳,使滑板減速並側滑。
  • Repeat the movement going the other way performing three to four pendulum movements.
    重複動作,往相反方向進行三到四次擺動。

Student Trial學生嘗試

Toeside & Heelside Pendulum: Since this particular exercise allows students to be more mobile, they must know exactly where to start and finish the exercise.
腳尖邊與腳跟邊擺動:由於這個特定的練習讓學生能夠更靈活移動,他們必須清楚知道從哪裡開始以及在哪裡結束練習。
Have students choose either their toe or heel edge to begin. Once comfortable with one edge, have them try the other, as they ultimately will need to learn both.
讓學生選擇從腳尖邊或腳跟邊開始。當他們對其中一邊感到熟悉後,再嘗試另一邊,因為最終他們需要學會兩邊。

Feedback回饋

Look for and encourage:
尋找並鼓勵:
  • Gradual transfer of pressure to help control direction.
    逐漸轉移壓力以協助控制方向。
  • Use of ankle/knee to release the board towards the fall line.
    利用腳踝/膝蓋釋放滑雪板朝向落線方向。
  • Adjusting pressure and edge angle to avoid stopping during direction changes.
    調整壓力與邊緣角度以避免在轉向時停下。
  • Proper use of edge angle to assist with speed control.
    適當使用邊緣角度以協助速度控制。
  • Controlled body position (eyes looking forward, arms quiet, knees flexed).
    控制身體姿勢(眼睛向前看,手臂保持靜止,膝蓋彎曲)。
  • Neutral position with eyes looking forward and arms controlled and within eyesight. Tall, relaxed position.
    中立姿勢,眼睛向前看,手臂受控且在視線範圍內。身體挺直且放鬆。
  • Weight distributed evenly to keep the board perpendicular to the fall line.
    重量均勻分布,以保持滑板垂直於落線。

KEY WORDS: HEELSIDE PENDULUM
關鍵詞:後跟擺動

KEY WORDS: TOESIDE PENDULUM
關鍵字:腳尖擺動

  • Start in a sideslip
    從側滑開始
  • Shift weight to left or right foot
    將重量轉移到左腳或右腳
  • Extend ankle and push same knee downhill slightly to initiate traverse
    伸展腳踝,並稍微將同側膝蓋向下坡方向推動以開始橫越
  • Look ahead向前看
  • Equalize weight and increase edge to slow/stop
    均衡重量並增加邊緣以減速/停止

- Start in a sideslip
- 從側滑開始

  • Shift weight to left or right foot
    將重量轉移到左腳或右腳
  • Slightly lower same heel to initiate traverse
    稍微降低相同的後跟以開始橫移
  • Look ahead向前看
  • Equalize weight and increase edge to slow/stop
    均衡重量並增加刃角以減速/停止

THE POWER PENDULUM力量擺盪器

The Power Pendulum is simply an extension of the Pendulum exercise. The Power Pendulum will appear slightly different from the Pendulum, in that students should now be comfortable guiding the snowboard through an arced path, as opposed to the diagonal sideslip of the Pendulum.
動力擺盪只是擺盪練習的延伸。動力擺盪看起來會與擺盪略有不同,因為學生現在應該能夠自如地引導滑雪板沿弧形路徑移動,而非擺盪時的斜向側滑。

Explanation說明

What: The Power Pendulum is a means of moving side to side at higher speeds, and with more board control. It is also a key manoeuvre in learning to turn, as we are allowing the board to pivot now.
什麼是:動力擺盪是一種在較高速度下左右移動的方法,並且能更好地控制滑雪板。這也是學習轉彎的關鍵動作,因為我們現在允許滑雪板進行旋轉。
Why: To learn to use rotation to assist with directional control.
為什麼:學習利用旋轉來輔助方向控制。

How:如何做:
  • Begin on either the heel or toeside edge, in a sideslip.
    從腳跟邊或腳尖邊的側滑開始。
  • Allow the nose of the snowboard to move down the hill by shifting pressure to the lead foot, and relaxing the ankle (as in the Pendulum). Also, incorporate a slight rotation of the hips and knees down the hill, which will allow the snowboard to travel more down the hill than across.
    透過將壓力轉移到前腳並放鬆腳踝(如同擺錘動作),讓滑雪板的板頭順著坡度向下移動。同時,稍微旋轉臀部和膝蓋朝坡下方向,這樣滑雪板會更多地沿坡度向下移動,而非橫向滑行。
  • As speed increases, flex the lead ankle and knee, and rotate hips back up the slope and feel the feet turning slightly in the boots to aid in steering. This will cause the snowboard to move more across the hill.
    隨著速度增加,彎曲前腳的腳踝和膝蓋,並將臀部旋轉回坡上方向,感覺腳在靴子內稍微轉動以協助轉向。這會使滑雪板更多地沿坡面橫向移動。
  • Continue these movements to guide the snowboard uphill, and slow down.
    持續這些動作,引導滑雪板向上坡移動,並減速。
  • Repeat in the opposite direction.
    反方向重複。

Demonstration示範

As this exercise is simply a variation of the Pendulum, the demonstration should highlight the new aspects - the rotation of the core (incorporating the hips, knees, and feet), as well as the altered path of travel of the snowboard. The path of travel will resemble a “falling leaf”, instead of a diagonal path across the hill.
由於此練習只是擺盪動作的變化,示範時應強調新的部分——核心旋轉(包含臀部、膝蓋和腳),以及滑雪板改變的移動路徑。移動路徑將類似「落葉飄落」,而非沿斜坡的對角線路徑。

Sideslip for approximately one metre Increase pressure on one foot, and slightly turn the core to guide the leading end of the snowboard down the hill. (E.g.: Regular footed rider travelling to the left would move the left shoulder downhill to initiate rotation of the core). Allow the edge angle to flatten slightly by relaxing the lead ankle. This will facilitate downhill movement of the board. As speed increases, maintain front foot pressure, and rotate the body (and feet slightly) back up the hill, through the fall line. Repeat the movements going the other direction.
側滑約一公尺,增加一隻腳的壓力,並稍微轉動軀幹,引導滑雪板的前端向下坡方向移動。(例如:慣用左腳的騎士向左行進時,會將左肩向下坡方向移動,以啟動軀幹的旋轉)。透過放鬆前腳踝,使邊緣角度稍微變平,這將有助於滑雪板向下坡移動。隨著速度增加,保持前腳壓力,並將身體(及腳部稍微)旋轉回上坡方向,穿越落線。重複相反方向的動作。

Student Trial學生試驗

Have students experiment with the Power Pendulum, using varying amounts of pressure and momentum.
讓學生嘗試使用動力擺盪,調整不同的壓力和動量。

KEY WORDS: POWER PENDULUM
關鍵詞:動力擺盪

  • Start in a sideslip
    從側滑開始
  • Shift weight to left or right foot and rotate hips downhill while reducing edge angle on that foot
    將重量轉移到左腳或右腳,並旋轉臀部朝向下坡,同時減少該腳的邊緣角度
  • Increase speed by riding downhill
    透過順坡滑行來增加速度
  • Rotate hips uphill and look uphill to slow down
    旋轉臀部朝向上坡並朝上坡方向看以減速
  • Turn head and look back downhill, repeat in new direction.
    轉頭並回望下坡方向,然後在新的方向重複動作。

Feedback回饋

Have students focus on using the eyes to guide them in the direction they wish to travel. Encourage them to “connect” the eyes, hips, and knees when rotating through the fall line. When rotating the body, ensure students are rotating with the core, and feel the feet turning slightly in the boots to aid in steering - guiding the snowboard back up the hill.
請學生專注於用眼睛引導他們想要前進的方向。鼓勵他們在沿著落線旋轉時,「連結」眼睛、臀部和膝蓋。旋轉身體時,確保學生是用核心旋轉,並感覺腳在靴子裡微微轉動以協助轉向——引導滑雪板回到上坡方向。

Pressure shifting in this exercise is a more dynamic and continuous process, and therefore requires students to be more comfortable balancing on the edge. Encourage students to use increased momentum (speed) to carry them across the fall line and back uphill.
這個練習中的壓力轉移是一個較為動態且連續的過程,因此需要學生更自在地在邊緣上保持平衡。鼓勵學生利用增加的動能(速度)帶動自己穿越落線並回到上坡方向。

POWER PENDULUM: PATH OF TRAVEL
動力擺:運動路徑

As students become more comfortable with the ability to move side to side, they may begin to experiment with momentum, and specifically allowing the snowboard to approach the fall line (increasing speed), and turn back uphill to control speed.
當學生對左右移動的能力越來越熟悉時,他們可能會開始嘗試利用動量,特別是讓滑雪板接近落線(增加速度),然後轉回上坡方向以控制速度。
The Power Pendulum is a great milestone in learning to snowboard - students can now control speed and direction, and will be mobile on most beginner / novice terrain. The Power Pendulum
動力擺盪是學習滑雪板的一個重要里程碑——學生現在可以控制速度和方向,並且能在大多數初學者/新手地形上移動自如。動力擺盪

GTURNING轉彎

Turning represents the next major milestone in learning to snowboard, and everything that the student has learned up until this point will be used in turning. With the skills to complete a Power Pendulum, and some simple guidance, the transition to turning is a simple process.
轉彎代表學習滑雪板的下一個重要里程碑,學生至此所學的一切都將用於轉彎。具備完成動力擺盪的技能,加上一些簡單的指導,轉向的過渡過程就很簡單。
Turning should be introduced with safety and clarity in mind. Use simple explanations, with visual cues, to explain the heel and toeside turns:
轉彎教學應以安全與清晰為前提。使用簡單的說明搭配視覺提示,來解釋腳跟轉彎與腳尖轉彎:
  • Heelside Turn: Begins on the toeside edge, crosses through the fall line on a flat base, and finishes on the heelside edge.
    腳跟轉彎:從腳尖邊緣開始,沿著平坦的底板穿越落線,最後結束於腳跟邊緣。
  • Toeside Turn: Begins on the heelside edge, crosses through the fall line on a flat base, and finishes on the toeside edge.
    腳尖轉彎:從腳跟邊緣開始,沿著平坦的底板穿越落線,最後結束於腳尖邊緣。
The S.A.F.E. concept is a recommended approach to introducing turning, and students may require some assistance to start, as well as lot’s of time to practice and experiment. Choose the supporting tactics / exercises carefully and with your student’s success in mind…some students will pick up turning immediately, while others will take more time and assistance.
S.A.F.E. 概念是介紹轉彎的推薦方法,學生可能需要一些協助來開始,並且需要大量時間練習與嘗試。請謹慎選擇輔助策略/練習,並以學生的成功為考量……有些學生能立即掌握轉彎技巧,而有些則需要更多時間與協助。

THE BEGINNER TURN初學者轉彎

The Beginner Turn introduces the concept of changing edges to the student. Using all the skills previously learned, students will now attempt their first edge changes in the fall line (with the board pointing downhill).
初學者轉彎向學生介紹改變邊緣的概念。運用先前學到的所有技巧,學生現在將嘗試在落線(滑板朝下坡方向)進行首次邊緣轉換。

Explanation說明

What: Turning the snowboard.
內容:轉動滑雪板。

Why: To move down the mountain using both edges, giving us complete control over our direction.
為什麼:使用雙邊邊緣下山,讓我們能完全掌控方向。

How: Heelside Turn如何做:腳跟邊轉彎

  • On the toeside edge (facing uphill), start to traverse across the slope, with slight pressure centred over the lead foot and the eyes looking forward in the direction of travel.
    在腳尖邊(面向上坡)開始橫越斜坡,輕微施壓於前腳,眼睛朝向前方行進方向。
  • Initiate the turn by rotating the head over the lead shoulder, and rotating the core toward the nose of the board.
    透過將頭部轉向前肩,並將軀幹旋轉朝向滑板前端來啟動轉彎。
  • Begin the edge change by moving the lead hip and knee in the direction of the turn (across the board), and allowing the board to flatten with slight flexion of the ankle. Feel the calf muscle press into the high back of the binding.
    開始轉換邊緣時,將前側的臀部和膝蓋朝轉彎方向(橫跨滑板)移動,並讓滑板在腳踝略微屈曲下趨於平坦。感受小腿肌肉壓在綁帶的高背部。
  • Allow the snowboard to approach the fall line and slide on a flat base briefly.
    讓滑雪板接近落線,並在平底上短暫滑行。

  • Continue to direct the board through the turn by rotating the knees, and using the lead knee and ankle flexion to change from the flat base to the heel edge.
    繼續透過旋轉膝蓋來引導滑板轉彎,並利用前膝和腳踝屈曲將滑板從平底轉換到腳跟邊緣。
  • The hips must continue to rotation through the turn in order to maintain an aligned and balanced position over the snowboard.
    臀部必須持續在轉彎中旋轉,以維持滑雪板上對齊且平衡的位置。
  • Once on the heel edge, flex the lower joints (knee, ankle) to engage the edge in the snow. Complete the turn by looking ahead and equalizing the weight distributed over the feet. Sideslip as necessary to slow down.
    一旦踩在後跟刃上,彎曲下方關節(膝蓋、腳踝)以使刃緊貼雪面。完成轉彎時,目視前方並均衡分配雙腳的重量。必要時側滑以減速。

How: Toeside Turn方法:腳尖轉彎

  • On the heelside edge (facing downhill), start to traverse across the slope, with slight pressure centred over the lead foot and the eyes looking forward in the direction of travel.
    在後跟刃(面向下坡)上,開始橫越斜坡,輕微施壓於前腳,眼睛朝向行進方向前方。
  • Initiate the turn by moving the lead hip and knee down the hill. Slightly extend the lead ankle to relax the edge angle, allowing the snowboard to move toward the fall line.
    透過將前髖和膝蓋向下坡移動來啟動轉彎。稍微伸展前腳踝以放鬆刃角,讓滑雪板朝向落線移動。
  • Rotate the hips to maintain upper body alignment (shoulders in line with the length of the snowboard) as the board moves through the turn.
    旋轉臀部以維持上半身的對齊(肩膀與滑雪板長度保持一致),當滑雪板通過轉彎時。
  • Allow the snowboard to approach the fall line, and slide on a flat base briefly.
    讓滑雪板接近落線,並短暫以平底滑行。
  • Continue to direct the board through the turn by rotating the hips through the turn, and flexing the lead knee and ankle to engage the toe edge.
    繼續透過旋轉臀部引導滑雪板完成轉彎,並彎曲前腳膝蓋和腳踝以啟動腳尖邊緣。
  • Once on the toe edge, push the lead knee forward toward the snow to complete the turn.
    一旦進入腳尖邊緣,將前腳膝蓋向雪面前推以完成轉彎。
  • Control the finish by equalizing the weight distributed over the feet.
    透過平衡分布在雙腳上的重量來控制結束動作。
  • Sideslip as necessary to slow down.
    必要時側滑以減速。

Student Trial學生練習

Encourage students to start with the heelside turn. Once one turn is completed, ensure students have control of their speed prior to starting the next turn. Encourage repetition and mileage once students are completing both the heel and toeside turns. For the students’ first turns, a hands-on approach may be necessary (see the “Dance Exercise”, below).
鼓勵學生從後跟轉彎開始。一旦完成一個轉彎,確保學生在開始下一個轉彎前能控制好速度。當學生能完成後跟和前腳趾兩種轉彎後,鼓勵多加練習和累積里程。對於學生的第一次轉彎,可能需要實際輔助(參見下方的「舞蹈練習」)。

Feedback回饋

Look for and correct:
尋找並修正:
  • Insufficient rotation of the core, or rotation of head/arms only. Focus on rotation of the core.
    核心旋轉不足,或僅旋轉頭部/手臂。請專注於核心的旋轉。
  • Correct edge change sequence. Sequence should be starting edge - flat base - finishing edge.
    正確的邊緣變換順序。順序應為起始邊緣 - 平底 - 結束邊緣。
  • Weight centred over lead foot (approximately 60 % 60 % 60%60 \% ). Shifting of pressure to the back foot in the fall line. Encourage continued front-foot pressure to turn completion.
    重量集中在前腳(約為 60 % 60 % 60%60 \% )。在下坡線上將壓力轉移到後腳。鼓勵持續施加前腳壓力以完成轉彎。

Beginner Turn Shape初學者轉彎形狀

It is important to remember that the slope of the hill will have a direct impact on the shape of the beginner’s initial turns, and on your demonstrations. For example, if the slope is very flat, the turn may become very long and utilize less sideslipping. On a steeper, narrower slope more sideslipping will be required between turns.
重要的是要記住,山坡的坡度會直接影響初學者最初轉彎的形狀,以及你的示範。例如,如果坡度非常平緩,轉彎可能會變得非常長,且較少使用側滑。在較陡且較窄的坡面上,轉彎之間將需要更多的側滑。

KEY WORDS: BEGINNER TURNS (HEELSIDE)
關鍵詞:初學者轉彎(腳跟邊)

  • Sideslip on toe edge
    腳尖邊側滑
  • Shift hips to front foot and slightly inside turn (downhill)
    將臀部移向前腳並稍微向內轉(下坡方向)
  • Rotate lead hip and knee toward nose of snowboard
    旋轉前側臀部和膝蓋朝向滑雪板前端
  • Look through turn with eyes
    用眼睛觀察轉彎
  • Allow board to flatten
    讓滑板平放
  • Flex ankle (toes up) to change edge
    屈曲腳踝(腳趾向上)以改變邊緣
  • Equal weight and increase edge to slow/stop
    均勻分配重量並增加邊緣壓力以減速/停止

1: Starting Edge 2: Flat Base 3: Finishing Edge
1:起始邊緣 2:平底 3:結束邊緣

KEY WORDS: BEGINNER TURNS (TOESIDE)
關鍵詞:初學者轉彎(腳尖側)

  • Begin with sideslip on heel edge
    從腳跟邊緣側滑開始
  • Shift hips towards front foot and slightly inside turn (downhill)
    將臀部移向前腳並稍微向內轉(下坡方向)
  • Move front knee over toes of front foot (downhill)
    將前膝移至前腳腳趾上方(下坡)
  • Allow board to flatten
    讓滑板平放
  • Push hips and knees inside turn slightly to change edge
    推動臀部和膝蓋向內轉動,稍微改變邊緣
  • Equal weight and increase edge to slow/stop
    均勻分配重量並增加邊緣角度以減速/停止

INTRODUCING TURNING: OTHER SUGGESTED TACTICS
介紹轉彎:其他建議的技巧

Students may need some extra help grasping their first turns. The following drills or exercises may help…
學生可能需要一些額外的幫助來掌握他們的第一個轉彎。以下的練習或訓練可能會有幫助……

1. THE STATIC ROTATION EXERCISE
1. 靜態旋轉練習

To introduce students to the movements required for turning in an environment free of consequence, have them remove their snowboard, and stand on flat terrain. Arrange the students to that the imaginary nose of their boards are pointed in the same direction. As you explain the sequence of movements required for turning, have them try to feel the movements at the same time. Focus on the movements of rotation with the core to initiate, as well as the edging movements with the knees and ankles that will be key in performing their first turns. This exercise can be completed prior to walking through the turns, or as a form of correction.
為了讓學生在沒有後果的環境中熟悉轉彎所需的動作,讓他們脫下滑雪板,站在平坦的地面上。安排學生使他們滑雪板的假想板頭朝向同一方向。在你解釋轉彎所需的動作順序時,讓他們同時嘗試感受這些動作。重點放在以核心旋轉啟動的動作,以及膝蓋和腳踝的邊緣動作,這些將是完成第一個轉彎的關鍵。這個練習可以在講解轉彎之前完成,或作為修正的方式。

2. GARLAND EXERCISE2. 花環練習

To introduce students to the initiation and completion of turns, have them begin in a traverse on either the toe or heel edge. Initiate rotation by moving the hips downhill slightly, and rotate the body as if starting a turn. As the snowboard approaches the fall line, reverse these movements and focus on rotation away from the fall line, and an increased edge angle to slow the snowboard.
為了讓學生了解轉彎的開始與完成,讓他們從腳尖或腳跟邊緣的橫向滑行開始。透過稍微將臀部向下坡方向移動來啟動旋轉,並旋轉身體,就像開始轉彎一樣。當滑雪板接近落線時,反向這些動作,並專注於遠離落線的旋轉,以及增加邊緣角度以減緩滑雪板速度。

3. J-TURNS3. J 型轉彎

Revisit the J-Turn from Phase 2: Sliding of the QuickRide System. Sometimes having students move back in their progression is a great way to kick-start forward progress!
回顧 QuickRide 系統第二階段:滑行中的 J 型轉彎。有時讓學生在進度上往回走,是啟動前進進展的好方法!

4. WALKING THROUGH THE TURNS
4. 走過轉彎動作

In order to relate the sequence of movements required for turning, students may find it beneficial to walk through a series of toe and heelside turns, with the board off. This will allow them to visualize and prepare for the next step.
為了說明轉彎所需的動作順序,學生可以在沒有滑雪板的情況下,走過一連串的腳尖轉和腳跟轉。這將幫助他們視覺化並準備下一個步驟。

5. THE DANCE EXERCISE
5. 舞蹈練習

The Dance Exercise can be completed on nearly flat terrain. To assist with the student’s first heelside turn, with your snowboard removed, stand behind the student (facing uphill and the student’s back). Provide assistance by holding the rider’s lead arm and trailing shoulder. Direct the student to begin the traverse and walk alongside them, verbally directing them through the movement of the turn. For the toeside turn, stand below the student, facing them, and walk them through the turn holding their hands/ arms for balance.
舞蹈練習可以在幾乎平坦的地形上完成。為了協助學生完成第一次腳跟轉,當你脫下滑雪板後,站在學生身後(面向上坡及學生背部)。透過握住騎乘者的前臂和後肩提供協助。指導學生開始橫向滑行,並與他們並行走動,口頭引導他們完成轉彎動作。至於腳尖轉,站在學生下方,面對他們,並握住他們的手或手臂以保持平衡,帶領他們完成轉彎。

6. THE "MOUSTACHE" (FALL LINE EDGE CHANGE)
6. 「八字鬍子」(落線邊緣變換)

The “Moustache” is an exercise used to help students learn to change edges, without the fear of accelerating in the fall line. It is also useful in getting students to experiment with riding forward, and “switch” (with the opposite foot leading).
「八字鬍子」是一個幫助學生學習變換邊緣的練習,讓他們不必害怕在落線上加速。這個練習也有助於學生嘗試向前滑行,以及「切換」(以相反腳領先)。

  • Initiate movement in the same fashion as the Power Pendulum, allowing the snowboard to move into the fall line (downhill) slightly.
    啟動動作方式與動力擺盪相同,讓滑雪板稍微沿著落線(下坡方向)移動。
  • Once sufficient speed and momentum has been achieved, have students rotate their core (as well as hips, knees, and feet) toward the uphill direction.
    當速度和動量達到足夠時,讓學生旋轉軀幹(以及臀部、膝蓋和腳)朝向上坡方向。
  • Direct the eyes upwards, over the lead shoulder. As the snowboard turns uphill, speed will decrease.
    將視線往上方,越過前方的肩膀。當滑雪板轉向上坡時,速度會減慢。
  • Have students feel the base flat on the snow momentarily. As the snowboard begins to slide back downhill, have students apply pressure to the opposite edge, and continue rotation to guide the snowboard across the slope.
    讓學生感受滑雪板底部短暫貼在雪面上。當滑雪板開始向下坡滑動時,讓學生施加壓力在相反的邊緣,並持續旋轉以引導滑雪板橫越斜坡。
  • Hands-on assistance may be required to allow students to successfully accomplish their first attempts. Position yourself uphill from students at the point of their first intended edge change. As they approach you, hold their uphill (lead) hand to stabilize them as they feel the board flat on the snow. As they slide back downhill away from you, direct them to shift pressure to the new edge, and continue to look in the new direction.
    可能需要實際協助,讓學生成功完成他們的第一次嘗試。站在學生預計第一次換邊的位置的上坡側。當他們接近時,握住他們上坡(前方)手以穩定他們,讓他們感受滑雪板貼在雪面上。當他們向下坡滑離你時,引導他們將壓力轉移到新的邊緣,並持續朝新的方向看。

GFLOW To learn to explore the mountain safely.
GFLOW 學習如何安全探索山區。

ADDING A TRAVERSE BETWEEN TURNS
在轉彎間加入橫移動作

Before beginning the Novice Turns, have students practice exiting the turns by traversing across the slope, instead of in a sideslip down the hill. As students finish the turn, have them focus on choosing a target at the side of the run, and maintaining sufficient edge angle to keep the board moving across the slope. This will help to create a rounder turn shape.
在開始初學者轉彎前,讓學生練習在轉彎結束時以橫移方式穿越斜坡,而非側滑下坡。當學生完成轉彎時,請他們專注於選擇跑道側邊的目標,並保持足夠的邊緣角度,使滑板能持續橫向移動。這將有助於形成更圓滑的轉彎弧線。

Abstract摘要

Once your students are able to complete both toeside and heelside turns, it’s time to add some fluidity to their riding. Also, the addition of vertical movement will enhance stability at higher speeds. Finally, speed control through varying the shape and size of turns will allow students to explore more of the mountain!
當學生能完成腳尖側和腳跟側轉彎後,就該開始讓他們的滑行更流暢。此外,加入垂直動作將提升高速時的穩定性。最後,透過改變轉彎的形狀和大小來控制速度,將讓學生能探索更多山區地形!

NOVICE TURNS初學者轉彎

During the Novice Turn, the students will be introduced to flexion of the knees and ankles to assist in maintaining balance and enhancing stability while turning. Also, the sensation of “releasing” the centre of mass from one turn to the next will help to link turns together smoothly.
在初學者轉彎階段,學生將學習膝蓋和腳踝的屈曲,以協助維持平衡並增強轉彎時的穩定性。同時,感受從一個轉彎到下一個轉彎時「釋放」重心的動作,有助於順暢地連接各個轉彎。

Explanation說明

A Novice Turn is similar to a Beginner Turn, except it is done with flexion of the lower joints after the fall line, to help with stability at higher speeds, and to assist riders to link turns together fluidly.
初學者轉彎類似於入門轉彎,不同之處在於在落線後會屈曲下肢關節,以幫助在較高速時保持穩定,並協助騎乘者流暢地連接各個轉彎。
What: A simple turn with flexion (bending) of the lower joints added.
什麼:加入下方關節屈曲(彎曲)的簡單轉彎動作。

Why: To help maintain balance and enhance stability in the later parts of the turn.
為什麼:幫助在轉彎後段維持平衡並增強穩定性。

How:如何:

  • Perform a heel or toeside Beginner Turn, focusing on rotation of the core, and the initiation of edging movements with the knees and ankles.
    執行腳跟或腳尖初學者轉彎,著重於核心旋轉,以及以膝蓋和腳踝開始邊緣動作。
  • As the new edge is engaged (at or below the fall line), begin to flex the hips, knees and ankles to lower the C.O.M. closer to the snow. Control the speed and direction of travel, through flexion.
    當新的刃邊接觸雪面(在落線上或以下)時,開始彎曲臀部、膝蓋和腳踝,將重心降低至更接近雪面的位置。透過彎曲動作來控制速度和行進方向。
  • Continue to traverse across the slope by maintaining edge “grip”, instead of sideslipping down the fall line, as in the Beginner Turn.
    繼續橫向滑行於斜坡上,保持刃邊的「抓地力」,而非像初學者轉彎時那樣沿落線側滑下坡。
  • Once under control, stand up to a normal body position and initiate the next turn.
    一旦控制穩定,站直回到正常姿勢,並開始下一個轉彎。

Demonstration示範

By now, it will probably be difficult to restrain the students since they will be excited about applying their new skills and getting mileage and practice! Link three medium sized turns followed by a stop. Exaggerate the movements of flexion after the fall line.
到現在為止,學生們可能已經很難被約束,因為他們會對應用新技能並獲得經驗和練習感到興奮!連續做三個中等大小的轉彎,接著停下。誇張地表現出落線後的屈膝動作。

KEY WORDS: NOVICE TURNS
關鍵詞:初學者轉彎

  • Begin in a traverse
    從橫向滑行開始
  • Shift hips towards front foot and slightly inside turn (downhill) to initiate beginner turn
    將臀部移向前腳並稍微向內轉(下坡方向)以啟動初學者轉彎
  • At fall line, flex hips, knees, and ankles to lower body position
    在落線處,屈曲臀部、膝蓋和腳踝以降低身體姿勢
  • Traverse out of turn, return to neutral vertical position
    轉彎時橫向移動,回到中立垂直姿勢

Student Trial學生練習

Have the students follow your path and stop where you do. As soon as one student is a safe distance away (I.E.: one turn ahead), ask another student to go. Make sure that they check for uphill traffic prior to starting. A “fol-low-the-leader” approach may be appropriate to continue this exercise afterwards and encourage mileage.
讓學生跟隨你的路徑並在你停下的地方停下。當一名學生與你保持安全距離(例如:領先一個轉彎)時,請另一名學生開始。確保他們在起步前檢查上坡方向的交通狀況。之後可採用「跟隨領隊」的方式繼續此練習,並鼓勵增加滑行距離。

Feedback回饋

Provide plenty of positive reinforcement.
提供大量正向強化。

Look for and correct if necessary:
尋找並在必要時修正:
  • Proper sequence of edging - all three phases.
    正確的刃邊順序——所有三個階段。
  • Neutral position. Smooth flexion as the board exits the fall line.
    中立位置。當滑雪板離開落線時,平順的屈膝動作。
  • Excessive speed caused by not edging across the fall line at the end of each turn, and not enough flexion.
    過快的速度是因為在每個轉彎結束時未沿落線刃邊,以及屈膝不足所致。
  • Encourage students to flex as a result of feeling increased speed and pressures after the fall line, as opposed to simply going through the movements of flexion.
    鼓勵學生因感受到落線後速度和壓力的增加而主動屈膝,而不是僅僅做屈膝的動作。

OTHER SUGGESTED TACTICS其他建議策略

  1. Traverse With Flexion / Extension: Prior to asking students to add vertical movement to their turns, have them practice a simple traverse across the slope experimenting with up and down motion. Once this is developed, they will be able to add the movements of extension to initiate the turn, and flexion after the fall line to enhance stability and control speed.
    屈伸橫越:在要求學生在轉彎中加入垂直動作之前,先讓他們練習在斜坡上做簡單的橫越,嘗試上下移動。一旦掌握後,他們就能在轉彎開始時加入伸展動作,並在落線後屈膝以增強穩定性和控制速度。
  2. Sliding 360’s: To further refine edge control and balance skills, you may have students attempt their first 360’s (sliding on snow!). Ask students to initiate a heel or toeside turn as they would normally, except at the completion of the turn, rather than traversing across the run, they will continue to rotate and allow the board to complete the second half of the rotation. Lowering the centre of mass will ensure stability in this exercise. Also, choose terrain carefully - flat enough to keep speed under control.
    滑行 360 度:為了進一步精進邊緣控制和平衡技巧,可以讓學生嘗試他們的第一次 360 度旋轉(在雪地上滑行!)。請學生像平常一樣啟動腳跟或腳尖轉彎,但在轉彎結束時,不是橫越斜坡,而是繼續旋轉,讓滑板完成旋轉的後半段。降低重心能確保此練習的穩定性。此外,請謹慎選擇地形——地面要夠平坦,以便控制速度。
  3. Follow The Leader: Encourage students to attempt to follow your path, giving them opportunity to experiment with their turning.
    跟隨領導者:鼓勵學生嘗試跟隨你的路徑,給予他們機會練習轉彎。

SPEED CONTROL速度控制

Increasing the amount of edge angle we use can reduce speed, but speed can also be controlled through turn shape and size.
增加使用的邊緣角度可以減速,但速度也可以透過轉彎的形狀和大小來控制。

This refers to the idea that a rounder, smaller turn will help to reduce speed on steep slopes. To increase speed, for example on flat terrain, a large, open turn is desirable.
這指的是較圓滑且較小的轉彎有助於在陡坡上減速。舉例來說,在平坦地形上,想要增加速度時,較大且開闊的轉彎是理想的。
Have students experiment by trying to maintain the same speed over varying slopes. Ask them to identify what they had to change in order to make rounder or more open-shaped turns. What about small or large turns? A follow-the-leader approach can work well here.
讓學生嘗試在不同坡度上保持相同速度。請他們指出為了做出較圓滑或較開放形狀的轉彎,需要改變什麼。小轉彎或大轉彎又該如何?採用「跟隨領導者」的方式在這裡會很有效。

KEY WORDS: SPEED CONTROL
關鍵字:速度控制

  • To reduce speed on steeper slopes, make rounder “closed” turns.
    在較陡的坡度上減速,請做出較圓滑的「封閉式」轉彎。
  • To increase or maintain speed on flatter terrain, create larger, more “open” turns.
    在較平坦的地形上增加或維持速度,請做出較大且較「開放式」的轉彎。

CUSTOMIZING QUICKRIDE FOR DIFFERENT STUDENTS
為不同學生客製化 QuickRide

The QuickRide System is meant to provide you with a flexible progression - not all students need the same steps or tactics to learn to turn!
QuickRide 系統旨在為您提供靈活的進階方式——並非所有學生都需要相同的步驟或策略來學習轉彎!

Remember, our goal should never be to simply “get through” the progression…our goal is to teach mobility and independence. In the first lesson (approximately 1.5 to 2.5 hours), the focus should be heel/toe edge control only. A good goal for the initial lesson is to have student reach the “Power Pendulum” stage on either the heel or toe edge.
請記住,我們的目標絕不應只是簡單地「完成」進階過程……我們的目標是教導學員具備移動能力與獨立性。第一堂課(約 1.5 至 2.5 小時)應專注於腳跟/腳尖邊緣控制。初次課程的一個良好目標是讓學生在腳跟或腳尖邊緣達到「動力擺盪」階段。

Second lessons should focus on “free and experimental” toe/heel edge control (particularly with experimenting or “reading” terrain), and introducing turning. Turning should only be encouraged/ taught if terrain is ideal and student is willing/capable. Emphasis should always be on mobility and independence first, and manoeuvres (like turning) second.
第二堂課應著重於「自由且實驗性」的腳尖/腳跟邊緣控制(特別是嘗試或「判讀」地形),並介紹轉彎技巧。只有在地形理想且學生願意且有能力的情況下,才應鼓勵或教授轉彎。重點應始終放在移動能力與獨立性優先,技巧(如轉彎)其次。

CUSTOMIZING THE PROGRESSION: TWO EXAMPLES
自訂進度:兩個範例

EXAMPLE 1範例一 EXAMPLE 2範例二
Student characteristics:
學生特徵:
Student characteristics:
學生特徵:
- Not athletic- 不擅長運動 - Athletic background- 有運動背景
- No exposure to snow sports
- 未接觸過雪上運動
- Avid skier- 熱衷滑雪者
- Limited exposure to other complimentary sports.
- 對其他互補運動的接觸有限。
- Has spent plenty of time in a snow/resort environment
- 曾在雪地/度假村環境中度過大量時間
- Nervous / apprehensive
- 緊張/不安
- Confident- 自信
- Has had three lessons and has progressed to the Power Pendulum stage.
- 已上過三堂課,並已進展到動力擺階段。
- Has had one lesson and progressed to the Power Pendulum stage.
- 已上過一堂課,並進展到動力擺階段。
TEACHING PROGRESSION: STAGE 4 ("TURNING"):
教學進度:第四階段(「轉動」):
TEACHING PROGRESSION: STAGE 4 ("TURNING"):
教學進度:階段 4(「轉向」):
1. Walking through the turns (board off)
1. 走過轉彎(不使用滑板)
1. Garland exercise1. 花環練習
2. Static rotation exercise (board off)
2. 靜態旋轉練習(不使用滑板)
2. 1-2 beginner turns with assistance
2. 1-2 次初學者轉彎(有協助)
3. Static rotation exercise (board on)
3. 靜態旋轉練習(板子裝上)
3. Beginner Turns (linked)
3. 初學者連續轉彎
4. Garland exercise4. 花環練習
5. Revisit J-Turns5. 重溫 J 型轉彎
6. Beginner Turns with assistance ("Dance Exercise")
6. 初學者輔助轉彎(「舞蹈練習」)
7. Beginner Turns (linked)
7. 初學者連續轉彎
Duration: 1.5 hours時長:1.5 小時 Duration: 30 minutes時間:30 分鐘
EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 Student characteristics: Student characteristics: - Not athletic - Athletic background - No exposure to snow sports - Avid skier - Limited exposure to other complimentary sports. - Has spent plenty of time in a snow/resort environment - Nervous / apprehensive - Confident - Has had three lessons and has progressed to the Power Pendulum stage. - Has had one lesson and progressed to the Power Pendulum stage. TEACHING PROGRESSION: STAGE 4 ("TURNING"): TEACHING PROGRESSION: STAGE 4 ("TURNING"): 1. Walking through the turns (board off) 1. Garland exercise 2. Static rotation exercise (board off) 2. 1-2 beginner turns with assistance 3. Static rotation exercise (board on) 3. Beginner Turns (linked) 4. Garland exercise 5. Revisit J-Turns 6. Beginner Turns with assistance ("Dance Exercise") 7. Beginner Turns (linked) Duration: 1.5 hours Duration: 30 minutes| EXAMPLE 1 | EXAMPLE 2 | | :--- | :--- | | Student characteristics: | Student characteristics: | | - Not athletic | - Athletic background | | - No exposure to snow sports | - Avid skier | | - Limited exposure to other complimentary sports. | - Has spent plenty of time in a snow/resort environment | | - Nervous / apprehensive | - Confident | | - Has had three lessons and has progressed to the Power Pendulum stage. | - Has had one lesson and progressed to the Power Pendulum stage. | | TEACHING PROGRESSION: STAGE 4 ("TURNING"): | TEACHING PROGRESSION: STAGE 4 ("TURNING"): | | 1. Walking through the turns (board off) | 1. Garland exercise | | 2. Static rotation exercise (board off) | 2. 1-2 beginner turns with assistance | | 3. Static rotation exercise (board on) | 3. Beginner Turns (linked) | | 4. Garland exercise | | | 5. Revisit J-Turns | | | 6. Beginner Turns with assistance ("Dance Exercise") | | | 7. Beginner Turns (linked) | | | Duration: 1.5 hours | Duration: 30 minutes |
As you can see from the above comparison, depending on the student characteristics, instructors may need to alter their approach to their lessons. Other factors that will influence your approach may be:
如上方比較所示,根據學生的特性,教練可能需要調整教學方式。其他會影響您教學方式的因素可能包括:
  • Student’s equipment學生的裝備
  • Snow conditions & weather (icy, powder, windy, foggy)
    雪況與天氣(結冰、粉雪、多風、起霧)
  • Physical capabilities / fitness level
    身體能力/體能水平
  • Emotional state (nervous, confident, tired, hungry)
    情緒狀態(緊張、自信、疲倦、飢餓)
In the early stages of teaching, the QuickRide System presents a proven method for teaching first-time snowboarders. Simply follow the steps, and you will help students learn to turn. As you gain teaching experience, your ability to adjust your approach will be refined and you may even find yourself using / creating new, novel tactics to help your students.
在教學的早期階段,QuickRide 系統提供了一套經過驗證的教學方法,適用於初學滑雪板者。只要依照步驟進行,就能幫助學生學會轉彎。隨著教學經驗的累積,你調整教學方式的能力會更加純熟,甚至可能會使用或創造新的、創意的策略來協助學生。

NOTES:備註:

SKILL DEVELOPMENT技能發展

Teaching beyond novice.超越新手的教學。

THE SKILL DEVELOPMENT MODEL(I.A.C.R.C.V.)
技能發展模型(I.A.C.R.C.V.)

The Coaching Association of Canada has presented a clear model for defining the learning process of our students.
加拿大教練協會提出了一個明確的模型,用以定義我們學生的學習過程。
DEVELOPMENT LEVEL發展階段 DESCRIPTION TEACHING IMPLICATIONS教學啟示 FEEDBACK
BENNER
4ヨNNI9ヨ
BENNER 4ヨNNI9ヨ| BENNER | | :--- | | 4ヨNNI9ヨ |
ACQUISITION

-騎士能協調並按正確順序執行動作。 -執行不穩定且缺乏精確度。 -騎士需要思考該做什麼(非自動化)。 -屬於「粗糙型態」-缺乏流暢性、流動感及同步性
-Rider can coordinate and execute movements in the correct order.
-Execution is inconsistent and lacks precision.
-Rider needs to think about what to do(not automatic).
-Is a"rough form"-lacks flow, fluidity,and synchronization.
-Rider can coordinate and execute movements in the correct order. -Execution is inconsistent and lacks precision. -Rider needs to think about what to do(not automatic). -Is a"rough form"-lacks flow, fluidity,and synchronization.| -Rider can coordinate and execute movements in the correct order. | | :--- | | -Execution is inconsistent and lacks precision. | | -Rider needs to think about what to do(not automatic). | | -Is a"rough form"-lacks flow, fluidity,and synchronization. |

-大量重複-不追求完美。 -允許騎士嘗試(試誤法)。 -透過提問開始培養理解與覺察。 -強調左右對稱。
-Lots of repetition-not looking for perfection.
-Allow rider to try(trial and error).
-Ask questions to start to develop understanding and awareness.
-Emphasize right and left symmetry.
-Lots of repetition-not looking for perfection. -Allow rider to try(trial and error). -Ask questions to start to develop understanding and awareness. -Emphasize right and left symmetry.| -Lots of repetition-not looking for perfection. | | :--- | | -Allow rider to try(trial and error). | | -Ask questions to start to develop understanding and awareness. | | -Emphasize right and left symmetry. |

-教學指導(什麼、在哪裡、何時、如何等)。 -清晰示範。 -不追求完美,但要大量練習。 -正向回饋。 -教學指導(什麼、在哪裡、何時、如何等)。 -清晰示範。 -不追求完美,但要大量練習。 -正向回饋。
-Instructional(what, where,when,how, etc.) -Clear demos -Not looking for perfect,but lots of practice. -Positive feedback.
-Instructional(what, where,when,how, etc.)
-Clear demos
-Not looking for perfect,but lots of practice.
-Positive feedback.
-Instructional(what, where,when,how, etc.) -Clear demos -Not looking for perfect,but lots of practice. -Positive feedback. -Instructional(what, where,when,how, etc.) -Clear demos -Not looking for perfect,but lots of practice. -Positive feedback.| -Instructional(what, where,when,how, etc.) -Clear demos -Not looking for perfect,but lots of practice. -Positive feedback. | | :--- | | -Instructional(what, where,when,how, etc.) | | -Clear demos | | -Not looking for perfect,but lots of practice. | | -Positive feedback. |
ヨHVIOヨNUヨINI CONSOLIDATION

-動作協調已具備。 -在穩定/簡單的條件下,技能能以控制與節奏執行。 -當騎士面臨壓力、條件改變或需求增加時,執行的某些元素仍然存在,但表現仍不穩定
-Coordination of movements is there.
-In stable/easy conditions,the skill is performed with control and rhythm.
-Some elements of the execution remain when the rider is under pressure,conditions change or demands increase,but perfor- mance is still inconsistent.
-Coordination of movements is there. -In stable/easy conditions,the skill is performed with control and rhythm. -Some elements of the execution remain when the rider is under pressure,conditions change or demands increase,but perfor- mance is still inconsistent.| -Coordination of movements is there. | | :--- | | -In stable/easy conditions,the skill is performed with control and rhythm. | | -Some elements of the execution remain when the rider is under pressure,conditions change or demands increase,but perfor- mance is still inconsistent. |

-讓騎士接觸各種情境。 -在不同條件下進行重複練習。 -以更複雜的任務來挑戰。 -減少反饋,鼓勵更多嘗試與錯誤。
-Expose rider to a variety of situations.
-Perform repetitions in varied conditions.
-Challenge with more com- plex tasks.
-Give less feedback,and encourage more trial and error.
-Expose rider to a variety of situations. -Perform repetitions in varied conditions. -Challenge with more com- plex tasks. -Give less feedback,and encourage more trial and error.| -Expose rider to a variety of situations. | | :--- | | -Perform repetitions in varied conditions. | | -Challenge with more com- plex tasks. | | -Give less feedback,and encourage more trial and error. |

-反饋可能更多來自學生內在(感覺、感受等)。 -更多解釋,目標是增加知識與理解。 -使用較大量的重複練習(搭配較少的反饋)。 -在反饋中使用提問以提升覺察。
-Feedback may come more from student internally(feelings, sensations,etc.)
-More explanation with the goal of increasing knowledge and understanding.
-Use higher volume of repetition(with lower volume of feedback).
-Use questions in feedback to increase awareness.
-Feedback may come more from student internally(feelings, sensations,etc.) -More explanation with the goal of increasing knowledge and understanding. -Use higher volume of repetition(with lower volume of feedback). -Use questions in feedback to increase awareness.| -Feedback may come more from student internally(feelings, sensations,etc.) | | :--- | | -More explanation with the goal of increasing knowledge and understanding. | | -Use higher volume of repetition(with lower volume of feedback). | | -Use questions in feedback to increase awareness. |
1YヨdX3 CREATIVE VARIATION創意變化

-動作在複雜情境中完美呈現。 -騎士擁有有效的個人風格。 -動作能依理想範本執行。 -騎士能自發性地創造新動作序列,以應對突發狀況。 -不熟悉的情境會展現出個人化且高效的動作。
-Movements are perfect in com- plex situations.
-Rider has a personal style that is effective.
-Movements can be performed according to the ideal model.
-Rider can come up with new se- quences of movements sponta- neously to cope with unexpected situations.
-Unfamiliar situations reveal personalized movements that are efficient.
-Movements are perfect in com- plex situations. -Rider has a personal style that is effective. -Movements can be performed according to the ideal model. -Rider can come up with new se- quences of movements sponta- neously to cope with unexpected situations. -Unfamiliar situations reveal personalized movements that are efficient.| -Movements are perfect in com- plex situations. | | :--- | | -Rider has a personal style that is effective. | | -Movements can be performed according to the ideal model. | | -Rider can come up with new se- quences of movements sponta- neously to cope with unexpected situations. | | -Unfamiliar situations reveal personalized movements that are efficient. |

-設置情境,讓騎士發展自己的解決方案。 -在要求嚴苛的情境中要求完美執行。
-Set up situations to allow riders to develop their own solutions.
-Ask for perfect execution in demanding situations.
-Set up situations to allow riders to develop their own solutions. -Ask for perfect execution in demanding situations.| -Set up situations to allow riders to develop their own solutions. | | :--- | | -Ask for perfect execution in demanding situations. |

-情境導向:根據環境而定。 -決策成為騎士與教練的共同決定。 -回饋可能聚焦於外在提示或內在提示。
-Situational:based on the environment.
-Decisions become joint decisions between rider and instructor.
-Feedback may focus on external cues or internal cues.
-Situational:based on the environment. -Decisions become joint decisions between rider and instructor. -Feedback may focus on external cues or internal cues.| -Situational:based on the environment. | | :--- | | -Decisions become joint decisions between rider and instructor. | | -Feedback may focus on external cues or internal cues. |
DEVELOPMENT LEVEL DESCRIPTION TEACHING IMPLICATIONS FEEDBACK "BENNER 4ヨNNI9ヨ" ACQUISITION "-Rider can coordinate and execute movements in the correct order. -Execution is inconsistent and lacks precision. -Rider needs to think about what to do(not automatic). -Is a"rough form"-lacks flow, fluidity,and synchronization." "-Lots of repetition-not looking for perfection. -Allow rider to try(trial and error). -Ask questions to start to develop understanding and awareness. -Emphasize right and left symmetry." "-Instructional(what, where,when,how, etc.) -Clear demos -Not looking for perfect,but lots of practice. -Positive feedback. -Instructional(what, where,when,how, etc.) -Clear demos -Not looking for perfect,but lots of practice. -Positive feedback." ヨHVIOヨNUヨINI CONSOLIDATION "-Coordination of movements is there. -In stable/easy conditions,the skill is performed with control and rhythm. -Some elements of the execution remain when the rider is under pressure,conditions change or demands increase,but perfor- mance is still inconsistent." "-Expose rider to a variety of situations. -Perform repetitions in varied conditions. -Challenge with more com- plex tasks. -Give less feedback,and encourage more trial and error." "-Feedback may come more from student internally(feelings, sensations,etc.) -More explanation with the goal of increasing knowledge and understanding. -Use higher volume of repetition(with lower volume of feedback). -Use questions in feedback to increase awareness." 1YヨdX3 CREATIVE VARIATION "-Movements are perfect in com- plex situations. -Rider has a personal style that is effective. -Movements can be performed according to the ideal model. -Rider can come up with new se- quences of movements sponta- neously to cope with unexpected situations. -Unfamiliar situations reveal personalized movements that are efficient." "-Set up situations to allow riders to develop their own solutions. -Ask for perfect execution in demanding situations." "-Situational:based on the environment. -Decisions become joint decisions between rider and instructor. -Feedback may focus on external cues or internal cues."| | DEVELOPMENT LEVEL | DESCRIPTION | TEACHING IMPLICATIONS | FEEDBACK | | :--- | :--- | :--- | :--- | :--- | | BENNER <br> 4ヨNNI9ヨ | ACQUISITION | -Rider can coordinate and execute movements in the correct order. <br> -Execution is inconsistent and lacks precision. <br> -Rider needs to think about what to do(not automatic). <br> -Is a"rough form"-lacks flow, fluidity,and synchronization. | -Lots of repetition-not looking for perfection. <br> -Allow rider to try(trial and error). <br> -Ask questions to start to develop understanding and awareness. <br> -Emphasize right and left symmetry. | -Instructional(what, where,when,how, etc.) -Clear demos -Not looking for perfect,but lots of practice. -Positive feedback. <br> -Instructional(what, where,when,how, etc.) <br> -Clear demos <br> -Not looking for perfect,but lots of practice. <br> -Positive feedback. | | ヨHVIOヨNUヨINI | CONSOLIDATION | -Coordination of movements is there. <br> -In stable/easy conditions,the skill is performed with control and rhythm. <br> -Some elements of the execution remain when the rider is under pressure,conditions change or demands increase,but perfor- mance is still inconsistent. | -Expose rider to a variety of situations. <br> -Perform repetitions in varied conditions. <br> -Challenge with more com- plex tasks. <br> -Give less feedback,and encourage more trial and error. | -Feedback may come more from student internally(feelings, sensations,etc.) <br> -More explanation with the goal of increasing knowledge and understanding. <br> -Use higher volume of repetition(with lower volume of feedback). <br> -Use questions in feedback to increase awareness. | | 1YヨdX3 | CREATIVE VARIATION | -Movements are perfect in com- plex situations. <br> -Rider has a personal style that is effective. <br> -Movements can be performed according to the ideal model. <br> -Rider can come up with new se- quences of movements sponta- neously to cope with unexpected situations. <br> -Unfamiliar situations reveal personalized movements that are efficient. | -Set up situations to allow riders to develop their own solutions. <br> -Ask for perfect execution in demanding situations. | -Situational:based on the environment. <br> -Decisions become joint decisions between rider and instructor. <br> -Feedback may focus on external cues or internal cues. |
In general, progress follows a clear predictable path. Keep in mind that skill development will vary from student to student, and there are many factors that can help a student progress, including:
一般而言,進展遵循明確且可預測的路徑。請記住,技能發展因學生而異,且有許多因素能幫助學生進步,包括:
  • Physical condition and fitness (strength and endurance)
    身體狀況與體能(力量與耐力)
  • Psychological factors心理因素
  • Equipment set-up and choice
    裝備設定與選擇
  • Environmental conditions (snow conditions and terrain)
    環境條件(雪況與地形)
  • Technical and tactical skill (experience and mileage)
    技術與戰術技能(經驗與里程)
For the purposes of this guide, skill development has been broken down into the corresponding phases below:
在本指南中,技能發展被劃分為以下相應階段:
  • Initiation & Acquisition: Beginner & Novice Students (See “Teaching Beginner Snowboarders”)
    啟蒙與習得階段:初學者與新手學生(參見「教導初學滑雪板者」)
  • Consolidation Phase: Intermediate Students
    鞏固階段:中級學生
  • Refinement Phase: Advanced Students
    精進階段:進階學生
  • Creative Variation Phase: Expert Students
    創意變化階段:專家學生
With each phase of development or skill level, students will undergo a progression through the skill development model in its entirety. However, when that student attempts a new skill, such as jumping for the first time, he/she will undergo a progression from initiation through to refinement and variation, in respect to the specific skills or movement being attempted. For example, an advanced rider who may be in the Refinement phase of his/her riding overall may be working within the Initiation or Acquisition phase when it comes to mastering a new skill or movement. Likewise, a beginner student may be working within the Creative Variation phase of a basic skill such as sideslipping, while still acquiring the skills to master turning.
隨著每個發展階段或技能等級的提升,學生將完整經歷技能發展模型的各個階段。然而,當學生嘗試一項新技能,例如第一次跳躍時,他/她將針對該特定技能或動作,從啟動階段一路進展到精進及變化階段。例如,一位整體處於精進階段的進階騎手,在掌握新技能或動作時,可能仍處於啟動或習得階段。同樣地,一位初學者在習得轉彎技巧的同時,可能已在基本技能如側滑的創意變化階段中練習。


THE 3 TEACHING REALMS: PISTE, OFF-PISTE & FREESTYLE
三大教學領域:雪道、非雪道與自由式

When our student progress through the novice skills, we begin to open up more variety in terrain and learning situations. In general, as instructors we can begin to look at skill development in three environments:
當我們的學生進展到初學者技能階段時,我們開始開放更多樣化的地形和學習情境。一般來說,作為教練,我們可以開始在三種環境中觀察技能發展:
  1. Piste: Groomed slopes, developing turning skills (including sliding and carved turns).
    滑雪道:整備過的坡面,發展轉彎技巧(包括滑行轉彎和刻滑轉彎)。
  2. Off-Piste: All-mountain terrain, un-groomed slopes (including bumps, steeps, trees, powder, steeps).
    非滑雪道:全山地形,未整備的坡面(包括波浪地形、陡坡、樹林、粉雪、陡坡)。
  3. Freestyle: Terrain Park & freestyle environments, where we can develop freeride & freestyle skills.
    自由式:地形公園與自由式環境,在這裡我們可以發展自由滑與自由式技巧。
The decision of which realm to work within is entirely up to the student and instructor, and may depend on a number of factors:
選擇在哪個領域工作完全由學生和講師決定,並可能取決於多種因素:
  • Student preferences學生偏好
  • Terrain available可用地形
  • Snow conditions雪況
  • Goals or objectives for the lesson
    課程目標或目的
Note: Experienced instructors will develop the skill necessary to allow these environments to cross over, using one to develop overall skill in the other(s). For example, skill development for freestyle / terrain park riding can be accomplished in piste or off-piste terrain.
注意:有經驗的教練將會培養出能讓這些環境相互交叉的技能,利用一種環境來發展其他環境的整體技能。例如,自由式/地形公園騎乘的技能發展,可以在滑雪道或非滑雪道地形中完成。

A TACTICAL APPROACH戰術性方法

Many of the tactics (or exercises) presented at the intermediate, advanced and expert stages are interchangeable from skill to skill. For example, Switch Riding is a useful tool for developing Balance, Pressure Control, and perhaps many other skills. It is important that instructors are aware of the Skills Concept, and can employ their Analysis & Improvement skills to watch a student and then formulate a plan to develop the skill that is lacking in their riding.
在中級、高級及專家階段所呈現的許多戰術(或練習)在各項技能間是可以互換的。例如,反向騎乘(Switch Riding)是發展平衡、壓力控制,甚至許多其他技能的有用工具。教練必須了解技能概念,並能運用他們的分析與改進技能,觀察學生後,制定計畫來發展學生騎乘中所缺乏的技能。

This will mean drawing on experiences and previously used tactics to accomplish the task at hand.
這將意味著要運用過去的經驗和先前使用過的戰術來完成當前的任務。

NTERMEDIATE SKILL DEVELOPMENT
中階技能發展

At this stage, students should be comfortable with the following skills:
在此階段,學生應該已熟悉以下技能:
  • Linking sliding turns on green, groomed runs.
    在綠色整備雪道上連續滑行轉彎。
  • Controlling speed using turn shape and size.
    利用轉彎的形狀和大小來控制速度。
Consolidation of the various riding skills will help to progress these students on to more challenging intermediate terrain and manoeuvres.
鞏固各種滑行技巧將有助於學生進一步挑戰中級地形和動作。
PISTE:滑行路線:

DEVELOPING SLIDING TURNS
發展滑行轉彎技巧

The Student學生

These snowboarders have the ability to perform novice turns on green runs. At times they find themselves getting a little out of control, especially on steeper intermediate slopes.
這些滑雪板初學者能夠在綠色雪道上完成初級轉彎。有時他們會發現自己有點失控,尤其是在較陡的中級雪道上。

Terrain地形

Green and blue runs, groomed conditions.
綠色及藍色滑道,整備良好。

Goals目標

  • To continue to develop the basic riding competencies:
    持續發展基本騎乘能力:
  • Centred, mobile stance居中、移動姿勢
  • Turning with the lower body
    以下半身轉動
  • Balance over the edge
    在邊緣保持平衡
  • To control speed using turn shape.
    利用轉彎形狀來控制速度。
  • To ride steeper slopes.
    騎乘較陡的坡度。
  • To improve coordination skills and consistency of turn shape.
    提升協調能力與轉彎形狀的一致性。
  • To link symmetrical sliding turns on blue slopes.
    在藍色坡道上連結對稱的滑行轉彎。

Skill Development Approaches & Example Tactics
技能發展方法與範例策略

POSITION & BALANCE:姿勢與平衡:

Development of a centred, relaxed, mobile position.
發展一個居中、放鬆且靈活的姿勢。
  • Motorboat Turns摩托艇轉彎
  • Sliding 360’s (on-snow)滑行 360 度轉彎(雪地上)

PIVOT:樞軸轉動:

Development of efficient low-er-body rotational movements (hips, knees, feet).
發展有效率的下半身旋轉動作(臀部、膝蓋、腳部)。
  • Fall-Line Pivot Exercise
    順坡樞軸轉動練習
  • Static Steering Exercise
    靜態轉向練習
  • Headlights On Knees頭燈對膝蓋

EDGING:邊緣控制:

Develop increased edge angle, and earlier in the arc (at the fall-line), using a combination of inclination and angulation movements.
在弧線的早期階段(在落線處),透過傾斜與角度調整的組合,發展更大的邊緣角度。
  • Static Edging Exercise靜態邊緣控制練習
  • Spray The Trees噴灑樹木
  • Clock Face Analogy時鐘面比喻

PRESSURE:壓力:

Exposure to passive pressure management, through up and down movements in the lower joints as terrain and speed dictate.
透過下肢關節隨地形和速度變化的上下運動,接觸被動壓力管理。
  • Riding Varied Terrain騎乘多樣地形
  • Hop Turns (Sliding)滑行轉彎
  • Flexion / Extension Exercises (in traverse or between turns)
    屈曲/伸展運動(在橫向移動或轉彎之間)

TIMING & COORDINATION:時機與協調:

Development of smooth, fluid movements, and begin to explore variation in movements to make different sized turns.
發展流暢、順暢的動作,並開始探索動作變化,以做出不同大小的轉彎。
  • Tornado Turns龍捲風轉彎
  • Follow The Leader跟隨領導者

ANALYSIS & IMPROVEMENT GUIDE: SLIDING TURNS (INTERMEDIATE)
分析與改進指南:滑行轉彎(中級)

OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS
Snow being sprayed down the slope instead of to the sides.
雪花被噴灑向坡下,而非向兩側。
Too much pivot, weak edging skills.
過度轉軸,邊緣技巧薄弱。

邊緣技巧 開始在轉彎時透過傾斜較早施加更多邊緣力,並運用下半身(膝蓋)來操控滑板。轉軸 過度使用上半身旋轉動作。專注於臀部和膝蓋來帶動轉彎。
Edging
Start applying more edge earlier in the turn through inclination, and engage lower body (knees) to steer board.
Pivot
Over-use of upper body rotation movements. Focus on hips and knees creating turn.
Edging Start applying more edge earlier in the turn through inclination, and engage lower body (knees) to steer board. Pivot Over-use of upper body rotation movements. Focus on hips and knees creating turn.| Edging | | :--- | | Start applying more edge earlier in the turn through inclination, and engage lower body (knees) to steer board. | | Pivot | | Over-use of upper body rotation movements. Focus on hips and knees creating turn. |
Dead spot between turns.
轉彎間有死角。
Unable to link turns.
無法連續銜接轉彎。

時機與協調 使用一個強調轉彎啟動與完成的落線樞軸練習。鼓勵學生向前看並規劃行進路徑。
Timing & Coordination
Use a Fall-Line Pivot Exercise which stresses turn initiation and completion. Encourage students to look ahead and plan their path of travel.
Timing & Coordination Use a Fall-Line Pivot Exercise which stresses turn initiation and completion. Encourage students to look ahead and plan their path of travel.| Timing & Coordination | | :--- | | Use a Fall-Line Pivot Exercise which stresses turn initiation and completion. Encourage students to look ahead and plan their path of travel. |
Board chattering on heelside turns.
腳跟側轉彎時滑板震動。
Static (straight or locked) knees.
膝蓋僵硬(直立或鎖死)。

壓力 讓學生進行獨立的腳跟側與腳尖側轉彎,專注於髖關節、膝蓋和腳踝的微調,以維持邊緣的持續壓力。
Pressure
Have student perform isolated heelside & toeside turns, concentrating on slight adjustments in flex of the hips knees and ankles, to maintain constant pressure on the edge.
Pressure Have student perform isolated heelside & toeside turns, concentrating on slight adjustments in flex of the hips knees and ankles, to maintain constant pressure on the edge.| Pressure | | :--- | | Have student perform isolated heelside & toeside turns, concentrating on slight adjustments in flex of the hips knees and ankles, to maintain constant pressure on the edge. |
OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS Snow being sprayed down the slope instead of to the sides. Too much pivot, weak edging skills. "Edging Start applying more edge earlier in the turn through inclination, and engage lower body (knees) to steer board. Pivot Over-use of upper body rotation movements. Focus on hips and knees creating turn." Dead spot between turns. Unable to link turns. "Timing & Coordination Use a Fall-Line Pivot Exercise which stresses turn initiation and completion. Encourage students to look ahead and plan their path of travel." Board chattering on heelside turns. Static (straight or locked) knees. "Pressure Have student perform isolated heelside & toeside turns, concentrating on slight adjustments in flex of the hips knees and ankles, to maintain constant pressure on the edge."| OBSERVATION | ANALYSIS | IMPROVEMENTS | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | Snow being sprayed down the slope instead of to the sides. | Too much pivot, weak edging skills. | Edging <br> Start applying more edge earlier in the turn through inclination, and engage lower body (knees) to steer board. <br> Pivot <br> Over-use of upper body rotation movements. Focus on hips and knees creating turn. | | Dead spot between turns. | Unable to link turns. | Timing & Coordination <br> Use a Fall-Line Pivot Exercise which stresses turn initiation and completion. Encourage students to look ahead and plan their path of travel. | | Board chattering on heelside turns. | Static (straight or locked) knees. | Pressure <br> Have student perform isolated heelside & toeside turns, concentrating on slight adjustments in flex of the hips knees and ankles, to maintain constant pressure on the edge. |

PISTE:滑雪道:

INTRODUCING CARVING介紹雕刻轉彎

The carved turn utilizes the board’s sidecut and maximum edge angle, leaving only a “pencil line” track in the snow. At this stage, the student’s first goal will be to become comfortable with riding on this pure edge. These students will need to be familiar with the effect of sidecut on the shape of the carved turn. The snowboard’s sidecut acts on an arc to help assist the snowboard in turning - the smaller the sidecut radius, the tighter the carved turn. The challenge in introducing carving is in eliminating pivoting movements, which disrupt the pure carved track in the snow.
雕刻轉彎利用滑雪板的側切弧線和最大邊緣角度,在雪地上只留下「鉛筆線」般的軌跡。在這個階段,學生的首要目標是習慣在這種純邊緣上滑行。這些學生需要熟悉側切弧線對雕刻轉彎形狀的影響。滑雪板的側切弧線呈弧形,有助於輔助滑雪板轉彎——側切半徑越小,雕刻轉彎越緊湊。引入雕刻技巧的挑戰在於消除旋轉動作,因為旋轉會破壞雪地上純淨的雕刻軌跡。

The Student學生

These riders are able to perform sliding turns on blue slopes. They have good understanding of all skills as applied in sliding turns.
這些滑雪者能夠在藍色雪道上進行滑行轉彎。他們對滑行轉彎所需的各項技巧有良好的理解。

Terrain地形

Green Runs: Beginning with flatter green runs and progressing to slightly steeper groomed conditions (still on green terrain), which allows for adequate speed control.
綠色雪道:從較平緩的綠色雪道開始,逐漸進入稍微陡峭且整備良好的雪道(仍屬於綠色地形),以便能夠適當控制速度。

Goals目標

  • To develop edge angle until carving occurs, utilizing the lower joints (angulation).
    發展邊緣角度直到產生刻滑,利用下方關節(角度調整)。

  • To maintain a centred position over both feet, with weight distributed evenly and prevents pivoting.
    保持雙腳中心位置,體重均勻分布,防止旋轉。
  • To develop a better sense of balance on a pure carved edge.
    培養在純刻滑邊緣上的平衡感。
  • To link symmetrical carved turns on green slopes.
    在綠色坡道上連結對稱的刻滑轉彎。

Skill Development Approaches & Example Tactics
技能發展方法與範例策略

POSITION & BALANCE:姿勢與平衡:

Equal weight over both feet with a relaxed position that allows for adjustment in balance.
雙腳均勻受力,保持放鬆的姿勢,以便隨時調整平衡。
  • Carved Traverses雕刻式橫移
  • “Stop n’ Hops”「停下並跳躍」
  • Hop Between Turns在回合間跳躍

PIVOT:樞軸轉動:

Minimize pivoting movements to reduce sliding of the tail of the board.
將樞軸轉動動作減到最低,以減少滑板尾部的滑動。
  • Alignment exercises (Motor Boat, Elbows Pointing to Nose/ Tail)
    對齊練習(摩托艇姿勢,手肘指向鼻子/尾巴)
  • Arms restricted - behind back, at sides, etc. (to minimize large rotational movements)
    手臂受限-放在背後、身側等(以減少大幅旋轉動作)

EDGING:邊緣技巧:

Develop balance over a “pure” carved edge and smooth application of edge.
培養在「純」刻邊上的平衡感及邊緣的平順運用。
  • Static Edging Exercise靜態邊緣練習
  • Carved Traverses雕刻橫越
  • Drinks on Shoulders肩上飲料
  • Pour Water from the Boots
    從靴子倒水

PRESSURE:壓力:

Passive control of pressures due to speed or terrain changes.
因速度或地形變化而被動控制壓力。
  • Cowboy Knees牛仔膝蓋
  • Relaxed Knees & Ankles
    放鬆的膝蓋與腳踝

TIMING & COORDINATION:時機與協調:

Smooth, fluid movements for turn symmetry and increased stability.
流暢、順暢的動作以達成轉彎對稱性及提升穩定性。
  • Counting計數
  • Tornado Turns to Decreased Radius
    龍捲風轉彎至半徑縮小
  • Pour Water From Boots
    從靴子中倒出水

ANALYSIS & IMPROVEMENT GUIDE: INTRO TO CARVED TURNS
分析與改進指南:雕刻轉彎入門

OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS
Board sliding out (not leaving a pencil line track).
滑板側滑(未留下鉛筆線般的軌跡)。
Insufficient edging. Too much pivot (weight too far forward over front foot).
邊緣抓地力不足。轉動過度(重心過於前傾,壓在前腳上)。

姿勢與平衡/邊緣抓地力 讓學生進行單獨的橫向滑行或弧線練習,專注於雙腳均勻施壓或稍微往板尾施壓,並調整邊緣角度以停止打滑。
Position & Balance / Edging
Have student perform isolated traverses or arcs concentrating on equal pressure over both feet or slightly back on the board, and adjusting edge angle to stop skidding.
Position & Balance / Edging Have student perform isolated traverses or arcs concentrating on equal pressure over both feet or slightly back on the board, and adjusting edge angle to stop skidding.| Position & Balance / Edging | | :--- | | Have student perform isolated traverses or arcs concentrating on equal pressure over both feet or slightly back on the board, and adjusting edge angle to stop skidding. |
Board chattering on heelside turns.
腳跟側轉彎時滑板震動。
Static (straight or locked) knees.
膝蓋僵硬(直或鎖死)。

壓力 讓學生進行獨立的腳跟側和腳尖側雕刻轉彎,專注於膝蓋輕微調整彎曲度,以保持邊緣的持續壓力。
Pressure
Have student perform isolated heelside & toeside carved turns, concentrating on slight adjustments in flex of the knees, to maintain constant pressure on the edge.
Pressure Have student perform isolated heelside & toeside carved turns, concentrating on slight adjustments in flex of the knees, to maintain constant pressure on the edge.| Pressure | | :--- | | Have student perform isolated heelside & toeside carved turns, concentrating on slight adjustments in flex of the knees, to maintain constant pressure on the edge. |
Student breaks at the waist to touch snow in middle of arc.
學生在弧線中段腰部彎曲觸碰雪面。
Inclining and/or breaking the neutral position.
傾斜和/或打破中立位置。

姿勢與平衡/邊緣控制 引入「肩上平衡飲料」(以及身體角度)的比喻,以鼓勵在邊緣滑行時保持更穩定的身體姿勢,並利用下半身關節來創造身體角度。
Position & Balance / Edging
Introduce the analogy of balancing "drinks on the shoulders" (and angulation) to encourage a more stable body position while on edge, and the use of lower body joints to create angulation.
Position & Balance / Edging Introduce the analogy of balancing "drinks on the shoulders" (and angulation) to encourage a more stable body position while on edge, and the use of lower body joints to create angulation.| Position & Balance / Edging | | :--- | | Introduce the analogy of balancing "drinks on the shoulders" (and angulation) to encourage a more stable body position while on edge, and the use of lower body joints to create angulation. |
OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS Board sliding out (not leaving a pencil line track). Insufficient edging. Too much pivot (weight too far forward over front foot). "Position & Balance / Edging Have student perform isolated traverses or arcs concentrating on equal pressure over both feet or slightly back on the board, and adjusting edge angle to stop skidding." Board chattering on heelside turns. Static (straight or locked) knees. "Pressure Have student perform isolated heelside & toeside carved turns, concentrating on slight adjustments in flex of the knees, to maintain constant pressure on the edge." Student breaks at the waist to touch snow in middle of arc. Inclining and/or breaking the neutral position. "Position & Balance / Edging Introduce the analogy of balancing "drinks on the shoulders" (and angulation) to encourage a more stable body position while on edge, and the use of lower body joints to create angulation."| OBSERVATION | ANALYSIS | IMPROVEMENTS | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | Board sliding out (not leaving a pencil line track). | Insufficient edging. Too much pivot (weight too far forward over front foot). | Position & Balance / Edging <br> Have student perform isolated traverses or arcs concentrating on equal pressure over both feet or slightly back on the board, and adjusting edge angle to stop skidding. | | Board chattering on heelside turns. | Static (straight or locked) knees. | Pressure <br> Have student perform isolated heelside & toeside carved turns, concentrating on slight adjustments in flex of the knees, to maintain constant pressure on the edge. | | Student breaks at the waist to touch snow in middle of arc. | Inclining and/or breaking the neutral position. | Position & Balance / Edging <br> Introduce the analogy of balancing "drinks on the shoulders" (and angulation) to encourage a more stable body position while on edge, and the use of lower body joints to create angulation. |

INTRODUCTION TO TERRAIN ADAPTATION
地形適應入門

During this phase, students can be introduced to riding more variable, un-groomed terrain. Basic skills can be evolved into the fundamental skills required for negotiating and adapting to freeride terrain. The goal here is to refine balance and mobility skills for controlled riding on variable runs. This could include any natural and intentionally built terrain features like: small rollers, small bumps, berms, banks, snowboard cross tracks, small halfpipes and terrain park features, etc.
在此階段,學生可以開始接觸更多變化且未整備的地形。基本技巧可以發展成應對和適應自由滑地形所需的基本技能。此階段的目標是精進平衡與靈活度技巧,以便在多變的滑道上進行受控滑行。這可能包括任何自然或刻意建造的地形特徵,如:小起伏、小顛簸、彎道、斜坡、單板越野賽道、小型半管及地形公園設施等。

The Student學生

Competent intermediate on groomed snow, perhaps intimidated by some of the variable terrain features found on most trails, or unable to maintain control over undulating and rough or un-groomed slopes.
在整理過的雪地上具備中等能力,可能會被大多數滑雪道上的一些多變地形特徵嚇到,或無法控制起伏不平及未整理的坡面。

Terrain地形

  • Un-groomed trails.未整理的滑雪道。
  • Blue runs with small rollers, small bumps, berms and banks.
    藍線適合搭配小滾輪、小顛簸、彎道和斜坡。
  • BX tracks, half-pipes, terrain parks (easier sections).
    BX 賽道、半管、地形公園(較簡單區段)。

Goals目標

  • To maintain confidence, control, fluidity, and balance required for safely negotiating rougher, undulating terrain and terrain features found on un-groomed trails.
    維持自信、控制力、流暢度和平衡感,以安全應對較崎嶇起伏的地形及未整修步道上的地形特徵。

Skill Development Approaches & Example Tactics
技能發展方法與範例策略

POSITION & BALANCE:姿勢與平衡:

Relaxed, athletic position, with COM slightly lower than normal, for stability and mobility.
放鬆且具運動感的姿勢,重心(COM)略低於平常,以增強穩定性與靈活性。
  • Cowboy Knees牛仔膝蓋
  • Any balance-specific exercises, in undulating terrain.
    任何在起伏地形上的平衡專項訓練。

PIVOT:樞軸:

Turning the snowboard using knees, and ankles and feet, allowing the upper-body to maintain stability.
利用膝蓋、腳踝和腳轉動滑雪板,同時讓上半身保持穩定。
  • Banking turns through a halfpipe.
    銀行在半管中轉彎。
  • Turning in the troughs of bumps.
    在顛簸的凹槽中轉彎。
  • Fish Turns魚式轉彎
  • “Twist The Disks” Analogy
    「扭轉圓盤」類比

EDGING:邊緣控制:

Balanced over the edge using a combination of inclination and angulation movements.
利用傾斜與角度動作的組合,在邊緣上保持平衡。
  • Stop-And-Hops停頓跳躍
  • Any edging-specific exercises, in undulating terrain.
    任何在起伏地形中針對邊緣控制的練習。

PRESSURE:壓力:

Allowing the lower body to move freely, absorbing pressure from terrain.
允許下半身自由移動,吸收地形帶來的壓力。
  • Traverse through bumps with passive absorption.
    以被動吸收方式穿越顛簸。
  • Shock Absorbers - legs extending and retracting in relation to terrain
    避震器——腿部根據地形伸展和收縮。
  • “Pumping” rollers「泵動」滾輪
  • Riding varied terrain (keeping the board in contact with the terrain)
    騎乘多變地形(保持滑板與地形接觸)

TIMING & COORDINATION:時機與協調:

Looking ahead, appropriate pace of movements, coordination skills.
向前觀察,適當的動作節奏,協調能力。
  • Riding through BX course, “whoops”, banked turns and berms.
    騎乘穿越 BX 賽道,「哎呀」,傾斜轉彎和斜坡。
  • Dropping-in to a small halfpipe or gulley.
    從小型半管或峽谷邊緣下滑。
  • Linking turns in varied terrain.
    在多變地形中連續轉彎。
  • Experimenting with rapid vs. slow movements.
    嘗試快速與緩慢的動作。

ANALYSIS & IMPROVEMENT GUIDE: BASIC TERRAIN ADAPTATION
分析與改進指南:基本地形適應

OBSERV/ATION觀察 ANALYSS IMPROVEMENTS
Getting bounced around in choppy snow.
在顛簸的積雪中被彈來彈去。
Lower joints too stiff or locked.
下肢關節過於僵硬或鎖死。

姿勢與平衡 嘗試降低重心並放鬆關節。確保上下半身保持對齊。
Position & Balance
Try to lower C.O.M. and relax joints. Ensure upper and lower body are aligned.
Position & Balance Try to lower C.O.M. and relax joints. Ensure upper and lower body are aligned.| Position & Balance | | :--- | | Try to lower C.O.M. and relax joints. Ensure upper and lower body are aligned. |
Front of board lifts in air while riding over rolls, speed increasing.
當騎乘過滾軸時,板頭會抬起離地,速度加快。
Lack of mobility in lower joints.
下肢關節活動度不足。

壓力 嘗試像獨立避震器一樣使用雙腿,根據地形需求推壓與收縮。
Pressure
Try to use legs like independent shock absorbers, pushing and retracting, as terrain requires.
Pressure Try to use legs like independent shock absorbers, pushing and retracting, as terrain requires.| Pressure | | :--- | | Try to use legs like independent shock absorbers, pushing and retracting, as terrain requires. |
Getting air over rollers.
在滾筒上方起跳。
Weight too far over back foot.
重心過於偏向後腳。

位置與平衡 在顛簸路段橫向移動,強調保持臀部低且位於雙腳之間,並利用下肢關節推動/收回。
Position & Balance
Traverse over bumps, emphasizing keeping the hips low and between the feet, and using the lower joints to push/retract.
Position & Balance Traverse over bumps, emphasizing keeping the hips low and between the feet, and using the lower joints to push/retract.| Position & Balance | | :--- | | Traverse over bumps, emphasizing keeping the hips low and between the feet, and using the lower joints to push/retract. |
Unable to pivot the board in bumpy terrain.
無法在顛簸地形中轉動滑板。

下肢關節僵硬。身體姿勢過於直立。使用上半身來轉彎。
Stiff lower joints. Body position too tall.
Using the upper-body to create turns.
Stiff lower joints. Body position too tall. Using the upper-body to create turns.| Stiff lower joints. Body position too tall. | | :--- | | Using the upper-body to create turns. |

壓力控制/姿勢與平衡 嘗試在緩坡地形上橫向滑行或直線滑行,強調在坡頂的屈曲,以及滑板通過「低谷」時的伸展。站姿的靈活性將提升在起伏地形中的平衡。樞軸/姿勢與平衡 著重讓上半身保持「靜止」,同時利用膝蓋和腳來帶動下半身轉動滑雪板。
Pressure Control / Position & Balance
Try traversing or straight running over gently rolling terrain, emphasizing flexion at the top of the roll, and extension as the board moves through the "troughs". Mobility in stance will improve balance in rollers.
Pivot / Position & Balance
Focus on allowing the upper body to stay "quiet" while the lower body pivots the snowboard, using the knees and feet.
Pressure Control / Position & Balance Try traversing or straight running over gently rolling terrain, emphasizing flexion at the top of the roll, and extension as the board moves through the "troughs". Mobility in stance will improve balance in rollers. Pivot / Position & Balance Focus on allowing the upper body to stay "quiet" while the lower body pivots the snowboard, using the knees and feet.| Pressure Control / Position & Balance | | :--- | | Try traversing or straight running over gently rolling terrain, emphasizing flexion at the top of the roll, and extension as the board moves through the "troughs". Mobility in stance will improve balance in rollers. | | Pivot / Position & Balance | | Focus on allowing the upper body to stay "quiet" while the lower body pivots the snowboard, using the knees and feet. |
OBSERV/ATION ANALYSS IMPROVEMENTS Getting bounced around in choppy snow. Lower joints too stiff or locked. "Position & Balance Try to lower C.O.M. and relax joints. Ensure upper and lower body are aligned." Front of board lifts in air while riding over rolls, speed increasing. Lack of mobility in lower joints. "Pressure Try to use legs like independent shock absorbers, pushing and retracting, as terrain requires." Getting air over rollers. Weight too far over back foot. "Position & Balance Traverse over bumps, emphasizing keeping the hips low and between the feet, and using the lower joints to push/retract." Unable to pivot the board in bumpy terrain. "Stiff lower joints. Body position too tall. Using the upper-body to create turns." "Pressure Control / Position & Balance Try traversing or straight running over gently rolling terrain, emphasizing flexion at the top of the roll, and extension as the board moves through the "troughs". Mobility in stance will improve balance in rollers. Pivot / Position & Balance Focus on allowing the upper body to stay "quiet" while the lower body pivots the snowboard, using the knees and feet."| OBSERV/ATION | ANALYSS | IMPROVEMENTS | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | Getting bounced around in choppy snow. | Lower joints too stiff or locked. | Position & Balance <br> Try to lower C.O.M. and relax joints. Ensure upper and lower body are aligned. | | Front of board lifts in air while riding over rolls, speed increasing. | Lack of mobility in lower joints. | Pressure <br> Try to use legs like independent shock absorbers, pushing and retracting, as terrain requires. | | Getting air over rollers. | Weight too far over back foot. | Position & Balance <br> Traverse over bumps, emphasizing keeping the hips low and between the feet, and using the lower joints to push/retract. | | Unable to pivot the board in bumpy terrain. | Stiff lower joints. Body position too tall. <br> Using the upper-body to create turns. | Pressure Control / Position & Balance <br> Try traversing or straight running over gently rolling terrain, emphasizing flexion at the top of the roll, and extension as the board moves through the "troughs". Mobility in stance will improve balance in rollers. <br> Pivot / Position & Balance <br> Focus on allowing the upper body to stay "quiet" while the lower body pivots the snowboard, using the knees and feet. |

FREESTYLE自由式

INTRODUCING SWITCH RIDING
介紹切換騎乘

POSITION & BALANCE: THE FREESTYLE TRIANGLE
姿勢與平衡:自由式三角形

Similar to the Neutral Position, the purpose of the Freestyle Triangle in riding is to create a comfortable and stable position to begin various manoeuvres. The Freestyle Triangle consists of all of the joints of the body slightly flexed, with the arms slightly and comfortably outstretched towards the nose and tail of the snowboard. The term ‘triangle’ comes from the shape created if you were to draw a line from the tail of the snowboard, up to the top of the head, and down to the nose of the board. A key part of this stance is the position of the hips. Hips should be neutral, allowing the riding to begin rotation in either direction. It is important to remember that in freestyle snowboarding, and freeriding in general, this triangle may not always be achievable. In fact, many times during various tricks and manoeuvres, the aspect of going ‘out of balance’ momentarily may be the desired effect.
類似於中立姿勢,自由式三角形在騎乘中的目的是創造一個舒適且穩定的位置,以開始各種動作。自由式三角形由身體所有關節略微彎曲組成,雙臂輕鬆自然地向滑雪板的頭部與尾部伸展。所謂「三角形」一詞,來自於如果你從滑雪板尾端畫一條線到頭頂,再從頭頂畫線到滑雪板頭端所形成的形狀。這個姿勢的關鍵部分是臀部的位置。臀部應保持中立,讓騎乘能夠向任一方向開始旋轉。需要記住的是,在自由式滑雪板以及一般的自由騎乘中,這個三角形姿勢不一定總是能達成。事實上,在各種技巧和動作中,短暫「失去平衡」的狀態往往是期望達到的效果。
Please refer to the chapters titled Safety & Risk Management and Terrain Park Teaching before taking students in freestyle terrain.
請在帶領學生進入自由式地形前,參考標題為「安全與風險管理」及「地形公園教學」的章節。

In the intermediate phase, students can be introduced to riding opposite to their normal stance, or “switch” (also sometimes called “fakie”). This riding skill is significant in all-terrain snowboarding. Ultimately, any type of turn or manoeuvre is possible while riding switch.
在中階階段,學生可以開始嘗試以與平常姿勢相反的方式騎乘,稱為「switch」(有時也稱為「fakie」)。這種騎乘技巧在全地形滑雪板運動中非常重要。最終,無論是任何類型的轉彎或動作,都可以在 switch 騎乘時完成。
Basic switch riding skills can make stopping and evasive manoeuvres safer and easier over a wider variety of conditions. At this stage, emphasis is on Position & Balance and Pivot skills required to make controlled switch stops and sliding turns on groomed green and blue runs. Re-introduction and/or emphasis of these key concepts of normal forward riding skills can be easily adapted to learning basic switch riding (Beginner, Novice, Intermediate Turns).
基本的 switch 騎乘技巧能讓停車和閃避動作在更多樣的條件下變得更安全、更容易。在這個階段,重點放在姿勢與平衡以及樞軸技巧,這些是控制 switch 停車和在整備過的綠道及藍道上滑行轉彎所必需的。重新引入和/或強調這些正常前進騎乘技巧的關鍵概念,可以輕鬆地適應學習基本的 switch 騎乘(初學者、新手、中階轉彎)。

The Student學生

This student can comfortably perform sliding turns on green runs. He/she desires to expand their “bag of tricks” their all around manoeuvrability and safety, to progress to all-terrain riding.
這位學生能夠自在地在綠道上進行滑行轉彎。他/她希望擴展自己的「技巧包」,提升全方位的機動性與安全性,以進階到全地形騎乘。

Terrain地形

  • Groomed green terrain.整理過的綠色地形。

Goals目標

  • To smoothly change from forward to switch while riding (sliding 180’s).
    在滑行時順暢地從正向切換到反向(滑行 180 度轉向)。
  • Controlled switch riding (stopping, straight-running, linked sliding turns).
    受控換邊滑行(停車、直線滑行、連續滑行轉彎)。

Skill Development Objectives
技能發展目標

POSITION & BALANCE:姿勢與平衡:

Centred, mobile body position.
身體居中且靈活的姿勢。

PIVOT:樞軸轉動:

Full-body rotation to start the turns, progressing to lower body rotation as skills increase.
全身旋轉以開始轉彎,隨著技巧提升,逐漸改為下半身旋轉。

TIMING & COORDINATION:時機與協調:

Coordinating movements to successfully ride in the reverse direction.
協調動作以成功向反方向滑行。

When introducing switch riding for the first time, a building block approach is suggested, using some or all of the following tactics:
首次介紹反向騎乘時,建議採用逐步建立的方法,使用以下部分或全部策略:
  1. Switch straight run (beginner bowl-type terrain)
    反向直線滑行(初學者碗型地形)
  2. Pendulum擺盪
  3. Switch traverse反向橫越
  4. “The Moustache” or “Fall Line Edge Change” exercise
    「鬍鬚」或「順坡線邊緣變換」練習
  5. Sliding on-snow 360’s, 180’s
    雪地滑行 360 度、180 度
  6. Switch Fall-Line Pivot exercise
    反向順坡線旋轉練習
  7. Isolated switch turns單獨反向轉彎
  8. Linked switch turns (with flexion for stability and mobility after the fall line)
    連動轉彎(在落線後以屈膝保持穩定與靈活)

ANALYSIS & IMPROVEMENT GUIDE:
分析與改進指南:

BASIC SWITCH RIDING基礎轉彎騎乘
OBSERVATION ANALYSS IMPROVEMENTS
Over turning / trouble stopping the board from turning.
過度轉彎/難以停止滑板轉動。
Too much weight over the front foot.
前腳承受過多重量。

姿勢與平衡 嘗試在轉彎間做小跳躍,以促進前後腳各承受 50%的重量分配。
Position & Balance
Try to perform small hops between turns, to encourage 50/50 weight distribution.
Position & Balance Try to perform small hops between turns, to encourage 50/50 weight distribution.| Position & Balance | | :--- | | Try to perform small hops between turns, to encourage 50/50 weight distribution. |
Unable to start (initiate) turns.
無法開始(啟動)轉彎。
Too much up-per-body rotation.
上半身旋轉過度。

樞軸 鼓勵使用下半身旋轉動作(臀部和膝蓋)來啟動轉彎,而非肩膀或手臂。
Pivot
Encourage the use of low-er-body rotational movements (hips and knees) to initiate turns, rather than shoulders/arms.
Pivot Encourage the use of low-er-body rotational movements (hips and knees) to initiate turns, rather than shoulders/arms.| Pivot | | :--- | | Encourage the use of low-er-body rotational movements (hips and knees) to initiate turns, rather than shoulders/arms. |
Falls often at edge change.
常在邊緣變換時跌倒。

後腳承受過多重量。抓邊。
Too much weight on the back foot.
Catching edges.
Too much weight on the back foot. Catching edges.| Too much weight on the back foot. | | :--- | | Catching edges. |

姿勢與平衡 「鼻子在腳趾上方」的比喻——讓學生專注於將鼻子(臉部)對齊在前腳靴的腳趾上方來開始轉彎。這將促使重心稍微轉移到前腳。
Position & Balance
"Nose over toes" analogy - have students focus on aligning their nose (on their face) over top of the toes of their front boot to start the turns. This will encourage a slight pressure shift to the front foot.
Position & Balance "Nose over toes" analogy - have students focus on aligning their nose (on their face) over top of the toes of their front boot to start the turns. This will encourage a slight pressure shift to the front foot.| Position & Balance | | :--- | | "Nose over toes" analogy - have students focus on aligning their nose (on their face) over top of the toes of their front boot to start the turns. This will encourage a slight pressure shift to the front foot. |

邊緣控制/時機與協調 嘗試進行滑行 180 度和 360 度旋轉,以提升協調能力和邊緣切換技巧。
Edging / Timing & Coordination
Try performing sliding 180's and 360's to increase coordination and edge change skills.
Edging / Timing & Coordination Try performing sliding 180's and 360's to increase coordination and edge change skills.| Edging / Timing & Coordination | | :--- | | Try performing sliding 180's and 360's to increase coordination and edge change skills. |
OBSERVATION ANALYSS IMPROVEMENTS Over turning / trouble stopping the board from turning. Too much weight over the front foot. "Position & Balance Try to perform small hops between turns, to encourage 50/50 weight distribution." Unable to start (initiate) turns. Too much up-per-body rotation. "Pivot Encourage the use of low-er-body rotational movements (hips and knees) to initiate turns, rather than shoulders/arms." Falls often at edge change. "Too much weight on the back foot. Catching edges." "Position & Balance "Nose over toes" analogy - have students focus on aligning their nose (on their face) over top of the toes of their front boot to start the turns. This will encourage a slight pressure shift to the front foot." "Edging / Timing & Coordination Try performing sliding 180's and 360's to increase coordination and edge change skills."| OBSERVATION | ANALYSS | IMPROVEMENTS | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | Over turning / trouble stopping the board from turning. | Too much weight over the front foot. | Position & Balance <br> Try to perform small hops between turns, to encourage 50/50 weight distribution. | | Unable to start (initiate) turns. | Too much up-per-body rotation. | Pivot <br> Encourage the use of low-er-body rotational movements (hips and knees) to initiate turns, rather than shoulders/arms. | | Falls often at edge change. | Too much weight on the back foot. <br> Catching edges. | Position & Balance <br> "Nose over toes" analogy - have students focus on aligning their nose (on their face) over top of the toes of their front boot to start the turns. This will encourage a slight pressure shift to the front foot. | | | | Edging / Timing & Coordination <br> Try performing sliding 180's and 360's to increase coordination and edge change skills. |

FREESTYLE自由式

BASIC FLATLAND TRICKS基礎平地技巧

At this stage, students may be getting curious about expanding their repertoire of tricks. Flatland manoeuvres are a great way to improve overall skills, as well as develop balance and movement on the snowboard.
在這個階段,學生可能會開始對擴展他們的技巧庫感到好奇。平地動作是提升整體技能的絕佳方式,同時也能培養滑雪板上的平衡感和動作協調。

The Student學生

This student can comfortably perform sliding turns on green and blue runs. He/she desires to expand their “bag of tricks” to progress to more advance freestyle riding.
這位學生能夠輕鬆地在綠色和藍色滑道上進行滑行轉彎。他/她希望擴展自己的「技巧包」,以進步到更高階的自由式滑雪。

Terrain地形

  • Groomed green terrain.整備過的綠色地形。

Goals目標

  • To learn some basic flatland tricks.
    學習一些基本的平地技巧。

Skill Development Objectives
技能發展目標

POSITION & BALANCE:姿勢與平衡:

Mobile body position.身體位置的移動。

PIVOT:旋轉:

Minimal rotation or pivoting movements at this stage, to avoid catching edges.
此階段應盡量避免大幅旋轉或轉動,以免刮到邊緣。

EDGING:邊緣動作:

Minimal edging movements will reduce the risk of falls.
減少邊緣動作可降低跌倒風險。

PRESSURE:壓力:

Relaxed lower joints, with some “push/pull” movements from lower body.
下半身關節放鬆,伴隨一些來自下半身的「推/拉」動作。

TIMING & COORDINATION:時機與協調:

Coordinating movements.協調動作。
When introducing flatland tricks for the first time, a progression-based approach is suggested to ensure that students learn safely. Try to break the manoeuvres down into basic movements, and use the S.A.F.E. model when introducing new tricks:
在首次介紹平地技巧時,建議採用循序漸進的方法,以確保學生能安全學習。嘗試將動作拆解成基本動作,並在介紹新技巧時使用 S.A.F.E.模型:
Nose/Tail Presses and Rolls: A nose or tail press requires the rider to move to the front or rear of the board while straight running, and then flex the board so that the opposite end is off the snow.
鼻壓/尾壓與滾動:鼻壓或尾壓需要騎士在直線滑行時移動到滑板的前端或後端,然後彎曲滑板,使相對的一端離開雪面。
  • STATIC: Have students practice presses on flat terrain (not sliding) first. Practice moving the COM (hips) towards the nose or tail. Highlight the difference between lifting the nose or tail, and pressuring or pushing on the nose or tail to get the opposite end to lift.
    靜態:讓學生先在平坦地形(非滑行狀態)練習壓板動作。練習將重心(臀部)移向鼻端或尾端。強調抬起鼻端或尾端與施壓或推壓鼻端或尾端以使相對一端抬起之間的差異。
  • ACTIVE: Practice this while sliding. Start slow on flat/controlled terrain!
    動態:在滑行時練習此動作。從平坦且可控的地形慢速開始!
  • FREE: Allow plenty of time for practice and controlled experimentation. Give feedback when necessary.
    自由練習:留足充裕時間進行練習和受控實驗。必要時給予回饋。
  • EXPERIMENTATION: Progress to a nose or tail press within a turn, or on an edge. Or, try hopping from nose to tail (or vice versa). Introduce rotational movements into presses to develop “butters” or nose / tail rolls (e.g.: tail press in the middle of a turn).
    實驗階段:嘗試在轉彎中或在邊緣上做鼻壓或尾壓。或者,嘗試從鼻子跳到尾巴(或反之)。在壓板動作中加入旋轉動作,以發展「butters」或鼻壓/尾壓滾動(例如:在轉彎中間做尾壓)。
ANALYSIS & IMPROVEMENT GUIDE: BASIC FLATLAND TRICKS (NOSE/TAIL PRESSES)
分析與改進指南:基礎平地技巧(鼻壓/尾壓)
OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS
Frequent Falling頻繁跌倒 Too tall, unstable position.
太高,姿勢不穩定。

姿勢與平衡 鼓勵學生將重心移近滑雪板,以增加穩定性。
Position & Balance
Encourage students to move their COM closer to the snowboard, to increase stability.
Position & Balance Encourage students to move their COM closer to the snowboard, to increase stability.| Position & Balance | | :--- | | Encourage students to move their COM closer to the snowboard, to increase stability. |
Catching edges.刃邊卡住。 Edge control needs improvement.
刃邊控制需要改進。

邊緣技巧練習:在平坦的基底(平地)上直線滑行。練習基本的低速滑行 180 度和 360 度轉彎,並逐漸增加挑戰難度。
Edging
Practice straight running on a flat base (on flat terrain). Practice basic sliding 180's and 360's at low speeds, and increase challenge slowly.
Edging Practice straight running on a flat base (on flat terrain). Practice basic sliding 180's and 360's at low speeds, and increase challenge slowly.| Edging | | :--- | | Practice straight running on a flat base (on flat terrain). Practice basic sliding 180's and 360's at low speeds, and increase challenge slowly. |
Can't get board to bend during nose/tail rolls.
無法在鼻子/尾巴滾動時使滑板彎曲。
Insufficient weight shift.
重量轉移不足。

壓力:讓學生嘗試用鼻子或尾巴壓力進行橫向滑行,以鼓勵更大幅度地移動到鼻子或尾巴。讓學生思考用臀部(重心)移動,並稍微配合前膝的動作。
Pressure
Have student try a traverse with a nose or tail press, to encourage a larger movement to the nose or tail. Have students think about moving with the hips (COM) and slightly with the lead knee.
Pressure Have student try a traverse with a nose or tail press, to encourage a larger movement to the nose or tail. Have students think about moving with the hips (COM) and slightly with the lead knee.| Pressure | | :--- | | Have student try a traverse with a nose or tail press, to encourage a larger movement to the nose or tail. Have students think about moving with the hips (COM) and slightly with the lead knee. |
OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS Frequent Falling Too tall, unstable position. "Position & Balance Encourage students to move their COM closer to the snowboard, to increase stability." Catching edges. Edge control needs improvement. "Edging Practice straight running on a flat base (on flat terrain). Practice basic sliding 180's and 360's at low speeds, and increase challenge slowly." Can't get board to bend during nose/tail rolls. Insufficient weight shift. "Pressure Have student try a traverse with a nose or tail press, to encourage a larger movement to the nose or tail. Have students think about moving with the hips (COM) and slightly with the lead knee."| OBSERVATION | ANALYSIS | IMPROVEMENTS | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | Frequent Falling | Too tall, unstable position. | Position & Balance <br> Encourage students to move their COM closer to the snowboard, to increase stability. | | Catching edges. | Edge control needs improvement. | Edging <br> Practice straight running on a flat base (on flat terrain). Practice basic sliding 180's and 360's at low speeds, and increase challenge slowly. | | Can't get board to bend during nose/tail rolls. | Insufficient weight shift. | Pressure <br> Have student try a traverse with a nose or tail press, to encourage a larger movement to the nose or tail. Have students think about moving with the hips (COM) and slightly with the lead knee. |

FREESTYLE自由式

INTRODUCING JUMPING介紹跳躍

At this stage, students may want to get air! Remember, safety is paramount when introducing jumping.
在這個階段,學生可能會想要嘗試空中動作!請記得,介紹跳躍時安全是最重要的。

The Student學生

This student can comfortably perform sliding turns on green and blue runs and should be comfortable absorbing rolling or bumpy terrain.
這位學生能輕鬆在綠色和藍色滑道上做滑行轉彎,並且應該能適應起伏或顛簸的地形。

Terrain地形

Look for small natural jump features on the mountain* before heading to small (S) park jumps. *Be aware of safety if using jumps on the mountain - ensure that the landings are visible, and that jumps do not send riders into the flow of traffic. Always use a spotter when working on jumping skills.
在前往小型(S)公園跳台之前,先在山上尋找小型自然跳台*。*使用山上跳台時請注意安全——確保著陸區域清晰可見,且跳台不會讓騎士衝入交通流中。練習跳躍技巧時,務必使用觀察員。

Goals目標

  • To learn to get air.
    學習如何取得空氣。

Skill Development Objectives
技能發展目標

POSITION & BALANCE:姿勢與平衡:

Centred, mobile position. The “Freestyle Triangle”.
居中且靈活的姿勢。「自由式三角形」。

PIVOT:旋轉:

Minimal rotation or pivoting movements at this stage, to avoid catching edges on take off or landing.
此階段應盡量避免大幅旋轉或轉動,以免起跳或著陸時刮到邊緣。

EDGING:傾斜:

Minimal edging movements will reduce the risk of falls.
減少傾斜動作可降低跌倒風險。

PRESSURE:壓力:

Extension of lower joints on take-off, relaxed lower joints to absorb landings.
起跳時下肢關節伸展,著地時下肢關節放鬆以吸收衝擊。

TIMING & COORDINATION:時機與協調:

Coordinating movements to achieve desired outcome.
協調動作以達成預期效果。
When introducing jumping for the first time, we can focus on two methods of generating lift: pop and ollie. Remember the S.A.F.E. model when introducing these movements!
當第一次介紹跳躍時,我們可以專注於兩種產生升力的方法:彈跳(pop)和奧利(ollie)。在介紹這些動作時,請記得使用 S.A.F.E.模型!
  1. Pop: When a snowboarder pushes against the snow with both feet to achieve lift, they are popping. Popping can be used either without a bump or jump in the snow, or with.
    彈跳(Pop):當滑雪板手用雙腳推壓雪面以獲得升力時,這就是彈跳。彈跳可以在沒有雪面凸起或跳躍的情況下使用,也可以搭配使用。
  • STATIC: When having students attempt popping, remember to have them begin with the Freestyle Triangle, and flex hips knees and ankles to start off. Extend the joints quickly, pull the board closer to the body by flexing the hips and knees, and then extend the legs again in preparation for landing.
    靜態(STATIC):當讓學生嘗試彈跳時,記得讓他們從自由式三角形(Freestyle Triangle)開始,並先屈曲臀部、膝蓋和腳踝。快速伸展關節,透過屈曲臀部和膝蓋將滑雪板拉近身體,然後再次伸展雙腿,為著陸做準備。
  • ACTIVE: Practice this movement in a shallow straight run, off of a flat base to start. Progress to trying to pop off of an edge (toe or heelside).
    動態(ACTIVE):先在淺斜的直線滑行中練習此動作,從平坦基底開始。接著進階嘗試從邊緣(腳趾側或腳跟側)彈跳。
  • FREE: Allow plenty of time for practice and controlled experimentation. Give feedback when necessary.
    自由練習:留足充裕時間進行練習和受控的嘗試。必要時給予回饋。
  • EXPERIMENTATION: Have students practice their pop over obstacles (snowballs, tracks in the snow, mitts) to improve the timing of their movements. Experiment with popping both off of flat ground and with the help of a jump/ramp or bump in the snow. Timing becomes an issue when popping off of a jump, as the riding will need to time the flexion/extension of the lower joints with the duration of the jump’s take off ramp.
    嘗試練習:讓學生練習跳過障礙物(雪球、雪地軌跡、手套),以提升動作的時機掌握。嘗試在平地上跳起,或利用跳台/斜坡或雪地隆起輔助跳躍。從跳台跳起時,時機掌握會變得更為重要,因為騎乘者需要配合跳台起跳斜坡的時間,調整下肢關節的屈伸動作。
  1. Ollie: When a snowboarder uses the flex of the snowboard to assist in jumping, they are ollieing. Ollies can be used either without a bump or jump in the snow, or with.
    Ollie:當滑雪板手利用滑雪板的彎曲來協助跳躍時,稱為 ollie。Ollie 可以在沒有雪地隆起或跳台的情況下使用,也可以搭配使用。
  • STATIC: When having students attempt to ollie, remember to have them begin with the Freestyle Triangle, and flex hips knees and ankles to start off and shift the hips towards the tail of the board while flexing down. Extend the back leg quickly to build pressure in the tail of the snowboard. Extend the back leg rapidly and forcefuly to pop into the air, pull the board closer to
    靜態練習:讓學生嘗試 ollie 時,記得先從自由式三角姿勢開始,屈曲臀部、膝蓋和腳踝,並在屈曲下壓時將臀部向滑雪板尾部移動。迅速伸展後腿以在滑雪板尾部施加壓力。快速且有力地伸展後腿,彈跳起身,並將滑雪板拉近身體。

    the body by flexing the hips and knees, and then extend the legs again in preparation for landing. On landing, absorb the pressure from the ground by flexing the legs equally.
    透過屈曲臀部和膝蓋來收縮身體,然後再次伸展雙腿,準備著陸。著陸時,透過均勻屈曲雙腿來吸收地面的壓力。
  • ACTIVE: Practice this movement in a shallow straight run, off of a flat base to start. Progress to trying to ollie off of an edge (toe or heelside).
    主動練習:先從平坦的基礎開始,在淺淺的直線滑行中練習這個動作。接著進階嘗試從邊緣(腳尖側或腳跟側)做 ollie。
  • FREE: Allow plenty of time for practice and controlled experimentation. Give feedback when necessary.
    自由練習:給予充足的時間進行練習和有控制的嘗試。必要時提供回饋。
  • EXPERIMENTATION: Have students practice their ollies over obstacles (snowballs, tracks in the snow, mitts) to improve the timing of their movements. Experiment with ollies both off of flat ground and with the help of a jump/ramp or bump in the snow. Timing becomes an issue when ollieing off of a jump, as the riding will need to time the flexion/extension of the lower joints with the duration of the jump’s take off ramp.
    嘗試實驗:讓學生練習在障礙物(雪球、雪地車痕、手套)上方做 ollie,以提升動作的時機掌握。嘗試在平地以及利用跳台、斜坡或雪地隆起輔助下做 ollie。從跳台做 ollie 時,時機掌握變得很重要,因為滑行者需要配合跳台起跳斜坡的時間,調整下肢關節的屈曲與伸展。
ANALYSIS & IMPROVEMENT GUIDE: STRAIGHT AIRS
分析與改進指南:直體空翻
OBSERVATION ANALYSS IMPROVEMENTS
Arms "flapping" in the air.
手臂在空中「拍打」。
Too tall, unstable position.
姿勢過於挺直且不穩定。

姿勢與平衡 建議學生將手臂往下移動以協助平衡。同時,請學生嘗試在空中將雙腿向身體收攏。
Position & Balance
Encourage students to move their arms down to help with balance. Also, ask students to try to retract the legs up towards the body while in the air.
Position & Balance Encourage students to move their arms down to help with balance. Also, ask students to try to retract the legs up towards the body while in the air.| Position & Balance | | :--- | | Encourage students to move their arms down to help with balance. Also, ask students to try to retract the legs up towards the body while in the air. |
Leaning back while in the air.
在空中向後傾斜。
Losing balance in the air.
在空中失去平衡。

姿勢與平衡/時機與協調 在起跳時練習保持身體居中位置,並可利用「滑行」來培養平衡感。同時,請學生嘗試在空中將雙腿收向身體。
Position & Balance / Timing & Coordination
Practice a centred position during the take-off of the jump, possibly using "coasting" to develop balance. Also, ask students to try to retract the legs up towards the body while in the air.
Position & Balance / Timing & Coordination Practice a centred position during the take-off of the jump, possibly using "coasting" to develop balance. Also, ask students to try to retract the legs up towards the body while in the air.| Position & Balance / Timing & Coordination | | :--- | | Practice a centred position during the take-off of the jump, possibly using "coasting" to develop balance. Also, ask students to try to retract the legs up towards the body while in the air. |
Not getting air.無法跳起。 Insufficient speed, and/or incorrect timing.
速度不足,和/或時機不正確。

壓力/時機與協調 練習以更快的速度騎向跳台。同時,練習跳起(ollie)的時機,使其與地形特徵同步——跳躍時向上的主要力量應來自滑雪板的彎曲與釋放。利用跳台起跳的形狀來協助達成此效果。
Pressure / Timing & Coordination
Practice riding towards jumps with more speed. Also, practice timing the pop (ollie) to coincide with the terrain feature - the bulk of the upward force when jumping should come from the snowboard flexing and releasing. Use the shape of the jump take-off to help this.
Pressure / Timing & Coordination Practice riding towards jumps with more speed. Also, practice timing the pop (ollie) to coincide with the terrain feature - the bulk of the upward force when jumping should come from the snowboard flexing and releasing. Use the shape of the jump take-off to help this.| Pressure / Timing & Coordination | | :--- | | Practice riding towards jumps with more speed. Also, practice timing the pop (ollie) to coincide with the terrain feature - the bulk of the upward force when jumping should come from the snowboard flexing and releasing. Use the shape of the jump take-off to help this. |
OBSERVATION ANALYSS IMPROVEMENTS Arms "flapping" in the air. Too tall, unstable position. "Position & Balance Encourage students to move their arms down to help with balance. Also, ask students to try to retract the legs up towards the body while in the air." Leaning back while in the air. Losing balance in the air. "Position & Balance / Timing & Coordination Practice a centred position during the take-off of the jump, possibly using "coasting" to develop balance. Also, ask students to try to retract the legs up towards the body while in the air." Not getting air. Insufficient speed, and/or incorrect timing. "Pressure / Timing & Coordination Practice riding towards jumps with more speed. Also, practice timing the pop (ollie) to coincide with the terrain feature - the bulk of the upward force when jumping should come from the snowboard flexing and releasing. Use the shape of the jump take-off to help this."| OBSERVATION | ANALYSS | IMPROVEMENTS | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | Arms "flapping" in the air. | Too tall, unstable position. | Position & Balance <br> Encourage students to move their arms down to help with balance. Also, ask students to try to retract the legs up towards the body while in the air. | | Leaning back while in the air. | Losing balance in the air. | Position & Balance / Timing & Coordination <br> Practice a centred position during the take-off of the jump, possibly using "coasting" to develop balance. Also, ask students to try to retract the legs up towards the body while in the air. | | Not getting air. | Insufficient speed, and/or incorrect timing. | Pressure / Timing & Coordination <br> Practice riding towards jumps with more speed. Also, practice timing the pop (ollie) to coincide with the terrain feature - the bulk of the upward force when jumping should come from the snowboard flexing and releasing. Use the shape of the jump take-off to help this. |

ADVANCED SKILL DEVELOPMENT
進階技能發展

At this stage, students should be comfortable with most of the following skills:
此階段,學生應該對以下大部分技能感到熟悉:
  • Linking sliding turns at moderate speeds on intermediate (blue) terrain.
    在中等速度下於中級(藍色)地形連續滑行轉彎。
  • Use of the lower joints to turn the snowboard to a mildly varied shape and size of turn.
    利用下半身關節轉動滑雪板,形成輕微變化的轉彎形狀與大小。
  • Absorption of small bumps and rolls in terrain.
    吸收地形中的小顛簸與起伏。
  • Basic use of carved turns, on mellow terrain, when conditions allow.
    在條件允許時,於平緩地形上基本使用刻滑轉彎。
  • Basic switch riding, straight airs and basic flatland tricks.
    基本的反腳滑行、直線空中動作及基本平地技巧。
  • Controlling speed using turn shape and size.
    利用轉彎的形狀與大小來控制速度。
Refinement of the various riding skills and skill components will help to progress these students on to more challenging advanced manoeuvres and situations. (Refer to the Skill Concept chapter for info on refining riding skills).
精進各種騎乘技巧及技能要素,將有助於學生進階至更具挑戰性的高級動作與情境。(有關精進騎乘技巧的資訊,請參考技能概念章節。)
PISTE:

REFINING ADVANCED TURNS ON GROOMED RUNS (SLIDING AND CARVED TURNS)
精進整備雪道上的進階轉彎技巧(滑行轉彎與刻滑轉彎)

The Student學生

These snowboarders have the ability to perform sliding turns on blue runs and carved turns on green runs. At times they may find themselves getting a little out of control, especially on steeper slopes and at higher speeds.
這些滑雪板手能夠在藍線雪道上進行滑行轉彎,在綠線雪道上進行刻滑轉彎。有時他們可能會發現自己有點失控,特別是在較陡的坡度和較高的速度下。

Terrain地形

Blue & black runs, groomed conditions.
藍線與黑線滑道,整備良好。

Goals目標

  • Begin to develop and demonstrate the Advanced Riding Competencies: Strength & Flow, Arc-toArc, Loading & Deflection & Steering Versatility.
    開始培養並展現進階騎乘能力:力量與流暢度、弧線連接、負載與偏轉及轉向多樣性。
  • To enhance stability through movements in body position, and the development of a stronger position.
    透過身體位置的移動來增強穩定性,並發展更強的姿勢。
  • To refine edging skills.
    精進邊緣控制技巧。
  • To refine lower-body movements (pivot, edging, pressure) in turning the snowboard.
    精進下半身動作(樞軸、邊緣控制、壓力)以轉動滑雪板。
  • To add strength and flow to riding; linking one turn to the next.
    增加騎乘的力量與流暢度;將一個轉彎連接到下一個轉彎。
  • To begin to bend the snowboard in turning, for board performance.
    開始在轉彎時彎曲滑雪板,以提升滑雪板的性能。
  • To add versatility in steering movements to riding for varied turn shapes and sizes.
    為了在騎乘中增加轉向動作的多樣性,以適應不同形狀和大小的轉彎。

Skill Development Approaches & Example Tactics
技能發展方法與範例策略

POSITION & BALANCE:姿勢與平衡:

Balance vs. stability: Centred, mobile, “alert” position. The development of dynamic balance, or balance and stability as a result of continuous micro-adjustments.
平衡與穩定性:居中、靈活、「警覺」的姿勢。動態平衡的發展,或透過持續微調所達成的平衡與穩定性。
  • ‘Tapping’ front or back foot
    輕觸前腳或後腳
  • Lower Centre of Mass
    降低質心
  • Resist upper-body rotation with arms crossed, behind back, etc.
    雙臂交叉、放在背後等方式抵抗上半身旋轉
  • Cowboy Knees牛仔膝蓋
  • “Tip” laterally into turns
    在轉彎時向側面「傾斜」

PIVOT:樞軸:

Rotation, Counter-Rotation: Refine lower-body rotational movements for increased efficiency.
旋轉、反向旋轉:精煉下半身的旋轉動作以提升效率。
  • Fall-Line Pivot Exercise
    落線樞軸練習
  • Garland (Within Turning Arc) / ‘Double-Turns’
    加蘭(轉彎弧內)/「雙重轉彎」
  • Fish Turns魚形轉彎
  • Rail to Rail從軌道到軌道
    *Note: In carved turns, focus on minimal rotational/pivoting movements, to maximize carving performance.
    *注意:在雕刻轉彎時,著重於最小化旋轉/樞軸動作,以最大化雕刻性能。

EDGING:刻邊:

Inclination, Angulation: Increased edge angle, and earlier in the arc (above the fall-line), utilizing a combination of inclination to start the turn and angulation as edge angle increases. Fine tuning of edging movements using the small joints.
傾斜、角度調整:增加邊緣角度,並在弧線較早階段(落線以上)使用傾斜結合角度調整來開始轉彎,隨著邊緣角度增加而進行角度調整。利用小關節微調刻邊動作。
  • Sponsor Turns贊助轉彎
  • Inverse Traverse反向橫移
  • Inverse Traverse plus Ollie Above Fall-Line
    反向橫移加上落線上方的奧利
  • Grab Turns抓板轉彎
  • Euro Carves / Revert Carves
    歐式切邊/反向切邊
  • Drinks on Shoulders肩膀上的飲料

PRESSURE:壓力:

Passive and Dynamic Pressure Management Skills:
被動與動態壓力管理技巧:

Create, control and release pressure created in the turn by loading the snowboard.
在轉彎時透過壓載滑雪板來產生、控制並釋放壓力。
  • Pump Turns泵浦轉向
  • Dolphin Turns海豚轉向
  • Absorbing undulating terrain
    吸收波動地形
  • Explore Down Un-Weighting in Turning
    探索轉向時的減重效果
  • Ride with minimal flexion in lower joints
    騎乘時下肢關節保持最小彎曲

TIMING & COORDINATION:時機與協調:

Timing vs. Coordination: Focus on looking ahead to ensure turns are linked effectively. Patience at start of turn will ensure optimal turn entry and exit (rounder arcs) - optimal duration / impulse of movements for desired outcomes.
時機與協調的區別:專注於向前看,以確保轉彎能有效銜接。轉彎開始時的耐心將確保最佳的進入與退出(更圓滑的弧線)— 達成理想結果的最佳動作持續時間與衝力。
  • Looking Ahead / Follow The Leader
    向前看/跟隨領騎者
  • Adjust Corridor / Size of Turns (Rhythm Change Exercise)
    調整走廊/轉彎大小(節奏變化練習)
  • Adjust Pace of Movements (Counting)
    調整動作節奏(計數)

ANALYSIS & IMPROVEMENT GUIDE:
分析與改進指南:

ADVANCED TURNS ON GROOMED TERRAIN
高級滑行道上的進階轉彎技巧
OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS
Turn shape is not round.
轉彎形狀不是圓形。
Rushing the top half of turn.
急促完成轉彎的上半部。

邊緣控制 在轉彎開始時較早施加邊緣壓力,早於任何轉向動作。
Edging
Start applying edge earlier in the turn, prior to any pivoting movements.
Edging Start applying edge earlier in the turn, prior to any pivoting movements.| Edging | | :--- | | Start applying edge earlier in the turn, prior to any pivoting movements. |
Board sliding in carved turns.
滑板在刻劃轉彎時滑動。
Insufficient tail pressure.
尾部壓力不足。

時機與協調 在轉彎時培養「耐心」—不要急著用尾部推動滑雪板過彎。
Timing & Coordination
Develop "patience" in turning - don't rush to push the tail of the snowboard through turns.
Timing & Coordination Develop "patience" in turning - don't rush to push the tail of the snowboard through turns.| Timing & Coordination | | :--- | | Develop "patience" in turning - don't rush to push the tail of the snowboard through turns. |
Lack of board performance (bending of snowboard).
滑雪板性能不足(滑雪板彎曲度不足)。
No loading.沒有施加壓力。

姿勢與平衡/壓力 將額外的重量轉移到後腳,特別是在落線位置。抵抗旋轉動作。壓力與刃邊 讓學生進行單獨的後跟側與腳尖側轉彎,專注於膝蓋輕微的屈曲調整,以在轉彎初期保持對刃邊的持續壓力。
Position & Balance / Pressure
Shift additional weight to back foot, specifically at the fall line. Resist rotational movements.
Pressure & Edging
Have student perform isolated heelside & toeside turns, concentrating on slight adjustments in flex of the knees, to maintain constant pressure on the edge, early in the turn.
Position & Balance / Pressure Shift additional weight to back foot, specifically at the fall line. Resist rotational movements. Pressure & Edging Have student perform isolated heelside & toeside turns, concentrating on slight adjustments in flex of the knees, to maintain constant pressure on the edge, early in the turn.| Position & Balance / Pressure | | :--- | | Shift additional weight to back foot, specifically at the fall line. Resist rotational movements. | | Pressure & Edging | | Have student perform isolated heelside & toeside turns, concentrating on slight adjustments in flex of the knees, to maintain constant pressure on the edge, early in the turn. |
OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS Turn shape is not round. Rushing the top half of turn. "Edging Start applying edge earlier in the turn, prior to any pivoting movements." Board sliding in carved turns. Insufficient tail pressure. "Timing & Coordination Develop "patience" in turning - don't rush to push the tail of the snowboard through turns." Lack of board performance (bending of snowboard). No loading. "Position & Balance / Pressure Shift additional weight to back foot, specifically at the fall line. Resist rotational movements. Pressure & Edging Have student perform isolated heelside & toeside turns, concentrating on slight adjustments in flex of the knees, to maintain constant pressure on the edge, early in the turn."| OBSERVATION | ANALYSIS | IMPROVEMENTS | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | Turn shape is not round. | Rushing the top half of turn. | Edging <br> Start applying edge earlier in the turn, prior to any pivoting movements. | | Board sliding in carved turns. | Insufficient tail pressure. | Timing & Coordination <br> Develop "patience" in turning - don't rush to push the tail of the snowboard through turns. | | Lack of board performance (bending of snowboard). | No loading. | Position & Balance / Pressure <br> Shift additional weight to back foot, specifically at the fall line. Resist rotational movements. <br> Pressure & Edging <br> Have student perform isolated heelside & toeside turns, concentrating on slight adjustments in flex of the knees, to maintain constant pressure on the edge, early in the turn. |

OFF-PISTE:非雪道:

REFINING TERRAIN ADAPTATION SKILLS
精進地形適應技巧

The Student學生

These snowboarders have the ability to perform sliding and carved turns on green, blue and some black runs. The are comfortable riding at moderate speeds, and want to explore more advanced freeride terrain, including steeps, bumps, trees, and variable snow conditions (icy to powder). These riders will improve by being exposed to a variety of terrain and situations.
這些滑雪板手能夠在綠線、藍線以及部分黑線路線上進行滑行和刻滑轉彎。他們能夠自在地以中等速度滑行,並希望探索更進階的自由滑雪地形,包括陡坡、波浪地形、樹林以及多變的雪況(從結冰到粉雪)。這些滑雪者透過接觸各種地形和情境將會有所進步。

Terrain地形

All terrain, green, blue and black runs (un-groomed slopes, including bumpy terrain and steeps).
所有地形,綠線、藍線及黑線路線(未整備的坡面,包括崎嶇地形和陡坡)。

Goals目標

  • To enhance mobility and stability in all-mountain terrain.
    提升全山地地形的移動性與穩定性。
  • To refine the use of lower body movements to turn the snowboard in variable conditions.
    精進下半身動作的運用,以應對多變條件下的滑雪板轉向。
  • To refine balance over the edges in variable terrain.
    精進在多變地形中對邊緣的平衡控制。
  • To add strength and flow in all-mountain riding.
    增加全山地騎乘的力量與流暢度。
  • To develop pressure control skills (loading and unloading the snowboard).
    培養壓力控制技巧(施壓與釋壓滑雪板)。
  • To develop the skills to link turns and/or manoeuvres in all-mountain situations.
    培養在全山地情境中連結轉彎及/或動作的技巧。

RIDING BUMPS: SUGGESTED TACTICS
騎乘凸起地形:建議策略

Focus on developing agility / coordination skills, along with dynamic pressure control skills which will allow the snowboard to maintain contact with the snow.
專注於培養敏捷性/協調能力,以及動態壓力控制技巧,這將使滑雪板能持續與雪面接觸。
  • Traversing across the bumps with passive flexion/extension for absorption.
    以被動屈伸來吸收衝擊,橫越顛簸地形。
  • Traversing with active flexion/extension to absorb or prepare for bumps and troughs.
    以主動屈伸來吸收或準備應對顛簸與凹陷。
  • “Double-ups” over multiple bumps.
    連續跨越多個顛簸的「雙跳」。
  • Down un-weighting to absorb bump at edge change.
    降低壓力以吸收邊緣變化處的突起。
  • Turning on the troughs only / turning on top of bumps only.
    僅啟用凹槽/僅啟用突起頂部。
  • Edging on back side of bumps.
    在突起的背面進行邊緣處理。
  • Medium or large radius turns in bumps, at various speeds.
    在突起處以不同速度進行中等或大半徑轉彎。
  • Speed-checks in bumps.在顛簸處進行速度檢查。
  • Using the tail (aft pressure) for speed control.
    利用尾部(後壓)來控制速度。

RIDING STEEPS: SUGGESTED TACTICS
騎乘陡坡:建議策略

Efficient edge change and active steering will allow the snowboard to complete smaller turns on steep terrain, controlling speed and direction.
有效的換刃與積極的轉向能讓滑雪板在陡峭地形上完成較小的轉彎,控制速度與方向。
  • Riding with a lower C.O.M., for stability.
    騎乘時降低重心以提升穩定性。
  • Down un-weighting for efficient edge change in steeps.
    在陡坡上向下卸重以有效換邊。
  • Combine up and down un-weighting movements (“mid-weighting”).
    結合向上與向下的卸重動作(「中間卸重」)。
  • Increased steering movements in feet and knees, with minimal upper body rotation movements.
    腳和膝蓋增加轉向動作,上半身旋轉動作則保持最小。
  • Use of upper/lower body separation (counter-rotation), where appropriate.
    適當時使用上半身與下半身分離(反向旋轉)。
  • Spray snow to sides of turns (edging).
    在轉彎側面噴灑雪花(邊緣控制)。

RIDING TREES: SUGGESTED TACTICS
樹林滑行:建議策略

Trees force riders to use their Timing & Coordination skills to adjust movements to adjust to obstacles in their path.
樹林迫使滑雪者運用時機與協調技巧,調整動作以應對路徑上的障礙。
  • Follow the leader跟隨領頭者
  • Look ahead; look for gaps - not at trees!
    向前看;尋找空隙——不要只看樹木!
  • Turning above trees, turning below trees, turning around trees.
    在樹上方轉彎,在樹下方轉彎,繞著樹轉彎。
  • Vary speed.變換速度。

RIDING POWDER: SUGGESTED TACTICS
滑行於粉雪:建議戰術

Efficient use of slight pressure adjustments in powder snow will help student maintain momentum & speed in relation to changing slopes.
在粉雪中有效運用輕微的壓力調整,有助於學生在面對不同坡度時維持動能與速度。
  • Use of groomed run edges to “explore” powder and return to groomed.
    利用整備雪道邊緣來「探索」粉雪,並返回整備雪道。
  • Down un-weighted edge change to reduce “diving”.
    採用下壓無重邊緣變換,以減少「俯衝」現象。
  • Reduce edging movements - “bank” or tilt the snowboard to form platform.
    減少邊緣動作——將滑雪板「傾斜」或傾斜形成平台。
  • Straight run with open turns.
    直線滑行並做開放式轉彎。
  • Aft pressure movements - bounce on tail.
    後壓動作——在尾部彈跳。
  • Powder “slashes”.粉末「斜線」。
  • “Face shots” - spray snow downhill and ride through.
    「面對雪花」— 噴灑雪花順坡而下並穿越。

RIDING ICY CONDITIONS: SUGGESTED TACTICS
在結冰狀況下騎乘:建議策略

Icy conditions require round turn shapes through pivot instead of edge performance, along with a stacked, stable body position for improved balance.
結冰狀況需要透過樞軸做圓形轉彎,而非依靠邊緣性能,並保持堆疊且穩定的身體姿勢以提升平衡。
  • Lower COM for stability.
    降低重心以增加穩定性。
  • Reduce edge angle, and focus on lower joints pivoting the snowboard to turn.
    減少邊緣角度,並專注於下肢關節轉動滑雪板來轉彎。
  • Reduce large, gross movements - focus on small joint movements.
    減少大幅度、粗糙的動作——專注於小關節的動作。
  • Increase angulation (“Drinks On Shoulders” exercise).
    增加角度彎曲(「肩膀上的飲料」練習)。

FREESTYLE自由式

REFINING FREESTYLE RIDING
精進自由式騎乘技巧

At this stage, students may want to get air! Remember, safety is paramount when introducing jumping.
在此階段,學生可能會想嘗試跳躍!請記得,安全是引入跳躍時最重要的考量。

The Student學生

This student can comfortably perform basic freestyle manoeuvres such as straight airs on small jumps, basic flatland manoeuvres, and switch riding.
這位學生能輕鬆完成基本的自由式動作,例如在小跳台上做直跳、基本平地動作,以及反向騎乘。

Terrain地形

  • quad\quad Small ( S ) ( S ) (S)(\mathrm{S}) and medium ( M ) features in the park.
    公園中的 quad\quad 小型 ( S ) ( S ) (S)(\mathrm{S}) 和中型(M)設施。
  • Small and medium jumps on the mountain.
    山上的小型和中型跳躍。

Goals目標

To develop overall freeriding skill through the use of Freestyle and Terrain Park features…
透過使用自由式和地形公園設施來提升整體的自由騎乘技巧…

Improve balance and mobility skills:
提升平衡與靈活度技巧:
  • To learn to ride on rail and box features (IE: 50-50), and manipulate the board while on a rail or box (IE: presses, boardslides).
    學習在鐵軌和箱子設施上騎乘(例如:50-50),並在鐵軌或箱子上操控滑雪板(例如:壓板、滑板滑行)。
  • To learn to grab the snowboard while in the air.
    學習在空中抓握滑雪板。
  • Improve edging and pressure management skills:
    提升邊緣控制與壓力管理技巧:
  • To learn to get more amplitude to their jumps,
    學習如何增加跳躍的幅度,
  • The use of loading and unloading the snowboard for freestyle performance.
    運用滑雪板的加壓與卸壓來提升自由式表現。

Develop rotational skills:
培養旋轉技巧:

  • To learn airs with rotation (180’s, 360’s), by developing rotational control and versatility.
    學習帶有旋轉的空中動作(180 度、360 度),藉由培養旋轉控制力和多樣性。

Development and refinement of coordination skills:
協調能力的發展與精進:

  • To learn more advanced flatland tricks.
    學習更進階的平地技巧。
  • To develop flow and linking of manoeuvres in freestyle riding.
    培養自由騎乘中動作的流暢度與連結性。

Skills技能

POSITION & BALANCE:姿勢與平衡:

Balanced, mobile, relaxed position across all planes of movement. Balance vs. stability (body position vs. creating and managing stability).
在所有運動平面上保持平衡、靈活且放鬆的姿勢。平衡與穩定性的區別(身體姿勢與創造及管理穩定性)。

PIVOT:樞軸動作:

Using rotation and/or counter-rotation movements to move the snowboard on a box or rail. Use of rotational movements to achieve 180 & 360-degree rotations.
利用旋轉和/或反向旋轉動作在滑雪板箱體或滑軌上移動。運用旋轉動作完成 180 度及 360 度旋轉。

EDGING:刻邊:

Minimal inclining edging movements on non-snow surfaces. The use of an edge-set to create a platform while spinning, through refined angulation movements.
在非雪地表面上進行最小傾斜的刻邊動作。透過精細的角度調整動作,利用刻邊設定在旋轉時創造支撐平台。

PRESSURE:壓力:

Passive vs. active application of pressure. Relaxed lower joints to absorb various surfaces. Use of fore and aft pressure to feel nose or tail presses, and to use ollies to generate more air.
被動與主動施加壓力。放鬆下肢關節以吸收不同地面。利用前後壓力感受板頭或板尾的壓迫,並使用跳躍動作(ollies)產生更多空中高度。

TIMING & COORDINATION:時機與協調:

Coordinated movements to link manoeuvres. Appropriate duration of movements based on intended outcome.
協調動作以連結各項操作。根據預期結果調整動作持續時間。

RAILS & BOXES軌道與方框

Rails and boxes can be a useful tool in developing stability, mobility, and edge regulation skills.
軌道與方框是發展穩定性、靈活性及邊緣控制技巧的有用工具。

The Student學生

This student can comfortably perform sliding turns on green and blue runs and should be comfortable absorbing rolling or bumpy terrain.
這位學生能輕鬆在綠色和藍色滑道上做滑行轉彎,並且應該能適應起伏或顛簸的地形。

Terrain地形

  • Small (S), surface level, ride on rail and/or box features in the park.
    小型(S),地表層,騎乘於公園內的鐵軌和/或箱型設施。

Goals目標

  • To learn to ride with a flat base on non-snow surfaces.
    學習在非雪地表面以平底姿勢騎乘。

Skills技能

POSITION & BALANCE:姿勢與平衡:

Balanced, aligned, and relaxed position.
平衡、對齊且放鬆的姿勢。

PIVOT:旋轉:

Minimal rotation or pivoting movements at this stage, to avoid catching edges.
此階段應盡量避免大幅旋轉或轉動,以免刮到邊緣。

EDGING:邊緣動作:

Minimal edging movements will reduce the risk of falls on boxes and rails.
減少邊緣動作可降低在箱子和欄杆上跌倒的風險。

PRESSURE:壓力:

Relaxed lower joints to absorb various surfaces.
放鬆下肢關節以吸收各種地面衝擊。

TIMING & COORDINATION:時機與協調:

Coordinated movements. Eyes looking ahead.
協調的動作。眼睛注視前方。

Suggested Tactics建議策略

INTRODUCING RAIL & BOX RIDING
介紹滑軌與滑箱騎乘

When introducing rail and box riding, a progression, or Building Block approach, is best. This will help to reduce any consequences of falling.
在介紹滑軌與滑箱騎乘時,採用漸進式或基礎建構法是最佳選擇。這有助於減少摔倒的後果。
  1. Flat-Base Riding: Outside of the park, have students practice straight running (in the fall line) with a flat base and no edge angle. Knees and ankles should be relaxed, and have students envision a “target” to focus on. Drawing imaginary rails or boxes in the snow is useful here.
    平底騎乘:在雪場外,讓學生練習直線滑行(順著落差線),保持平底且無邊緣角度。膝蓋和腳踝應保持放鬆,並讓學生想像一個「目標」來集中注意力。在雪地上畫出想像中的滑軌或滑箱會很有幫助。
  2. Riding with a flat base on snow-level obstacle: Using a bamboo pole, stick or other object, have students practice riding across it.
    在雪面障礙物上以平底滑行:使用竹竿、棍子或其他物品,讓學生練習橫跨滑行。

NOSE/TAIL PRESSES ON BOX/RAIL FEATURES:
在箱子/鐵軌特徵上做鼻壓/尾壓:

A nose or tail press requires the rider to move to the front or rear of the board while doing a 50-50, and flex the snowboard so that the opposite end is off the surface. This is a good progression from 50-50’s.
鼻壓或尾壓要求騎士在做 50-50 時,將重心移至滑板的前端或後端,並彎曲滑雪板,使相反端離開表面。這是從 50-50 進階的好方法。
  • Have students practice on the snow before beginning on boxes or rails.
    讓學生先在雪地上練習,再開始在箱子或鐵軌上練習。
  • Practice moving the COM towards the nose or tail. Highlight the difference between lifting the nose or tail, and pressuring the nose or tail to get the opposite end to lift. Practice this while sliding.
    練習將重心(COM)移向鼻端或尾端。強調抬起鼻端或尾端與施壓於鼻端或尾端以使相反端抬起之間的差異。滑行時練習這個動作。
  • Once you’ve progressed to boxes, start with having students nose or tail press at the end of the feature, and progressively start earlier and earlier. Progress to ollie or nollie into the nose or tail press.
    當你進階到箱子時,先讓學生在特徵末端施壓於鼻端或尾端,並逐漸提前施壓時間。進階到用 ollie 或 nollie 進入鼻端或尾端施壓。
  1. Hands-On On a Box: The first time students ride on a non-snow surface, it maybe helpful for the instructor to stand beside the box, and hold students’ hands as they slide across. Consider safety - do you have the physical attributes to safely handle a student riding on a box?
    箱子上的實作:學生第一次在非雪地表面騎乘時,教練站在箱子旁邊,握住學生的手幫助他們滑過,可能會很有幫助。請考慮安全性——你是否具備足夠的體能來安全協助學生在箱子上騎乘?
  2. Riding Over Boxes &/or Rails: Remember to choose the type of rail that will best suit your student’s level of ability. The key here is to choose rails or boxes that are flat, short, low and wide. Once students are comfortable with flat-based riding, have them apply the same skills to simple boxes or rails - centred position, flat base, and eyes on target at end of feature.
    騎越箱子及/或欄杆:記得選擇最適合學生能力等級的欄杆類型。關鍵是選擇平坦、短小、低矮且寬大的欄杆或箱子。當學生對平面基底騎乘感到自在後,讓他們將相同技巧應用於簡單的箱子或欄杆——保持中心位置、平坦基底,並將目光鎖定在特徵末端的目標。
ANALYSIS & IMPROVEMENT GUIDE: RAILS & BOXES
分析與改進指南:軌道與盒子
OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS
Sliding out on edges.
在邊緣滑出。
Using edges on box.
使用盒子邊緣。

姿勢與平衡 鼓勵學生保持垂直對齊的站姿,膝蓋和腳踝保持「柔軟」以減少邊緣滑出。注意旋轉對齊——保持肩膀、臀部和膝蓋在裝置上的對齊,雙手置於滑板前後端。
Position & Balance
Encourage students to stand in a vertically aligned position, with knees and ankles "soft" to reduce edging. Be aware of rotational alignment - keep shoulders, hips and knees aligned on the feature with hands over tip and tail.
Position & Balance Encourage students to stand in a vertically aligned position, with knees and ankles "soft" to reduce edging. Be aware of rotational alignment - keep shoulders, hips and knees aligned on the feature with hands over tip and tail.| Position & Balance | | :--- | | Encourage students to stand in a vertically aligned position, with knees and ankles "soft" to reduce edging. Be aware of rotational alignment - keep shoulders, hips and knees aligned on the feature with hands over tip and tail. |
Stopping on feature.在特徵上停下。 Travelling too slowly.移動速度過慢。

時機與協調 讓學生以較快的速度接近特徵,並注視特徵的末端。
Timing & Coordination
Have students approach the feature at a faster speed, and look at the end of the feature.
Timing & Coordination Have students approach the feature at a faster speed, and look at the end of the feature.| Timing & Coordination | | :--- | | Have students approach the feature at a faster speed, and look at the end of the feature. |
Coming off feature early.
過早離開特徵。

進場路線不直。沒有看向特徵物的末端。
Approach not straight.
Not looking toward end of feature.
Approach not straight. Not looking toward end of feature.| Approach not straight. | | :--- | | Not looking toward end of feature. |

時機與協調 練習在接近特徵物時盡量減少轉向。讓學生練習在騎乘時看向特徵物的末端。
Timing & Coordination
Practice minimizing turning on the approach to the feature.
Have student practice looking at end of the feature while riding on it.
Timing & Coordination Practice minimizing turning on the approach to the feature. Have student practice looking at end of the feature while riding on it.| Timing & Coordination | | :--- | | Practice minimizing turning on the approach to the feature. | | Have student practice looking at end of the feature while riding on it. |
OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS Sliding out on edges. Using edges on box. "Position & Balance Encourage students to stand in a vertically aligned position, with knees and ankles "soft" to reduce edging. Be aware of rotational alignment - keep shoulders, hips and knees aligned on the feature with hands over tip and tail." Stopping on feature. Travelling too slowly. "Timing & Coordination Have students approach the feature at a faster speed, and look at the end of the feature." Coming off feature early. "Approach not straight. Not looking toward end of feature." "Timing & Coordination Practice minimizing turning on the approach to the feature. Have student practice looking at end of the feature while riding on it."| OBSERVATION | ANALYSIS | IMPROVEMENTS | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | Sliding out on edges. | Using edges on box. | Position & Balance <br> Encourage students to stand in a vertically aligned position, with knees and ankles "soft" to reduce edging. Be aware of rotational alignment - keep shoulders, hips and knees aligned on the feature with hands over tip and tail. | | Stopping on feature. | Travelling too slowly. | Timing & Coordination <br> Have students approach the feature at a faster speed, and look at the end of the feature. | | Coming off feature early. | Approach not straight. <br> Not looking toward end of feature. | Timing & Coordination <br> Practice minimizing turning on the approach to the feature. <br> Have student practice looking at end of the feature while riding on it. |

INTRODUCING BOARDSLIDES介紹滑板滑行(BOARDSLIDES)

  1. Have students practice on the snow before beginning on boxes or rails. Have them practice by using a counter-rotational movement (“shifty” or speed check) to get the snowboard to move up to 90 degrees across the direction of travel.
    讓學生在雪地上練習,然後再開始在箱子或欄杆上練習。讓他們透過反向旋轉動作(「shifty」或速度檢查)來練習,使滑雪板移動到與行進方向成 90 度。
  2. Once the movements are consolidated, have them try on a box: starting in a 50-50, and then pivoting the board to the boardslide position using count-er-rotation, by rotating the upper body in the opposite direction that they want the board to rotate.
    一旦動作穩固後,讓他們嘗試在箱子上滑行:從 50-50 開始,然後利用反向旋轉(count-er-rotation)將滑板轉到 boardslide 的位置,方法是將上半身朝著滑板想要旋轉的相反方向旋轉。
  3. Progress to hopping onto the feature straight into the boardslide position.
    進階到直接跳上障礙物並進入 boardslide 位置。

NAMING BOARDSLIDESBOARDSLIDE 的命名

When naming boardslides, unlike the direction of spins or rotation, we name the boardslide based on the approach to the rail or box, and also the nose of the board crossing the feature first. Note: The opposite of this is a “lipslide”, which happens when the tail of the snowboard crosses the feature first.
在命名 boardslide 時,與旋轉方向不同,我們是根據接近欄杆或箱子的方式來命名 boardslide,並且以滑板的前端(nose)先越過障礙物為準。注意:相反的情況稱為「lipslide」,是指滑雪板的尾端(tail)先越過障礙物。

Backside Boardslides: A backside boardslide is when a rider slides along a box or rail with the board across the feature. The rider is facing downhill and approached with the feature to his/her back, rotating 90 degrees in the frontside direction to get on the feature. Backside boardslides are generally simpler for students to begin learning.
背側滑板滑行(Backside Boardslides):背側滑板滑行是指騎士以滑板橫跨障礙物(如箱子或欄杆)滑行。騎士面向下坡,並以障礙物在背後的方向接近,向前側方向旋轉 90 度以進入障礙物。背側滑板滑行通常較簡單,適合初學者學習。

Frontside Boardslide: A frontside boardslide happens when a rider slides along a box or rail with the board across the feature. The rider is facing uphill and approached with the feature to his/ her front, rotating 90 degrees in the backside direction to get on the feature.
前側滑板滑行(Frontside Boardslide):前側滑板滑行是指騎士以滑板橫跨障礙物(如箱子或欄杆)滑行。騎士面向上坡,並以障礙物在前方的方向接近,向背側方向旋轉 90 度以進入障礙物。

On ride-on rails or boxes, it’s sometimes difficult to specify boardslide or lipslide; in which case the take-off edge can be used as reference (IE: approaching on toe edge, but sliding facing downhill would be considered a lipslide).
在騎乘滑行欄杆或箱子時,有時難以明確區分是滑板滑行(boardslide)還是唇滑(lipslide);此時可以起跳邊緣作為參考(例如:以腳尖邊緣接近,但滑行時面向下坡則視為唇滑)。
COMMON SENSE IS KEY WHEN TEACHING RAILS AND BOXES. CONTINUALLY EVALUATE WHETHER YOUR STUDENT HAS THE ABILITY TO SAFELY RIDE THE OBSTACLE. IF NOT, FIND A DIFFERENT OBSTACLE!
教學欄杆和箱子時,常識是關鍵。持續評估你的學生是否具備安全騎乘該障礙物的能力。如果沒有,請尋找其他障礙物!

ANALYSIS & IMPROVEMENT GUIDE: BOARDSLIDES
分析與改進指南:滑板滑行

OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS
Rider falls over uphill edge.
騎士於上坡邊緣跌倒。
Lateral balance.側向平衡。

姿勢與平衡/邊緣控制 鼓勵學生透過放鬆下肢關節,保持滑雪板平貼於設施上。透過稍微向下坡傾斜,並將體重隨著手臂微微伸展向下坡方向移動,維持腳下的平衡。
Position & Balance / Edging
Encourage students to keep the snowboard flat on the feature by maintaining relaxed lower joints. Maintain balance over the feet by leaning downhill slightly and keeping the body weight moving downhill with the arms outstretched slightly.
Position & Balance / Edging Encourage students to keep the snowboard flat on the feature by maintaining relaxed lower joints. Maintain balance over the feet by leaning downhill slightly and keeping the body weight moving downhill with the arms outstretched slightly.| Position & Balance / Edging | | :--- | | Encourage students to keep the snowboard flat on the feature by maintaining relaxed lower joints. Maintain balance over the feet by leaning downhill slightly and keeping the body weight moving downhill with the arms outstretched slightly. |
Rider can't get to a full 90-degree boardslide.
騎士無法完成完整的 90 度滑板滑行。
More separation of upper and lower body needed.
需要更多上半身與下半身的分離。

反向旋轉 讓學生練習在雪地上板面平放的「速度檢查」動作,分離上半身與下半身。
Counter-Rotation
Have student practice separating the upper and lower body in a "speed-check" motion, with the board flat on the snow.
Counter-Rotation Have student practice separating the upper and lower body in a "speed-check" motion, with the board flat on the snow.| Counter-Rotation | | :--- | | Have student practice separating the upper and lower body in a "speed-check" motion, with the board flat on the snow. |
Leaving feature with board still across fall line.
離開設施時,滑板仍橫跨下坡線。
Lack of rotational control to return to normal riding position.
缺乏旋轉控制以回到正常騎乘姿勢。

旋轉/反向旋轉 讓學生練習持續旋轉直到特徵結束,以切換騎乘方向,或讓學生保持肩膀與特徵對齊,反向旋轉使滑板在特徵結束前回到直線位置。
Rotation/Counter-Rotation
Have student practice continuing rotation through end of the feature to exit riding switch, or have students keep shoulder in-line with feature, counter-rotating to return the board back to a straight position before end of feature.
Rotation/Counter-Rotation Have student practice continuing rotation through end of the feature to exit riding switch, or have students keep shoulder in-line with feature, counter-rotating to return the board back to a straight position before end of feature.| Rotation/Counter-Rotation | | :--- | | Have student practice continuing rotation through end of the feature to exit riding switch, or have students keep shoulder in-line with feature, counter-rotating to return the board back to a straight position before end of feature. |
OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS Rider falls over uphill edge. Lateral balance. "Position & Balance / Edging Encourage students to keep the snowboard flat on the feature by maintaining relaxed lower joints. Maintain balance over the feet by leaning downhill slightly and keeping the body weight moving downhill with the arms outstretched slightly." Rider can't get to a full 90-degree boardslide. More separation of upper and lower body needed. "Counter-Rotation Have student practice separating the upper and lower body in a "speed-check" motion, with the board flat on the snow." Leaving feature with board still across fall line. Lack of rotational control to return to normal riding position. "Rotation/Counter-Rotation Have student practice continuing rotation through end of the feature to exit riding switch, or have students keep shoulder in-line with feature, counter-rotating to return the board back to a straight position before end of feature."| OBSERVATION | ANALYSIS | IMPROVEMENTS | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | Rider falls over uphill edge. | Lateral balance. | Position & Balance / Edging <br> Encourage students to keep the snowboard flat on the feature by maintaining relaxed lower joints. Maintain balance over the feet by leaning downhill slightly and keeping the body weight moving downhill with the arms outstretched slightly. | | Rider can't get to a full 90-degree boardslide. | More separation of upper and lower body needed. | Counter-Rotation <br> Have student practice separating the upper and lower body in a "speed-check" motion, with the board flat on the snow. | | Leaving feature with board still across fall line. | Lack of rotational control to return to normal riding position. | Rotation/Counter-Rotation <br> Have student practice continuing rotation through end of the feature to exit riding switch, or have students keep shoulder in-line with feature, counter-rotating to return the board back to a straight position before end of feature. |

REFINING FLATLAND TRICKS
精進平地技巧

In performing flatland tricks, you are only limited by your imagination!
在執行平地技巧時,你的想像力是唯一的限制!
  • Progress from simple single-plane movements (presses), to more complex multi-plane movements (presses with rotation, and then presses with rotation and vertical pop).
    從簡單的單平面動作(壓板)進展到更複雜的多平面動作(帶旋轉的壓板,然後是帶旋轉和垂直彈跳的壓板)。
  • Encourage students to experiment with combining manoeuvres - IE: Nose press 180 (nose roll), or pop-180 to tail press, etc.
    鼓勵學生嘗試結合不同的動作——例如:鼻壓 180 度(鼻滾),或彈跳 180 度接尾壓,等等。
  • A game of “Betcha-Cant’s” can be a good way to challenge students to refine their coordination skills.
    「Betcha-Cant’s」遊戲是一種很好的方式,能挑戰學生精進他們的協調技巧。

At this stage, students should be confident with small jumps. The next steps are increasing the amplitude of jumps, through the use of “ollies”, and then learning to grab the board.
在這個階段,學生應該對小跳躍有信心。接下來的步驟是透過使用「ollies」來增加跳躍幅度,然後學習抓板。

OLLIES/NOLLIES:OLLIES/NOLLIES:

  • Ollies (springing off the tail of the board) use the natural flex of the snowboard to help the rider gain lift. Snowboarders must be able to bend their board to ollie. Nose and tail presses (see above) may be good skills to lead into ollies. Nollies are similar to ollies, with the spring coming from the nose of the board.
    Ollies(從滑板尾部彈起)利用滑雪板的自然彎曲幫助騎士獲得提升。滑雪者必須能夠彎曲滑板才能做出 ollie。鼻壓和尾壓(見上文)可能是引導 ollies 的好技巧。Nollies 與 ollies 類似,不同的是彈力來自滑板的前端。
  • To introduce ollies to riders, have the rider flex down into a low position. The rider must then shift pressure to the back foot, while pushing on the back foot and lifting the front foot off the ground.
    為了向騎士介紹 ollies,讓騎士彎曲身體進入低姿勢。騎士接著必須將壓力轉移到後腳,同時用後腳施力並抬起前腳離地。
  • At this point, the rider must push down on the back foot with more force, to achieve vertical pop. The spring of the board should snap the rider into the air slightly, at which point they can make the board parallel with the ground and absorb the landing by flexing the hip, knee and ankle joints.
    此時,騎士必須用更大的力氣向下壓後腳,以達到垂直彈跳。滑板的彈力應該會稍微將騎士彈向空中,這時他們可以讓滑板與地面平行,並透過彎曲臀部、膝蓋和腳踝關節來吸收著陸衝擊。
  • Ollie-ing at the take-off of a jump will allow the rider to achieve more vertical lift, and more time in the air.
    在跳躍起跳時做 ollie,能讓騎士獲得更大的垂直提升和更長的空中時間。

GRABS:抓板動作:

  • There are an almost infinite number of grabs a rider can perform in the air. In general, the simpler grabs will be close to the middle of the board and between the feet (Mellon, Indy, Mute).
    騎士在空中可以做出幾乎無限多種抓板動作。一般來說,較簡單的抓板會靠近滑板中間且位於雙腳之間(Mellon、Indy、Mute)。
  • Have students approach the jump as they would with any straight air.
    請學生以執行直空(straight air)時的方式接近跳台。
  • A slight ollie at the lip of the jump will assist students in getting the necessary airtime to grab.
    在跳台唇邊輕輕做一個 ollie,能幫助學生獲得足夠的空中時間來完成抓板。
  • Once in the air, students should bring the board up toward the hand, by bending the knees (as opposed to reaching for the board, and moving the upper body down. This can result in a loss of balance).
    一旦離開地面,學生應該透過彎曲膝蓋將滑板往手的方向帶起(而非伸手去抓滑板並將上半身往下移動,這樣可能會導致失去平衡)。
  • After grabbing the board, the student should be looking for the landing. Release the grab and extend the legs to prepare to absorb the landing.
    抓住滑板後,學生應該開始注意著陸。放開抓握,並伸直雙腿準備吸收著陸的衝擊。

ANALYSIS & IMPROVEMENT GUIDE: AIRS WITH GRABS
分析與改進指南:空中抓板動作

OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS
Not getting the grab.
未能成功抓板。
Position too tall or extended.
姿勢過高或過度伸展。

姿勢與平衡 鼓勵學生在空中時將雙腿和滑板向手部收回。先在雪地上練習各種抓板動作,找出最適合學生的方式。
Position & Balance
Encourage students to retract the legs and board up toward the hands while in the air. Practice various grabs on the snow first to find ones that work best for the student
Position & Balance Encourage students to retract the legs and board up toward the hands while in the air. Practice various grabs on the snow first to find ones that work best for the student| Position & Balance | | :--- | | Encourage students to retract the legs and board up toward the hands while in the air. Practice various grabs on the snow first to find ones that work best for the student |
OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS Not getting the grab. Position too tall or extended. "Position & Balance Encourage students to retract the legs and board up toward the hands while in the air. Practice various grabs on the snow first to find ones that work best for the student"| OBSERVATION | ANALYSIS | IMPROVEMENTS | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | Not getting the grab. | Position too tall or extended. | Position & Balance <br> Encourage students to retract the legs and board up toward the hands while in the air. Practice various grabs on the snow first to find ones that work best for the student |

INTRODUCING AIRS WITH ROTATION (180'S & 360'S)
介紹帶旋轉的空中動作(180 度與 360 度)

A major goal of many snowboarders is rotation - more specifically airs with rotation such as 180’s and 360’s. Understanding the concept of rotation is crucial to mastering airs with rotation. Up until this point, rotation has simply aided this snowboarder in turning left and right. When working up to airs with rotation, safety should be the number one concern. A Building Block approach is the best method for helping your students achieve their first spins, as it breaks down the goal into small, manageable, safe parts.
許多滑雪板愛好者的主要目標是旋轉——更具體來說,是帶旋轉的空中動作,如 180 度和 360 度。理解旋轉的概念對掌握帶旋轉的空中動作至關重要。到目前為止,旋轉只是幫助滑雪者向左或向右轉彎。在練習帶旋轉的空中動作時,安全應該是首要考量。採用分階段建構法是幫助學生完成首次旋轉的最佳方法,因為它將目標拆解成小而可控且安全的部分。

BUILDING UP TO SPINS - AN EXAMPLE SPIN PROGRESSION
建立旋轉動作的基礎 — 一個旋轉進階範例

  1. Static rotations, board off: Have the students practice spinning 180’s and 360’s the snowboard off, on a gentle slope, by encouraging them to pop with both legs and initiate the spin by:
    靜態旋轉,板子離地:讓學生在緩坡上練習 180 度和 360 度旋轉,板子離地,鼓勵他們雙腳同時彈跳並透過以下方式啟動旋轉:
  • “Winding up” slightly in the opposite direction of the spin
    稍微向旋轉相反方向「蓄力」
  • Looking through the rotation with their head / eyes.
    用頭部/眼睛隨著旋轉方向看過去。
  • Taking off and landing on two feet Landing without looking down
    雙腳起跳與著陸 不看腳下著陸
  1. Static rotations, board on: Students will find this easier with a solid edge set in the snow. Have students try these rotations by using the same tips as above.
    靜態旋轉,板子固定:學生會發現當雪面有穩固的邊緣時會比較容易。請學生嘗試使用上述相同技巧進行這些旋轉。
  2. Spinning on snow: Have students traverse a gentle slope, and concentrate on spinning 180’s, 360’s and more by using the same techniques as above, on the snow.
    在雪地上旋轉:讓學生橫越緩坡,並專注於使用上述相同技巧,在雪地上完成 180 度、360 度甚至更多的旋轉。
  3. Pop 180’s (cross-fall-line): Have students try to spin 180 degrees as above, but this time adding a two-foot pop at the start of the rotation.
    彈跳 180 度(跨越跌落線):請學生嘗試如上所述旋轉 180 度,但這次在旋轉開始時加入雙腳彈跳。
  4. Pop 180’s with revert 180: This time students will try to get the feeling of doing a complete 360 rotation by performing a pop-180 (as above), and continuing the spin after they land, for the second 180 degrees (the revert).
    Pop 180 連接 revert 180:這次學生將嘗試透過執行 pop-180(如上所述),並在著陸後繼續旋轉完成第二個 180 度(revert),來感受完成完整 360 度旋轉的感覺。
  5. Air 360’s across the fall line: Once the students are completing 180’s with revert, encourage them to continue spinning in the air, by increasing their wind-up and using larger bumps in the snow to help with air.
    沿著落線的空中 360:當學生能完成帶 revert 的 180 度旋轉後,鼓勵他們透過加大起手動作並利用雪地上的較大凸起來幫助空中旋轉,持續在空中旋轉。
  6. Spins in the fall line: Encourage students to try spinning closer and closer to the fall line, beginning with slow speeds and flat terrain, and progressing to jump features. Fall-line spins require more involvement of lower joints to create an edging platform.
    落線旋轉:鼓勵學生嘗試在越來越接近落線的位置旋轉,從慢速和平坦地形開始,逐步進階到跳躍地形。落線旋轉需要更多下肢關節的參與,以建立邊緣支撐平台。

SPIN DIRECTION旋轉方向

Frontside: Any spin where the front of the body faces the direction of travel for the first 180 degrees of the spin.
正面旋轉:任何在旋轉的前 180 度內,身體正面朝向移動方向的旋轉。
Backside: Any spin where the back of the body faces the direction of travel for the first 180 degrees of the spin.
背轉:任何在旋轉的前 180 度內,身體背面朝向前進方向的旋轉。

CREATING & CONTROLLING ROTATION
創造與控制旋轉

Riders can use the shoulders and hips to create rotation by starting with a wind-up, and then rotating in the direction of the spin at take-off. The arms may also be used here to generate more rotation, if needed. To control rotation, have riders use the head and eyes:
騎手可以利用肩膀和臀部來產生旋轉,方法是先做一個預備動作,然後在起跳時朝旋轉方向轉動。若需要,也可以使用手臂來增加旋轉力。為了控制旋轉,讓騎手利用頭部和眼睛:
  • Backside 180 & Frontside 360: Have riders look back up at the take-off of the jump upon landing, to stop rotation.
    背轉 180 與正轉 360:讓騎手在著陸時回頭看跳台起跳點,以停止旋轉。
  • Frontside 180 & Backside 360: Have riders spot their landing downhill, on the landing of the jump.
    Frontside 180 與 Backside 360:讓騎士在空中時目視跳台下方的落點。

ANALYSIS & IMPROVEMENT GUIDE: AIRS WITH ROTATION
分析與改進指南:帶旋轉的空中動作

OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS
Rider loses balance in the air.
騎士在空中失去平衡。
Position too tall or extended.
姿勢過於直立或伸展。

姿勢與平衡 鼓勵學生在起跳時目視前方,並在空中稍微收腿,以獲得更穩定的姿勢。
Position & Balance
Encourage students to look towards the takeoff, as well as a slight re-traction of the legs while in the air, for a more stable position.
Position & Balance Encourage students to look towards the takeoff, as well as a slight re-traction of the legs while in the air, for a more stable position.| Position & Balance | | :--- | | Encourage students to look towards the takeoff, as well as a slight re-traction of the legs while in the air, for a more stable position. |
Rider can't generate enough rotation to complete spin.
騎手無法產生足夠的旋轉來完成轉體。
Inadequate rotation.旋轉不足。

旋轉 鼓勵學生在起跳時結合垂直動作與旋轉動作。邊緣控制 騎手應在起跳時設定輕微的邊緣,並在跳躍起跳處留下一條淡淡的「鉛筆線」。
Rotation
Encourage student to blend vertical movement with rotational movement during take off.
Edging
Riders should be setting a slight edge on takeoff, leaving a faint "pencil line" in the take off of the jump.
Rotation Encourage student to blend vertical movement with rotational movement during take off. Edging Riders should be setting a slight edge on takeoff, leaving a faint "pencil line" in the take off of the jump.| Rotation | | :--- | | Encourage student to blend vertical movement with rotational movement during take off. | | Edging | | Riders should be setting a slight edge on takeoff, leaving a faint "pencil line" in the take off of the jump. |
Over-rotation.過度旋轉。 Generating too much spin.
產生過多的旋轉力。

旋轉控制 回顧用頭部/眼睛控制旋轉的觀點。壓力控制 讓學生專注於著地時屈膝,以停止旋轉。
Rotational Control
Review viewpoints for controlling rotation with the head/eyes.
Pressure Control
Have students focus on flexing the legs on landing, to stop rotation.
Rotational Control Review viewpoints for controlling rotation with the head/eyes. Pressure Control Have students focus on flexing the legs on landing, to stop rotation.| Rotational Control | | :--- | | Review viewpoints for controlling rotation with the head/eyes. | | Pressure Control | | Have students focus on flexing the legs on landing, to stop rotation. |
OBSERVATION ANALYSIS IMPROVEMENTS Rider loses balance in the air. Position too tall or extended. "Position & Balance Encourage students to look towards the takeoff, as well as a slight re-traction of the legs while in the air, for a more stable position." Rider can't generate enough rotation to complete spin. Inadequate rotation. "Rotation Encourage student to blend vertical movement with rotational movement during take off. Edging Riders should be setting a slight edge on takeoff, leaving a faint "pencil line" in the take off of the jump." Over-rotation. Generating too much spin. "Rotational Control Review viewpoints for controlling rotation with the head/eyes. Pressure Control Have students focus on flexing the legs on landing, to stop rotation."| OBSERVATION | ANALYSIS | IMPROVEMENTS | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | Rider loses balance in the air. | Position too tall or extended. | Position & Balance <br> Encourage students to look towards the takeoff, as well as a slight re-traction of the legs while in the air, for a more stable position. | | Rider can't generate enough rotation to complete spin. | Inadequate rotation. | Rotation <br> Encourage student to blend vertical movement with rotational movement during take off. <br> Edging <br> Riders should be setting a slight edge on takeoff, leaving a faint "pencil line" in the take off of the jump. | | Over-rotation. | Generating too much spin. | Rotational Control <br> Review viewpoints for controlling rotation with the head/eyes. <br> Pressure Control <br> Have students focus on flexing the legs on landing, to stop rotation. |

NOTES:備註:

EXPERT SKILL DEVELOPMENT
專家技能發展

At this stage, students should be comfortable with the following skills in advanced terrain and speeds:
在此階段,學生應該能夠在高級地形和速度下熟練運用以下技能:
  • Refined use of a centred and mobile body position, lower body movements to turn the snowboard, and balance over the edge.
    精細運用居中且靈活的身體姿勢,下半身動作來轉動滑雪板,以及在邊緣上的平衡。
  • Advanced use of Timing & Coordination skills, to allow for strength, flow, and linking of complex manoeuvres in riding.
    進階運用時機與協調技能,以達到力量、流暢度及連結複雜動作的騎乘表現。
  • Advanced ability to load, unload, and steer the snowboard for performance in all-mountain riding.
    具備高階能力,能夠裝載、卸載並操控滑雪板,以應對全山地滑行的表現。

    Creating instances where students are forced to adapt to varied situations will help to progress these students on to more challenging advanced manoeuvres and skills.
    創造讓學生必須適應多變情境的機會,有助於推動他們進階至更具挑戰性的高階動作與技巧。

A STRATEGIC APPROACH策略性方法

At this level, it’s important that students can develop a tactical, or strategic approach to riding in expert terrain. Encourage students to improvise solutions to challenging situations “on the fly”. Have them experiment with faster and slower riding, a variety of turn types (sliding vs. carving) as well as rounder and more open turn shapes. Teaching riders at this level is about guiding them to find solution to tactical challenges due to terrain, conditions, manoeuvres, or skills.
在此階段,學生必須能夠發展出在專家級地形中滑行的戰術或策略性方法。鼓勵學生即興應對挑戰情境。讓他們嘗試快慢不同的滑行速度、多種轉彎方式(滑行轉彎與刻滑轉彎),以及較圓滑與較開闊的轉彎形狀。此階段的教學重點在於引導滑雪者針對地形、環境、動作或技巧所帶來的戰術挑戰,尋找解決方案。
PISTE:滑雪道:

EXPERT CARVING專業雕刻轉彎

The Student學生

These snowboarders have the ability to perform carved turns on most groomed runs. At times they may find themselves having difficulty maintaining the “pencil line” track, especially on steeper slopes and at higher speeds.
這些滑雪板手能夠在大多數整備過的滑道上進行雕刻轉彎。有時他們可能會發現自己難以維持「鉛筆線」軌跡,特別是在較陡的坡度和較高的速度下。

Terrain地形

Intermediate and advanced runs, groomed conditions.
中級及高級滑道,經過整備的雪況。

Goals目標

  • To carve at higher speeds on steeper slopes.
    在較陡的坡面上以較高速度進行刻滑。
  • To improve timing skills to develop versatility in carving skills - varied shapes and sizes of carved turns.
    提升時機掌握技巧,以發展刻滑技巧的多樣性——各種形狀與大小的刻滑轉彎。
  • To add variation to movements, allowing for quicker decision-making and adaptation skills.
    增加動作變化,提升快速決策與適應能力。

Suggested Tactics建議戰術

"EDGE, PRESSURE, STEER" MODEL
「EDGE、PRESSURE、STEER」模型

This sequence of movements can assist students at this level to maximize the performance of their carved turns. Encourage riders to follow this sequence:
這一連串動作能幫助此階段的學員發揮雕刻轉彎的最大效能。鼓勵騎士依照此順序進行:
  1. Neutral position between turns.
    轉彎間的中立姿勢。
  2. Establish edge “grip” through a lateral, or inclined, movement of the body.
    透過身體的側向或傾斜動作,建立邊緣「抓地力」。
  3. Load the snowboard through a combination of lateral movement of the mass inside the turn, and flexion/extension in the lower joints.
    透過轉彎內部質量的側向移動與下肢關節的屈伸組合,施加壓力於滑雪板。
  4. Steer the snowboard to the desired path of travel.
    引導滑雪板朝向預期的行進路徑。

POSITION & BALANCE:姿勢與平衡:

Position the upper-body in a slightly open position at start of toeside turn (chest oriented toward nose), to encourage lateral balance and to allow the snowboard to carve.
在腳尖轉彎開始時,將上半身擺成略微開放的位置(胸部朝向鼻尖方向),以促進側向平衡並讓滑雪板能夠刻滑。
Assume an “aggressive” position in the upper-body with increased flexion at the hips, creating stability that allows the lower joints to turn the snowboard, while maintaining mobility for continuous adjustment.
採取「積極」的上半身姿勢,臀部增加屈曲,創造穩定性,使下半身關節能夠轉動滑雪板,同時保持靈活性以持續調整。

PIVOT:樞軸:

Rotation: Resistance to rotational movements at start of turn to ensure the board is carving at the start of the turning arc.
旋轉:在轉彎開始時對旋轉動作施加阻力,確保滑雪板在轉彎弧線開始時即刻滑行。

Counter-Rotation: Experiment with counter-rotational movements at start of turns, as well as delayed rotational movements later in the turn, to add power and force to turns.
反向旋轉:在轉彎開始時嘗試反向旋轉動作,以及在轉彎後期延遲旋轉動作,以增加轉彎的力量與動能。

TIMING & COORDINATION:時間與協調:

Linking: Approach riding as a series of linked manoeuvres. Encourage students to work to combine a series of difficult movements into one effort.
連結:將騎乘視為一連串相連的動作。鼓勵學生努力將一連串困難的動作結合成一次完整的動作。

Vary duration and impulse of movements to get varied outcomes.
改變動作的持續時間和力度,以獲得不同的效果。

EDGING:刻邊:

Versatility: Refined and varied use of the snowboard’s sidecut, along with varied edge angle to create varied turn shapes.
多功能性:精細且多樣化地運用滑雪板的側切角,並搭配不同的刻邊角度,創造多變的轉彎形狀。

Experiment with “bracing” against the edge - maintaining a clean carved track while the body changes positions (rotation, counter rotation, vertical movement).
嘗試「支撐」於邊緣——在身體改變姿勢(旋轉、反向旋轉、垂直移動)時,保持乾淨的刻痕軌跡。

PRESSURE:壓力:

Loading & Unloading: Pressuring (bending) the snowboard and allowing the energy stored to re-direct into the new turn will allow for lively, dynamic riding.
加載與卸載:對滑雪板施加壓力(彎曲),並讓儲存的能量重新導向新的轉彎,將能帶來活潑且動態的滑行。

In shorter turns, the use of lateral movements in the feet (pedalling) will encourage the addition of torsional pressure in the snowboard.
在較短的轉彎中,腳部的橫向動作(踩踏)會促進滑雪板扭轉壓力的增加。

OFF-PISTE:非壓雪場地:

EXPERT FREERIDING SKILLS
專家級自由滑雪技巧

The Student學生

These snowboarders have the ability to perform sliding and carved turns on green, blue and black runs. The are comfortable riding at high speeds, and want to explore expert freeride terrain, including steeps, bumps, trees, and powder. These riders will improve by being exposed to a variety of terrain and situations, and developing their ability to react and decide on the best approach to a given terrain challenge.
這些滑雪板手能夠在綠線、藍線和黑線滑道上進行滑行和刻滑轉彎。他們能夠自在地高速滑行,並希望探索專家級自由滑雪地形,包括陡坡、波浪地形、樹林和粉雪。這些滑雪者透過接觸各種地形和情境,並培養對特定地形挑戰做出反應和決策的能力,將能持續進步。

Terrain地形

All terrain, green, blue, black and double-black runs (un-groomed, including bumpy terrain).
所有地形,綠線、藍線、黑線及雙黑線滑道(未整備,包括顛簸地形)。

Goals目標

  • To ride at higher speeds on steeper slopes.
    在較陡坡上以較高速度滑行。
  • To perform shorter radius turns in challenging situations.
    在具挑戰性的情況下執行較短半徑的轉彎。
  • To improve timing skills to develop versatility in all-mountain riding skills.
    提升時機掌握技巧,以發展全山地騎乘技能的多樣性。
  • To add variation to movements, allowing for quicker decision-making and adaptation skills.
    增加動作變化,促進更快速的決策與適應能力。

EXPERT FREERIDING: SUGGESTED TACTICS
專家級自由騎乘:建議策略

  • Vary line - rounder turns, around and over bumps.
    變換路線——採用較圓滑的轉彎,繞過並越過凸起地形。
  • Vary speed - faster speeds in bumps create more pressure to deal with. Push the limits!
    變換速度——在顛簸處加快速度會產生更多需要應對的壓力。挑戰極限!
  • Vary turn size - larger turns in bumps create the need for dynamic absorption in the midst of turning.
    變換轉彎大小——在顛簸處進行較大幅度的轉彎,會需要在轉彎過程中進行動態吸收。
  • Vary movements - experiment with up and down un-weighting, and a combination of the two. Inclination and angulation movements can be blended in freeride terrain.
    變換動作——嘗試上下卸重,或兩者結合。在自由滑行地形中,可以融合傾斜與角度調整的動作。
  • Vary terrain - expose students to a variety of terrain situations, to develop a sense of autonomy and decision-making.
    變換地形——讓學員接觸各種地形狀況,以培養自主性和決策能力。
  • Experiment with moving the snowboard forward and back under the body.
    嘗試將滑雪板在身體下方前後移動。
  • Isolate steering movements within a turn (allowing the snowboard to create small "gar-
    在轉彎時隔離轉向動作(讓滑雪板產生小幅度的「gar-」

FREESTYLE:自由式:

CREATING VARIATION IN FREESTYLE RIDING
在自由式滑行中創造變化

The Student學生

This student has a high level of confidence in park and/or freestyle terrain. Their skills will be developed through safe challenges and the creation of new movement sequences.
這位學生對公園及/或自由式地形有高度的自信。他們的技能將透過安全的挑戰和創造新的動作序列來發展。

Terrain地形

Small (S) and medium (M) and large (L) terrain park features.
小型(S)、中型(M)及大型(L)地形公園設施。

Goals目標

  • To learn to expand their “bag of tricks” in the park.
    學習在公園中擴展他們的「技巧包」。
  • To apply existing freestyle skills to larger features, with more speed/amplitude.
    將現有的自由式技巧應用於更大的設施,並增加速度與幅度。

Suggested Tactics建議策略

POSITION & BALANCE:位置與平衡:

Develop enhanced awareness and mobility, to achieve a larger variety of freestyle manoeuvres. Examples: Presses on rails with slope. Boardslides on challenging features. Spins with grabs.
培養更強的覺察力與靈活度,以完成更多樣化的自由式動作。範例:在有坡度的欄杆上做壓板動作。在具挑戰性的設施上做滑板滑行。帶抓握的旋轉動作。

PIVOT:樞軸:

Add variety to movements used to control rotation, through rotation and counter-rotation. Use of head, shoulders, hips and legs/feet (together or separately) to influence
透過旋轉與反向旋轉,增加用於控制旋轉的動作變化。利用頭部、肩膀、臀部與腿/腳(合併或分開)來影響

rotation. Examples: Complex rotations on rail/box features. Spins on and off of rails or boxes. Variety of airs with rotation, including beyond 360-degrees, and on larger jump features.
旋轉。範例:在欄杆或箱型設施上做複雜旋轉。在欄杆或箱型設施上做旋轉進出動作。各種帶旋轉的空中動作,包括超過 360 度的旋轉,以及在較大跳躍設施上的空中動作。

EDGING:邊緣控制:

Refined use of edging to create take-off and rotational platform. Ability to maintain flat base over varied box and rail features. Examples: Boardslides through kinked or curved features. Appropriate edge angle on approach to rail/box or jump features. Use of edges to control exit from features.
精細運用邊緣控制以創造起跳和旋轉平台。能夠在不同的箱子和滑軌特徵上保持板底平穩。範例:在彎曲或曲線特徵中進行板滑。接近滑軌/箱子或跳躍特徵時採用適當的邊緣角度。利用邊緣控制離開特徵。

PRESSURE:壓力控制:

Loading, unloading the snowboard and creating/absorbing pressures appropriate to features and desired outcome. Examples: Boardslides through kinks in rails/boxes. Urban-style rails.
對滑雪板施加或釋放壓力,並根據特徵和期望結果創造或吸收壓力。範例:在滑軌/箱子彎曲處進行板滑。城市風格滑軌。

TIMING & COORDINATION:時機與協調:

Adjustment of duration and power of movements in relation to features and manoeuvres. Appropriate sequence of movements according to desired outcome. Examples:
根據特徵和動作調整動作的持續時間和力度。根據期望結果安排適當的動作順序。範例:

ROTATION VARIATIONS OFF OF RAILS
軌道旋轉變化

  • Sweeps: Rotating on the rail in the same direction the rider got on the rail.
    掃掠動作:沿著騎士進入軌道的相同方向在軌道上旋轉。
  • Switch-ups: rotating on the rail in the opposite direction the rider got on the rail.
    Switch-ups:在滑軌上以與騎上滑軌時相反的方向旋轉。
  • Same ways: rotating off the rail in the same direction as the initiation of the slide.
    Same ways:以與滑行開始方向相同的方向從滑軌上旋轉下來。
  • Pretzel: rotating off the rail in the opposite direction as the initiation of the slide.
    Pretzel:以與滑行開始方向相反的方向從滑軌上旋轉下來。

TEACHING CHILDREN教導兒童

Teaching children isn’t just about the technical aspects of snowboarding. Children make up the majority of students learning to snowboard, and as such, special attention needs to be paid to how you conduct children’s lessons.
教導兒童不僅僅是關於滑雪板的技術層面。兒童佔學習滑雪板學生的大多數,因此,在進行兒童課程時需要特別注意教學方式。
In addition to this information, please be sure to review Chapter 4: Risk Management as well as the Kids Can Snowboard Teaching Guide, available on our web site.
除了這些資訊外,請務必參閱第 4 章:風險管理,以及我們網站上提供的《兒童滑雪板教學指南》。

THE BASICS OF PHYSICAL DEVELOPMENT IN CHILDREN
兒童身體發展的基礎知識

Understanding the differences in physical capabilities gives the instructor an advantage in working with children. Using their insights into a child’s development, an instructor can adapt their teaching methods to get the best results by making learning meaningful and fun for kids. Children learn differently than adults and as they grow they are continuously developing and changing. Physical and mental development in children follows a predictable pattern. The sequence of development remains constant, but the rate of development will vary from child to child.
了解身體能力的差異,能讓教練在教導兒童時更具優勢。利用對兒童發展的洞察,教練可以調整教學方法,使學習對孩子們既有意義又有趣,從而取得最佳效果。兒童的學習方式與成人不同,隨著成長,他們持續發展與變化。兒童的身體和心理發展遵循可預測的模式。發展的順序保持不變,但發展速度因兒童而異。
Muscular control and coordination do not develop evenly throughout the body. A child gains motor control from the mid-line of the body out to the extremities. This means a child can control the larger muscle groups (trunk and hip joint area) before the smaller ones (arms, hands, legs, ankles). Children rely on larger muscle groups to move and regain balance than the smaller ones.
肌肉控制與協調在身體各部位的發展並不均衡。孩子的動作控制是從身體中線向四肢延伸。這表示孩子能先控制較大的肌肉群(軀幹和髖關節區域),再控制較小的肌肉群(手臂、手、腿、腳踝)。孩子在移動和恢復平衡時,較依賴較大的肌肉群,而非較小的肌肉群。

Control develops from the head down to the feet. Children can control their trunks before their legs, hips before their knees, ankles and feet, and hands before their feet.
控制能力是從頭部向腳部發展。孩子能先控制軀幹,再控制腿部,先控制髖部,再控制膝蓋、腳踝和腳,手的控制能力則先於腳。

Younger children are not capable of subtle movement in their ankle joints to control lateral (edge-to-edge) balance. The shoulders and the upper body are constantly adjusting between forward and upright positions in order to maintain balance.
年幼的孩子無法在腳踝關節做出細微的動作來控制側向(邊緣到邊緣)的平衡。肩膀和上半身會不斷在前傾與直立姿勢間調整,以維持平衡。

Hands will often mimic what children are trying to make their feet do. Encouraging such movement can be effective at getting the legs and feet to perform.
手部常常會模仿孩子試圖讓腳做出的動作。鼓勵這種動作有助於促使腿部和腳部的表現。

The centre of mass in a child’s body is disproportionately high until approximately age 8 (and a helmet adds to this!). Children need a wider stance to help stabilize this top-heavy body. Because motor control and strength are not well developed at this stage, children use their bones rather than their muscles to support their frame. The joints are stacked one over the other, in a wide, straight-legged stance with the hips aligned over the heels. The upper body bends forward from the waist to compensate for the hip position. On steeper terrain and at higher speeds, extra forces are put on the board causing the child to need to “lock” into this position in an effort to resist the forces. With this stiff, inflexible stance, the child has difficulty learning balancing movements in the turn.
兒童身體的質心在大約 8 歲之前相對較高(戴上頭盔會使這個情況更明顯!)。兒童需要較寬的站姿來幫助穩定這種上半身較重的體態。由於此階段的運動控制和肌力尚未發展完善,兒童會用骨骼而非肌肉來支撐身體。關節一個疊一個,採用寬闊且腿部伸直的站姿,臀部與腳跟對齊。上半身從腰部向前彎曲以補償臀部的位置。在較陡的地形和較快的速度下,滑板會承受額外的力量,導致兒童需要「鎖定」這個姿勢以抵抗這些力量。由於這種僵硬且不靈活的站姿,兒童在學習轉彎時的平衡動作會感到困難。

Terrain and speed are important factors in the development of skills. Practice new movements on relatively easy terrain and make sure the speed is appropriate to allow progress. Once movements have been repeated and refined, you can progress to steeper terrain - this can be a fabulous built-in reward system.
地形和速度是技能發展的重要因素。應在相對簡單的地形上練習新動作,並確保速度適中以促進進步。一旦動作反覆練習並精進後,就可以進階到較陡的地形——這也可以成為一個絕佳的內在獎勵系統。

CHARACTERISTICS OF CHILDREN AS THEY GROW
兒童成長的特徵

4 AND UNDER4 歲及以下

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
身體特徵
TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS教學注意事項
Tires easily—has low stamina
容易疲勞——耐力低
Keep on-snow sessions short.
保持雪地課程時間短。
Stance may biased towards the back foot. Lacks small muscle co-ordination-uses large muscle groups to maintain balance and may appear clumsy and uncoordinated.
站姿可能偏向後腳。缺乏小肌肉協調能力,使用大肌肉群來維持平衡,可能看起來笨拙且不協調。
Avoid one-footed manoeuvres. Instructor should assist student with mobility. Focus on fun and creating comfort sliding in the winter environment.
避免單腳動作。教練應協助學生移動。重點放在樂趣及在冬季環境中滑行的舒適感。
Has difficulty separating the activity of the upper and the lower body (referred to as "upper/lower body separation").
難以分離上半身與下半身的動作(稱為「上/下半身分離」)。
Focus on simple movements generated from the core. Be realistic with expectations of progression.
專注於由核心產生的簡單動作。對進展的期望要實際。
Lateral movement is easier than vertical movement.
側向移動比垂直移動容易。
Turning effort will be generated through inclination (bending at the waist).
轉向動作會透過傾斜(腰部彎曲)產生。
Not yet independent or able to look after themselves.
尚未獨立或能夠自理。
Constant monitoring of physical comfort (clothing, energy etc.).
持續監控身體舒適度(衣著、能量等)。
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS Tires easily—has low stamina Keep on-snow sessions short. Stance may biased towards the back foot. Lacks small muscle co-ordination-uses large muscle groups to maintain balance and may appear clumsy and uncoordinated. Avoid one-footed manoeuvres. Instructor should assist student with mobility. Focus on fun and creating comfort sliding in the winter environment. Has difficulty separating the activity of the upper and the lower body (referred to as "upper/lower body separation"). Focus on simple movements generated from the core. Be realistic with expectations of progression. Lateral movement is easier than vertical movement. Turning effort will be generated through inclination (bending at the waist). Not yet independent or able to look after themselves. Constant monitoring of physical comfort (clothing, energy etc.).| PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS | TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS | | :--- | :--- | | Tires easily—has low stamina | Keep on-snow sessions short. | | Stance may biased towards the back foot. Lacks small muscle co-ordination-uses large muscle groups to maintain balance and may appear clumsy and uncoordinated. | Avoid one-footed manoeuvres. Instructor should assist student with mobility. Focus on fun and creating comfort sliding in the winter environment. | | Has difficulty separating the activity of the upper and the lower body (referred to as "upper/lower body separation"). | Focus on simple movements generated from the core. Be realistic with expectations of progression. | | Lateral movement is easier than vertical movement. | Turning effort will be generated through inclination (bending at the waist). | | Not yet independent or able to look after themselves. | Constant monitoring of physical comfort (clothing, energy etc.). |
MENTAL CHARACTERISTICS心理特徵 TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS教學考量
Short attention span.注意力持續時間短。 Reward attention with "fun" rewards like a short session building a snowman.
以「有趣」的獎勵來鼓勵注意力,例如短暫的堆雪人活動。
Vivid imagination.豐富的想像力。 Use games with lots of imagination and NO RULES.
使用充滿想像力且沒有規則的遊戲。
Ego-centric - only able to focus on their own needs.
以自我為中心——只能專注於自己的需求。
Children in this category should always be taught in a private lesson situation.
這類兒童應該始終在一對一的教學環境中學習。
Copy cats.模仿者。 Learn through imitation.
透過模仿學習。
Easily overwhelmed with too much.
容易因為資訊過多而感到不知所措。
Copes best with ONE instruction rather than a series of instructions.
較能應付單一指令,而非一連串的指令。
Cannot understand mirror images.
無法理解鏡像。
Stand BESIDE the child to demonstrate or FRONT of the child, facing the same way as the child.
站在孩子旁邊示範,或站在孩子前方,面向與孩子相同的方向。
Do not understand cause and effect.
無法理解因果關係。
Control effect with clear instructions and suitable (safe) terrain.
以清楚的指示和適合(安全)的地形來控制效果。
Excited to use words but not always able to express feelings - reactions that are out of proportion are a sign of frustration.
渴望使用言語,但不總能表達情感——反應過度是挫折感的徵兆。
Stop. Find out what is the problem because their learning will stop if the frustration continues.
停下來。找出問題所在,因為如果挫折感持續,他們的學習將會停止。
MENTAL CHARACTERISTICS TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS Short attention span. Reward attention with "fun" rewards like a short session building a snowman. Vivid imagination. Use games with lots of imagination and NO RULES. Ego-centric - only able to focus on their own needs. Children in this category should always be taught in a private lesson situation. Copy cats. Learn through imitation. Easily overwhelmed with too much. Copes best with ONE instruction rather than a series of instructions. Cannot understand mirror images. Stand BESIDE the child to demonstrate or FRONT of the child, facing the same way as the child. Do not understand cause and effect. Control effect with clear instructions and suitable (safe) terrain. Excited to use words but not always able to express feelings - reactions that are out of proportion are a sign of frustration. Stop. Find out what is the problem because their learning will stop if the frustration continues.| MENTAL CHARACTERISTICS | TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS | | :--- | :--- | | Short attention span. | Reward attention with "fun" rewards like a short session building a snowman. | | Vivid imagination. | Use games with lots of imagination and NO RULES. | | Ego-centric - only able to focus on their own needs. | Children in this category should always be taught in a private lesson situation. | | Copy cats. | Learn through imitation. | | Easily overwhelmed with too much. | Copes best with ONE instruction rather than a series of instructions. | | Cannot understand mirror images. | Stand BESIDE the child to demonstrate or FRONT of the child, facing the same way as the child. | | Do not understand cause and effect. | Control effect with clear instructions and suitable (safe) terrain. | | Excited to use words but not always able to express feelings - reactions that are out of proportion are a sign of frustration. | Stop. Find out what is the problem because their learning will stop if the frustration continues. |

PHYSICAL LITERACY身體素養

Children who are physically literate move with competence and confidence in a wide variety of physical activities in multiple environments that benefit the healthy development of the whole person.
具備身體素養的兒童能在多種環境中,以熟練且自信的方式進行各種體能活動,有助於整體健康發展。
Physical Literacy provides a solid foundation for children and youth to develop the skills, knowledge and attitudes they need to enable them to engage with poise and confidence across a wide variety of activities. The development of physical literacy is now a reality for educators and practitioners and many provincial physical education curricula now identify the development of physically literate students as the major outcome of physical education programs.
身體素養為兒童和青少年提供堅實的基礎,使他們能發展所需的技能、知識與態度,從而自信且從容地參與各種活動。身體素養的發展現已成為教育者和實務工作者的現實,許多省級體育課程現今將培養具備身體素養的學生視為體育課程的主要目標。

Learn More: www.physicalliteracy.ca
了解更多:www.physicalliteracy.ca

5 TO 7 YEARS OLD
5 至 7 歲

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
身體特徵
TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS教學考量
Have varying amounts of energy.
具有不同程度的精力。
May still need rest periods.
可能仍需要休息時間。
Beginning to want to challenge limits.
開始想要挑戰極限。
Allow for some experimentation within the bounds of SAFETY.
允許在安全範圍內進行一些嘗試。
Coordination improving but still highly variable - look for inability to skate, have control staying in a line, stopping and turning on command.
協調性有所提升,但仍然非常不穩定——注意是否無法滑行、無法保持直線控制、無法依指令停下和轉彎。
Group kids according to size and coordination, not just age.
依據體型和協調性分組,而不僅僅是年齡。
Beginning to refine motor skills - this can come and go as nervous system tries to catch up to growth.
開始精進動作技巧——隨著神經系統努力追趕成長,這種狀況可能時有時無。
Be prepared for varied coordination within a group. One-footed exercises may be appropriate for some and not others.
準備好接受團體中協調能力的差異。有些人適合單腳練習,有些則不適合。
Beginning to perform simultaneous lateral movements and develop upper and lower body separation (e.g.: upper body rotation while sweeping back foot).
開始執行同時的側向動作,並發展上下半身的分離(例如:上半身旋轉同時掃動後腳)。
Start to teach refinement of movements where appropriate.
在適當的情況下,開始教授動作的精細化。
Susceptible to injuries because they are less coordinated and have slower reaction times.
因為協調性較差且反應時間較慢,容易受傷。
Make sure the rules of safety are simple and clear.
確保安全規則簡單明確。
MENTAL CHARACTERISTICS心理特徵 TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS教學注意事項
Still have fears and will attach to adults quickly.
仍然會有恐懼感,並且會迅速依附於大人。
Manage fears by creating a comfortable, safe environment.
透過營造舒適、安全的環境來管理恐懼。
Age of greatest dropout rate if they have a bad experience.
如果有不好的經驗,這個年齡層的輟學率最高。
Create fun and memorable experiences. Mix in enough of what they "want" (freestyle, fun tricks, etc.) with what they "need" (skill development).
創造有趣且難忘的體驗。將他們「想要」的(自由式、好玩的技巧等)與他們「需要」的(技能發展)適當結合。
Can work well in pairs.
能夠很好地兩人合作。
Pair up the children for some activities.
將孩子們兩人一組進行一些活動。
Team begins to take on meaning at around age 7 , but they still have difficulty understanding and accepting rules - they think, "It's okay for me to bend the rules, but not for you".
團隊的概念大約在 7 歲左右開始形成,但他們仍然難以理解和接受規則——他們會想,「我可以違反規則,但你不行」。
Keep the rules to a minimum and keep them simple. Games and activities should always be kept "win-win" - there should be no losers in snowboarding..
規則要盡量簡單且最少。遊戲和活動應該始終保持「雙贏」——滑雪板運動中不應該有輸家。
Sense of independence.獨立意識。 Allow for independent, experimentation (within safe parameters).
允許在安全範圍內進行獨立嘗試。

思考過程是:停下-思考-執行。例如:他們看到吊椅斜坡接近,但無法快速處理資訊,錯過下車時機。
Thought process is: STOP - THINK - EXECUTE
E.g.: They see the chairlift ramp approaching but can't process the information fast enough and miss getting off.
Thought process is: STOP - THINK - EXECUTE E.g.: They see the chairlift ramp approaching but can't process the information fast enough and miss getting off.| Thought process is: STOP - THINK - EXECUTE | | :--- | | E.g.: They see the chairlift ramp approaching but can't process the information fast enough and miss getting off. |
Keep instructions simple and use repeated cue words often ("straighten board, stand, straight run") - include the source of their lost attention (staring into the trees) in the lesson to keep their attention.
保持指示簡單,並經常使用重複的提示詞(「板子拉直、站起來、直線滑行」)-在課程中加入他們分心的來源(盯著樹看),以保持他們的注意力。
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS Have varying amounts of energy. May still need rest periods. Beginning to want to challenge limits. Allow for some experimentation within the bounds of SAFETY. Coordination improving but still highly variable - look for inability to skate, have control staying in a line, stopping and turning on command. Group kids according to size and coordination, not just age. Beginning to refine motor skills - this can come and go as nervous system tries to catch up to growth. Be prepared for varied coordination within a group. One-footed exercises may be appropriate for some and not others. Beginning to perform simultaneous lateral movements and develop upper and lower body separation (e.g.: upper body rotation while sweeping back foot). Start to teach refinement of movements where appropriate. Susceptible to injuries because they are less coordinated and have slower reaction times. Make sure the rules of safety are simple and clear. MENTAL CHARACTERISTICS TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS Still have fears and will attach to adults quickly. Manage fears by creating a comfortable, safe environment. Age of greatest dropout rate if they have a bad experience. Create fun and memorable experiences. Mix in enough of what they "want" (freestyle, fun tricks, etc.) with what they "need" (skill development). Can work well in pairs. Pair up the children for some activities. Team begins to take on meaning at around age 7 , but they still have difficulty understanding and accepting rules - they think, "It's okay for me to bend the rules, but not for you". Keep the rules to a minimum and keep them simple. Games and activities should always be kept "win-win" - there should be no losers in snowboarding.. Sense of independence. Allow for independent, experimentation (within safe parameters). "Thought process is: STOP - THINK - EXECUTE E.g.: They see the chairlift ramp approaching but can't process the information fast enough and miss getting off." Keep instructions simple and use repeated cue words often ("straighten board, stand, straight run") - include the source of their lost attention (staring into the trees) in the lesson to keep their attention.| PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS | TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS | | :--- | :--- | | Have varying amounts of energy. | May still need rest periods. | | Beginning to want to challenge limits. | Allow for some experimentation within the bounds of SAFETY. | | Coordination improving but still highly variable - look for inability to skate, have control staying in a line, stopping and turning on command. | Group kids according to size and coordination, not just age. | | Beginning to refine motor skills - this can come and go as nervous system tries to catch up to growth. | Be prepared for varied coordination within a group. One-footed exercises may be appropriate for some and not others. | | Beginning to perform simultaneous lateral movements and develop upper and lower body separation (e.g.: upper body rotation while sweeping back foot). | Start to teach refinement of movements where appropriate. | | Susceptible to injuries because they are less coordinated and have slower reaction times. | Make sure the rules of safety are simple and clear. | | MENTAL CHARACTERISTICS | TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS | | Still have fears and will attach to adults quickly. | Manage fears by creating a comfortable, safe environment. | | Age of greatest dropout rate if they have a bad experience. | Create fun and memorable experiences. Mix in enough of what they "want" (freestyle, fun tricks, etc.) with what they "need" (skill development). | | Can work well in pairs. | Pair up the children for some activities. | | Team begins to take on meaning at around age 7 , but they still have difficulty understanding and accepting rules - they think, "It's okay for me to bend the rules, but not for you". | Keep the rules to a minimum and keep them simple. Games and activities should always be kept "win-win" - there should be no losers in snowboarding.. | | Sense of independence. | Allow for independent, experimentation (within safe parameters). | | Thought process is: STOP - THINK - EXECUTE <br> E.g.: They see the chairlift ramp approaching but can't process the information fast enough and miss getting off. | Keep instructions simple and use repeated cue words often ("straighten board, stand, straight run") - include the source of their lost attention (staring into the trees) in the lesson to keep their attention. |

8 TO 11 YEARS OLD
8 至 11 歲

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
身體特徵
TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS教學考量
Have unlimited amounts of energy.
擁有無限的精力。
Less talk, more rock!
少說話,多行動!
Likes to challenge limits of performance feels "invincible".
喜歡挑戰極限的表現,感覺「無敵」。
Give students safe, yet challenging goals.
給學生安全但具挑戰性的目標。
Generally, at 8 or 9 years of age they have the strength and coordination to balance in the centre of the board and make movements to stay there.
通常在 8 或 9 歲時,他們已具備足夠的力量和協調性,能夠在滑板中央保持平衡並做出動作以維持平衡。
Challenge student with basic freestyle manoeuvres (ollies, 180's) and more challenging terrain, when appropriate.
在適當的情況下,挑戰學生進行基本的自由式動作(ollies、180 度轉)以及更具挑戰性的地形。
Beginning to develop fine motor movement. Can move all four quadrants independently and can separate upper body activity from lower body activity.
開始發展精細的運動能力。能獨立移動四個象限,並能將上半身活動與下半身活動分開。
Improvements can now focus on smaller joints.
現在可以將改進重點放在較小的關節上。
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS Have unlimited amounts of energy. Less talk, more rock! Likes to challenge limits of performance feels "invincible". Give students safe, yet challenging goals. Generally, at 8 or 9 years of age they have the strength and coordination to balance in the centre of the board and make movements to stay there. Challenge student with basic freestyle manoeuvres (ollies, 180's) and more challenging terrain, when appropriate. Beginning to develop fine motor movement. Can move all four quadrants independently and can separate upper body activity from lower body activity. Improvements can now focus on smaller joints.| PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS | TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS | | :--- | :--- | | Have unlimited amounts of energy. | Less talk, more rock! | | Likes to challenge limits of performance feels "invincible". | Give students safe, yet challenging goals. | | Generally, at 8 or 9 years of age they have the strength and coordination to balance in the centre of the board and make movements to stay there. | Challenge student with basic freestyle manoeuvres (ollies, 180's) and more challenging terrain, when appropriate. | | Beginning to develop fine motor movement. Can move all four quadrants independently and can separate upper body activity from lower body activity. | Improvements can now focus on smaller joints. |
MENTAL CHARACTERISTICS心理特徵 TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS教學考量
Unlimited curiosity.無限的好奇心。 Incorporate some Guided Discovery teaching approach.
融入部分引導式探索教學法。
Rely on feedback from both peers and adults.
依賴同儕與成人的回饋。
Provide lots of positive feedback and promote encouragement amongst group members.
提供大量正面回饋,並促進團體成員間的鼓勵。
Games and activities should always be kept "win-win" - there should be no losers in snowboarding.
遊戲和活動應始終保持「雙贏」—滑雪板運動中不應有輸家。
Encourage participation for the enjoyment of the activity.
鼓勵參與,以享受活動的樂趣。
Tests authority - respects the instructor as an authority figure, but has little respect for the instructor's intelligence.
挑戰權威—尊重教練作為權威人物,但對教練的智慧缺乏尊重。
Set clear guidelines for behaviour and stick to them. Remember that what you permit, you promote.
訂立明確的行為準則並堅持執行。請記住,你所允許的,就是你所促進的。
MENTAL CHARACTERISTICS TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS Unlimited curiosity. Incorporate some Guided Discovery teaching approach. Rely on feedback from both peers and adults. Provide lots of positive feedback and promote encouragement amongst group members. Games and activities should always be kept "win-win" - there should be no losers in snowboarding. Encourage participation for the enjoyment of the activity. Tests authority - respects the instructor as an authority figure, but has little respect for the instructor's intelligence. Set clear guidelines for behaviour and stick to them. Remember that what you permit, you promote.| MENTAL CHARACTERISTICS | TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS | | :--- | :--- | | Unlimited curiosity. | Incorporate some Guided Discovery teaching approach. | | Rely on feedback from both peers and adults. | Provide lots of positive feedback and promote encouragement amongst group members. | | Games and activities should always be kept "win-win" - there should be no losers in snowboarding. | Encourage participation for the enjoyment of the activity. | | Tests authority - respects the instructor as an authority figure, but has little respect for the instructor's intelligence. | Set clear guidelines for behaviour and stick to them. Remember that what you permit, you promote. |

12 TO 15 YEARS OLD
12 至 15 歲

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
身體特徵
TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS教學考量
Age of motor skill refinement.
動作技巧精進的時期。
Can now begin to ride with the same skill refinement as adults.
現在可以開始以與成人相同的技巧精進程度騎乘。
May experience growth spurts and temporary periods of clumsiness.
可能會經歷生長突增期及暫時的笨拙階段。
Be considerate and show empathy and encouragement.
請體諒並展現同理心與鼓勵。
MENTAL CHARACTERISTICS心理特徵 TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS教學考量
Learns effectively by whole-part-whole method.
透過整體-部分-整體的方法有效學習。
Teach the whole manoeuvre, teach a part, and put the part back into the whole. Encourage lots of mileage.
教導整個動作,教導其中一部分,然後將該部分放回整體中。鼓勵大量練習。
Puberty may cause emotional changes and anxiety.
青春期可能會引起情緒變化和焦慮。
May be sensitive - be careful with criticism.
可能較為敏感-對批評要小心。
Wants to be independent from parents.
渴望從父母那裡獨立。
Responds to clear expectations and opportunities to express independence.
對明確的期望和表達獨立的機會有反應。
Gender difference becomes an issue.
性別差異成為一個問題。
If applicable, create same gender groupings.
如適用,建立相同性別的分組。
Can benefit from visualization techniques.
可以受益於視覺化技術。
Use analogies to aid understanding.
使用類比來幫助理解。
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS Age of motor skill refinement. Can now begin to ride with the same skill refinement as adults. May experience growth spurts and temporary periods of clumsiness. Be considerate and show empathy and encouragement. MENTAL CHARACTERISTICS TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS Learns effectively by whole-part-whole method. Teach the whole manoeuvre, teach a part, and put the part back into the whole. Encourage lots of mileage. Puberty may cause emotional changes and anxiety. May be sensitive - be careful with criticism. Wants to be independent from parents. Responds to clear expectations and opportunities to express independence. Gender difference becomes an issue. If applicable, create same gender groupings. Can benefit from visualization techniques. Use analogies to aid understanding.| PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS | TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS | | :--- | :--- | | Age of motor skill refinement. | Can now begin to ride with the same skill refinement as adults. | | May experience growth spurts and temporary periods of clumsiness. | Be considerate and show empathy and encouragement. | | MENTAL CHARACTERISTICS | TEACHING CONSIDERATIONS | | Learns effectively by whole-part-whole method. | Teach the whole manoeuvre, teach a part, and put the part back into the whole. Encourage lots of mileage. | | Puberty may cause emotional changes and anxiety. | May be sensitive - be careful with criticism. | | Wants to be independent from parents. | Responds to clear expectations and opportunities to express independence. | | Gender difference becomes an issue. | If applicable, create same gender groupings. | | Can benefit from visualization techniques. | Use analogies to aid understanding. |

LEARNING STYLES學習風格

When was the last time you saw a group of young children sitting, enjoying a lecture?
你上一次看到一群小朋友坐著,愉快地聽講是什麼時候?

Before the last stage of mental development that begins with adolescence, children cannot reason by using abstract concepts. They need to relate everything to something concrete, something real, in their environment. They need to see, feel and do.
在以青少年期開始的最後一個心理發展階段之前,兒童無法運用抽象概念進行推理。他們需要將所有事物與環境中具體、真實的事物聯繫起來。他們需要看見、感受並親自體驗。

The same principles apply on snow. An instructor will experience successful teaching with children by:
相同的原則也適用於雪地。教練在教導兒童時會獲得成功,方法包括:
  • Using verbal directions that are short, simple and keeping them to a minimum
    使用簡短、簡單且盡量少的口頭指令
  • Demonstrating manoeuvres many times during a lesson
    在課程中多次示範動作
  • Encouraging children to repeat successes over and over
    鼓勵兒童反覆重複成功的動作
  • Encouraging children to experiment with movement
    鼓勵孩子們嘗試各種動作
  • Using games instead of technical jargon or exercises intended for adults
    使用遊戲取代成人專用的術語或練習
  • Helping the younger children experience feeling by manual assistance
    透過手動輔助幫助年幼的孩子體驗感覺
  • Giving children ONE goal at a time (baby steps).
    一次只給孩子一個目標(循序漸進)。
  • Giving positive, specific feedback (applauding the child’s successes with comments that pinpoint the details of the success)
    給予正面且具體的回饋(以評論讚揚孩子的成功,並指出成功的細節)

LESSON PRESENTATION課程呈現

Introducing Yourself自我介紹

When you are introducing yourself to your class, take some time to get to know something about each one of them, and to let them get to know you. You can even make it fun. Here are some suggestions for making those first few minutes a success and for laying the groundwork for a good teaching environment.
當你向班上自我介紹時,花點時間了解每位學生的一些事情,並讓他們也認識你。你甚至可以讓這個過程變得有趣。以下是一些建議,幫助你讓最初的幾分鐘順利進行,並為良好的教學環境奠定基礎。
  • Make eye contact with the children. This will require you to remove your goggles or glasses if you are wearing any. If necessary, go down on one knee or bend over to the child’s level so that the children can see your face without craning their necks.
    與孩子們進行眼神交流。如果你戴著護目鏡或眼鏡,這時需要將它們取下。如有必要,請單膝跪地或彎腰至孩子的視線高度,讓孩子們不用仰頭就能看到你的臉。
  • Consider giving each child a nickname if you feel comfortable with nicknames. Tell them why you chose this name. This will make them feel special and important. Be prepared to adopt a nickname yourself, and be prepared to have some children object to another name.
    如果你對使用暱稱感到自在,可以考慮給每個孩子取一個暱稱,並告訴他們你為何選擇這個名字。這會讓他們感覺特別且重要。你也要準備好接受一個暱稱,並且準備面對有些孩子可能不喜歡被取其他名字的情況。
  • Some children will be receptive to a name game (e.g.: toss a foam cube or other soft object (like a glove or a hat) from one to another and have each person say either his name or the name of the person to whom he is tossing the cube).
    有些孩子會樂於參與名字遊戲(例如:將泡棉方塊或其他柔軟物品(如手套或帽子)從一人拋給另一人,每個人說出自己的名字或他拋給的人的名字)。
  • Get to know the children’s interests. Ask them about their favourite “thing” - an object, activity, person or animal. Find out what other sports they enjoy.
    了解孩子們的興趣。問問他們最喜歡的「東西」是什麼——可以是物品、活動、人物或動物。了解他們還喜歡哪些其他運動。

Use of Games and Activities
遊戲與活動的運用

Games and activities are important when teaching children. Although it is not necessary to use games throughout the entire lesson, we must keep in mind that children learn best through play. A new skill (or refinement of an old skill) will be more appealing to a child if it is wrapped up in the form of a game. Make sure you consider the age of the group when deciding the games or activities you will be using during the clinic. Balance the games with time just to ride and enjoy the movement without structure. The children will be reinforcing their skills with no conscious effort.
遊戲與活動在教導兒童時非常重要。雖然不必在整堂課中都使用遊戲,但我們必須記住,兒童透過遊戲學習效果最佳。若將新技能(或舊技能的精進)包裝成遊戲形式,對兒童來說會更具吸引力。決定課程中使用的遊戲或活動時,務必考慮團體的年齡。遊戲與自由騎乘、享受動作的時間要取得平衡。孩子們在無意識中就能強化他們的技能。

Make sure the activities/games you choose help develop one of the five skills of riding. Once you have determined the skill that will be the focus for the lesson, select activities and games that will develop that skill. It is important to correlate the game to the skill, and the game and skill to the age group. Some activities may be used to help develop more than one skill. If children enjoy a game, they will not mind repeating it.
確保你選擇的活動/遊戲有助於發展五項騎乘技能之一。確定本堂課的重點技能後,挑選能培養該技能的活動與遊戲。將遊戲與技能相互對應,並依年齡層選擇遊戲與技能的搭配非常重要。有些活動可用來發展多項技能。若孩子喜歡某個遊戲,他們不會介意重複玩。

Setting Goals設定目標

When setting goals for children the instructor must find a balance between the child’s goals and the realistic goals that can be attained in the lesson. A child often has goals that include riding freestyle terrain and learning the basics of snowboarding. The instructor can find balance by rewarding participation in basic exercises with fun, kid specific games and freestyle manoeuvres.
在為兒童設定目標時,教練必須在兒童的目標與課程中可實現的現實目標之間找到平衡。兒童通常的目標包括騎乘自由式地形以及學習滑雪板的基本技巧。教練可以透過以有趣、適合兒童的遊戲和自由式動作來獎勵參與基本練習,從而找到平衡。
Creating different levels for grouping children according to their age and riding ability serves two purposes.
根據兒童的年齡和騎乘能力創建不同的分組等級有兩個目的。

Not only does it give the snowboard school a convenient way of forming classes, it sets goals for the children.
這不僅為滑雪板學校提供了方便的分班方式,也為兒童設定了目標。

Achieving a new level of boarding becomes a reward for personal accomplishment. Colours, animals, numbers, figures or vehicles can designate the levels; whatever works for the boarding school.
達成新的滑雪板等級成為個人成就的獎勵。等級可以用顏色、動物、數字、圖形或交通工具來表示;只要適合滑雪板學校即可。

ALWAYS KEEP SAFETY IN MIND!
永遠保持安全意識!

The S.A.F.E. Model and Kids
S.A.F.E. 模型與兒童

In order for kids to progress, they must feel confident. The S.A.F.E. model (Static, Active, Free, Experimentation) provides a framework for students to find that confidence.
為了讓兒童進步,他們必須感到自信。S.A.F.E. 模型(靜態、主動、自由、實驗)提供了一個框架,幫助學生找到那份自信。

Ensure that you allow kids the time to progress to the “Experimentation” phase of the model before introducing new skills. This will ensure that they have consolidated and refined the existing movements, and have the necessary confidence to move on to more complicated skills.
請確保給予兒童足夠的時間,讓他們在引入新技能前,能夠進展到模型中的「實驗」階段。這將確保他們已鞏固並精進現有動作,並擁有必要的自信,進而學習更複雜的技能。

QUICKRIDE FOR KIDS兒童快速滑雪板

TEACHING 3-6 YEAR OLDS
教導 3 至 6 歲兒童

Kids aged 3 to 6 are quickly taking up snowboarding, thanks to advancements in kids’ equipment. Here are some things to remember when teaching these little ones…
由於兒童裝備的進步,3 至 6 歲的孩子們正迅速開始學習滑雪板。教導這些小朋友時,有幾點需要記住……
Do…應該……
  • Ensure that equipment fits them, and is made for someone their size - not just a mini adult board!
    確保裝備適合他們,且是為他們的身形設計的——而不僅僅是縮小版的成人板!

    \square Adjust your expectations! Progress at this level will take on many forms, and will happen in many small steps.
    \square 調整你的期望值!在這個階段的進步會以多種形式出現,並且會透過許多小步驟逐漸實現。

    \square Incorporate fun, games, and plenty of trial and error.
    \square 融入樂趣、遊戲,以及大量的嘗試與錯誤。

Don't...不要…

  • Don’t bother trying to have them skate or move with one foot attached. Strap both feet in and pull them with a tether on the board, a ski pole, or hula-hoop.
    別費心讓他們用一隻腳固定著滑行或移動。兩隻腳都綁好,然後用滑板上的繩索、滑雪杖或呼拉圈拉著他們。
  • Don’t rush to get them turning. Focus on balance first in varied situations and speeds.
    不要急著讓他們轉彎。先專注於在不同情況和速度下的平衡。
  • Don’t expect them to last for long. Start in 15 minute chunks and progress from there.
    不要期望他們能持續很久。從 15 分鐘一段開始,然後逐步增加時間。

PRE-QUICKRIDE PROGRESSION
快速滑行前的進階訓練

Before jumping into the QuickRide System with kids aged 3-6 years, consider the following steps, and take your time to get them there successfully.
在讓 3 至 6 歲的孩子開始使用 QuickRide 系統之前,請先考慮以下步驟,並花時間讓他們順利適應。
PRE-QUICKRIDE STEPSQuickRide 前置步驟 QUICKRIDE PHASEQuickRide 階段

A:雪地外探索(裝備與平衡) 在地毯上,認識裝備(穿戴雪靴及操作固定器),並練習在搖擺板或滑雪板上保持平衡。
A: Off-Snow Exploration (equipment & balance)
On carpet, learn about the equipment (doing up boots, and working the bindings), and practice balancing on a wobble-board or on the snowboard.
A: Off-Snow Exploration (equipment & balance) On carpet, learn about the equipment (doing up boots, and working the bindings), and practice balancing on a wobble-board or on the snowboard.| A: Off-Snow Exploration (equipment & balance) | | :--- | | On carpet, learn about the equipment (doing up boots, and working the bindings), and practice balancing on a wobble-board or on the snowboard. |
BASICS

B:雪地探索(平衡與滑行) 使用像是可伸縮繩索、滑雪杖或呼拉圈等輔助工具,在平緩的坡道上拖曳孩子,讓他們在滑行中探索平衡。
B: On-Snow Exploration (balance and sliding)
Using an aid like a retractable tether on the board, a ski pole to hold, or a hula hoop, explore balance while sliding by towing kids around a flat slope.
B: On-Snow Exploration (balance and sliding) Using an aid like a retractable tether on the board, a ski pole to hold, or a hula hoop, explore balance while sliding by towing kids around a flat slope.| B: On-Snow Exploration (balance and sliding) | | :--- | | Using an aid like a retractable tether on the board, a ski pole to hold, or a hula hoop, explore balance while sliding by towing kids around a flat slope. |
BASICS & SLIDING基礎與滑行

C:直線滑行與「J 型停」 利用緩坡,讓孩子直線滑行並嘗試透過眼睛觀察來讓滑板轉動並停下。此時雙腳應該都綁好。
C: Straight Running With "J-Stops"
Using a mellow slope, allow kids to straight-run and experiment with allowing the board to pivot and stop by looking with the eyes. Both feet should be strapped in for this.
C: Straight Running With "J-Stops" Using a mellow slope, allow kids to straight-run and experiment with allowing the board to pivot and stop by looking with the eyes. Both feet should be strapped in for this.| C: Straight Running With "J-Stops" | | :--- | | Using a mellow slope, allow kids to straight-run and experiment with allowing the board to pivot and stop by looking with the eyes. Both feet should be strapped in for this. |
SLIDING & CONTROL滑行與控制

D:里程與練習 不要急!花時間練習並嘗試這些技巧。讓學生接觸新的坡道和速度。如果有條件,嘗試地形起伏和滑行箱。一旦感到自在,再進入 QuickRide 系統的控制階段。
D: Mileage and practice
Don't rush it! Take the time to practice and experiment with these skills. Expose students to new slopes and speeds. If available, try terrain undulations and slider boxes. Once comfortable, then progress to the Control phase of the QuickRide System.
D: Mileage and practice Don't rush it! Take the time to practice and experiment with these skills. Expose students to new slopes and speeds. If available, try terrain undulations and slider boxes. Once comfortable, then progress to the Control phase of the QuickRide System.| D: Mileage and practice | | :--- | | Don't rush it! Take the time to practice and experiment with these skills. Expose students to new slopes and speeds. If available, try terrain undulations and slider boxes. Once comfortable, then progress to the Control phase of the QuickRide System. |
CONTROL
PRE-QUICKRIDE STEPS QUICKRIDE PHASE "A: Off-Snow Exploration (equipment & balance) On carpet, learn about the equipment (doing up boots, and working the bindings), and practice balancing on a wobble-board or on the snowboard." BASICS "B: On-Snow Exploration (balance and sliding) Using an aid like a retractable tether on the board, a ski pole to hold, or a hula hoop, explore balance while sliding by towing kids around a flat slope." BASICS & SLIDING "C: Straight Running With "J-Stops" Using a mellow slope, allow kids to straight-run and experiment with allowing the board to pivot and stop by looking with the eyes. Both feet should be strapped in for this." SLIDING & CONTROL "D: Mileage and practice Don't rush it! Take the time to practice and experiment with these skills. Expose students to new slopes and speeds. If available, try terrain undulations and slider boxes. Once comfortable, then progress to the Control phase of the QuickRide System." CONTROL| PRE-QUICKRIDE STEPS | QUICKRIDE PHASE | | :--- | :--- | | A: Off-Snow Exploration (equipment & balance) <br> On carpet, learn about the equipment (doing up boots, and working the bindings), and practice balancing on a wobble-board or on the snowboard. | BASICS | | B: On-Snow Exploration (balance and sliding) <br> Using an aid like a retractable tether on the board, a ski pole to hold, or a hula hoop, explore balance while sliding by towing kids around a flat slope. | BASICS & SLIDING | | C: Straight Running With "J-Stops" <br> Using a mellow slope, allow kids to straight-run and experiment with allowing the board to pivot and stop by looking with the eyes. Both feet should be strapped in for this. | SLIDING & CONTROL | | D: Mileage and practice <br> Don't rush it! Take the time to practice and experiment with these skills. Expose students to new slopes and speeds. If available, try terrain undulations and slider boxes. Once comfortable, then progress to the Control phase of the QuickRide System. | CONTROL |

1. Basics1. 基礎

When children come out for a lesson, they may be a little nervous and apprehensive, especially if it is their first time. Beginner riders have the added challenge of having to become familiar with their equipment, how it works and how to put it on. They also need to be able to identify “their” boards.
當孩子們來上課時,他們可能會有些緊張和不安,尤其是第一次。初學者還面臨著熟悉裝備、了解其運作方式以及如何穿戴的額外挑戰。他們還需要能夠辨認「自己的」滑板。
Here are some games one can play to familiarize children with their equipment:
以下是一些可以讓孩子熟悉裝備的遊戲:
  • Yard Sale - Get the children to place their boards in a neat pile. Time them to find their board and return to their starting point. You might ask them to strap in their front foot.
    跳蚤市場 - 讓孩子們將他們的滑板整齊堆放。計時他們找到自己的滑板並返回起點的時間。你也可以請他們綁好前腳。
  • Boot Games - Get the children to play games in their boots to ensure the boots fit well. Play follow the leader, for example, getting the children to twist in their boots, walk on their tip-toes, walk on their heels, etc. Have them perform manoeuvres they would do with their board on, for example, jump, rock from heels to toes, spin 180’s. These manoeuvres will be easier to perform in their boots without the boards and will familiarize them with the feelings they will experience later on while wearing a board.
    靴子遊戲 - 讓孩子們穿著靴子玩遊戲,以確保靴子合腳。例如玩「跟著領導者做」,讓孩子們在靴子裡扭動身體、踮腳走路、用腳跟走路等。讓他們做一些穿著滑板時會做的動作,例如跳躍、從腳跟搖擺到腳尖、旋轉 180 度。這些動作在沒有滑板的靴子裡會比較容易完成,並且能讓他們熟悉穿著滑板時會感受到的感覺。
  • Relay Races (ages 8 and up) - Once children know how to put on their boards, you can have them do a relay race. Both teams start with their boards off. Each individual has to put his board on the front foot, skate a distance, and tag another member of their team. The person who has been tagged puts on his board and skates back to tag another member. If there are not enough people to make 2 teams, simply time the one group. This will develop group participation and interaction and challenge the children at the same time.
    接力賽(8 歲以上)-當孩子們學會如何穿上滑雪板後,可以讓他們進行接力賽。兩隊都從未穿上滑雪板開始。每個人必須先穿上前腳的滑雪板,滑行一段距離,然後觸碰隊友。被觸碰的人穿上滑雪板,滑回去觸碰另一位隊友。如果人數不足以組成兩隊,就讓一組人計時。這樣能促進團體參與和互動,同時挑戰孩子們。
  • Simon Says - Have children strap in both feet and play Simon Says while making them balance, edge hop, etc. This is definitely a method to get them laughing, balancing, falling and learning to get up using guided discovery.
    西蒙說-讓孩子們雙腳綁好滑雪板,玩「西蒙說」遊戲,同時讓他們練習平衡、邊緣跳躍等動作。這絕對是一種讓他們笑著、保持平衡、跌倒並學會如何站起來的引導式探索方法。
  • Freeze Tag - The instructor is “it” and goes around tagging people. Once tagged, a person must remain frozen in some kind of snowboarding pose until another unfrozen person touches him and frees him. Designate an area within which to play so kids remain together in a confined area.
    冰凍捉人-教練是「鬼」,負責去觸碰其他人。被觸碰的人必須保持某種滑雪姿勢不動,直到另一個未被凍住的人觸碰他並解救他。指定一個區域進行遊戲,讓孩子們保持在一起的限制空間內。
  • Follow the leader may be used as well. Use your imagination to get kids learning by doing. After trying balancing and mobility games, get your group to try sliding on gentle terrain. There is no need to rush to the top. Spend time at the bottom until you feel your children are competent and ready.
    也可以使用「跟著領導者做」的遊戲。運用你的想像力,讓孩子們透過實作來學習。在嘗試了平衡和移動遊戲後,讓你的團體嘗試在緩坡上滑行。沒有必要急著衝到山頂。花時間在山腳下,直到你覺得孩子們已經有能力並準備好了。

2. Sliding2. 滑行

Find a gentle slope and get the children to practice a glide. Ask them to mimic their favourite animal, su-per-hero or favourite snowboarder while gliding. Then move into a glide by pushing on their toes to get the board to change direction. Next, try heel side. Ask them to move their arms toward their toes or heels in a slow, deliberate manner, like “Frankenstein” or the “Zombies”.
找一個緩坡,讓孩子們練習滑行。請他們在滑行時模仿自己喜愛的動物、超級英雄或最喜歡的滑雪板選手。接著透過腳趾推動滑板,讓滑板改變方向,進入滑行狀態。接著嘗試腳跟邊滑行。請他們慢慢、有意識地將手臂移向腳趾或腳跟,就像「科學怪人」或「殭屍」一樣。
Games to play while gliding:
滑行時可以玩的遊戲:
  • Tall like a house/ small like a mouse: Get children to glide trying to be tall or small.
    高得像房子/小得像老鼠:讓孩子滑行時嘗試變得高大或矮小。
  • Animal Game: Ask a child to imitate his favourite animal. The other kids try to guess what it is.
    動物遊戲:請一位孩子模仿他最喜歡的動物,其他孩子則嘗試猜出是什麼動物。
  • Draw a line in the snow and challenge the child to slide over the “rail”.
    在雪地上畫一條線,挑戰孩子滑過這條「軌道」。
  • While sliding on the gentle slope, have the child try different grabs to highlight the different planes of balance.
    在緩坡上滑行時,讓孩子嘗試不同的抓握動作,以強調不同的平衡面。

3. Control3. 控制

Once your class is comfortable gliding, they will learn to side slip/traverse. Make sure the terrain is appropriate - not too steep or with too much traffic.
當你的班級已經能夠自在滑行後,他們將學習側滑/橫移。請確保地形適合——不要太陡峭或交通過於繁忙。
Most children will find the heelside is easier to start with. Don’t rush to get to the toeside - spend as much time as is necessary learning to control direction on the heel edge first. In general, the younger the child, the more difficulty they will have on the toe edge.
大多數孩子會發現後跟邊(heelside)較容易入門。不要急著學習前腳趾邊(toeside)——先花足夠時間學會用後跟邊控制方向。一般來說,孩子越小,使用前腳趾邊會越困難。

Games that will help children learn to stop while sideslipping:
有助於孩子在側滑時學會停下來的遊戲:
  • Pretend there are bugs under your toes or heels and you are trying to squash them - this will promote toe/heel edging.
    假裝你的腳趾或腳跟下有蟲子,你正在試圖踩扁牠們——這會促進腳趾/腳跟邊緣動作。
  • Call out “red light” or “green light”. The children stop or go according to the call like cars in traffic.
    喊出「紅燈」或「綠燈」。孩子們會像交通中的車輛一樣,根據指令停下或前進。
  • Put down markers to indicate how far the children may side slip and where they must stop.
    放置標記物,指示孩子們可以側滑到多遠,以及必須在哪裡停下。
  • Designate a fuel station. The children side slip (or traverse) to that point. Once they reach the “gas station”, they must stop to re-fuel and then may begin moving again.
    指定一個加油站。孩子們側滑(或橫向移動)到那個點。當他們到達「加油站」時,必須停下來加油,然後才能繼續移動。
  • Get children to realize when they push on both heels or toes equally, they will slow down or stop. It is essential that children know how to control their speed.
    讓孩子們意識到當他們同時用力推兩側的腳跟或腳尖時,速度會減慢或停止。讓孩子們知道如何控制速度是非常重要的。

    Games that will help with direction change:
    有助於改變方向的遊戲:
  • Put markers on the hill and have children try to make their way to the markers. Make sure the pattern you create is achievable.
    在斜坡上放置標記,讓孩子們嘗試前往這些標記。確保你設計的路線是可行的。
  • Pendulum with some rotation can also be explained as similar to an air to fakie in the half pipe or more simply, riding regular and switch.
    擺盪動作加上一些旋轉,也可以解釋為類似半管中的空中轉向(air to fakie),或者更簡單地說,就是正腳騎乘與反腳騎乘(regular and switch)。
  • Younger children, 7 and under, may not have success with traversing. A more appropriate approach my be simple J Turns.
    較年幼的兒童,7 歲及以下,可能無法成功完成橫越動作。較合適的方法可能是簡單的 J 型轉彎。
  • Remember that once children can pendulum comfortably on one edge they can start to explore much more of the mountain.
    請記住,一旦兒童能夠舒適地在一側邊緣擺盪,他們就可以開始探索更多的山區。

4. Turning4. 轉彎

Once children are capable of side slipping with some directional control, it is time to introduce turning. Once they have the hang of turning children will be able to comfortably ride beginner terrain.
當兒童能夠側滑並具備一定的方向控制能力時,就該開始介紹轉彎技巧。一旦他們掌握了轉彎,便能輕鬆駕馭初學者地形。

The selection of terrain is crucial! Use a gentle slope that is well groomed and not too busy. Here are some games to play to help children learn to turn:
地形的選擇非常重要!請選擇坡度緩和、整修良好且不過於擁擠的地形。以下是一些遊戲,幫助孩子學習轉彎:
  • Dance Exercise: Be creative. Give the exercise a different name, for example, “pretend magnets”: you and the student become magnets at the hands and you help him/her to turn.
    舞蹈練習:發揮創意,給這個練習取個不同的名字,例如「假裝磁鐵」:你和學生的手像磁鐵一樣相吸,並幫助他/她轉彎。
  • Garland Exercise (“Chicken-Out Turns”): This exercise helps them to initiate the turn and to learn how to control speed at the end of the turn.
    花環練習(「膽小轉彎」):這個練習幫助他們啟動轉彎,並學習如何在轉彎結束時控制速度。
  • Basketball Turns: Children are low going across the fall line and stretch or reach for the turn. This promotes flexion / extension, and pivoting.
    籃球轉彎:孩子們在穿越落線時身體保持低姿態,並伸展或伸手準備轉彎。這促進屈伸和旋轉動作。
If the class is young, avoid using the words “left” and “right”. Try attaching stickers to their hands and feet and name each body part after the sticker. Ask the child to turn the hand or foot with the corresponding sticker.
如果班級年紀較小,避免使用「左」和「右」這兩個詞。試著在他們的手和腳上貼上貼紙,並以貼紙的名稱來稱呼每個身體部位。請孩子轉動貼有相應貼紙的手或腳。

Make sure children practice equally on both sides. Children will usually be more successful on the heel side because they are able to use the support of the high back. Get them to practice balancing on the toe edge on flatter terrain by timing them. Ask, “Who can balance for 5 seconds on toe side?” Encourage them to increase the time gradually and reward them often.
確保孩子們在兩邊都能均衡練習。孩子們通常在腳跟側會比較成功,因為他們能利用高背的支撐。讓他們在較平坦的地形上練習用腳尖邊緣保持平衡,並計時。問他們:「誰能在腳尖邊緣平衡 5 秒?」鼓勵他們逐漸延長時間,並經常給予獎勵。

Remember how the front foot did not want to remain sideways during skating. It wanted to return to a walking position, making you feel as if the board had a mind of its own. Make it fun for children to learn these difficult manoeuvres of walking, skating, climbing and gliding on their boards. And what better way than to play games!
記得前腳在滑行時不想保持側向,它想回到走路的姿勢,讓你感覺滑板像有自己的意志。讓孩子們在學習這些困難的動作——走路、滑行、爬坡和滑行板上——時感到有趣。還有什麼比玩遊戲更好的方法呢!

The use of games is important not only to create a fun learning environment but also to reinforce the skills that will help these students later in the learning process and throughout their snowboarding journey.
使用遊戲不僅能創造有趣的學習環境,還能強化這些學生在後續學習過程及整個滑雪板旅程中所需的技能。

QUICKRIDE REFERENCE TACTICS FOR CHILDREN
QUICKRIDE 兒童參考策略

GOALS KEY CONCEPTS關鍵概念 CHILD-FRIENDLY TACTICS適合兒童的策略
BASICS: To learn to use the equipment, and gain comfort moving around on the snowboard with one foot attached.
基礎:學習使用裝備,並習慣單腳綁定滑雪板時的移動。
裝備移動性
EQUIPMENT
MOBILITY
EQUIPMENT MOBILITY| EQUIPMENT | | :--- | | MOBILITY |

- 握手遊戲,名字遊戲。- 靴子遊戲 / 凍結標籤 - 找你的裝備 - 障礙賽(滑行) - 接力賽
- Handshakes, name game.
- Boot game / Freeze Tag
- Find your equipment
- Obstacle course (skating)
- Relay Race
- Handshakes, name game. - Boot game / Freeze Tag - Find your equipment - Obstacle course (skating) - Relay Race| - Handshakes, name game. | | :--- | | - Boot game / Freeze Tag | | - Find your equipment | | - Obstacle course (skating) | | - Relay Race |
SLIDING: To become comfortable standing on the snowboard while it is sliding.
滑行:習慣站在滑雪板上滑行的感覺。
STRAIGHT RUNNING直線滑行

- 高 / 矮 - 動物遊戲 - 自由式抓板以強調平衡面 - 想像騎在箱子或欄杆上以提升平衡意識。
- Tall / Small
- Animal Game
- Freestyle grabs to highlight planes of balance
- Imagine riding a box or rail for balance awareness.
- Tall / Small - Animal Game - Freestyle grabs to highlight planes of balance - Imagine riding a box or rail for balance awareness.| - Tall / Small | | :--- | | - Animal Game | | - Freestyle grabs to highlight planes of balance | | - Imagine riding a box or rail for balance awareness. |
CONTROL: To learn to control both speed and direction with both feet attached to the snowboard.
控制:學習在雙腳固定於滑雪板上時,控制速度與方向。
側滑擺盪
SIDESLIPPING
PENDULUM
SIDESLIPPING PENDULUM| SIDESLIPPING | | :--- | | PENDULUM |

- 紅燈/綠燈 - 壓扁蟲子 - 標記物 / 目標 - 障礙物(跳過、鑽過、繞過) - 想像在半管中空中轉向假倒滑以改變方向
- Red Light/Green Light
- Squish bugs
- Markers / Targets
- Obstacles (hop over, under, around)
- Visualize air to fakie in the halfpipe for direction change
- Red Light/Green Light - Squish bugs - Markers / Targets - Obstacles (hop over, under, around) - Visualize air to fakie in the halfpipe for direction change| - Red Light/Green Light | | :--- | | - Squish bugs | | - Markers / Targets | | - Obstacles (hop over, under, around) | | - Visualize air to fakie in the halfpipe for direction change |
TURNING: To learn to turn (changing edges in the fall line).
轉彎:學習轉彎(在落線上變換邊緣)。
BEGINNER TURNS初學者轉彎

- 「膽小轉彎」(Garland)- 雷射槍 - 舞蹈練習 - 磁鐵手 - 呼拉圈
- "Chicken-Out Turns" (Garland)
- Laser Guns
- Dance Exercise
- Magnet hands
- Hula Hoops
- "Chicken-Out Turns" (Garland) - Laser Guns - Dance Exercise - Magnet hands - Hula Hoops| - "Chicken-Out Turns" (Garland) | | :--- | | - Laser Guns | | - Dance Exercise | | - Magnet hands | | - Hula Hoops |
FLOW: To learn to explore the mountain safely.
流暢:學習安全地探索山區。
NOVICE TURNS新手轉身

- 彎曲與伸展 - 籃球轉身 - 小門口轉身 - 跟隨領導者 - 轉身形狀
- Bend & Stretch
- Basketball turns
- Small doorways
- Follow the Leader
- Turn Shapes
- Bend & Stretch - Basketball turns - Small doorways - Follow the Leader - Turn Shapes| - Bend & Stretch | | :--- | | - Basketball turns | | - Small doorways | | - Follow the Leader | | - Turn Shapes |
GOALS KEY CONCEPTS CHILD-FRIENDLY TACTICS BASICS: To learn to use the equipment, and gain comfort moving around on the snowboard with one foot attached. "EQUIPMENT MOBILITY" "- Handshakes, name game. - Boot game / Freeze Tag - Find your equipment - Obstacle course (skating) - Relay Race" SLIDING: To become comfortable standing on the snowboard while it is sliding. STRAIGHT RUNNING "- Tall / Small - Animal Game - Freestyle grabs to highlight planes of balance - Imagine riding a box or rail for balance awareness." CONTROL: To learn to control both speed and direction with both feet attached to the snowboard. "SIDESLIPPING PENDULUM" "- Red Light/Green Light - Squish bugs - Markers / Targets - Obstacles (hop over, under, around) - Visualize air to fakie in the halfpipe for direction change" TURNING: To learn to turn (changing edges in the fall line). BEGINNER TURNS "- "Chicken-Out Turns" (Garland) - Laser Guns - Dance Exercise - Magnet hands - Hula Hoops" FLOW: To learn to explore the mountain safely. NOVICE TURNS "- Bend & Stretch - Basketball turns - Small doorways - Follow the Leader - Turn Shapes"| GOALS | KEY CONCEPTS | CHILD-FRIENDLY TACTICS | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | BASICS: To learn to use the equipment, and gain comfort moving around on the snowboard with one foot attached. | EQUIPMENT <br> MOBILITY | - Handshakes, name game. <br> - Boot game / Freeze Tag <br> - Find your equipment <br> - Obstacle course (skating) <br> - Relay Race | | SLIDING: To become comfortable standing on the snowboard while it is sliding. | STRAIGHT RUNNING | - Tall / Small <br> - Animal Game <br> - Freestyle grabs to highlight planes of balance <br> - Imagine riding a box or rail for balance awareness. | | CONTROL: To learn to control both speed and direction with both feet attached to the snowboard. | SIDESLIPPING <br> PENDULUM | - Red Light/Green Light <br> - Squish bugs <br> - Markers / Targets <br> - Obstacles (hop over, under, around) <br> - Visualize air to fakie in the halfpipe for direction change | | TURNING: To learn to turn (changing edges in the fall line). | BEGINNER TURNS | - "Chicken-Out Turns" (Garland) <br> - Laser Guns <br> - Dance Exercise <br> - Magnet hands <br> - Hula Hoops | | FLOW: To learn to explore the mountain safely. | NOVICE TURNS | - Bend & Stretch <br> - Basketball turns <br> - Small doorways <br> - Follow the Leader <br> - Turn Shapes |

MOVING TO INTERMEDIATE SLOPES
進入中級坡道

Once children are linking turns comfortably on beginner terrain, it is time to move on. Be sensitive to their fears and apprehensions. What might seem small or flat to the instructor may appear intimidating to the child. For example, if you were to return to your grade school, the water fountains would seem low to the ground. But, to the child, they would be a perfect height. Bear this in mind. You can first challenge your class by using the philosophy, “maximum speed on minimum terrain”.
當孩子們能夠在初學者地形上自如地連續轉彎時,就該進階了。要對他們的恐懼和擔憂保持敏感。對教練來說看似平緩或簡單的地形,對孩子而言可能會顯得令人生畏。例如,如果你回到你的小學,飲水機會顯得很矮,但對孩子來說,這正是合適的高度。請記住這一點。你可以先用「在最小的地形上達到最大速度」的理念來挑戰你的班級。
Once children can negotiate beginner terrain with ease, they will need guided mileage on their boards. Keep them busy! Use ollie contests, lines in the snow, beginner boxes and easy rollers to challenge and maintain interest. Children learn successfully through guided discovery: the instructor sets the parameters, and allows the children to experiment within the safe boundaries.
當孩子們能輕鬆應付初學者地形時,他們需要在滑板上進行有指導的里程訓練。讓他們保持忙碌!利用跳躍比賽、雪地線條、初學者滑箱和簡單的滾軸來挑戰並維持他們的興趣。孩子們透過引導式探索學習最為成功:教練設定範圍,讓孩子們在安全的界限內自由嘗試。

Here are some activities you can do with children who are ready to move from the beginner slopes. Vary the imaginative aspect of the game to suit the age group and interests of the children:
以下是一些適合準備從初學者坡道進階的孩子們進行的活動。請根據孩子們的年齡層和興趣,調整遊戲的想像力元素:
  • Squish the snow snakes or ice the cake: Children concentrate on squishing the snow snake during the turn, or icing the cake, or flattening the play-dough. The flatter board will make it easier to turn.
    壓扁雪蛇或在蛋糕上抹糖霜:孩子們專注於在轉彎時壓扁雪蛇、在蛋糕上抹糖霜,或壓平黏土。較平坦的板面會讓轉彎更容易。
  • Follow The Leader: Lead the children to interesting terrain and have them experiment while riding. Have them ride with flexed legs/stiff legs. Play with balance-fore/aft, lateral, and vertical. Use questions to make them aware of the contrast of feelings with the experimentation. Make sure children change their place in line so that everyone has the opportunity to ride behind the instructor.
    跟隨領導者:帶領孩子們到有趣的地形,讓他們在騎乘時進行嘗試。讓他們用彎曲的腿或僵硬的腿騎乘。玩平衡的前後、左右和上下。用問題讓他們意識到嘗試時感覺的差異。確保孩子們換位置排隊,讓每個人都有機會騎在教練後面。
  • Obstacle Course: In a sheltered area, set up a course where students must go around, under, over, through items that will not injure them, e.g. bamboo poles, sponges, hula-hoops, etc.
    障礙賽:在有遮蔽的區域設置一條路線,學生必須繞過、鑽過、爬過或穿越不會傷害他們的物品,例如竹竿、海綿、呼拉圈等。
  • Tightrope walker: Have children ride with an object (sponge, cone, old glove, etc.) on the head and keep it from falling off.
    走鋼索者:讓孩子們頭上放一個物品(海綿、錐形標、舊手套等)騎乘,並保持物品不掉落。
  • Cat & Mouse: The child in front tries not to get caught by the child in back by making turns that vary in size, shape and rhythm, but not through speed. Make sure the children do not turn back up the hill.
    貓捉老鼠:前面的孩子嘗試透過大小、形狀和節奏各異的轉彎來避免被後面的孩子抓到,但不靠速度。確保孩子們不會往山上回頭轉彎。
  • Jumping Bean: The kids ride in a line and when the leader calls out “Taco Bell” or “chili con carne” (use your imagination!) and starts to jump, the rest of the group start to jump. There may be a pause in jumping while turning and then the beans go off again.
    跳跳豆:孩子們排成一列騎行,當領頭者喊出「Taco Bell」或「chili con carne」(發揮你的想像力!)並開始跳躍時,其他人也開始跳躍。轉彎時跳躍可能會暫停,然後跳跳豆又繼續跳。
  • Animation: Suggest an object or animal or person to a child and have him/her imitate the style. The rest of the group has to guess the object/person/animal. (Ride like a lion, like a fighter plane, like a ballerina) Make sure the suggestion is appropriate to the age group. You may find that the group has some good suggestions.
    模仿秀:向孩子建議一個物品、動物或人物,讓他/她模仿其風格。其他孩子必須猜出是什麼物品/人物/動物。(像獅子騎行,像戰鬥機騎行,像芭蕾舞者騎行)確保建議適合該年齡層。你可能會發現孩子們有一些很棒的建議。
  • Synchro pair riding: One child leads and the other child follows, but not necessarily in the same tracks. The first person turns and the follower tries to turn at the same time as the first person - not in the other person’s tracks.
    同步雙人騎行:一個孩子領騎,另一個孩子跟隨,但不一定踩在同一條軌跡上。第一個人轉彎時,跟隨者嘗試與第一個人同時轉彎,但不是踩在對方的軌跡上。
  • Putt Putt: The children try turning at a slow speed. Then they make a new series of turns at a higher speed. And again, with each new series of turns, the speed increases (to a controllable level). Ask them which speed is easier for turning, and why.
    Putt Putt:孩子們嘗試以慢速轉彎。接著,他們以較高的速度進行新一系列的轉彎。每完成一系列新的轉彎,速度都會增加(到可控制的程度)。問他們哪個速度轉彎比較容易,為什麼。
These are only a few of the activities that will help develop all the skills in a way that is fun. All these activities can be made to focus on one particular skill or can be modified to focus on another. Be creative and have fun. If you are having fun, so will your group. Remember to make goals attainable. This will build the child’s confidence and their trust in you. Snowboarding is lifetime sport. You are instructor, mentor and guide. Be sure to share your knowledge of how to best enjoy the mountain environment along with the technical components of snowboarding.
這些只是幫助發展所有技能的幾項活動,且過程中充滿樂趣。所有這些活動都可以專注於某一特定技能,或修改成專注於其他技能。發揮創意並享受其中。如果你玩得開心,你的團隊也會如此。記得設定可達成的目標。這將建立孩子的自信心以及對你的信任。滑雪板運動是一項終身運動。你是教練、導師與引導者。務必分享你如何在享受山區環境的同時,掌握滑雪板技術的知識。

MOVING TO MORE ADVANCED TERRAIN
進階地形

Groomed Terrain:整備過的地形:

At this level, we will also need to introduce carving skills and speed control by carving long to medium turns on green and blue terrain.
在這個階段,我們還需要透過在綠色和藍色地形上進行長至中等弧度的刻滑轉彎,來引入刻滑技巧和速度控制。

Once the children are comfortable with these carving manoeuvres, move them into short radius fall-line turns and intermediate bumps.
一旦孩子們對這些刻滑動作感到自在,就將他們帶入短半徑的落線轉彎和中級雪包地形。

Varied Terrain:多變地形:

Once children are comfortable on intermediate terrain, they need to work on more refined edge control to increase their comfort zone on steeper terrain, bumps, and deeper, softer snow. Children should be able to ride in control on easy black diamond slopes before they
當孩子們在中級地形上感到自在後,他們需要練習更精細的邊緣控制,以增加在較陡峭地形、雪包和較深較軟的雪地上的舒適區。孩子們應該能夠在簡單的黑鑽石坡道上控制滑行,然後他們才會...

REMEMBER TO KEEP IT SAFE, BUT EXCITING AND FUN! IF CHILDREN ARE HAVING FUN, THEY WILL LEARN AND WANT TO RETURN.
記得保持安全,但同時要讓過程充滿刺激與樂趣!如果孩子們玩得開心,他們就會學得更好,也會想要再回來。

progress to the more challenging conditions, bumps and crud.
逐步進展到更具挑戰性的地形、顛簸和不平整的路面。
Challenge children to change the size and shape of their turns. If children do the same type of turn all the time, they will be intimidated on steeper, narrower terrain. Remember, variety is the spice of life and riding.
挑戰孩子們改變轉彎的大小和形狀。如果孩子們總是做同一種轉彎,面對更陡、更窄的地形時會感到害怕。記住,變化是生活和滑行的調味料。

When introducing moguls, choose the easiest terrain possible so your class can experience changes in pressure control and balance without excessive fear. Have children traverse the run to get the feel for moguls. Make sure they look up the run to avoid any collisions before crossing. As soon as possible, get them to practice more in the fall line-this is safer line from the point of view of traffic.
在介紹波浪地形時,選擇最簡單的地形,讓班上的孩子能夠體驗壓力控制和平衡的變化,而不會過度害怕。讓孩子們橫越坡道,感受波浪地形。確保他們在橫越前抬頭觀察坡道,避免碰撞。盡快讓他們在落線上多加練習——從交通安全的角度來看,這是較安全的路線。

A mogul run with one side groomed so your class will be able to go in and out of the moguls is the best option because the groomed section provides an escape route.
一側整平的雪丘跑道是最佳選擇,因為整平區段提供了逃生路線,讓你的班級能夠進出雪丘。

Freestyle Terrain:自由式地形:

Kids of all ages and abilities are interested in riding freestyle terrain and are able to be successful given the right introduction. Most resorts are now providing progression based freestyle terrain (terrain parks) to augment the many natural features available on the hill (rollers, ridges, etc.).
各年齡層和不同能力的孩子們都對騎乘自由式地形感興趣,只要有適當的引導,他們都能成功。大多數滑雪場現在都提供分級的自由式地形(地形公園),以補充山上許多自然地形(滾軸、山脊等)。

Remember to start small! Any man made features should be flush with, or very close to the ground and instructors should always focus on avoiding falls wherever possible. Confidence is key for your students and safety should always be front of mind. Be sure to teach students about proper park etiquette and safety and make sure they are familiar with the Smart Style responsibility code.
記得從小開始!任何人造設施應與地面齊平或非常接近地面,教練應始終著重於盡可能避免跌倒。學生的信心是關鍵,安全應始終放在首位。務必教導學生正確的公園禮儀和安全知識,並確保他們熟悉 Smart Style 責任守則。

Here are some activities to do with your class in all terrain:
以下是在各種地形中可與班級一起進行的一些活動:
  • Obstacle Course: Set up a course using props - cones, bamboo, hula-hoops, etc. Be sure to set up the course so the children go over, under, around, through etc.
    障礙賽:使用道具設置一條賽道——錐桶、竹竿、呼拉圈等。務必設計賽道讓孩子們能夠爬過、鑽過、繞過、穿過等。
  • Line Game: Have children make different lines in the snow - from wide to narrow tracks. Ask what they had to do in order to change the width or type of line.
    排線遊戲:讓孩子們在雪地上畫出不同的線條——從寬到窄的軌跡。詢問他們為了改變線條的寬度或類型,需要做哪些動作。
  • Hop Turns: Ask the children to begin the turn with a hop in the direction of the new turn. Use this exercise with longer radius turns.
    跳躍轉彎:請孩子們在轉彎方向先跳一步開始轉彎。此練習適用於較大半徑的轉彎。
  • Penguin Walk: Ask children to run to their partner, with both feet in the binding, as though they were running with their feet unattached to the board.
    企鵝步行:請孩子們雙腳綁在滑板上,像是雙腳沒有綁在滑板上一樣跑向他們的夥伴。
  • Ollies: Get class to practice their ollies, toe and heel side, while traversing. This is definitely a good way to tire them out! A bamboo makes a great “ollie bar”. Challenge riders to jump over the bar.
    Ollies:讓全班練習他們的 ollies,腳趾側和腳跟側,同時橫越滑行。這絕對是讓他們疲憊的好方法!竹竿是很棒的「ollie 桿」。挑戰騎士跳過這根桿子。
  • Follow the Leader, or “The all mountain chase”: Lead your group all over the hill - through moguls, rollers, terrain parks…Get them to ride with stiff legs, then with flexed joints. Control speed!
    跟隨領隊,或稱「全山追逐」:帶領你的團隊在整個山坡上滑行——穿越波浪地形、滾軸、地形公園……讓他們用僵硬的腿滑行,然後用彎曲的關節滑行。控制速度!
  • Volcano run: The children ride varied terrain and observe where the pressure builds.
    火山滑行:孩子們在多變的地形上滑行,觀察壓力集中的位置。
  • Electric Fence: Have children ride within the imaginary boundaries of a narrow corridor to avoid “getting a charge” from the electric fence along the sides of the corridor.
    電圍欄:讓孩子們在狹窄走廊的想像邊界內騎乘,以避免被走廊兩側的電圍欄「電擊」。

EQUIPMENT CONSIDERATIONS FOR CHILDREN
兒童裝備考量

Kids snowboarding equipment has come a long way in recent years. Kid-specific equipment now allows children to start snowboarding earlier, and more successfully.
近年來,兒童滑雪板裝備有了很大的進步。專為兒童設計的裝備現在讓孩子們能更早且更成功地開始滑雪板運動。
As kids aren’t always aware of how their equipment should fit or be set up, it is your responsibility as the instructor to ensure they are set up for success.
由於孩子們不一定知道裝備應該如何合身或調整,作為教練的你有責任確保他們的裝備能幫助他們成功。

Boots靴子

Some considerations:一些注意事項:

  • Children don’t always know if their boots are too small or too big. Ensure that boots fit well by checking their foot in the liner, or against the sole.
    小孩不一定知道靴子是太小還是太大。請透過檢查腳在內襯或鞋底的位置,確保靴子合腳。
  • Although only one pair of socks is ideal they can often be used to help snug up boot fit with small children.
    雖然理想上只穿一雙襪子,但對於小孩來說,襪子常常可以用來幫助靴子更貼合腳型。
  • Boots that are too big will not allow kids to control the board, and may pose a safety hazard (boot slipping off on chair!).
    過大的靴子會讓孩子無法控制滑板,並可能造成安全隱患(靴子在椅子上滑落!)。
  • Ensure closure system is snug but not tight.
    確保固定系統緊貼但不過緊。

Bindings綁帶

Some considerations:一些注意事項:

  • Be aware of how to perform basic binding adjustments, but each resort may have a policy regarding this that you will have to adhere to.
    了解如何進行基本的綁定調整,但每個度假村可能有相關政策,您必須遵守。
  • Look for bindings with simple straps that are easy for kids to fasten.
    尋找帶有簡單帶子的綁定,讓孩子們容易扣上。
  • Always check stance width and angles in kids’ set-ups. Kids require a wider base of support relative to their height.
    務必檢查兒童裝置的站姿寬度和角度。相較於身高,孩子們需要更寬的支撐基底。
  • In larger children, check for heel and toe overhang (boot/binding centred on board).
    對於較大的兒童,檢查後跟和腳趾是否有懸空(靴子/綁定是否置中於滑板)。

Boards滑雪板

Some considerations:一些考量:

  • Look for boards that are sized appropriately for the child. IE: Children’s boards should not just be small versions of adult board. Flex, width and length should all match the child’s size. Ideally boards should be sized based on weight but a quick on snow guideline is to have board length fall between shoulder and nose.
    尋找尺寸適合孩子的滑雪板。也就是說,兒童滑雪板不應該只是成人滑雪板的縮小版。彈性、寬度和長度都應該符合孩子的尺寸。理想情況下,滑雪板應該根據體重來選擇,但一個快速的雪地判斷標準是滑雪板長度應介於肩膀和鼻子之間。
  • Boards that are not too long or heavy will be cumbersome.
    不過長或過重的滑雪板會很笨重。
  • Look for kids boards with topsheet traction (stomp pad), as well as base bevel, to minimize edge catches.
    尋找具有頂層止滑墊(stomp pad)以及底板倒角的兒童滑雪板,以減少邊緣卡住的情況。

INSTRUCTOR TRAINING教練培訓

CASI’s mandate is to train and certify snowboard instructors, and it is this training of both potential and certified instructors to which we apply the term “pedagogy”. By using this terminology, CASI differentiates between an instructor teaching a client how to snowboard better, and an Evaluator or trainer teaching the instructor how to teach the client.
CASI 的使命是培訓並認證滑雪教練,而我們所稱的「教學法」即是指對潛在及已認證教練的培訓。透過此術語,CASI 區分了教練教導學員如何更好地滑雪,與評估員或培訓師教導教練如何教學的不同。

Learning how to teach effectively has proven to be more difficult for many candidates than learning how to ride to the standard of an exam. For this reason, the Evaluators (the teachers who conduct a course) must be more than competent snowboard instructors in order to pass on the skill to others; they must be knowledgeable teachers themselves who can train others to teach.
學習如何有效教學對許多考生來說,比學習達到考試標準的滑雪技巧更為困難。因此,評估員(負責執行課程的教師)必須不僅是合格的滑雪教練,才能將技能傳授給他人;他們本身必須是具備教學知識的教師,能夠培訓他人進行教學。

Embedded deep within snowboarding is a culture of learning. Whether it is sessioning in the park, or out stoking each other after a steep run, we are always striving to improve. In order to improve this learning process, a flexible framework has been developed to help achieve personal goals, snowboard school goals, or course candidate goals.
滑雪板運動中深植著一種學習文化。無論是在公園練習,還是在陡坡滑行後互相激勵,我們總是不斷努力進步。為了提升這個學習過程,已經開發出一套靈活的框架,幫助達成個人目標、滑雪學校目標或課程候選人目標。

WHEN TEACHING PEOPLE HOW TO RIDE, THE INSTRUCTOR IS TEACHING THE STUDENT. WHEN TRAINING PEOPLE HOW TO TEACH, THE TRAINER IS TEACHING THE INSTRUCTOR.
當教導人們如何滑行時,教練是在教學生。當訓練人們如何教學時,訓練師是在教導教練。

LANGUAGE WHEN TEACHING HOW TO DO VS. HOW TO TEACH
教導「如何做」與「如何教」時的語言用法
INSTRUCTOR TO STUDENT: HOW TO DO
教練對學生:如何做
TRAINER TO INSTRUCTOR: HOW TO TEACH
從訓練師到講師:如何教學
Explanations for flow and simplicity. Information is more direct, with the instructor telling the student what, why, how, etc.
針對流程與簡潔性的說明。資訊更直接,由講師告訴學生什麼、為什麼、如何等。
Questions for thinking and analyzing. More discussion based, allowing the instructor to problem solve more to increase understanding.
引導思考與分析的問題。以討論為主,讓講師能更多地解決問題以提升理解。
Talking directly to them as students.
直接以學生的身份與他們對話。
Often talking about the "imaginary student".
經常談論「想像中的學生」。
"We'll use this mellow slope because..."
「我們會使用這個緩坡,因為……」
"When we teach, we'll use this mellow slope because..."
「當我們教學時,我們會使用這個緩坡,因為……」
"Try to extend your legs more as you absorb that bump..."
「當你吸收那個顛簸時,試著多伸展你的雙腿……」
"When you teach, try to extend your legs more as you absorb that bump to show your students a better demo".
「當你教學時,試著在吸收那個顛簸時多伸展你的雙腿,這樣可以給學生一個更好的示範。」
"What did you think of that exercise?"
「你覺得那個練習怎麼樣?」
"How do you think that exercise will help your students?"
「你認為那個練習會如何幫助你的學生?」
"When we ride down here, what do you think we should do with our arms?"
「當我們騎到這裡時,你覺得我們應該怎麼擺放手臂?」
"When we teach someone on this slope, what could we ask our students to do with their arms, before we ride down here?"
「當我們在這個斜坡上教學時,我們可以要求學生在下坡前用手臂做什麼動作?」
"When it gets steeper, let's get lower for more stability and range of movement."
「當坡度變陡時,讓我們降低重心,以獲得更多的穩定性和活動範圍。」
"What do you think our students should do when it gets steeper to gain more stability and range of movement?"
「你認為當坡度變陡時,我們的學生應該做什麼來獲得更多的穩定性和活動範圍?」
"What do you think will be challenging about this slope?"
「你認為這個斜坡會有哪些挑戰?」
"As an instructor, what do you think will be challenging for your students about this slope?"
「作為一名教練,你認為這個斜坡對你的學生來說會有哪些挑戰?」
"Let's ride down here and apply those movements..."
「我們來這裡滑下去,並應用那些動作……」
"Let's ride down here and apply those movements, thinking about what our students would be feeling."
「我們來這裡滑下去,並應用那些動作,同時思考學生會有什麼感受。」
"We'll use a simple exercise to help us learn the timing of this movement."
「我們會用一個簡單的練習來幫助我們學習這個動作的時機。」
"When we teach, we use simple exercises to help our students learn the timing of this movement."
「當我們教學時,我們會使用簡單的練習來幫助學生學習這個動作的時機。」
"Here's some feedback: try to lean a little earlier at the start of the turn".
「這裡有一些回饋:試著在轉彎開始時稍微提早傾斜。」
"You'll get better edge grip if you lean a little earlier at the start of the turn... do you know why that is? Good - if you know why, you can explain it better to your students."
「如果你在轉彎開始時稍微提早傾斜,你的邊緣抓地力會更好……你知道為什麼嗎?很好——如果你知道原因,就能更好地向學生解釋。」
LANGUAGE WHEN TEACHING HOW TO DO VS. HOW TO TEACH INSTRUCTOR TO STUDENT: HOW TO DO TRAINER TO INSTRUCTOR: HOW TO TEACH Explanations for flow and simplicity. Information is more direct, with the instructor telling the student what, why, how, etc. Questions for thinking and analyzing. More discussion based, allowing the instructor to problem solve more to increase understanding. Talking directly to them as students. Often talking about the "imaginary student". "We'll use this mellow slope because..." "When we teach, we'll use this mellow slope because..." "Try to extend your legs more as you absorb that bump..." "When you teach, try to extend your legs more as you absorb that bump to show your students a better demo". "What did you think of that exercise?" "How do you think that exercise will help your students?" "When we ride down here, what do you think we should do with our arms?" "When we teach someone on this slope, what could we ask our students to do with their arms, before we ride down here?" "When it gets steeper, let's get lower for more stability and range of movement." "What do you think our students should do when it gets steeper to gain more stability and range of movement?" "What do you think will be challenging about this slope?" "As an instructor, what do you think will be challenging for your students about this slope?" "Let's ride down here and apply those movements..." "Let's ride down here and apply those movements, thinking about what our students would be feeling." "We'll use a simple exercise to help us learn the timing of this movement." "When we teach, we use simple exercises to help our students learn the timing of this movement." "Here's some feedback: try to lean a little earlier at the start of the turn". "You'll get better edge grip if you lean a little earlier at the start of the turn... do you know why that is? Good - if you know why, you can explain it better to your students."| LANGUAGE WHEN TEACHING HOW TO DO VS. HOW TO TEACH | | | :--- | :--- | | INSTRUCTOR TO STUDENT: HOW TO DO | TRAINER TO INSTRUCTOR: HOW TO TEACH | | Explanations for flow and simplicity. Information is more direct, with the instructor telling the student what, why, how, etc. | Questions for thinking and analyzing. More discussion based, allowing the instructor to problem solve more to increase understanding. | | Talking directly to them as students. | Often talking about the "imaginary student". | | "We'll use this mellow slope because..." | "When we teach, we'll use this mellow slope because..." | | "Try to extend your legs more as you absorb that bump..." | "When you teach, try to extend your legs more as you absorb that bump to show your students a better demo". | | "What did you think of that exercise?" | "How do you think that exercise will help your students?" | | "When we ride down here, what do you think we should do with our arms?" | "When we teach someone on this slope, what could we ask our students to do with their arms, before we ride down here?" | | "When it gets steeper, let's get lower for more stability and range of movement." | "What do you think our students should do when it gets steeper to gain more stability and range of movement?" | | "What do you think will be challenging about this slope?" | "As an instructor, what do you think will be challenging for your students about this slope?" | | "Let's ride down here and apply those movements..." | "Let's ride down here and apply those movements, thinking about what our students would be feeling." | | "We'll use a simple exercise to help us learn the timing of this movement." | "When we teach, we use simple exercises to help our students learn the timing of this movement." | | "Here's some feedback: try to lean a little earlier at the start of the turn". | "You'll get better edge grip if you lean a little earlier at the start of the turn... do you know why that is? Good - if you know why, you can explain it better to your students." |

I. BASIC INSTRUCTOR TRAINING SESSIONS
I. 基本教練訓練課程

Basic training sessions are generally approached in a three-part format, and aim to teach lesser-experienced instructors about the Practical Teaching Skills (refer to the Teaching Theory chapter).
基礎訓練課程通常採用三部分的形式進行,旨在教授經驗較少的講師實用教學技巧(參見教學理論章節)。
  1. Introduction of the teaching skill
    教學技巧介紹
  2. Sample lesson demonstrating the teaching skill
    示範課程展示教學技巧
  3. Session wrap-up and conclusion
    課程總結與結論
Note: In the above phases of the training sessions, your role will change from that of “trainer”, during the introduction and conclusion, to that of “instructor” during the sample lesson, and back to “trainer” during the wrap-up. It’s important to make this distinction clear.
注意:在上述培訓階段中,您的角色將會從「訓練師」於介紹與結束階段,轉變為「講師」於示範課程階段,然後在總結階段再回到「訓練師」。清楚區分這些角色非常重要。

1: SESSION INTRODUCTION1:課程介紹

The goal of the instructor training session is to introduce or refine the understanding of a teaching skill that instructors can employ in their lessons (e.g.: Guest Service & Safety, Demonstrations, etc.) Your introduction should answer the following questions for your instructors:
講師培訓課程的目標是介紹或精進講師在課堂中可運用的教學技巧(例如:顧客服務與安全、示範等)。您的介紹應該回答以下問題,讓講師們了解:
  • What is the new teaching skill or topic to be explored?
    新的教學技巧或主題是什麼?
  • Who is this skill good for? What student characteristics?
    這項技能適合誰?適合什麼樣的學生特質?
  • Why would an instructor choose to use this skill in their lesson?
    為什麼教師會選擇在課程中使用這項技能?
  • When is this skill useful?
    這項技能在什麼時候有用?
  • How is the strategy used to improve the students’ lesson experience?
    這項策略如何用來提升學生的課程體驗?
Once these questions are answered, it’s time to further explore or develop the teaching skill that is being presented. For example, in the case of teaching your instructors about the skill of Guest Service & Safety, you may wish to show them a sample of a lesson that pays special attention to this aspect of teaching in a lesson scenario.
一旦這些問題得到解答,就該進一步探索或發展所呈現的教學技巧。例如,在教導您的講師有關「顧客服務與安全」技巧時,您可能希望向他們展示一個特別關注此教學面向的課程範例。

2. SAMPLE LESSON2. 範例課程

Now it’s time to show the teaching skill in action! When a sample lesson is used to demonstrate a teaching skill, it’s important to specify the following criteria prior to the lesson:
現在是展示教學技巧實際運用的時候了!當使用範例課程來示範教學技巧時,事先明確以下標準非常重要:
  • Technical goal of the sample lesson (remember, this is different from the goal of the training session!)
    範例課程的技術目標(請記得,這與訓練課程的目標不同!)
  • Student Ability Level學生能力等級
  • Situation and terrain (includes snow conditions, terrain to be used, etc.)
    情境與地形(包括雪況、將使用的地形等)
Try to present your sample lesson in the same way you would present to an actual student. Pay attention to all of the critical elements that make a good lesson (The Training Cycle, pacing, safety are a few examples) with special care paid to illustrating the teaching skill that your session is attempting to develop (your session goal).
嘗試以實際教學時對學生呈現的方式來展示您的示範課程。注意所有構成良好課程的關鍵要素(例如訓練循環、節奏、安全性),並特別著重於展現您的課程目標所要培養的教學技巧。

3. SESSION CONCLUSION3. 課程結束

The wrap-up or conclusion of the session is your time to reflect back on your sample lesson and draw out the important “take away messages” that you would like your instructors to use in their future lessons. Highlight the parts of your sample lesson where you showed a clear example of the teaching skill at hand.
課程的總結或結尾是你回顧示範課程並提出重要「帶走訊息」的時間,這些訊息是你希望你的講師們在未來課程中能夠運用的。強調你示範課程中清楚展現該教學技巧的部分。

Questions are an effective tool to use in your conclusion to ensure that your group has a good grasp on the concept, and to ensure that your message was clearly understood. Try to use questions to get your instructors to try and relate the teaching skill to other lesson scenarios (riding skills, students, terrain, etc.)
在結尾時使用提問是一個有效的工具,可以確保你的團隊對概念有良好的理解,並確保你的訊息被清楚地傳達。嘗試用問題讓你的講師們嘗試將教學技巧與其他課程情境(騎乘技巧、學生、地形等)聯繫起來。

Your goal for introductory instructor training sessions is to give your trainees tools to make their future lessons more effective.
你在入門講師訓練課程中的目標是提供受訓者工具,使他們未來的課程更有效。

II. ADVANCED INSTRUCTOR TRAINING SKILLS
II. 進階講師訓練技巧

The advanced instructor training session combines elements of the structure of the introductory session, and further develops the understanding level of the students on a more specific level. The following are elements crucial to successful training sessions for advanced instructors.
進階講師培訓課程結合了入門課程的結構元素,並在更具體的層面上進一步提升學員的理解程度。以下是成功培訓進階講師所必須具備的關鍵要素。

Advanced Pedagogy - Trainer vs. Instructor Roles
進階教學法 - 培訓師與講師的角色

By the time trainers are training high-level instructors their presentation abilities should be such that they are comfortable switching in and out of roles within a single session, and their instructor students intuitively know when they are being taught pedagogical ideas, and when concepts deal with teaching the public. This is a crucial skill of advanced trainers.
當培訓師開始培訓高階講師時,他們的表達能力應該已達到能夠自在地在同一堂課中切換角色的程度,而他們的講師學員也能直覺地分辨何時是在學習教學法理念,何時是在探討對大眾教學的相關概念。這是進階培訓師必備的重要技能。

Combined Goals綜合目標

Goals for advanced training sessions may have multiple angles. For example, the trainer may wish to increase the instructor’s level of knowledge of a particular teaching skill or strategy, while also making them better snowboarders. This presents a challenge to the trainer to effectively plan and combine the pedagogy information to be presented with the technical information. Also, the trainer must take into account details such as tactics, terrain, A & I concepts, questions, etc. to be sure that both aspects (pedagogical and technical) support each other.
進階訓練課程的目標可能有多重面向。例如,教練可能希望提升指導員對特定教學技巧或策略的知識水平,同時也讓他們成為更好的滑雪板選手。這對教練來說是一項挑戰,需要有效規劃並結合將要呈現的教學法資訊與技術資訊。此外,教練必須考慮戰術、地形、A & I 概念、問題等細節,以確保兩個面向(教學法與技術)彼此支持。
In the case of dual goals for a session, it’s important to draw a link between the technical riding skills being developed, and the pedagogical skills that are being taught.
在課程有雙重目標的情況下,重要的是要建立技術騎乘技巧與所教授的教學技巧之間的連結。

Building on the basic pedagogy model and session structure, the following elements should be included in your advanced pedagogy session:
在基本教學法模型和課程結構的基礎上,您的進階教學法課程應包含以下元素:
  1. Pedagogical: Improving the group’s understanding of the various teaching skills, strategies and tools that CASI promotes.
    教學法:提升團隊對 CASI 推廣的各種教學技巧、策略與工具的理解。
  2. Technical: Isolating one of the various riding skills or outcomes in the technical (riding) skill development of the group.
    技術面:在團體的技術(騎乘)技能發展中,將各種騎乘技能或成果中的某一項隔離出來。

Less is More!少即是多!

Many times, advanced training sessions build on existing knowledge, refining your instructor’s riding and/or teaching skills. For this reason, specificity is crucial. In short, less is more at this stage. Many, if not all, of the basics regarding teaching strategies and riding skills have been covered by this stage. Instructors working with advanced riders, or training for higher-level certification courses, need to know the finer details of these skills and strategies. Consult the Skill Development Model for tips on Refining and Creating Variation in your instructors teaching and riding skills.
許多時候,進階訓練課程是建立在既有知識的基礎上,精進教練的騎乘及/或教學技能。因此,具體性至關重要。簡言之,在此階段少即是多。關於教學策略和騎乘技能的基本要點,多數甚至全部已在此階段涵蓋。與進階騎手合作的教練,或為更高級認證課程訓練的教練,需要了解這些技能和策略的細節。請參考技能發展模型,獲取精進及創造變化的教學與騎乘技能建議。
When structuring advanced training sessions, try to ensure that you’re not overwhelming instructor students. Refining or learning advanced skills takes a lot longer than learning lower level ideas, so make that you account for this in your session plans. As the session leader, give yourself a clear and specific goal for the session. There’s no need to teach everything you know about snowboarding - remember, it’s not always about your goals, but rather what the instructors need to be successful. Find creative ways to refine and push your instructor’s knowledge levels.
在規劃進階訓練課程時,盡量避免讓教練學員感到負擔過重。精進或學習進階技能所需的時間遠比學習基礎概念長,因此在課程計畫中務必考慮到這一點。作為課程主持人,給自己設定一個明確且具體的課程目標。沒必要將你所有關於滑雪板的知識全部教給學員——記住,重點不一定是你的目標,而是教練們成功所需的內容。尋找創意的方法來精進並提升教練的知識層次。

Developing Analysis & Improvement Skills
發展分析與改進技能

Sessions developing the Analysis and/or Improvement skills of your instructors may use a couple of varying approaches. A sample lesson may be presented, with special attention paid to illustrating how and when analysis and improvement is taking place. Alternatively, the session leader may choose to use an A & I Development Tactic, to give instructors some practice in watching (analysing) and delivering improvements to their students. Common tactics for developing the Analysis or Improvement skills include:
針對教練的分析及/或改進技能所設計的課程,可能會採用幾種不同的方式。可以示範一堂範例課程,特別強調分析與改進何時以及如何進行。或者,課程主持人也可以選擇使用分析與改進發展策略,讓教練們練習觀察(分析)並向學生提供改進建議。常見用於發展分析或改進技能的策略包括:
  • Circle Around圍圈討論
  • Divide The Class分組教學
  • The Telephone電話
  • Follow The Leader跟著領導者走

Circle Around繞圈圈

Have the group split into pairs so that they can watch only their partner. Ask the first member of the group to start down the run, stopping after a predetermined number of turns. Follow this with the next person, who will stop a set distance below the first, followed by the third, fourth, etc. The group descends down the run in this revolving sequence.
讓小組分成兩人一組,這樣他們就只能觀察自己的搭檔。請小組的第一位成員開始沿著滑道下滑,並在預定的轉彎數後停下。接著由下一位成員開始,他會在第一位成員下方一定距離處停下,然後是第三位、第四位,依此類推。小組成員以這種輪流的方式沿著滑道往下滑。

As the exercise is progressing, partners should be watching each other, and formulating a plan for analysis or delivery of improvement. At the completion of the exercise, have each pair communicate their analysis.
在練習進行中,搭檔應該互相觀察,並擬定分析或改進的計畫。練習結束後,請每對搭檔溝通他們的分析結果。

Divide The Class分組教學

In pairs, one partner will ride down a predetermined part of the run. Pairs will watch each other from various vantage points, and at the bottom of the run, communicate their analysis or improvement plan.
兩人一組,其中一位搭檔會沿著預定的滑道部分下滑。兩人會從不同的觀察點互相觀察,並在滑道底部溝通他們的分析或改進計畫。

The Telephone電話遊戲

Good with large groups, this exercise involves the first member of the group riding down the run, away from the group. The session leader will facilitate the analysis of the riding with the group. Once a plan has been reached, the next member will be sent down the run to relay the analysis. At this point, the group will then analyze this person’s riding. This continues until there are no instructors left.
適合大型團體,這個練習讓團體中的第一位成員沿著滑道滑下,遠離團體。課程帶領者將協助團體分析該成員的滑行。當達成共識後,下一位成員將被派往滑道,傳達分析結果。此時,團體將分析這位成員的滑行。此過程持續進行,直到所有教練都完成為止。

Follow The Leader跟隨領導者

A useful tactic in analyzing someone’s riding is to simply follow him or her as they ride. This allows for a closeup view of the various movements or situations that may be providing challenges.
分析某人滑行的一個有效方法是直接跟隨他或她滑行。這樣可以近距離觀察各種動作或情況,找出可能帶來挑戰的原因。

Analysis and improvement sessions for instructors are very important in developing their overall teaching effectiveness. It should be noted that the above tactics for developing these skills are for instructors only! We wouldn’t ever be developing these skills in our students (because in that situation, it’s the instructor’s job to provide the feedback).
對講師進行分析與改進的課程對提升其整體教學效能非常重要。需注意的是,上述用於培養這些技能的策略僅適用於講師!我們絕不會在學生身上培養這些技能(因為在那種情況下,提供回饋是講師的工作)。
A successful instructor training session will provide instructors with tools, tactics, and a better understanding of the teaching strategies they can use in their everyday lessons.
一場成功的講師培訓課程將為講師提供工具、策略,以及對他們在日常課程中可運用教學策略的更深入理解。

SEASONAL SESSION PLANNING (LONG TERM TRAINING)
季節性課程規劃(長期培訓)

The key to effective training is good organization, not only for a single session but for a full season as well (or multiple seasons). This planning section will illustrate key components to consider when planning both seasonal and session plans.
有效培訓的關鍵在於良好的組織,不僅針對單一課程,也包括整個季節(或多個季節)。本規劃部分將說明在規劃季節性及課程計畫時需考慮的關鍵要素。

Seasonal Planning (Long Range)
季節性規劃(長期規劃)

Seasonal plans structure the goals of the school, director or supervisor, and the needs of the instructors into small manageable chunks, which will then be planned into individual sessions. During the long range planning of a course, the instructor organizes all the skills and knowledge to be learned into a logical and coherent progression.
季節性計劃將學校、主任或主管的目標,以及講師的需求,結構化為小而可管理的部分,然後再規劃成個別課程。在課程的長期規劃中,講師會將所有要學習的技能和知識組織成一個合乎邏輯且連貫的進程。
Long range planning enables the instructor to:
長期規劃使講師能夠:
  • Ensure all the items are included in the lesson series.
    確保所有項目都包含在課程系列中。
  • Ensure the skills and competencies are reviewed.
    確保技能和能力已被審查。
  • Present technical material in a logical sequence.
    以合乎邏輯的順序呈現技術資料。
  • Determine if adequate time has been scheduled to teach the sessions.
    判斷是否已安排足夠的時間來教授各課程。

How do you design a long-range plan?
你如何設計長期計畫?

The exact method depends upon the individual teacher. The following steps can assist you:
具體方法取決於個別教師。以下步驟可協助你:
  1. Brainstorm, contemplate and understand the aim of the season or course.
    腦力激盪、思考並了解該季節或課程的目標。
  2. What are the goals for your training program? How did you arrive at this goal? Were the instructors asked about their goals for the season?
    你的訓練計畫目標是什麼?你是如何確定這個目標的?有沒有詢問教練們對本賽季的目標是什麼?
  3. List all the topics, activities or skills to be covered in the course, season, and program. Group together related items.
    列出課程、賽季及計畫中所有要涵蓋的主題、活動或技能。將相關項目歸類整理。
  4. Order these into a logical learning progression. Put items of lower skill first, progressing to more difficult.
    將這些項目依照合乎邏輯的學習進程排序。先放較低難度的項目,再逐步進入較困難的內容。
  5. Slot the sessions/lessons with the available times.
    將課程或課時安排在可用的時間內。
Note: Be sure to consider the number of lessons and time available. Schedule items to be provided for maximum learning and practice. Be Realistic. Plan for lost time because of weather or terrain conditions, absenteeism, etc. Allow for a great deal of practice time, particularly when working on new material.
注意:務必考慮課程數量與可用時間。安排項目時應以最大化學習與練習為目標。務必務實。需預留因天氣或地形條件、缺席等因素造成的時間損失。特別是在處理新教材時,應預留大量練習時間。

Sometimes it will become apparent that adequate time has not been scheduled. Then, the instructor must reconsider the long-range lesson plan:
有時會明顯發現安排的時間不足。此時,講師必須重新考慮長期課程計畫:
  • Is it possible to increase the number of sessions?
    是否有可能增加課程次數?
  • Can using on-going evaluation and feedback save time?
    持續評估與回饋能否節省時間?
  • Are you trying to teach “beyond” the student?
    你是否試圖教導學生「超出」原本範圍的內容?
It may be necessary for the instructor to devise a way to cover more in each session than originally planned. Using a more direct teaching approach or keeping class sizes smaller may achieve this. How you divide up the training material will depend on many factors. Some of these factors cannot be controlled in advance.
講師可能需要想出方法,在每次課程中涵蓋比原先計劃更多的內容。採用更直接的教學方式或保持較小的班級規模,可能有助於達成此目標。你如何劃分訓練教材,將取決於許多因素,其中一些因素無法事先控制。

Review審核

The season plans should be updated and revised after each session. This planning process should become part of every post-session evaluation. Consider using a rating system, or mid-season evaluation process to gauge the effectiveness of your seasonal plan.
季節計劃應在每次課程後更新和修訂。這個規劃過程應成為每次課後評估的一部分。考慮使用評分系統或季中評估程序,以評估你的季節計劃的有效性。
How may each of the following affect your long range planning?
以下各項如何影響你的長期規劃?
  • The level being taught.
    教學的等級。
  • The number and ability of candidates.
    學員的人數與能力。
  • Weather misfortunes (powder days…very hard to session through!).
    天氣不佳(粉雪日……非常難以進行課程!)。
Long term training plans can form the backbone for successful snowboard schools. Involve your instructors, supervisors and directors in the planning process. As a trainer, your “clients” are your instructors. Your session plan must satisfy many goals - the instructor’s, the resort’s, your goals, as well as the snow school director’s goals. The most successful trainers take all of these perspectives into account when developing training plans.
長期訓練計畫可以成為成功滑雪學校的基礎。讓你的教練、主管和主管參與規劃過程。作為訓練師,你的「客戶」是你的教練。你的課程計畫必須滿足多重目標——教練的、度假村的、你的目標,以及滑雪學校主管的目標。最成功的訓練師在制定訓練計畫時會考慮所有這些觀點。

SESSION PLANNING (SHORT TERM TRAINING)
課程規劃(短期訓練)

Session plans allow for fluid presentations of relevant material, and can be accomplished in set time limits. Effective session planning depends on an up-to-date season plan.
課程計畫能讓相關內容的呈現更流暢,並能在設定的時間內完成。有效的課程規劃依賴於最新的賽季計畫。
Individual session plans can be difficult to make far in advance, because their effectiveness depends on the success of the lessons that precede them. Finalize your next session’s plan after reviewing the outcome of the previous session.
個別課程計畫很難提前很久制定,因為其成效取決於前面課程的成果。請在檢視前一堂課的結果後,確定下一堂課的計畫。

What goes into planning the session?
課程規劃包含哪些內容?

In the season plan, you roughly describe the topics and tactics you wish to cover. Your session plan tells you how you are going to achieve the goals, and what you are going to need. To plan the session, identify the following:
在季節計劃中,你大致描述了你希望涵蓋的主題和策略。你的課程計劃則告訴你如何達成目標,以及你需要什麼。要規劃課程,請確認以下事項:
  • Your NEW topic or SKILL
    你的新主題或技能
  • Your TEACHING STRATEGY你的教學策略
  • Required TERRAIN所需的場地
  • The TIME scheduled for each component of the session
    每個環節的預定時間
  • TACTICS for use使用策略
  • KEY WORDS to mention
    要提及的關鍵詞
  • QUESTIONS to ask要提出的問題
  • RIDER ABILITY騎士能力
  • Additional MATERIALS or points to cover
    額外材料或需涵蓋的重點

Should you write your session plan down?
你應該把課程計劃寫下來嗎?

Yes! Remember that the purpose of the session plan is to help YOU teach effectively. If you are going to forget your lesson, or are inexperienced at teaching the specific session, you will likely feel more confident writing it down. With time and mileage in the trainer role, you may be able to develop session plans “on the fly”, based on the day’s conditions, goals and session attendees.
是的!請記住,課程計劃的目的是幫助你有效教學。如果你可能會忘記課程內容,或對於特定課程教學經驗不足,寫下課程計劃會讓你更有信心。隨著時間累積和擔任教練的經驗增加,你或許能根據當天的狀況、目標和參與者,臨場發揮並制定課程計劃。
Written plans can also serve as a reference for future sessions, teaching strategies, and evaluation of the session’s effectiveness. Consider saving all session plans to create a session book, for future use at your resort. Hold on to past session plans for future use, as they can combine to form a comprehensive training reference for you or your snow school.
書面計劃也可以作為未來課程、教學策略及課程成效評估的參考。建議將所有課程計劃保存下來,製作成課程手冊,供未來在您的度假村使用。請保留過去的課程計劃,因為它們可以整合成為您或您的滑雪學校的完整訓練參考資料。

COMPONENTS OF A SESSION PLAN:
課程計劃的組成要素:

Session goals課程目標

List the goals for the session. Make certain the goal is S.M.A.R.T. The goal could be as simple as covering the beginner turn in full detail, to sharing Analysis & Improvement tactics, or to introducing pedagogy concepts to hopeful Level 3’s.
列出課程的目標。確保目標符合 S.M.A.R.T.原則。目標可以簡單到完整講解初學者轉彎技巧,或分享分析與改進策略,亦或是向有志成為三級教練者介紹教學法概念。
At the advanced stages, your session goals will be twofold - to develop instructor’s pedagogy knowledge, while also developing their technical riding ability.
在進階階段,您的課程目標將有兩個方向——一方面發展教練的教學法知識,另一方面提升他們的技術騎乘能力。

The Method of Presentation
呈現方法

Identify and utilize a method of presentation or combination thereof. A method of presentation will not only aid in organizing your lessons, it will also help your students comprehension of the session.
確定並運用一種或多種呈現方法。呈現方法不僅有助於組織您的課程,也能幫助學生理解課程內容。

Timeline時間規劃

Have you considered the length of the chairlift? How about buckling in? There are numerous factors when wanting to maximize the time for a session. Most sessions need to be finished on time in order to allow instructors to prepare for upcoming lessons. Do a dry run through if at all possible to time the various components of your session.
您是否考慮過吊椅纜車的長度?安全帶的扣緊呢?在想要最大化課程時間時,有許多因素需要考量。大多數課程必須準時結束,以便教練能準備接下來的課程。如果可能,請先進行一次模擬演練,來掌握課程中各個環節的時間。

Rider ability騎士能力

State your rider ability for the lesson. Use the ability level and manoeuvre style to aid in setting up your session.
請說明您此次課程的騎士能力。請利用能力等級和操作風格來協助安排您的課程。

Terrain地形

Identify the intended terrain for each tactic. Flat areas for static exercises are sometimes difficult to happen across, so plan your session terrain well. The terrain chosen should support the technical goal of your session.
確認每個戰術所適用的地形。平坦區域適合靜態練習,但這類地形有時難以遇到,因此請妥善規劃你的課程地形。所選地形應支持你課程的技術目標。

Tactics戰術

List and briefly explain each intended tactic. Try to jot down the important points to highlight during the use of the tactic. Points such as: key words, linked skills and/or analogies. Also helpful is to jot down a few extra tactics in case of unexpected changes (terrain, teaching challenges, equipment malfunction). We are stronger teachers and pedagogues if we always have some extras in our back pocket. Simple drawings (stick people can snowboard) can also aid in a well-planned session.
列出並簡要說明每個預定的戰術。試著記下使用該戰術時要強調的重要要點,例如:關鍵字、相關技能和/或類比。備註一些額外的戰術也很有幫助,以應對意外變化(地形、教學挑戰、設備故障)。如果我們隨時準備一些備用方案,會成為更強的教師和教育者。簡單的圖示(即使是火柴人也能滑雪板)也能幫助規劃出一堂完善的課程。

Using Questions - "Facilitation"
使用提問—「引導教學」

Ask a variety of questions. Very simply put, ask questions that will result in the anticipated response, or take your session in the direction you would like. For example, your choice of questions can alter the current train of thought, enhance understanding of a current idea, or bring to light areas of lesser understanding. Write a few questions down so that they are fresh in your head for the end of the lesson, but don’t be afraid to react to the session outcomes when using questions.
提出各種問題。簡單來說,提出能引導出預期回應的問題,或將你的課程帶向你想要的方向。例如,你選擇的問題可以改變當前的思路,加深對現有想法的理解,或揭示較不清楚的領域。寫下幾個問題,讓它們在課程結束時仍清晰在腦海中,但在使用問題時,也不要害怕根據課程結果做出反應。

TIPS AND TRICKS:技巧與訣竅:

Concept Maps概念圖

Use a concept map to organize either your session or season plan into logical sequences. A concept map is just a large scrap piece of paper on which you write your ideas, goals, tactics, teaching strategies, etc. All that you wish to accomplish during the session/season. Afterwards, group and link the items into logical sequences and then follow up by numbering them and transferring the info to a session/season plan.
使用概念圖來組織你的課程或賽季計畫,使其成為合乎邏輯的序列。概念圖就是一張大張的廢紙,上面寫下你的想法、目標、策略、教學方法等,所有你希望在課程或賽季中完成的事項。之後,將這些項目分組並連結成合乎邏輯的序列,接著編號並將資訊轉移到課程或賽季計畫中。

Diagrams圖表

A diagram could be used to illustrate a possible class formation, or an A & I drill. Diagrams are also great to use when teaching a freestyle half-pipe session or introducing delays to a group of coaches or athletes. Leave some space on your session/season plans for diagrams.
圖表可用來說明可能的班級組成,或 A&I 訓練。當教授自由式半管課程或向教練或運動員群體介紹延遲技巧時,圖表也是很好的輔助工具。在你的課程或賽季計劃中留一些空間用來繪製圖表。

Test Run試跑

When completed take your lesson plan for a ride, and test run your plan. Check the terrain, lift times, weather forecasts, etc. Run through it and see if any adaptation should be made before using it out on any groups. And always try out any new tactics or skills before you teach them. The worst, most humbling moments occur when you realize that a chosen tactic does not work or is too difficult for the group.
完成後,帶著你的教案實地試跑。檢查地形、纜車時間、天氣預報等。實際演練,看看是否需要在帶領任何團體前做出調整。並且,任何新策略或技巧都應先自行嘗試再教學。最糟糕且令人挫折的時刻,往往是當你發現所選策略無效或對團體來說太困難時。

Critical Reflection關鍵反思

None of us run perfect sessions, and more often than not, we can all improve on our own sessions. So take advantage, and write down the improvements. Take a minute after each session to decide whether the session accomplished its goals. If you were to run the session again, what would you do differently?
我們沒有人能主持完美的課程,而且多半情況下,我們都能在自己的課程中有所改進。因此,請善加利用,並將改進之處記錄下來。每次課程結束後,花一分鐘時間判斷該課程是否達成了目標。如果你要再主持一次這堂課,你會有什麼不同的做法?

TRAINING SESSION PLANNING CHECKLIST
訓練課程規劃檢查清單

\square The Training Session is organized and well structured (introduction; warm-up; practice; conclusion).
\square 訓練課程組織良好且結構完整(介紹;熱身;練習;結論)。

The duration of the Training Session is appropriate for the age and ability level of the participants.
訓練課程的時間長度適合參與者的年齡和能力水平。

\square The Training Session starts on time, and the time allocated for the session is respected.
\square 訓練課程準時開始,且課程所分配的時間得到尊重。

\square The activities designed for the session have well-defined goals.
\square 課程設計的活動目標明確。

\square The instructions given are clear, brief, and simple.
\square 所給予的指示清楚、簡短且簡單。

\square The chosen activities are appropriate for the ability and proficiency of the participants and they present exciting and reasonable challenges to them.
\square 所選擇的活動適合參與者的能力與熟練度,並且對他們提出了令人興奮且合理的挑戰。

\square Appropriate safety measures are implemented.
\square 已實施適當的安全措施。

\square Time is not wasted during the session, or in transition from one activity to the next.
\square 課程中或從一項活動轉換到下一項活動時,時間沒有被浪費。

\square Participants are actively involved throughout the training.
\square 參與者在整個訓練過程中都積極參與。

\square Participants are having fun, and are demonstrating genuine interest in the activities.
\square 參與者們玩得很開心,並展現出對活動的真誠興趣。

\square The overall tone of the session is positive.
\square 整個課程的氛圍是正面的。

\square The choice of terrain is appropriate for the ability and proficiency level of the participants.
\square 地形的選擇適合參與者的能力和熟練程度。

\square The choice of equipment (freeride, park or carving) is relative to the session plan.
\square 裝備的選擇(自由滑、花式公園或雕刻滑)與課程計劃相符。

\square Level of the participants.
\square 參與者的等級。

\square The goals and objectives of the session have been mutually agreed upon.
\square 已共同同意本次會議的目標與宗旨。

\square The goals and objectives of the session for ride improvement.
\square 本次會議的目標與宗旨為騎乘改進。

\square The goals and objectives of the session for practice teaching.
\square 本次會議的目標與宗旨為教學實踐。

PHYSICS & BIOMECHANICS IN SNOWBOARDING
滑雪板運動中的物理學與生物力學

"There are no rights and wrongs on snowboarding - only consequences."
「滑雪板運動中沒有對錯之分,只有後果。」

Understanding biomechanics and the laws of physics, and how they relate to human movements, is essential to be an effective instructor.
了解生物力學與物理定律,以及它們如何與人體動作相關,是成為有效教練的關鍵。
As your students progress, their movements will become more refined and fluid. Figuring out which movements need to be reinforced will be more difficult. Here is where we introduce various biomechanical principles. The purpose of these principles is to strengthen your understanding of "action vs. reaction" in snowboarding.
隨著學生的進步,他們的動作會變得更加精緻且流暢。判斷哪些動作需要加強將變得更加困難。這時我們會引入各種生物力學原理。這些原理的目的是加深你對滑雪板運動中「作用與反作用」的理解。
For further information, please review Appendix 4: Basic Anatomy & Movements For Snowboarding
如需更多資訊,請參閱附錄 4:滑雪板的基本解剖與動作

ESSENTIAL CONCEPTS OF PHYSICS
物理學的基本概念

This section summarizes various concepts that can help you in your day-to-day teaching.
本節總結了各種能幫助您日常教學的概念。

Newton's Laws of Physics
牛頓物理定律

Objects at rest stay at rest, and objects in motion stay in motion, unless acted on by an outside force
靜止的物體會保持靜止,運動中的物體會保持運動,除非受到外力作用
An object continues to do whatever it happens to be doing unless a force is exerted upon it. If it is at rest, it continues in a state of rest (demonstrated when a tablecloth is skillfully whipped from under dishes on a tabletop and the dishes remain in their initial state of rest). If an object is moving, it continues to move without turning or changing its speed.
物體會持續做它當下正在做的事,除非有力作用於它。如果物體靜止,它會繼續保持靜止狀態(如熟練地從桌面下抽走桌布,而盤子仍保持原本靜止狀態所示)。如果物體在運動,它會持續運動,且不會轉向或改變速度。
Force = Mass x Acceleration
力 = 質量 × 加速度
The force required to change an object's momentum is determined by the mass and the rate of change in velocity (acceleration). Since a snowboarder's mass remains constant, we can assume that the force applied is proportional to the rate of change in velocity. For example, stopping or changing direction quickly requires more force than stopping or changing direction slowly.
改變物體動量所需的力取決於質量和速度變化率(加速度)。由於滑雪板手的質量保持不變,我們可以假設施加的力與速度變化率成正比。例如,快速停止或改變方向需要比緩慢停止或改變方向更多的力。
Every action has an equal and opposite reaction
每個作用力都有一個大小相等、方向相反的反作用力
Trying to determine the equal and opposite forces can be quite complicated at times but the important thing to remember is that every action has a reaction.
嘗試判斷大小相等且方向相反的力有時可能相當複雜,但重要的是要記住每個作用力都會有反作用力。
Objects at rest stay at rest, and objects in motion stay in motion, unless acted on by an outside force An object continues to do whatever it happens to be doing unless a force is exerted upon it. If it is at rest, it continues in a state of rest (demonstrated when a tablecloth is skillfully whipped from under dishes on a tabletop and the dishes remain in their initial state of rest). If an object is moving, it continues to move without turning or changing its speed. Force = Mass x Acceleration The force required to change an object's momentum is determined by the mass and the rate of change in velocity (acceleration). Since a snowboarder's mass remains constant, we can assume that the force applied is proportional to the rate of change in velocity. For example, stopping or changing direction quickly requires more force than stopping or changing direction slowly. Every action has an equal and opposite reaction Trying to determine the equal and opposite forces can be quite complicated at times but the important thing to remember is that every action has a reaction.| Objects at rest stay at rest, and objects in motion stay in motion, unless acted on by an outside force | An object continues to do whatever it happens to be doing unless a force is exerted upon it. If it is at rest, it continues in a state of rest (demonstrated when a tablecloth is skillfully whipped from under dishes on a tabletop and the dishes remain in their initial state of rest). If an object is moving, it continues to move without turning or changing its speed. | | :--- | :--- | | Force = Mass x Acceleration | The force required to change an object's momentum is determined by the mass and the rate of change in velocity (acceleration). Since a snowboarder's mass remains constant, we can assume that the force applied is proportional to the rate of change in velocity. For example, stopping or changing direction quickly requires more force than stopping or changing direction slowly. | | Every action has an equal and opposite reaction | Trying to determine the equal and opposite forces can be quite complicated at times but the important thing to remember is that every action has a reaction. |
Mass: This is the weight of an object (e.g.: a snowboarder who weighs 75 kg ).
質量:指的是物體的重量(例如:一位體重 75 公斤的滑雪板運動員)。

Balance: Balance is achieved when the forces acting on a body are in equilibrium. Assuming there are no changes in these forces, a balanced object will not fall over.
平衡:當作用於物體的力處於平衡狀態時,即達到平衡。假設這些力沒有變化,平衡的物體將不會倒下。

Stability: Stability refers to an object’s resistance to external forces. A low wide object is generally more stable than a tall thin object: it is harder to push over.
穩定性:穩定性指的是物體對外力的抵抗能力。一般來說,低矮且寬廣的物體比高且細長的物體更穩定:較不容易被推倒。

Balancing: Refers to the constant, dynamic movements made, both subconsciously and consciously, to manage instability and/or to regain balance. Balancing movements involve both the body moving over the board and the board moving underneath the body.
平衡:指的是為了管理不穩定狀態和/或重新獲得平衡而進行的持續且動態的動作,這些動作既有潛意識的也有意識的。平衡動作包括身體在板上移動以及板在身體下方移動。

Centre of Mass (COM): The centre of mass of an object is an imaginary point around which all the mass of the object is equally distributed. (The centre of mass of a soccer ball is right in the centre, but the centre of mass of an egg would be closer to the rounder end). In people, different body types have different relative locations of COM.
質心(COM):物體的質心是一個假想點,物體的所有質量均勻分布於此點周圍。(足球的質心位於正中央,但雞蛋的質心會較接近較圓的一端)。不同體型的人質心位置相對不同。
Men typically have a COM located just above the navel while women typically have a COM located just bellow the navel. In snowboarding, the centre of mass of a rider changes as the rider changes his/her body position. There are times in snowboarding when a rider’s centre of mass is outside of his or her body (e.g.: during a method grab).
男性的質心通常位於肚臍上方,而女性的質心通常位於肚臍下方。在滑雪板運動中,騎乘者的質心會隨著身體姿勢的改變而改變。有時候,滑雪板騎乘者的質心會位於身體之外(例如:在做 method grab 動作時)。

Base of Support (BOS): The location on a body or object where most of the weight is supported. The larger the base of support, the more stable objects will be. When snowboarding, riders can increase stability by riding flat-based or spreading their weight evenly across the working edge. Riders typically choose a longer board for increased stability when free-riding and a shorter board for less stability and more playfulness for freestyle riding.
支撐基底(BOS):身體或物體上承受大部分重量的位置。支撐基底越大,物體越穩定。滑雪板時,騎士可以透過平放板底或將重量均勻分布在工作邊緣來增加穩定性。騎士通常會選擇較長的滑雪板以增加自由騎乘時的穩定性,而較短的滑雪板則提供較少的穩定性和更多的靈活性,適合花式騎乘。

Note: Changing the stance width also affects stability, wide stances are more stable and narrow stances are less stable; however if a stance is too wide it can make it difficult for a rider to be mobile, and a more narrow stance can provide a larger base of support while pressing on the nose or tail.
注意:改變站姿寬度也會影響穩定性,寬站姿較穩定,窄站姿較不穩定;然而,站姿過寬會使騎士行動不便,而較窄的站姿在壓鼻或壓尾時能提供較大的支撐基底。

Velocity: The speed and direction at which an object is travelling
速度:物體移動的速度與方向

Acceleration: The rate of change of velocity. This can be an increase or decrease in speed or a change of direction.
加速度:速度變化的速率。這可以是速度的增加或減少,或是方向的改變。

MOMENTUM: MOMENTUM = MASS X VELOCITY
動量:動量 = 質量 × 速度

The combination of speed and weight. A heavy rider travelling at a certain speed has more momentum than a lighter rider travelling at the same speed. Momentum travels in a given direction - for example, a rider straight-lining has their momentum travelling in a straight line, downhill.
速度與重量的結合。以一定速度行進的重騎士,其動量比以相同速度行進的輕騎士更大。動量沿特定方向移動——例如,直線下坡的騎士,其動量沿直線方向移動。

Linear Motion: Any movement that occurs along a straight path, where all parts of the body or object move an equal distance in the same direction.
線性運動:沿直線路徑發生的任何運動,身體或物體的所有部分在相同方向上移動相等距離。
Centripetal Force: Centripetal force makes a moving object follow a curved path. In snowboarding when the board is placed on edge it can/may create a centripetal force to make a turn.
向心力:向心力使移動的物體沿曲線路徑運動。在滑雪板運動中,當滑板傾斜時,可能會產生向心力以完成轉彎。
Angular Motion: Any motion where an object rotates around an axis. Angular motion is created by the application of force (torque) at some distance from the axis of rotation of a body or object. In other words, the force does NOT act directly through the centre of gravity.
角動作:任何物體繞著一個軸旋轉的運動。角動作是由於在距離物體或物體旋轉軸某段距離處施加力(扭矩)所產生。換句話說,力並非直接作用於重心。

Torque: Torque equals force times the perpendicular distance from the force to the axis of rotation. The farther a force is applied from the axis of rotation the greater the twisting force will be produced. Think of rotating with arms outstretched vs. in tight against the body.
扭矩:扭矩等於力乘以力到旋轉軸的垂直距離。力施加得越遠離旋轉軸,產生的扭轉力就越大。想像雙臂伸展旋轉與雙臂緊貼身體旋轉的差異。
Moment of Inertia: A measure of an object’s resistance to changes in angular motion. Objects with mass distributed further from the axis of rotation will be more resistant to changes in angular motion (higher moment of inertia). Longer snowboards will be more resistant to changes in angular velocity, however the added length creates more torque between the snow and the board.
慣性矩:衡量物體對角動作變化的抗拒程度。質量分布越遠離旋轉軸的物體,對角動作變化的抗拒越大(慣性矩越高)。較長的滑雪板對角速度變化的抗拒較大,但增加的長度會在雪地與滑雪板之間產生更大的扭矩。
Moment Arm: In a simple way, a moment arm can be thought of as a leverage force. The bigger the perpendicular distance away from the point of rotation the lever is, the more powerful it becomes.
力臂:簡單來說,力臂可以被視為槓桿力。距離旋轉點的垂直距離越大,槓桿的力量就越強。

Impulse: Impulse is the result of applying a force for a given amount of time. If we apply a force to an object we can change its momentum, so impulse can be thought of as a force that changes the direction or speed of an object. Impulse can be generated
衝量:衝量是施加力於物體一段時間的結果。如果我們對物體施加力,就能改變其動量,因此衝量可以被視為改變物體方向或速度的力。衝量可以產生

STABILITY FACTORS穩定性因素

Mass: The greater their mass, the more stable objects are. In snowboarding, heavy riders have an advantage in choppy snow because more force is required to knock them off balance.
質量:物體的質量越大,越穩定。在滑雪板運動中,體重較重的騎士在顛簸的雪地上具有優勢,因為需要更大的力才能使他們失去平衡。
Centre of Mass (COM): The lower their centre of mass, the more stable objects will be. Snowboarders can crouch down to become more stable through turns and when landing jumps or sliding rails.
質心(COM):質心越低,物體越穩定。滑雪板騎士可以蹲下來,在轉彎、著陸跳躍或滑行軌道時提高穩定性。
Base of Support: The larger their base of support, the more stable objects will be. When snowboarding, riders can increase stability by riding flat-based or spreading their weight evenly across the working edge. Riders typically choose a longer board for increased stability when free-riding and a shorter board for less stability and more playfulness for freestyle riding.
支撐基底:支撐基底越大,物體越穩定。滑雪板騎士可以透過平放板面或將體重均勻分布在工作邊緣上來增加穩定性。騎士通常會選擇較長的滑雪板以提升自由騎乘時的穩定性,而選擇較短的滑雪板則能在花式騎乘時帶來較少的穩定性和更多的靈活性。

over a long or short period of time. Impulse is critical in situations that require changes in speed and direction of movement. Impulse is involved every time a rider turns, jumps or rides varied terrain.
在長時間或短時間內。衝量在需要改變速度和移動方向的情況下至關重要。每當騎士轉彎、跳躍或騎乘不同地形時,衝量都會發揮作用。

Applied Force (A): This is the force exerted on the ground by the rider and snowboard, through the base of the board and/or edges. It is also known as the Contact Force. The axis this force is applied can be seen be drawing a line from the COM, through the riders feet; we call this the Balance Axis.
施加力(A):這是騎士和滑雪板透過滑雪板底部和/或邊緣施加在地面的力量,也稱為接觸力。這股力量施加的軸線可以透過從質心(COM)穿過騎士雙腳畫一條線來觀察,我們稱之為平衡軸。

Ground Reaction Force (GR): This is the force exerted on the snowboard and body by the ground. For example, a person standing on the ground exerts a contact force on it (equal to the person’s weight) and at the same time an equal and opposite ground reaction force is exerted by the ground on the person. When a snowboarder rides over a bump, the ground exerts an equal and opposite force to the riders momentum hitting the bump. Snowboarders experience this as a build up of “pressure” between the snowboard and the snow. While standing on a slope, part of the ground reaction force will move a rider down the fall line.
地面反作用力(GR):這是地面對滑雪板和身體施加的力。例如,一個站在地面上的人會對地面施加一個接觸力(等於此人的體重),同時地面也會對此人施加一個大小相等方向相反的地面反作用力。當滑雪者騎過一個凸起時,地面會對滑雪者撞擊凸起的動量施加一個大小相等方向相反的力。滑雪者會感受到這種力在滑雪板和雪面之間產生的「壓力」累積。當站在斜坡上時,部分地面反作用力會使滑雪者沿著坡度方向向下移動。

Elastic Potential Energy: Elastic potential energy is potential energy stored as a result of deformation of an elastic object, such as the stretching of a bow.
彈性位能:彈性位能是由彈性物體變形所儲存的位能,例如拉弓時的拉力。
Friction: The force that resists relative motion between two bodies in contact when sliding against one another.
摩擦力:當兩個接觸物體相對滑動時,抵抗相對運動的力。

PHYSICS OF STABILITY ON A SLOPE
斜坡上的穩定性物理學

Gravity (G) on a level surface only has one component pulling the rider’s COM down into the ground at a 90 90 90^(@)90^{\circ} to the surface of the terrain. This creates an Applied Force (A) in this direction. For a rider to be stable, this Applied Force must therefore be aligned with and in direct opposition to the Ground Reaction Force (GR).
重力(G)在平坦表面上只有一個分量,將騎士的質心(COM)以與地形表面成 90 90 90^(@)90^{\circ} 角度的方向拉向地面。這會在此方向產生一個作用力(A)。為了讓騎士保持穩定,這個作用力必須與地面反作用力(GR)對齊且方向相反。

If the rider aligned their COM towards the rear of the board (and therefore not aligning the A Force against the GR Force), this would cause a tendency for the rider to “loop out” or fall backwards, over the tail of the board. Similarly, a rider whose COM is towards the nose of the board would have a tendency to “nose dive”, or fall over the nose. In either case, the A and GR forces are not in direct opposition to each other, therefore causing an imbalance in forces and thus instability.
如果騎士將他們的重心(COM)對齊在滑板的尾部(因此沒有將空氣力(A Force)與重力反作用力(GR Force)對齊),這會導致騎士有「翻轉」或向後跌落在滑板尾部的傾向。同樣地,重心位於滑板前端的騎士則容易「頭部下沉」或向前跌落在滑板頭部。無論哪種情況,空氣力與重力反作用力並非直接相對,因此造成力的失衡,進而導致不穩定。

Stability also relies on the forces from the rider being balanced with the forces from the terrain. If someone were to push you to the left, you’d move to the right to counter balance the push. This is stability… moving into a position from which all forces can be balanced, so they don’t push your over.
穩定性也依賴於騎士施加的力量與地形施加的力量達到平衡。如果有人向左推你,你會向右移動以抵銷這股推力。這就是穩定性……移動到一個所有力量都能平衡的位置,這樣它們就不會把你推倒。
Gravity on a downhill slope is different - instead of one component only pulling the rider’s COM directly down (vertical), gravity (G) is divided into two components; one that is parallel to the pitch of the slope (GS), and one that is perpendicular to the slope (GN).
下坡時的重力情況不同——重力(G)不再只有一個分量直接向下拉騎士的質心(垂直方向),而是被分成兩個分量;一個與坡度方向平行(GS),另一個與坡面垂直(GN)。

Similarly, the opposing force from the ground (GR) now has two components; the component of friction (GRF), resisting the rider from moving down the slope, and because the surface is firm, the ground also pushes back on the rider at an angle perpendic-
同樣地,地面施加的反作用力(GR)現在也有兩個分量;摩擦力分量(GRF)阻止騎士沿坡面向下滑動,且因為地面堅硬,地面還會以垂直於地形表面的角度反作用於騎士(GRN)。

ular to the surface of the terrain (GRN).
垂直於地形表面的反作用力分量(GRN)。
People are used to balancing on slopes in a world where there is friction at the surface. This is why beginner riders tend to move their weight back when they slide downhill, as they are expecting a “force” that will hold them up, and resist them from moving down the hill.
人們習慣於在有摩擦力的表面上平衡於斜坡上。這就是為什麼初學者在滑下坡時傾向於將重心往後移,因為他們預期會有一股「力」支撐他們,阻止他們往下滑。

However, the physics between balancing on a slope when stationary compared to when moving (sliding) down a slope. In the first scenario there is a GR Friction Force (GRf). This force resists the board from moving down the hill. If this force is reduced by the surface being slippery, like snow, the net (combined) GR force changes from exerting vertically on to the rider, to pushing the rider at a perpendicular angle.
然而,靜止時在斜坡上平衡與移動(滑行)下坡時的物理原理是不同的。在第一種情況下,有一個重力反作用摩擦力(GRf)。這股力抵抗滑板往下坡移動。如果表面變得滑溜,例如雪地,這股力就會減弱,重力反作用力的合力會從垂直作用於騎士身上,變成以垂直角度推動騎士。
Because the angle of the GR Force changes, the rider must move into a different position to maintain balance and stability.
因為重力反作用力的角度改變,騎士必須調整姿勢以維持平衡和穩定。
To put this simply…
簡單來說……
  • To be stable, a rider needs to balance against any forces acting on them.
    為了保持穩定,騎士需要對抗作用在他們身上的任何力量。
  • Different forces are happening on a downhill slope, compared to a level surface.
    在下坡斜坡上,作用的力量與在平坦地面上不同。
  • Different forces are happening when stationary, compared to moving.
    靜止時與移動時,作用的力量也不同。
  • Being stationary on a slope requires friction. In the presence of friction, a vertical position creates stability.
    在斜坡上靜止需要摩擦力。在有摩擦力的情況下,垂直姿勢能帶來穩定。
  • Moving on a slope loses friction. In the absence of friction, a perpendicular position creates stability.
    在斜坡上移動會失去摩擦力。在沒有摩擦力的情況下,垂直的位置會產生穩定性。

ADAPTING TO CHANGES IN FRICTION, TERRAIN SURFACE AND TERRAIN PITCH (STEEPNESS)
適應摩擦力、地形表面及地形坡度(陡度)的變化

To remain stable, a rider needs to make constant adjustments as the forces acting on them are also constantly changing. As soon as there is any ground friction force (GRf), the rider will need to adjust their position accordingly. Bumps or changes in surface conditions that result in a ‘resistance’ to or deceleration of the snowboard, will require the rider to react and adjust their position, if they wish to maintain their stability.
為了保持穩定,騎士需要不斷調整,因為作用在他們身上的力量也在不斷變化。只要有任何地面摩擦力(GRf),騎士就需要相應地調整他們的位置。地面凹凸不平或表面條件的變化,導致滑雪板產生「阻力」或減速,騎士若想維持穩定,就必須做出反應並調整姿勢。

To counterbalance against this resistance the rider needs to adjust their COM slightly towards the tail. A classic example is performing a 50-50 onto a sticky box or rail. Conversely, if this resistance is reduced or removed (faster snow, steeper terrain,
為了抵銷這種阻力,騎士需要稍微將重心(COM)向尾部調整。一個經典的例子是執行 50-50 動作時,滑上黏性較強的箱子或鐵軌。相反地,如果這種阻力減少或消失(例如雪質較快、地形較陡),

colder section of box) the rider needs to “project” their mass downhill: much like a mast on a ship would “tip” as the ship rolls down the back side of a wave. Constant changes in friction, terrain surface or pitch (angle) of terrain, all result in different forces acting on the rider to different degrees and at different angles. Constant change in these forces therefore requires constant movement and adaptation to stay balanced and stable as possible.
在箱子較冷的區域,騎士需要將自己的重量「投射」向下坡方向:就像船桅在船隻隨波浪翻滾時會「傾斜」一樣。摩擦力、地形表面或地形傾斜角度的持續變化,都會導致作用在騎士身上的力以不同程度和角度變化。因此,這些力的持續變化需要騎士不斷移動和調整,以保持盡可能的平衡和穩定。
Beginners to intermediates tend to “think out” these adjusting movements, making for reactive riding. Advanced and Expert riders start to make these adjustments autonomously (without thinking), creating precise, efficient movements and more fluid, smooth riding.
初學者到中級者傾向於「思考」這些調整動作,導致騎乘反應較慢。高級和專家級騎士則開始自動(無需思考)做出這些調整,產生精確、高效的動作,使騎乘更加流暢和平滑。
In any sport where someone is moving with gravity, down a slope with little to no friction, to be stable they must align their Balance Axis (the line from their COM through their BOS) against the GR force; they must “tip” themselves downhill.
在任何一項運動中,當人們隨著重力沿坡面移動且摩擦力極低或幾乎沒有摩擦時,為了保持穩定,他們必須將自己的平衡軸(從重心到支撐基底的線)與重力加速度方向對齊;他們必須將自己「傾斜」向下坡方向。

Since boardsliding a rail and snowboarding down a slope are all friction low environments; no friction, means no GRf force to balance against, so remaining “upright” would be less stable.
由於滑板滑過欄杆和滑雪板沿坡面滑行都是低摩擦環境;沒有摩擦力就意味著沒有重力反作用力可供平衡,因此保持「直立」反而會較不穩定。
It is therefore important for the Balance Axis to pass through the feet. The Line of Gravity (which is simply an imaginary line from the COM, directly down,) does not need to pass through the feet, as it would on a level surface, or if the person was static on the slope. This understanding is key to teaching riders correct Position & Balance techniques when snowboarding downhill.
因此,保持平衡軸通過雙腳是非常重要的。重力線(即從質心垂直向下的假想線)不必像在平坦地面上或人在斜坡上靜止時那樣通過雙腳。這個理解對於教導滑雪板初學者正確的姿勢和平衡技巧,尤其是在下坡滑行時,至關重要。

Teaching beginner snowboarders to “tip” their weight down the hill is one of the first hurdles for any instructor, since people are programmed to stand in a position to “resist” gravity pulling them down the hill, rather than letting their body “tip”, and to go with it.
教導初學滑雪板者將體重「傾斜」向下坡是每位教練面臨的第一個挑戰,因為人們習慣站在一個「抵抗」重力將他們拉下坡的位置,而不是讓身體「傾斜」並順勢而為。

PHYSICS & SNOWBOARDING: THE FORCES IN ACTION
物理學與滑雪板:作用中的力

What follows is a description of how the above forces and concepts come into play while we are snowboarding. This is by no means an exhaustive description, but it will hopefully help to create an understanding of how the snowboard behaves and how forces affect it whilst we are riding.
以下將描述上述力和概念在滑雪板運動中如何發揮作用。這絕非詳盡的說明,但希望能幫助理解滑雪板的行為以及在騎乘過程中力如何影響它。

Turning & Steering The Snowboard
轉彎與操控滑雪板

Snowboarders use the force supplied by gravity to accelerate them down the slopes. The fall line, or gravity line, is the path that a ball would roll down if dropped at the top of a mountain. A snowboard that is running on a flat base will travel in a straight line following the fall line of the slope. If a rider wishes to change their direction of travel/momentum away from the fall line, they may use the snowboard to create a centripetal force.
滑雪板手利用重力提供的力量加速下坡。落線或重力線,是指如果將一顆球從山頂放下,球會滾落的路徑。滑雪板若以平底面滑行,將沿著坡面的落線直線前進。若騎士想改變行進方向或動量,偏離落線,他們可以利用滑雪板產生向心力。
A turn can be achieved by tilting the snowboard onto an edge. The sidecut shape of the edge can create a centripetal force that will deflect the rider’s momentum in a new direction. In order for a change in direction and momentum to be achieved, (i.e.: a ‘turn’) the snowboard is normally* tilted onto an edge. The higher the edge angle of the board, the more centripetal force is generated by the sidecut. If the snowboard is only pivoted on a flat base, the rider’s momentum will not be affected. A good example of this is when a snowboarder performs a boardslide on a box. The board is pivoted 90 degrees to the direction of travel, but the rider travels straight along the box.
轉彎可以透過將滑雪板傾斜到邊緣來達成。邊緣的側切形狀能產生向心力,將騎士的動量偏轉到新的方向。為了實現方向和動量的改變(即「轉彎」),滑雪板通常*會傾斜到邊緣。滑雪板邊緣角度越大,側切產生的向心力越強。若滑雪板僅在平底面上旋轉,騎士的動量不會受到影響。一個很好的例子是滑雪板手在箱子上做 boardslide 時,滑雪板相對行進方向旋轉 90 度,但騎士仍沿著箱子直線滑行。
In order for us to vary the size and shape of our turns, we can use different amounts of edge angle, apply pressure, and pivot the board to change the outcome. Effective steering of the snowboard is a combination of these things. Adding rotational movement to create a sliding turn will slow us down for two reasons: there is increased friction between the edge and the snow, and a reduced time in the fall line.
為了讓我們能改變轉彎的大小和形狀,我們可以使用不同的邊緣角度、施加壓力,並旋轉滑雪板來改變結果。有效的滑雪板操控是這些因素的綜合運用。加入旋轉動作以創造滑行轉彎會讓我們減速,原因有兩個:邊緣與雪面之間的摩擦力增加,以及在落線上的時間減少。

*Deep powder creates a base of support for the snowboard, and this creates a centripetal force, and in a similar way, a banked turn in a boarder-cross track would allow a change of direction on a flat base.
*深厚的粉雪為滑雪板提供了支撐基底,這會產生向心力,類似地,滑雪板越野賽道中的傾斜轉彎也能在平坦的基底上改變方向。

Pivoting & Spinning旋轉與轉動

Rotational movements made by the body can be transferred to the snowboard, but there are different outcomes possible. Pivoting or spinning on the snowboard will not necessarily affect the direction of travel of the rider, and are examples of angular motion.
身體所做的旋轉動作可以傳遞到滑雪板上,但可能產生不同的結果。滑雪板上的旋轉或轉動不一定會影響騎乘者的行進方向,這些都是角動作的例子。
Bending the knees and ankles while rotating these lower joints will create more torque and thus pivot the snowboard with more force. Initiating a spin with the arms far from the body will create more torque. Riders can change their moment of inertia by moving their arms into different positions. If a rider wants to spin faster they should bring their arms closer to their body. If a rider wants to spin more slowly they should move their arms away from their body. Grabbing the board and adding a tweak while spinning is an alternate way to change moment of inertia and control rotational speed.
彎曲膝蓋和腳踝,同時旋轉這些下肢關節,將產生更大的扭矩,從而以更大的力量旋轉滑雪板。用手臂遠離身體來啟動旋轉,會產生更多的扭矩。騎手可以透過將手臂移動到不同位置來改變慣性矩。如果騎手想要旋轉得更快,應該將手臂靠近身體;如果想要旋轉得更慢,則應該將手臂移離身體。抓住滑雪板並在旋轉時加入扭動,是改變慣性矩和控制旋轉速度的另一種方法。

Impulse & Stability in Turns
衝量與轉彎時的穩定性

The longer the edge is applied, the more the rider’s momentum will change direction, so there will be a larger impulse. A higher edge angle will create more centripetal force, and will cause a bigger change in momentum, which is again, a larger impulse.
邊緣接觸時間越長,騎手的動量改變方向越大,因此衝量也會越大。較高的邊緣角度會產生更大的向心力,並導致動量的更大變化,這同樣意味著更大的衝量。

In order for the snowboard to redirect the rider’s momentum in a turn, the riders COM must be in line with the BOS (i.e.: the working edge). To help understand this, imagine you are a passenger in a speeding car, and you are holding an egg cup with an egg in it. When the car goes round a corner, you feel yourself moving towards the side of the car. If you keep the egg cup upright, the egg will come flying out the side of the cup. In order to keep the yolk off the upholstery, you tilt the egg cup towards the middle of the turn. If you tilt the cup too much, the egg falls out the other side. As the car comes out of the turn and starts to travel in a straight line, you have to gradually level out the egg cup.
為了讓滑雪板在轉彎時重新導引騎乘者的動量,騎乘者的重心(COM)必須與支撐基底(BOS)(即作用邊緣)保持一致。為了幫助理解這一點,想像你是高速行駛汽車中的乘客,手中拿著一個裝有雞蛋的蛋杯。當汽車轉彎時,你會感覺自己向車的一側移動。如果你保持蛋杯直立,雞蛋會從蛋杯的一側飛出。為了避免蛋黃弄髒車內座椅,你會將蛋杯向轉彎的內側傾斜。如果傾斜過度,雞蛋又會從另一側掉出來。當汽車轉彎結束並開始直線行駛時,你必須逐漸將蛋杯調整回水平。

If the egg is rounder end down, its C.O.M is quite close to the base of support so there is a margin for error if you haven’t got the cup tilted at exactly the right angle (it has some stability). If you turn the egg, so the pointed end is sitting in the cup, the egg’s C.O.M is now higher and further away from the B.O.S. This means that the egg will topple out more easily if it is not quite inline with the forces and stacked over the egg cup (it has less stability). When we are snowboarding, we can imagine our bodies as being the egg, and our snowboard is the cup. Our bodies need to be tilted towards the centre of the arc, but not too much. If we are lower, we are more stable, and therefore have a bigger margin for error.
如果蛋是圓的一端朝下,其重心(C.O.M)相當接近支撐基底,因此如果你沒有將杯子傾斜到完全正確的角度,仍有一定的誤差空間(它具有一定的穩定性)。如果你將蛋轉過來,讓尖端坐在杯子裡,蛋的重心現在較高且離支撐基底(B.O.S)更遠。這意味著如果蛋沒有完全對齊力量方向並堆疊在蛋杯上,它會更容易翻倒(穩定性較差)。當我們滑雪板時,可以想像我們的身體像蛋,而滑雪板是杯子。我們的身體需要朝向弧線的中心傾斜,但不能太多。如果我們的重心較低,我們會更穩定,因此有更大的誤差容忍度。

Pressuring The Board施壓於滑雪板

The combination of our momentum, body movements, ground reaction forces, centripetal force, and friction all create changes in pressure between the snowboard and the snow. They can also help us store and release energy in the board through its change in shape.
我們的動量、身體動作、地面反作用力、向心力和摩擦力的組合,會在滑雪板與雪地之間產生壓力變化。這些力量也能幫助我們透過滑雪板形狀的變化,儲存並釋放能量。

As snowboarders, we are constantly experiencing the ground reaction force in different ways. The ground reaction force acts in the opposite direction to the force being applied to it. In snowboarding, it can generally be thought of as acting ‘vertically’ on a rider, and is responsible for increases in pressure between the snowboard and the snow. The ground reaction forces can change the momentum of a body in motion.
作為滑雪板運動員,我們不斷以不同方式感受地面反作用力。地面反作用力的方向與施加於它的力相反。在滑雪板運動中,這股力通常被認為是垂直作用於騎乘者身上,並且負責增加滑雪板與雪面之間的壓力。地面反作用力能改變運動中物體的動量。

When a snowboarder lands a jump, the impact or impulse of force can be very large. If the rider lands with stiff legs, the average force is very high for a brief period of time, and the landing is painful. If the rider absorbs the landing with their legs, their mass and velocity at the moment they hit the ground is still the same, but by flexing, they are spreading the impulse of force over a longer period of time and therefore the average force experienced over that time period is lower (and less painful). The same principle applies when a snowboard travels over a bump. If the rider has stiff legs there will be a higher average force than if the rider has soft legs and spreads the impact over a longer period of time.
當滑雪板運動員著陸跳躍時,衝擊力或脈衝力可能非常大。如果騎乘者以僵硬的雙腿著陸,平均力在短時間內會非常高,著陸時會感到疼痛。如果騎乘者用雙腿吸收著陸時的衝擊,他們在觸地瞬間的質量和速度仍然相同,但透過屈膝,他們將衝擊力的脈衝分散在較長的時間內,因此在該時間段內所感受到的平均力較低(疼痛感也較輕)。同樣的原理也適用於滑雪板經過顛簸時。如果騎乘者雙腿僵硬,平均力會比雙腿柔軟且將衝擊分散在較長時間內時更大。

A rider’s body movements can also create an impulse of force. Sudden vertical movements can be used to generate an impulse of force between the snowboard and the snow. If a rider is in a very flexed position and extends suddenly, this will create a build up of pressure between the snowboard and snow. When the rider reaches the top of their extension, there will be a momentary un-weighting of the board as the momentum of the COM continues upwards. Gravity will bring the COM back down again. A sudden downwards movement of the COM will initially create an un-weighting effect on the board, but as the rider starts to reach a fully flexed position and their COM decelerates, an impulse of force will be created.
騎乘者的身體動作也能產生一股衝力。突然的垂直動作可以用來在滑雪板與雪地之間產生衝力。如果騎乘者處於非常彎曲的姿勢並突然伸展,這將在滑雪板與雪地之間產生壓力累積。當騎乘者達到伸展的最高點時,隨著質心(COM)的動量持續向上,滑雪板會有短暫的減重現象。重力會使質心再次下落。質心突然向下的動作最初會對滑雪板產生減重效果,但當騎乘者開始達到完全彎曲的姿勢並且質心減速時,將會產生一股衝力。

In a turn, pressure is experienced as the ground reaction force increases on the snowboard. For example, at a given speed and turn shape, a smaller radius carved turn will create a greater ground reaction force (more pressure) on the snowboard, and a larger radius carved turn with the same shape will create less ground reaction force. Sliding the board through a turn will help to reduce the rider’s speed because not as much force is being directed straight towards the BOS, the ground reaction force acting on the rider will be lower.
在轉彎時,隨著滑雪板上的地面反作用力增加,會感受到壓力。例如,在相同速度和轉彎形狀下,半徑較小的刻滑轉彎會在滑雪板上產生較大的地面反作用力(較大的壓力),而半徑較大的相同形狀的刻滑轉彎則會產生較小的地面反作用力。透過滑行滑雪板完成轉彎,有助於降低騎乘者的速度,因為並非所有力量都直接作用於支撐基底(BOS),騎乘者所受的地面反作用力會較低。

Flexing the Board彎曲滑雪板

A rider can create a Moment Arm longitudinally (from nose to tail) over their snowboard. When moving towards the tail of the board, the back foot generally becomes the centre of rotation, and when moving towards the nose, the front foot generally becomes the centre of rotation.
騎乘者可以在滑雪板上縱向(從板頭到板尾)產生一個力矩臂。當重心移向板尾時,後腳通常成為旋轉中心;當重心移向板頭時,前腳通常成為旋轉中心。
Movements of the COM fore and aft on the board will create leverage over the snowboard and cause the board to flex. Because of the elastic nature of the materials a snowboard is made of, the board will store the force being applied to it as elastic potential energy. With proper timing of movements, this elastic potential energy can be released to aid in un-weighting the board. The perfect example of this is in an ollie.
在滑雪板上前後移動重心會對滑雪板產生槓桿作用,並使滑雪板彎曲。由於滑雪板所使用材料的彈性特性,滑雪板會將施加在其上的力量儲存為彈性位能。透過適當的動作時機,這種彈性位能可以釋放出來,幫助減輕滑雪板的負重。這方面的完美範例就是跳躍動作(ollie)。

Maximum Force最大力量

The more joints riders use in a movement, the more muscles they contract, and the more force they can exert. For example, turning the snowboard with just the shoulders produces less force than turning the snowboard with the head, shoulders, hips, knees and feet.
滑雪者在動作中使用的關節越多,收縮的肌肉也越多,能施加的力量也越大。例如,僅用肩膀轉動滑雪板所產生的力量,比起用頭部、肩膀、臀部、膝蓋和腳一起轉動滑雪板所產生的力量要小。

Maximum Speed最大速度

Skills calling mainly for maximum speed are timed sequentially - larger, slower joints start the movement, and faster joints contribute once the preceding joint reaches peak speed. For example, while starting a big spin a rider will rotate his/her head and shoulders in the direction of the spin followed by their hips, knees and then feet.
主要需要最大速度的技巧會依序計時執行——較大且較慢的關節先啟動動作,較快的關節則在前一個關節達到最高速度後才開始發力。例如,在開始一個大旋轉時,騎士會先將頭部和肩膀朝旋轉方向轉動,接著是臀部、膝蓋,最後是腳。

Novice vs, Experienced Riders
新手與經驗豐富的騎士

Experienced riders can create and absorb forces over a shorter range of motion than a novice rider. This means more experienced riders can create and control larger forces associated with more advanced riding and they are more efficient than novice riders. The experienced rider will be able to remain balanced through larger ranges of motion.
經驗豐富的騎士能在比新手更短的動作範圍內產生和吸收力量。這表示經驗豐富的騎士能產生並控制與更高階騎乘相關的更大力量,且他們比新手更有效率。經驗豐富的騎士能在更大範圍的動作中保持平衡。

The COM in Powder, Slush and at Speed
粉雪、濕雪與高速時的重心(COM)

Powder and slush create more friction on the snowboard than groomed snow conditions. The effect of this drag means that the effective centre of the snowboard is moved further back, and if a rider does not adjust the position of their COM accordingly, there will be a moment arm created over the front foot. Anyone who has gone over the nose of his or her board on a pow day can understand this concept!
粉雪和濕雪在滑雪板上產生的摩擦力比整平過的雪地條件更大。這種阻力的效果意味著滑雪板的有效中心會向後移動,如果騎士沒有相應調整他們的重心位置,前腳上方就會產生一個力矩。任何在粉雪天摔過板頭的人都能理解這個概念!

The effect of friction on the snowboard is similar to that of powder and slush. After a certain velocity is reached (which varies depending on a number of complex factors), the higher the speed, the more friction exists between the board and the snow. This means that when a snowboarder is travelling at a higher speed, they are more susceptible to changes in the relative position of the snowboard’s effective centre. If a rider wants to add stability at speed, they may move their COM towards the tail of the board.
滑雪板上的摩擦力效應與粉雪和濕雪類似。當速度達到某個臨界值後(此值因多種複雜因素而異),速度越快,滑雪板與雪地之間的摩擦力越大。這表示當滑雪者以較高速度行進時,他們更容易受到滑雪板有效中心相對位置變化的影響。如果騎士想在高速時增加穩定性,他們可能會將重心移向滑雪板的尾部。

Summary摘要

Fully understanding the forces involved in snowboarding would require a degree-level understanding of physics. It is not the role of a snowboard instructor to give lessons in the science of snowboarding, but a good basic grasp of how the forces act on a snowboard will help you to understand the skills concept more fully. Initially, some of these explanations or concepts may seem difficult to grasp. As your riding level and experience of teaching increases, your understanding of these concepts will become more refined.
要完全理解滑雪板運動中涉及的力,需要具備大學程度的物理知識。滑雪板教練的角色並不是教授滑雪板運動的科學原理,但對於力如何作用於滑雪板有基本的了解,將有助於你更全面地理解技巧的概念。起初,這些解釋或概念可能會顯得難以掌握。隨著你的騎乘水平和教學經驗的提升,你對這些概念的理解也會變得更加精細。

PHYSICS & BIOMECHANICS PRINCIPLES: SUMMARY TABLE
物理與生物力學原理:摘要表

BIO-MECHANICAL PRINCIPLE RIDERS' ACTIONS
生物力學原理 騎士的動作

Balance and Stability平衡與穩定
When riders want to become more stable, they could...
當騎士想要變得更穩定時,他們可以...

- 降低重心 - 擴大支撐基底 - 將重心置於支撐基底的中央 - 增加質量
- Lower their centre of gravity
- Widen their base of support
- Place their centre of gravity in the middle of the base of support
- Increase their mass
- Lower their centre of gravity - Widen their base of support - Place their centre of gravity in the middle of the base of support - Increase their mass| - Lower their centre of gravity | | :--- | | - Widen their base of support | | - Place their centre of gravity in the middle of the base of support | | - Increase their mass |
When riders want to move quickly (become less stable), they could...
當騎士想要快速移動(變得較不穩定)時,他們可以...

- 提高重心 - 縮小支撐基底 - 將重心移出支撐基底之外 - 減少質量
- Raise their centre of gravity
- Narrow their base of support
- Move their centre of gravity outside the base of support
- Decrease their mass
- Raise their centre of gravity - Narrow their base of support - Move their centre of gravity outside the base of support - Decrease their mass| - Raise their centre of gravity | | :--- | | - Narrow their base of support | | - Move their centre of gravity outside the base of support | | - Decrease their mass |
Use All Joints in Order
依序使用所有關節
When riders want to create maximum force, they should...
當騎士想要產生最大力量時,他們應該...

- 盡可能使用多個關節 - 同時使用關節
- Use as many joints as possible
- Use joints simultaneously
- Use as many joints as possible - Use joints simultaneously| - Use as many joints as possible | | :--- | | - Use joints simultaneously |
When riders want to produce maximum speed, they should...
當騎士想要產生最大速度時,他們應該...

- 盡可能多使用關節 - 按順序使用所有關節,從最大且最慢的關節到最小且最快的關節
- Use as many joints as possible
- Use all joints in order, from largest and slowest to smallest and fastest
- Use as many joints as possible - Use all joints in order, from largest and slowest to smallest and fastest| - Use as many joints as possible | | :--- | | - Use all joints in order, from largest and slowest to smallest and fastest |
Impulse衝力
When riders want to apply maximum force, they should...
當騎士想要施加最大力量時,他們應該...
- Move their joints through a larger range of motion
- 讓關節活動範圍更大
Angular Motion角動量
When riders want to create motion about a fixed point or fixed axis, they should...
當騎士想要繞著固定點或固定軸產生運動時,他們應該...
- Apply force some distance from the axis of rotation
- 在距離旋轉軸一定距離處施加力
Moment of Inertia慣性矩
When riders want to spin faster, they should...
當騎士想要旋轉得更快時,他們應該...
- Move extremities closer to the body (decrease their moment of inertia)
- 將四肢靠近身體(減少慣性矩)
When riders want to spin more slowly, they should...
當騎士想要旋轉得更慢時,他們應該...
- Move extremities farther away from the body
- 將四肢遠離身體
Balance and Stability When riders want to become more stable, they could... "- Lower their centre of gravity - Widen their base of support - Place their centre of gravity in the middle of the base of support - Increase their mass" When riders want to move quickly (become less stable), they could... "- Raise their centre of gravity - Narrow their base of support - Move their centre of gravity outside the base of support - Decrease their mass" Use All Joints in Order When riders want to create maximum force, they should... "- Use as many joints as possible - Use joints simultaneously" When riders want to produce maximum speed, they should... "- Use as many joints as possible - Use all joints in order, from largest and slowest to smallest and fastest" Impulse When riders want to apply maximum force, they should... - Move their joints through a larger range of motion Angular Motion When riders want to create motion about a fixed point or fixed axis, they should... - Apply force some distance from the axis of rotation Moment of Inertia When riders want to spin faster, they should... - Move extremities closer to the body (decrease their moment of inertia) When riders want to spin more slowly, they should... - Move extremities farther away from the body| Balance and Stability | | | :--- | :--- | | When riders want to become more stable, they could... | - Lower their centre of gravity <br> - Widen their base of support <br> - Place their centre of gravity in the middle of the base of support <br> - Increase their mass | | When riders want to move quickly (become less stable), they could... | - Raise their centre of gravity <br> - Narrow their base of support <br> - Move their centre of gravity outside the base of support <br> - Decrease their mass | | Use All Joints in Order | | | When riders want to create maximum force, they should... | - Use as many joints as possible <br> - Use joints simultaneously | | When riders want to produce maximum speed, they should... | - Use as many joints as possible <br> - Use all joints in order, from largest and slowest to smallest and fastest | | Impulse | | | When riders want to apply maximum force, they should... | - Move their joints through a larger range of motion | | Angular Motion | | | When riders want to create motion about a fixed point or fixed axis, they should... | - Apply force some distance from the axis of rotation | | Moment of Inertia | | | When riders want to spin faster, they should... | - Move extremities closer to the body (decrease their moment of inertia) | | When riders want to spin more slowly, they should... | - Move extremities farther away from the body |
For more information on biomechanics and sport technique, see the second edition of Sport Mechanics for Coaches, by Gerry Carr and published in 2004 by Human Kinetics.
欲了解更多有關生物力學與運動技巧的資訊,請參閱 Gerry Carr 所著、Human Kinetics 於 2004 年出版的《Sport Mechanics for Coaches》第二版。

BASIC ANATOMY & MOVEMENTS FOR SNOWBOARDING
滑雪板運動的基礎解剖學與動作

A basic understanding of the parts of the human body and how they function will help instructors to teach effective lessons based on sound bio-mechanics.
對人體各部位及其功能的基本認識,將有助於教練根據正確的生物力學原理,教授有效的課程。

THE MUSCULOSKELETAL SYSTEM
肌肉骨骼系統

It’s important to know which parts of the body have a major involvement in snowboarding.
了解身體哪些部位在滑雪板運動中扮演重要角色是很重要的。
THE MAJOR BONES OF THE BODY:
身體主要的骨骼:

THE MAJOR MUSCLES OF THE BODY:
身體主要的肌肉:

TERMINOLOGY術語

It is useful to understand the basic language of anatomy so as to be able to explain movement in a concise way and with a standard terminology.
了解基本的解剖學語言是有用的,這樣才能以簡潔且標準的術語來解釋動作。
  • Anterior: Towards the front of the body. E.g.: The nose is on the anterior of the face.
    前方:朝向身體的前面。例如:鼻子位於臉部的前方。
  • Posterior: Towards the back of the body. E.g.: The buttocks are on the posterior of the body.
    後方:朝向身體的後面。例如:臀部位於身體的後方。
  • Superior: Towards the highest point. E.g.: The head is superior to the body.
    上方:朝向最高點。例如:頭部位於身體的上方。
  • Inferior: Towards the lowest point. E.g.: The foot is inferior to the chest
    下方:朝向最低點。例如:腳位於胸部的下方
  • Medial: Towards or at the mid-line of the body. E.g.: The nose is to the medial of the ears.
    內側:朝向或位於身體中線。例如:鼻子位於耳朵的內側
  • Lateral: Away from the midline of the body. E.g.: The little toes are on the lateral aspect of the foot.
    外側:遠離身體中線。例如:小腳趾位於腳的外側

Planes & Axes平面與軸線

There are three planes and axes for the human body:
人體有三個平面和軸:
  • The Sagittal Plane: Lies vertically and separates the body into left and right halves.
    矢狀面:垂直排列,將身體分為左右兩半。
  • The Frontal Plane: Also lies vertically but separates the body into anterior/posterior halves.
    額狀面:同樣垂直排列,但將身體分為前後兩半。
  • The Transverse Plane: Lies horizontally and separates the body into superior/inferior halves.
    橫切面:水平排列,將身體分為上半部和下半部。
An axis is a straight line around which an object rotates. There are three axes of rotation.
軸是物體旋轉的直線。共有三個旋轉軸。
  • Sagittal axis: passes horizontally from posterior to anterior and is formed by the intersection of the sagittal and transverse planes.
    矢狀軸:水平通過後方至前方,由矢狀面與橫斷面的交線形成。
  • Frontal axis: passes horizontally from left to right and is formed by the intersection of the frontal and transverse planes.
    額狀軸:水平通過左側至右側,由額狀面與橫斷面的交線形成。
  • Vertical axis: passes vertically from inferior to superior and is formed by the intersection of the sagital and frontal planes.
    垂直軸:垂直通過下方至上方,由矢狀面與額狀面的交線形成。

TYPES OF MOVEMENT運動類型

  • Abduction: Is movement away from the centre. E.g.: Raising a straight arm to the side.
    外展:是遠離中心的運動。例如:將伸直的手臂向側面抬起。
  • Adduction: Is movement towards the centre. E.g.: Bring arm back down.
    內收:是朝向中心的運動。例如:將手臂放回下方。
  • Flexion: Is reducing the angle between two parts of the body by articulating a joint in the anterior-posterior or frontal plane.
    屈曲:是通過關節在前後或額面平面活動,使身體兩部分之間的角度減小。
  • Extension: Takes place in the same plane as flexion, however it increases the angle between the moving limbs/parts of the body.
    伸展:發生在與屈曲相同的平面上,但會增加移動肢體/身體部位之間的角度。
  • Rotation: Involves rotation of a limb in a joint. E.g.: Rotating the femur in the hip socket
    旋轉:涉及肢體在關節處的旋轉。例如:股骨在髖臼中的旋轉。
  • Dorsiflexion / Plantar Flexion: Dorsiflexion is when the toes move towards the knees. Plantar Flexion occurs when the toes are pointed away from the knee.
    背屈/跖屈:背屈是指腳趾朝向膝蓋移動。跖屈則是腳趾指向遠離膝蓋的方向。
  • Pronation / Supination: Pronation is when the foot rolls inward towards the big toe around the ankle joint. Supination is when the foot rolls outward towards the small toe around the ankle joint.
    旋前/旋後:旋前是指腳在踝關節處向大腳趾方向內翻。旋後是指腳在踝關節處向小腳趾方向外翻。
  • Circumduction: Involves the circular motion of a limb. E.g.: Rolling up/down the windows while jumping.
    環繞運動:涉及肢體的圓周運動。例如:跳躍時搖下/搖上車窗。

Examples of Movements:動作範例:

MOTION EXAMPLES
Flexion/Extension屈曲/伸展

蹲跳 收腹前翻
Squatting
Jumping
Tucked Front Flip
Squatting Jumping Tucked Front Flip| Squatting | | :--- | | Jumping | | Tucked Front Flip |

外展/內收 側彎
Abduction/Adduction
Lateral Flexion
Abduction/Adduction Lateral Flexion| Abduction/Adduction | | :--- | | Lateral Flexion |

做雪天使 鼻子抓握
Making a snow angel
Nose Grabs
Making a snow angel Nose Grabs| Making a snow angel | | :--- | | Nose Grabs |
Rotation旋轉

棒球揮棒 360 度旋轉 下半身旋轉
Baseball Swing
360 Spin
Lower body rotation
Baseball Swing 360 Spin Lower body rotation| Baseball Swing | | :--- | | 360 Spin | | Lower body rotation |
MOTION EXAMPLES Flexion/Extension "Squatting Jumping Tucked Front Flip" "Abduction/Adduction Lateral Flexion" "Making a snow angel Nose Grabs" Rotation "Baseball Swing 360 Spin Lower body rotation"| MOTION | EXAMPLES | | :--- | :--- | | Flexion/Extension | Squatting <br> Jumping <br> Tucked Front Flip | | Abduction/Adduction <br> Lateral Flexion | Making a snow angel <br> Nose Grabs | | Rotation | Baseball Swing <br> 360 Spin <br> Lower body rotation |

LOCOMOTIVE MOVEMENTS軌道運動

In a simplified way, human movement occurs when the Central Nervous System (CNS) sends signals to the skeletal muscles to contract. This will result in a contraction of the muscle.
簡單來說,人體運動是當中樞神經系統(CNS)發送訊號給骨骼肌,使其收縮。這將導致肌肉收縮。
There are three types of muscular contraction we should consider:
我們應該考慮三種類型的肌肉收縮:
  1. Concentric Contraction: This is when the muscle shortens and generates force (e.g.: contracting the quads and glutes as the knee and hip extend while taking off on a jump).
    向心收縮:當肌肉縮短並產生力量時(例如:跳躍起跳時,膝蓋和臀部伸展,同時股四頭肌和臀大肌收縮)。
  2. Eccentric Contraction: This is where the muscle lengthens under tension (e.g.: the quads and glutes stretch as the knee and hip flex when a person lands from jumping to decelerate the body).
    離心收縮:指肌肉在張力下伸長(例如:當人從跳躍著陸以減速身體時,膝蓋和臀部屈曲,股四頭肌和臀大肌被拉伸)。
  3. Isometric Contraction: An isometric contraction generates force without changing the length of the muscle (e.g.: bracing against the pressures created in a turn - the muscles tense but do not change length).
    等長收縮:等長收縮是在不改變肌肉長度的情況下產生力量(例如:在轉彎時抵抗產生的壓力——肌肉緊繃但長度不變)。
In snowboarding, we use varying combinations of these three types of muscular contraction at different times depending on the movements our bodies are making.
在滑雪板運動中,我們會根據身體所做的動作,在不同時間使用這三種肌肉收縮類型的不同組合。

PARTS OF THE BODY
身體部位

The "Core"「核心」

The lumbar spine (lower back), abdominals and pelvis can be thought of as the “core” of our body during snowboarding. When snowboarding, we are aiming to achieve the relative stability of this part of our body by maintaining a strong and neutral posture.
腰椎(下背部)、腹部和骨盆可以被視為我們在滑雪板運動中的「核心」。滑雪時,我們的目標是透過保持強健且中立的姿勢,達到這部分身體的相對穩定。
The role of the abdominals and lumbar muscles is to hold the spine in a neutral and healthy position, and to allow the lower body to move around underneath whilst supporting the upper body and head and without compromising the alignment of the spine.
腹部和腰部肌肉的作用是將脊椎保持在中立且健康的位置,並允許下半身在支撐上半身和頭部的同時自由移動,而不影響脊椎的排列。

Pelvic tilt is achieved through movement of the lumbar spine and is controlled by the abdominals, back and hips. The pelvis has a neutral position (which does vary from person to person) that we should generally try to maintain while snowboarding.
骨盆傾斜是透過腰椎的運動來達成,並由腹部、背部和臀部控制。骨盆有一個中立位置(因人而異),我們在滑雪時通常應該盡量維持這個位置。

Flexion, lateral flexion, and rotation of the spine all occur in snowboarding, but these movements can place the spine in a weak position, which causes poor stability in less experienced riders. More experienced riders will intuitively understand the correct timing for when to bend in and out of weaker positions, and when to be in an aligned and neutral position.
脊椎的屈曲、側屈和旋轉在滑雪板運動中都會發生,但這些動作可能使脊椎處於較弱的位置,導致經驗較少的騎士穩定性較差。經驗較豐富的騎士會直覺地了解何時該彎曲進入或離開較弱的位置,以及何時保持對齊且中立的位置。

Hip, Knee & Ankle
髖關節、膝蓋與腳踝

The hip joint is crucial for achieving balance and stability in sport. The hip joint serves as the link between the torso and legs, and flexion at the hip is used to balance the upper body over the lower body. Flexion of the hip joint moves the Centre of Mass (COM) towards the anterior (back) of the frontal plane.
髖關節對於在運動中達成平衡與穩定性至關重要。髖關節作為軀幹與雙腿之間的連結,髖關節的屈曲用於將上半身平衡於下半身之上。髖關節的屈曲會使質心(COM)向額狀面前方(背側)移動。

Initially, flexion of the knee will move the COM towards the posterior of the frontal plane, i.e.: towards the heels. Once the knee has passed through 90 degrees of flexion, further flexion will move the COM back towards the anterior of the frontal plane. The quadriceps, hamstrings, gluteals, and adductors control flexion of the knee.
最初,膝蓋屈曲會使身體重心(COM)向額面後方移動,也就是朝向腳跟方向。當膝蓋屈曲超過 90 度後,進一步的屈曲會使身體重心回移至額面前方。股四頭肌、腿後肌群、臀肌和內收肌共同控制膝蓋的屈曲。
The ankle is an often overlooked joint when it comes to snowboarding, but its role in allowing a rider to move in a balanced way is very important. Dorsiflexion moves the COM towards the anterior of the frontal plane (towards the toes), and plantar flexion moves the COM towards the posterior of the frontal plane (towards heels).
腳踝在滑雪板運動中常被忽略,但它在讓騎乘者保持平衡移動的角色非常重要。背屈會使身體重心向額面前方移動(朝向腳趾方向),而跖屈則會使身體重心向額面後方移動(朝向腳跟方向)。

MOVING THE PARTS移動各部位

Balanced Bending & Straight Back vs. Upright Back
平衡彎曲與挺直背部對比直立背部

Isolated flexion of the knees, without any flexion from the ankles or hips in a standing position will most likely make a person fall over. In order for a person to perform a balanced squat movement, there must be flexion of the ankle, knee and hip joints, so that the centre of mass remains over the middle of the feet in the frontal plane. The flexion at the hip in a balanced squat movement will cause the back angle to the ground to change. As the knee reaches 90 degrees flexion, the pelvis is furthest away from the feet and so the back angle will be quite “flat”, approximately between 45 and 30 degrees to the ground.
單純膝蓋屈曲,而站立時腳踝或臀部沒有任何屈曲,很可能會導致人跌倒。為了讓一個人能夠執行平衡的蹲下動作,腳踝、膝蓋和臀部關節必須同時屈曲,這樣質心才能保持在正面平面上腳掌中間的位置。平衡蹲下動作中臀部的屈曲會使背部與地面的角度改變。當膝蓋屈曲達到 90 度時,骨盆距離腳最遠,因此背部角度會相當「平坦」,大約介於 45 度到 30 度之間。

You will often hear coaches in various sports asking their athletes or students to maintain a straight back; students, and some coaches often misinterpret this. The idea of a straight back is to keep the vertebrae in the spine in a neutral and aligned position. Unfortunately, a lot of athletes and students take the verbal cue to keep a ‘straight back’ to mean keep a vertically upright position with the back. This leads to all sorts of strange bending in the lumbar spine and/or the COM being too far back over the heels.
你常會聽到各種運動的教練要求運動員或學生保持背部挺直;學生和部分教練經常誤解這點。背部挺直的概念是要保持脊椎的椎骨處於中立且對齊的位置。不幸的是,許多運動員和學生將「保持背部挺直」的口頭指令誤解為背部要保持垂直直立的姿勢。這會導致腰椎出現各種奇怪的彎曲,和/或質心過度向後移動到腳跟上方。

Toeside vs. Heelside腳尖側與腳跟側

In snowboarding, it is important that a rider knows how to move their COM laterally across the snowboard in the frontal plane. This is so they are able to keep their COM over the working edge of the board (the Base of Support). Because of the asymmetry between the anterior and posterior of the human body, we will need to bend the joints in different ways in order to achieve balance and stability over the toe edge or heel edge of the board.
在滑雪板運動中,騎手必須知道如何在額面上將他們的重心(COM)橫向移動。這樣他們才能保持重心位於滑雪板的工作邊緣(支撐基底)上。由於人體前後的不對稱性,我們需要以不同的方式彎曲關節,以在滑雪板的腳尖邊或腳跟邊上達到平衡與穩定。

ON THE HEEL EDGE, A RIDER WILL ASSUME A POSITION WHICH LOOKS SIMILAR TO A WALL SIT POSITION. WHILE SNOWBOARDING A RIDER MAY BE ABLE TO MAINTAIN THIS POSITION BECAUSE OF THE FORCES CREATED BY MOMENTUM.
在腳跟邊,騎手會採取類似靠牆坐姿的姿勢。滑雪時,騎手可能因慣性產生的力量而能維持此姿勢。

ON THE TOE EDGE, THE POSITION WILL LOOK MORE SIMILAR TO THAT OF A SPRINTER RISING OUT OF THE BLOCKS AT THE START OF A 100-METRE RACE, WITH THE ANKLE AND KNEE MORE FLEXED THAN THE HIP.
在腳尖邊,姿勢則更像是短跑選手在 100 公尺賽跑起跑時從起跑器中站起來的姿勢,腳踝和膝蓋的彎曲度比臀部更大。

Rotation & Counter Rotation
旋轉與反旋轉

In snowboarding, rotation of different parts of the body is a key component of performing most manoeuvres. Rotational movements of the body are highly complex and can be difficult to separate into compartments, but there are some general types of rotation that we should understand:
在滑雪板運動中,身體不同部位的旋轉是執行大多數動作的關鍵要素。身體的旋轉動作非常複雜,且難以劃分成獨立部分,但我們應該了解一些基本的旋轉類型:
  • Whole body rotation is rotating the whole body in the same direction. This is a type of compound movement that requires movements in multiple joints. Examples of this would be a 360 spin in the air. In order to generate this type of rotation, there must be something to oppose the force of the body rotating. In the 360 example, it would be the board’s edge on take off. This type of rotation can achieve maximum rotational force but can also be too powerful and imprecise. This type of rotation can be initiated through a combination of other types of rotation.
    全身旋轉是指整個身體朝同一方向旋轉。這是一種複合動作,需要多個關節的協同運動。舉例來說,空中 360 度旋轉就是一種全身旋轉。為了產生這種旋轉,必須有某種力量來抵抗身體旋轉的力。在 360 度旋轉的例子中,這個力量來自起跳時滑板的邊緣。這種旋轉能達到最大的旋轉力,但也可能過於強烈且不夠精確。這種旋轉可以透過其他旋轉類型的組合來啟動。
  • Counter rotation uses core rotation to achieve simultaneous turning of the upper and lower body in opposite directions. Examples of this type of rotation include shifties, speed checks and some board slides. Counter rotation can be a very quick movement, making it very useful, but it is limited by the flexibility of the body and can lead to riders ending up in unstable body positions if they do not have the skill to realign themselves.
    反向旋轉利用核心旋轉來實現上半身與下半身同時向相反方向轉動。這種類型的旋轉範例包括 shifties、speed checks 以及某些滑板滑行。反向旋轉可以是一個非常快速的動作,使其非常實用,但受限於身體的柔軟度,若騎士沒有技巧重新調整自己,可能會導致身體處於不穩定的位置。
  • Upper Body Rotation / Separation is achieved by using lumbar and thoracic rotation to rotate the upper body whilst keeping the lower body still. This type of rotation can be use by riders to generate tension in the body to aid spinning or turning and is often called anticipation or pre-wind.
    上半身旋轉/分離是透過腰椎和胸椎的旋轉來旋轉上半身,同時保持下半身靜止。騎士可以利用這種類型的旋轉在身體中產生張力,以協助旋轉或轉向,這通常被稱為預備動作或預繞。
  • Lower Body Rotation occurs when the lower body rotates to catch up with, or turn ahead of, the upper body. Again, this type of movement occurs through rotation of the lumbar and thoracic spine.
    下半身旋轉發生在下半身旋轉以追上或超前上半身的時候。這種動作同樣是透過腰椎和胸椎的旋轉來完成。
  • Femur rotation involves rotating the femur in the hip socket either laterally or medially. Because a snowboarders feet are in a fixed position, rotating the femur laterally causes the foot to turn on its side and creates pressure on the outside of the snowboard binding. Rotation of the femurs can help to adjust the position of the COM, which can aid stability and balance.
    股骨旋轉是指在髖關節中將股骨向外側或內側旋轉。由於滑雪板者的雙腳位置固定,股骨向外側旋轉會使腳向側面轉動,並在滑雪板綁帶的外側產生壓力。股骨的旋轉有助於調整重心位置,進而提升穩定性和平衡感。

Lateral Flexion側彎

Flexion of the spine towards the side of the body will cause a “C-shape” curve. Think of a child making a teapot shape and pouring out the tea from one side and you will understand how side flexion works. The shoulders tilt to one side, and this moves the centre of mass to the side of the body. This movement can also be exaggerated by moving the pelvis in the opposite direction by rotating the femurs laterally, which creates a more pronounced C-Shape in the body.
脊椎向身體側面彎曲會形成「C 形」曲線。想像一個孩子做出茶壺的形狀,從一側倒出茶水,你就能理解側彎的原理。肩膀向一側傾斜,這會將重心移向身體的一側。透過將骨盆向相反方向移動,並使股骨向外側旋轉,這個動作可以被加強,從而在身體上形成更明顯的 C 形曲線。

This movement is also important in snowboarding as it gives a rider control of their COM in a fore and aft direction over the board. If a snowboarder did not use side flexion while riding, they would not be able to perform a number of important manoeuvres such as ollies, or be able to keep balance while riding powder. Too much lateral flexion will take the spine out of alignment and place it in a weaker position.
這個動作在滑雪板運動中也非常重要,因為它讓騎乘者能夠控制身體重心(COM)在滑板上的前後方向。如果滑雪板手在騎乘時不使用側彎,他們將無法完成許多重要的動作,例如跳躍(ollies),或是在粉雪中保持平衡。過度的側彎會使脊椎失去對齊,並處於較弱的位置。

ANATOMICAL GENDER DIFFERENCES
解剖性別差異

While recent research suggest that gender difference in sporting performance, position, and injury rates are not due to anatomical differences, but more to do with patterns of movements, the anatomical differences between men and women is worth learning to tailor lessons to specific students.
雖然近期研究顯示,運動表現、姿勢和受傷率的性別差異並非源自解剖結構的不同,而更多與動作模式有關,但了解男女之間的解剖差異仍然值得學習,以便針對特定學生調整教學內容。

Typically, women are shorter, have a wider and slightly differently shaped pelvis with shallower hip sockets. Female’s ligaments are thinner and more flexible and women usually have a greater range of motion. Women, even the leanest of elite athletes, have a higher body fat percentage and less muscular development, and therefore lower muscular power-to-weight - something taken into account by snowboard manufacturers when making female-specific snowboards.
一般而言,女性身高較矮,骨盆較寬且形狀略有不同,髖臼較淺。女性的韌帶較薄且更具彈性,通常擁有較大的活動範圍。即使是最瘦的頂尖女運動員,體脂率也較高,肌肉發展較少,因此肌肉力量與體重的比例較低,這也是滑雪板製造商在設計女性專用滑雪板時會考慮的因素。
It is important to note that many of these anatomical differences do not apply to all women, or to women only humans come in many shapes and sizes, and current theories about the gender differences in athletic pursuits focus less on anatomical differences and more on gender-specific movement patterns. However, the following two are commonly discussed differences:
值得注意的是,許多這些解剖學差異並不適用於所有女性,或僅限於女性。人類有各種不同的體型與尺寸,目前關於性別在運動表現上的差異理論,較少著重於解剖學差異,而是更關注性別特有的動作模式。然而,以下兩項是常被討論的差異:
  • Centre of Mass (COM)
    質心(Centre of Mass,COM)
  • Quadriceps Angle (Q Angle)
    股四頭肌角度(Quadriceps Angle,Q Angle)

CENTRE OF MASS質心

  • Centre of mass location rearwards and lower.
    質心位置向後且較低。
  • Muscle Imbalances: Relying on quadriceps (front of thigh muscles) and cantilevered balancing of arms & upper body and hips.
    肌肉不平衡:依賴股四頭肌(大腿前側肌肉)以及手臂、上半身和臀部的懸臂式平衡。

TEACHING SOLUTIONS & MODIFICATIONS
教學解決方案與調整

Equipment: Frequently bindings are placed too far towards heel edge because of small size of rider’s feet in proportion to height. Set up bindings centred edge-to-edge or biased slightly towards toe-edge to bring COM towards midline of equipment.
裝備:由於騎乘者腳的尺寸相較身高偏小,綁帶常常被放置得過於靠近腳跟邊緣。將綁帶設置為邊緣對邊緣居中,或稍微偏向腳趾邊緣,以將質心拉向裝備的中線。

Specific Coaching:特定指導:
  1. Encourage COM positioned over centre of equipment, rather than folding upper body forward to balance rearward-displaced COM.
    鼓勵將重心(COM)置於設備中心上方,而非透過前傾上半身來平衡向後移動的重心。

Q ANGLEQ 角度

  • Knees turn inwards / “Q angle” or “A frame”
    膝蓋內扣/「Q 角度」或「A 形架構」
  • The quadriceps or “Q” angle is the angle at which the quadriceps muscle meets the kneecap compared to the line formed by the ligament attaching the kneecap to shin.
    股四頭肌角度或稱「Q 角」是指股四頭肌與膝蓋骨相接處的角度,與連接膝蓋骨與脛骨的韌帶所形成的線相比較。
  • Normal Q angle for men is 8 15 8 15 8^(@)-15^(@)8^{\circ}-15^{\circ}
    男性的正常 Q 角為 8 15 8 15 8^(@)-15^(@)8^{\circ}-15^{\circ}
  • Normal Q angle for women is 12 19 12 19 12^(@)-19^(@)12^{\circ}-19^{\circ}
    女性的正常 Q 角為 12 19 12 19 12^(@)-19^(@)12^{\circ}-19^{\circ}
  • This difference is most commonly attributed to women’s broader pelvis, shorter thighbone (femur) length, and more inwards twist of the femur; however pelvic tilt, foot position and muscle weakness also increase the amount the knee appears to turn inwards (A-frame).
    這種差異通常歸因於女性較寬的骨盆、較短的大腿骨(股骨)長度,以及股骨較內旋;然而,骨盆傾斜、腳的位置和肌肉無力也會增加膝蓋向內轉的程度(A 字形)。

TEACHING SOLUTIONS & MODIFICATIONS
教學方案與調整

Equipment: Even though in normal gait toes might be straight or toe-in, set up snowboard with 25 30 25 30 25-30^(@)25-30^{\circ} angles between the feet to encourage neutral or external rotation at the hip to encourage knees moving in line with feet as opposed to tracking inwards. E.g.: + 18 degrees front / - 12 degrees back = 30 degrees total.
裝備:即使在正常步態中腳趾可能是直的或內八,滑雪板的腳位角度應設為 25 30 25 30 25-30^(@)25-30^{\circ} ,以促進髖關節的中立或外旋,鼓勵膝蓋與腳趾保持同一直線,而非向內偏移。例如:前腳+18 度/後腳-12 度=總共 30 度。
Encourage knees to track over the feet with flexion:
鼓勵膝蓋在屈曲時保持與腳趾對齊:
  1. External rotation at the hip = = == knees track more naturally over the feet,
    髖關節外旋 = = == 時,膝蓋較自然地跟隨腳趾方向,
  2. Encourage weight distribution to be on outer edge of foot, rather than medial side.
    鼓勵將體重分布在腳的外側邊緣,而非內側。
  3. Accept some “A-frame” position when riding from female riders with larger Q angles anatomically.
    接受女性騎士因解剖學上較大的 Q 角而在騎乘時呈現某種程度的「A 字型」姿勢。

DIFFERENCES IN MOVEMENT PATTERNS
動作模式的差異

Most of the differences in injury rates between male and female athletes (in particular the significantly higher incidence of ACL injury to female athletes) have to do with movement pattern differences and muscle coordination. These fall into two broad categories:
男性與女性運動員之間受傷率的多數差異(特別是女性運動員前十字韌帶受傷率顯著較高)與動作模式差異及肌肉協調有關。這些差異可分為兩大類:
  • Postural differences: anterior pelvic tilt
    姿勢差異:骨盆前傾
  • Landing mechanics著地力學

PELVIC TILT骨盆傾斜

  • Females typically have greater anterior pelvic tilt.
    女性通常有較明顯的骨盆前傾。
  • Culturally acceptable posture for women = front of pelvis tilted down & forward, tailbone lifted higher & hips moved posteriorly; increased curve in the low back.
    女性文化上可接受的姿勢 = 骨盆前傾向下及向前,尾骨抬高,臀部向後移動;腰椎曲度增加。
  • Greater flexibility in spine, hips & hamstrings allow women to achieve this posture more comfortably than males, and removes strain from typically weaker core.
    脊椎、臀部及腿後肌群較大的柔軟度使女性比男性更容易舒適地達成此姿勢,並減輕通常較弱的核心肌群的負擔。
  • Anterior pelvic tilt reduces range of motion in internal & external rotation of the hip.
    骨盆前傾會減少髖關節內旋及外旋的活動範圍。

EXCESSIVE ANTERIOR PELVIC TILT
過度前傾骨盆

  • Excessive curve in low back / hips appear back & prominent, chest is moved forward
    下背部/臀部過度彎曲,背部突出,胸部向前移動
  • If wearing a belt: the buckle in the front would sit much lower than where the spine meets the tailbone
    如果戴著皮帶:前方的皮帶扣會比脊椎與尾骨交接處的位置低很多
  • Knees move more inwards (more A-frame) with flexion
    膝蓋在屈曲時向內移動較多(呈現較明顯的 A 字形)
  • Reduced ability to steer with lower body
    下半身的操控能力降低
  • Encourage neutral or slightly posterior pelvic tilt when teaching Neutral Position.
    在教導中立姿勢時,鼓勵採用中立或略微後傾的骨盆傾斜。

  • Long term, encourage an increase in core strength, and change posture to neutral/ slight anterior tilt for better spinal health in all sports & daily living activities.
    長期來看,應鼓勵核心肌群力量的提升,並將姿勢調整為中立或略微前傾,以促進所有運動及日常生活活動中的脊椎健康。

LANDING MECHANICS著地力學

  • Differences in the balance of quadriceps & hamstring strength (“Q:H ratio”). In general, women may be proportionally stronger in the quadriceps and weaker in the hamstrings, even in elite athletes. This manifests in a difference in landing mechanics:
    股四頭肌與腿後肌力量平衡的差異(“Q:H 比率”)。一般而言,即使是頂尖運動員,女性的股四頭肌相對較強,而腿後肌較弱。這種差異會反映在著地力學上:
  • Men may land with ankles more flexed, and absorb impact through ankles and knees (greater shin velocity).
    男性著地時踝關節可能較為彎曲,並透過踝關節和膝蓋吸收衝擊(脛骨速度較大)。
  • Women may land with less flexion at the ankles, absorb impact through knees and hips. The hips and COM move back, torso and arms move forward to try to balance.
    女性著地時踝關節彎曲較少,透過膝蓋和臀部吸收衝擊。臀部和身體重心向後移動,軀幹和手臂向前移動以嘗試保持平衡。
  • When manoeuvres can be anticipated and landings or terrain absorption happens when the snow slider is balanced, falls will be minimized.
    當動作可預測且著地或地形吸收發生時,滑雪者保持平衡,跌倒的情況將會減少。
  • Long-term exercise plans aimed at creating more flex at ankles, tracking of the knees out over the little toes rather than inwards, and more hamstring involvement may help female snowboarders, as well as reducing ACL injury rates.
    長期的運動計畫,旨在增加踝關節的彎曲度、膝蓋向外追蹤至小腳趾方向而非向內,以及增加腿後肌群的參與,可能有助於女性滑雪板選手,同時降低前十字韌帶受傷率。

The rider on the right bends forward at the hips/“breaks” at the waist or “pikes”. Active/reactionary position when dealing with terrain pressure.
右側的騎士從臀部前傾/在腰部「折斷」或「折疊」。在應對地形壓力時,這是一種主動/反應性姿勢。

NOTES:備註:

TERRAIN AS A TEACHING TOOL
地形作為教學工具

Using terrain to your advantage is a great way to maximize the results of your lessons. The best instructors have been using terrain in their lessons for many years. With experience, your ability to translate terrain features on the mountain into teaching tools will increase. This section will give you some tips and tricks.
利用地形來發揮優勢,是最大化課程效果的絕佳方法。最優秀的教練多年來一直在課程中運用地形。隨著經驗的累積,你將能更好地將山上的地形特徵轉化為教學工具。本節將提供一些技巧和竅門。

TERRAIN AND BEGINNER SNOWBOARDERS
地形與初學者滑雪板手

The biggest hurdle for new snowboarders is getting used to the feeling of sliding, or gliding, on snow. Add to that being attached to a snowboard, and the challenges add up fast. Feelings like acceleration and deceleration, absorption, flexion / extension, and rotation can all be daunting for new riders.
對於新手滑雪板手來說,最大的障礙是習慣在雪地上滑行或滑動的感覺。再加上綁在滑雪板上的感覺,挑戰很快就會累積起來。加速與減速、吸收衝擊、屈伸與旋轉等感受,對新手來說都可能令人畏懼。

The QuickRide System provides a proven framework to help your students progress to turning. Using QuickRide in conjunction with complimentary terrain (either purpose-built or natural terrain) will positively affect your beginner lesson experience.
QuickRide 系統提供了一個經過驗證的框架,幫助你的學生進步到轉彎階段。將 QuickRide 與相輔相成的地形(無論是專門打造的還是自然地形)結合使用,將對你的初學者課程體驗產生正面影響。
Many resorts are now providing sculpted terrain features for beginners to use to experience the sensations associated with snowboarding for the first time. The following chart will help you to use terrain features effectively.
許多度假村現在提供為初學者設計的雕塑地形設施,讓他們首次體驗滑雪板相關的感覺。以下圖表將幫助你有效利用地形設施。

THE QUICKRIDE SYSTEM AND TERRAIN
快速滑行系統與地形

GOALS KEY CONCEPTS關鍵概念 COMPLEMENTARY TERRAIN互補地形
BASICS: To learn to use the equipment, and gain comfort moving around on the snowboard with one foot attached.
基礎:學習使用裝備,並習慣單腳綁定滑雪板時的移動。
裝備移動性
EQUIPMENT
MOBILITY
EQUIPMENT MOBILITY| EQUIPMENT | | :--- | | MOBILITY |
Look for... Flat areas free from traffic, distractions, excessive noise, or other safety hazards. Use obstacles such as bamboos poles, soft cubes / toys to move around.
尋找……平坦且無車流、干擾、過度噪音或其他安全危險的區域。使用障礙物如竹竿、軟方塊/玩具來繞行。
SLIDING: To become comfortable standing on the snowboard while it is sliding.
滑行:習慣站在滑雪板上滑行的感覺。
STRAIGHT RUNNING直線滑行 Look for... A gentle slope with a flat area and small count-er-slope at the bottom (for speed control). Mini half-pipe for dropping in and decelerating on the opposite side. Small, gentle rollers with a return wall at the end to help feel gliding with small vertical movements (absorption).
尋找……一個帶有平坦區域和底部小反坡(用於速度控制)的緩坡。迷你半管用於起跳並在對面減速。小而緩的波浪形坡道,末端有回彈牆,幫助感受帶有小幅垂直動作(吸收)的滑行。
GOALS KEY CONCEPTS COMPLEMENTARY TERRAIN BASICS: To learn to use the equipment, and gain comfort moving around on the snowboard with one foot attached. "EQUIPMENT MOBILITY" Look for... Flat areas free from traffic, distractions, excessive noise, or other safety hazards. Use obstacles such as bamboos poles, soft cubes / toys to move around. SLIDING: To become comfortable standing on the snowboard while it is sliding. STRAIGHT RUNNING Look for... A gentle slope with a flat area and small count-er-slope at the bottom (for speed control). Mini half-pipe for dropping in and decelerating on the opposite side. Small, gentle rollers with a return wall at the end to help feel gliding with small vertical movements (absorption).| GOALS | KEY CONCEPTS | COMPLEMENTARY TERRAIN | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | BASICS: To learn to use the equipment, and gain comfort moving around on the snowboard with one foot attached. | EQUIPMENT <br> MOBILITY | Look for... Flat areas free from traffic, distractions, excessive noise, or other safety hazards. Use obstacles such as bamboos poles, soft cubes / toys to move around. | | SLIDING: To become comfortable standing on the snowboard while it is sliding. | STRAIGHT RUNNING | Look for... A gentle slope with a flat area and small count-er-slope at the bottom (for speed control). Mini half-pipe for dropping in and decelerating on the opposite side. Small, gentle rollers with a return wall at the end to help feel gliding with small vertical movements (absorption). |
CONTROL: To learn to control both speed and direction with both feet attached to the snowboard.
控制:學習在雙腳固定於滑雪板上時控制速度和方向。
SIDESLIPPING PENDULUM側滑擺動

尋找……- 稍陡的坡度以利側滑,幫助調整邊緣角度。- 傾斜坡面有助於完成如擺動和強力擺動等方向變換動作。
Look for...
- Slightly steeper slopes for sideslipping, to assist with edge angle.
- A banked slope will assist with direction change tasks like the Pendulum and Power Pendulum.
Look for... - Slightly steeper slopes for sideslipping, to assist with edge angle. - A banked slope will assist with direction change tasks like the Pendulum and Power Pendulum.| Look for... | | :--- | | - Slightly steeper slopes for sideslipping, to assist with edge angle. | | - A banked slope will assist with direction change tasks like the Pendulum and Power Pendulum. |
TURNING: To learn to turn (changing edges in the fall line).
轉彎:學習轉彎(在落線上變換邊緣)。
BEGINNER TURNS初學者轉彎

注意… - 非常緩和、開闊的坡面,適合初次嘗試轉彎。 - 小型傾斜坡有助於將騎乘者引導至相反方向。 - 彎道護欄有助於感受轉彎的形狀。
Look for...
- Very gentle, open slope for initially trying turning.
- Small banked slopes will help re-direct the rider in the opposite direction.
- Berms can assist in feeling the shape of turns.
Look for... - Very gentle, open slope for initially trying turning. - Small banked slopes will help re-direct the rider in the opposite direction. - Berms can assist in feeling the shape of turns.| Look for... | | :--- | | - Very gentle, open slope for initially trying turning. | | - Small banked slopes will help re-direct the rider in the opposite direction. | | - Berms can assist in feeling the shape of turns. |
FLOW: To learn to texplore the mountain safely.
流暢:學習安全地探索山區。
NOVICE TURNS初學者轉彎 Look for... Runs or slopes with some variation, to help students feel the need to change turn shape and size for speed control.
尋找… 有些變化的坡道或斜坡,幫助學生感受到需要改變轉彎的形狀和大小以控制速度。
CONTROL: To learn to control both speed and direction with both feet attached to the snowboard. SIDESLIPPING PENDULUM "Look for... - Slightly steeper slopes for sideslipping, to assist with edge angle. - A banked slope will assist with direction change tasks like the Pendulum and Power Pendulum." TURNING: To learn to turn (changing edges in the fall line). BEGINNER TURNS "Look for... - Very gentle, open slope for initially trying turning. - Small banked slopes will help re-direct the rider in the opposite direction. - Berms can assist in feeling the shape of turns." FLOW: To learn to texplore the mountain safely. NOVICE TURNS Look for... Runs or slopes with some variation, to help students feel the need to change turn shape and size for speed control.| CONTROL: To learn to control both speed and direction with both feet attached to the snowboard. | SIDESLIPPING PENDULUM | Look for... <br> - Slightly steeper slopes for sideslipping, to assist with edge angle. <br> - A banked slope will assist with direction change tasks like the Pendulum and Power Pendulum. | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | TURNING: To learn to turn (changing edges in the fall line). | BEGINNER TURNS | Look for... <br> - Very gentle, open slope for initially trying turning. <br> - Small banked slopes will help re-direct the rider in the opposite direction. <br> - Berms can assist in feeling the shape of turns. | | FLOW: To learn to texplore the mountain safely. | NOVICE TURNS | Look for... Runs or slopes with some variation, to help students feel the need to change turn shape and size for speed control. |

RIGLET PARKSRIGLET 公園

Riglet Parks were created by Burton Snowboards as part of their Learn to Ride program. “Riglet” refers the retractable Riglet Reel leash mounted on Burton kid’s boards to allow young riders to be pulled by a parent or instructor. A Riglet Park is a fun and engaging environment to help kids under 12 experience snowboarding. These purpose-built environments may include rollers, surface-level boxes, quarter pipes, and berms, banks, and other obstacles. Kids are able to slide and glide through the parks with the help of instructors and begin to develop the skill necessary for riding the whole mountain.
Riglet 公園是 Burton Snowboards 為其 Learn to Ride 計畫所創建的。「Riglet」指的是安裝在 Burton 兒童滑雪板上的可伸縮 Riglet Reel 牽引繩,讓年幼的滑雪者能由家長或教練牽引。Riglet 公園是一個有趣且吸引人的環境,幫助 12 歲以下的兒童體驗滑雪。這些專門打造的場地可能包含滾筒、地面箱子、四分之一管、彎道、斜坡及其他障礙物。孩子們在教練的協助下,能在公園中滑行並開始培養騎乘整座山的必要技能。
The parks help kids to learn by doing, in a snowboard park environment. If your resort provides a learning park for young snowboarders, use it! Refer to our Teaching Children chapter for some tips on teaching young kids, but the key is mileage and practice - get your students sliding in a controlled fashion and developing balance skills from day one. Start by using a tether (or “Riglet Reel”) attached to the snowboard so you can move kids from feature to feature safely. Ensure that both feet are strapped in, and have your students focus on simply feeling the sensations of gliding up and over obstacles on a flat base.
這些公園幫助孩子們在滑雪板公園的環境中透過實作學習。如果你的度假村提供給年輕滑雪板手的學習公園,務必善加利用!參考我們的「教導兒童」章節,獲取一些教導小朋友的技巧,但關鍵在於累積經驗和練習——讓你的學生從第一天起就以受控的方式滑行,並培養平衡感。開始時可使用繫繩(或稱「Riglet Reel」)連接滑雪板,這樣你就能安全地將孩子從一個設施帶到另一個設施。確保雙腳都已綁好,並讓學生專注於感受在平坦基底上滑過障礙物的滑行感覺。
For more info, visit: http://burtonriglet.com
更多資訊,請造訪:http://burtonriglet.com

USING NATURAL TERRAIN使用自然地形

Your resort may not provide purpose-built terrain features for teaching. Luckily, the mountains provide endless opportunities to use natural terrain features to accentuate your lessons. Once your students are out of the beginner area, begin to choose terrain with skill-development outcomes in mind.
你的度假村可能沒有提供專門設計的教學地形設施。幸運的是,山區提供無限的機會,讓你利用自然地形來強化教學。一旦你的學生離開初學者區域,就開始選擇有助於技能發展的地形。
Some examples…一些範例…

Balance & Stability:平衡與穩定性:

  • Becoming more skilled on the snowboard relies on improving our ability to react to changes in balance and improve our stability.
    提升滑雪板技巧依賴於增強我們對平衡變化的反應能力以及提升穩定性。
  • To improve lateral balance, looks for natural banked runs and emphasize “tipping” laterally into the valleys.
    為了改善側向平衡,尋找自然傾斜的滑道,並強調向山谷側「傾斜」身體。
  • Vertical balance can be improved by using undulations / rollers in the terrain (see below).
    垂直平衡可以透過地形中的起伏/滾輪來改善(見下文)。
  • Surface-level boxes or rails (or trees/logs!) can help students improve balance on a flat-based snowboard (minimal or no edge angle).
    地面層級的箱子或欄杆(或樹木/木頭!)可以幫助學生在平底滑雪板上提升平衡感(邊緣角度極小或沒有)。

Carving:刻滑:

  • Speed control is a common concern when learning to carve.
    速度控制是在學習刻滑時常見的問題。
  • Choose terrain with natural counter slopes and flatter terrain to remove the intimidation of speed.
    選擇具有自然反坡和較平坦的地形,以消除速度帶來的威嚇感。

Terrain Adaptation / Absorption Skills:
地形適應/吸收技巧:

  • Learning to absorb terrain is all about freeing up the range of motion in the lower joints (hips, knees and ankles).
    學習吸收地形的關鍵在於釋放下肢關節(臀部、膝蓋和腳踝)的活動範圍。
  • Look for undulating terrain, and follow a simple Building Block approach - the terrain you choose should be on the mellower side early on in the learning process, and can progress to more challenging as students become more skilled.
    尋找起伏的地形,並採用簡單的建構式方法——在學習初期,選擇較溫和的地形,隨著學員技能提升,再逐步挑戰更具難度的地形。
  • Rollers, larger bumps, cat tracks, snowboard cross tracks may all be appropriate for teaching absorption skills.
    滾筒、大顆凸起、貓爪軌跡、單板滑雪越野軌跡都可能適合用來教導吸收技巧。

Timing & Coordination Skills:
時機與協調技巧:

  • Improve your student’s coordination skills by creating external timing changes.
    透過創造外部時機變化,提升學生的協調能力。
  • Tree runs provide the need to turn “on demand”, rather than wherever is comfortable. Ensure slopes and speeds are suitable to your student level.
    樹林滑行需要「隨時轉彎」,而非在舒適的地方轉彎。請確保坡度和速度適合學生的程度。
These are just a few examples of the opportunities to use terrain to your advantage when teaching. A common trait of experienced instructors is that ability to monitor the terrain around you, and translate that terrain into a usable teaching tool.
這些只是利用地形優勢進行教學的幾個例子。經驗豐富的教官常具備的特質之一,就是能夠觀察周遭地形,並將其轉化為實用的教學工具。

FREESTYLE TERRAIN自由式地形

Teaching in freestyle terrain requires special attention to safety details regarding the environment students are learning in. Here are some various environmental instructing factors to consider when teaching in the Terrain Park.
在自由式地形教學時,需要特別注意學生所學習環境的安全細節。以下是在地形公園教學時需考慮的各種環境教學因素。

TERRAIN PARK SAFETY地形公園安全

Always start your day with a thorough park inspection. You will need to point out to your students certain important safety considerations before riding it.
每天開始前,務必進行全面的公園檢查。你需要在學生騎乘前,向他們指出某些重要的安全注意事項。
Stop zones: Point out specific areas where your students will stop between park sections. Teaching your riders to face uphill when they stop will help them gauge if they are in a safe spot.
停車區域:指出學生在公園區段之間會停下來的特定區域。教導騎士停下時面向上坡,能幫助他們判斷是否處於安全位置。

Feature highlights: Check the takeoff transitions, length of tables and condition of the landings before riding the jumps. Watching other riders will also help your students gauge speed and flight path.
特色亮點:在騎乘跳躍前,檢查起跳過渡區、跳台長度及落地狀況。觀察其他騎士也能幫助學生判斷速度和飛行路線。

Spotters: Explain to your riders the spotter signs. “0” for 0K, “X” for NOT OK. These signs are of crucial importance at busy resorts.
觀察員:向騎士解釋觀察員的標誌。「0」代表安全,「X」代表不安全。這些標誌在繁忙的度假村非常重要。

Drop-in calls: It is important for students to call their drop-in, especially at the halfpipe or at any jump with multiple takeoffs. Riders should get in line or raise their arm (if there is no organized line), calling “Dropping next!” When it is safe to go they have the right-of-way and need to call out “DROPPING!” Teaching proper park “ethics” will help riders get along.
起跳呼叫:學生呼叫起跳非常重要,尤其是在半管或有多個起跳點的跳躍處。騎士應排隊或在無組織排隊時舉手,並喊「下一個起跳!」當安全時,他們擁有優先權,並需喊出「起跳!」教導正確的公園「禮儀」有助於騎士間和諧相處。

SMART STYLE智慧風格

Freestyle Terrain Designation & Rating System
自由式地形標示與分級系統

Freestyle terrain may include halfpipes, as well as terrain parks and natural terrain features. They are provided for your enjoyment and offer adventure, challenge and fun. However, freestyle terrain use, like all riding, exposes you to the risk of serious injury. Prior to using freestyle terrain, it is your responsibility to familiarize yourself with all instructions and warnings and to follow “your responsibility code”.
自由式地形可能包含半管、地形公園以及自然地形特徵。這些設施是為了您的樂趣而設,提供冒險、挑戰與娛樂。然而,自由式地形的使用,和所有滑行活動一樣,存在嚴重受傷的風險。在使用自由式地形之前,您有責任熟悉所有指示與警告,並遵守「您的責任守則」。
  • Freestyle Terrain contains man-made and natural terrain variations.
    自由式地形包含人造及自然地形變化。
  • Freestyle Terrain changes constantly due to weather and use.
    自由式地形因天氣和使用情況不斷變化。
  • Inspect Freestyle Terrain before using and throughout the day.
    使用前及全天候請檢查自由式地形。
  • In jumping and using this terrain, you assume the risk of serious injury.
    在跳躍及使用此地形時,您須承擔嚴重受傷的風險。
  • Be courteous and respect others.
    請保持禮貌並尊重他人。
  • One user on a Terrain feature at a time.
    一次只能有一位使用者在地形特徵上。
  • Never jump blindly - use a spotter when necessary. Look Before You Leap!
    切勿盲目跳躍——必要時請使用觀察員。先看清楚再跳!
  • It is your responsibility to control your body on the ground and in the air.
    你有責任控制自己在地面和空中的身體動作。
  • Always clear the landing area quickly.
    請務必迅速清理著陸區域。
  • Always ride in control and within your ability.
    始終保持可控且符合自身能力的騎乘。

THE TERRAIN PARK "PICTIONARY"
地形公園「圖解辭典」

Tabletop Jump平頂跳躍

Tabletop jumps offer a wide takeoff to allow various lines of approach. Approaching this shape of jump from the side will allow the rider to see what distance he must clear to reach the landing. The lip of the jump is at the same height as the flat-top. This makes the jump safer in the event of a rider not making it to the landing (the rider will only drop as far as he has risen).
平頂跳躍提供寬闊的起跳面,允許多種進場路線。從側面接近這種形狀的跳躍,可以讓騎士看清必須跨越的距離以達到落地點。跳躍的唇緣與平頂高度相同。這使得跳躍在騎士未能成功落地時更安全(騎士只會掉落到他起跳的高度)。

Tombstone Tabletop Jump墓碑式平台跳躍

The tombstone tabletop is a more advanced feature. These jumps send the rider to a substantial drop in elevation as the takeoff is sometimes up to 3 meters higher than the flat top. This makes for dire consequence when a rider fails to reach the landing. Adding to the difficulty is the amount of rise from the base of the takeoff to its lip. It is more difficult to gauge how fast to ride in order to make the landing (lots of speed is lost while riding up the takeoff).
墓碑式平台是一項較進階的技巧。這類跳躍會讓騎士從高處大幅下降,因為起跳點有時比平坦的頂部高出約 3 公尺。當騎士未能成功落地時,後果相當嚴重。增加難度的是從起跳基底到跳台邊緣的高度差。要判斷騎乘速度以順利落地更為困難(騎上起跳台時會損失大量速度)。

"Hip Jump"「側跳」

Some tabletops have groomed sides that make for a different trajectory option. Riding the jump as a hip makes it similar to riding a spine jump. The hip option is useful to test the “kick” of the takeoff and the amount of speed necessary to reach the landing. The slight change in direction needed to match the hip landing reinforces straight airs in the halfpipe.
有些平台的側面經過整修,提供不同的軌跡選擇。將跳躍當作側跳騎乘,類似於騎脊背跳。側跳選項有助於測試起跳的「彈力」以及達到落地所需的速度。為配合側跳落地所需的輕微轉向,也強化了半管中直線空翻的技巧。

Hip Jump with Tombstone
帶墓碑的側跳

Once again the tombstone raises the level of difficulty. Because tombstone hips usually have steep takeoffs and landings, special care should be taken when picking the line of trajectory. Riders can easily overturn on the takeoff, projecting them to land on the flats. Hip jumps are an effective feature to introduce halfpipe spins.
墓碑再次提高了難度。由於墓碑側跳通常有陡峭的起跳和落地,選擇軌跡線時需特別小心。騎士在起跳時很容易翻覆,導致落在平地上。側跳是引入半管旋轉的有效技巧。

Spine Jumps脊跳

Spine jumps offer many different trajectory options. The most obvious choice is going left or right. Spines closely simulate the trajectory of halfpipe airs. Landing on a strong edge and completing the shape of the takeoff turn offers the same feeling as landing an air in the pipe and carving hard across the bottom. Entry-level students can use the very edge of the takeoff to introduce small airs and advanced riders can jump it from end to end.
脊跳提供多種不同的軌跡選擇。最明顯的選擇是向左或向右跳。脊跳非常模擬半管空中動作的軌跡。落在強邊並完成起跳轉彎的形狀,帶來與在管中空中著陸並在底部用力切邊相同的感覺。初學者可以利用起跳的邊緣來練習小空中動作,進階騎士則可以從一端跳到另一端。

Gap Jumps間隙跳躍

Gap jumps are becoming a thing of the past in terrain parks. Their “unforgiving” shape has claimed many riders. Great ability at judging the required speed to clear the gap is essential to avoid catastrophic consequences. Obviously riders should already be riding much larger tabletops confidently before they attempt to clear gaps. Instructors should avoid using gap jumps with their students as a serious safety consideration.
間隙跳躍在地形公園中正逐漸成為過去式。它們「無情」的形狀已奪走許多騎士的安全。準確判斷通過間隙所需速度的能力至關重要,以避免災難性後果。顯然,騎士在嘗試通過間隙前,應該已經能自信地騎乘更大的平頂跳台。教練在安全考量上應避免讓學生使用間隙跳躍。

TOMBSTONE TABLETOP JUMP墓碑平頂跳台
HIP JUMP側跳
HIP WITH TOMBSTONE墓碑式跳台
GAP JUMP空隙跳躍

Step-up Jump踏板跳躍

Step-up jumps are rare in ski area terrain parks. A well-designed step-up can have some psychological benefits to your students. When the landing roll matches the flight trajectory, riders are never much higher than the snow. This shape helps with riders that are uncomfortable with the height provided by tombstone tabletops. Instructors must be wary of the “gap” aspect of a step-up. Although not as catastrophic as colliding with a straight wall of snow, failing to reach the landing will result in an uphill impact.
踏板跳躍在滑雪場地形公園中相當罕見。設計良好的踏板跳躍對你的學生有一定的心理益處。當著陸滾動與飛行軌跡相符時,騎乘者的高度通常不會超過雪面太多。這種形狀有助於那些對墓碑式平臺高度感到不適的騎乘者。教練必須注意踏板跳躍中的「空隙」部分。雖然不如撞上直立的雪牆那麼嚴重,但未能成功著陸仍會導致向上坡方向的撞擊。

Transfer Jump轉移跳躍

“Transfers” are less obvious trajectories over classic features. In the above example, the rider can use the right-hand takeoff and drift toward the left-side landing or even the left side hip. Spotting (or blocking other takeoffs) such a flight path is crucial to avoid collisions or unexpected snow conditions (ill-maintained landing).
「轉移」是在經典地形上較不明顯的軌跡。在上述範例中,騎士可以利用右側起跳點,並向左側著陸區或甚至左側臀部滑行。觀察(或阻擋其他起跳點)這樣的飛行路徑對避免碰撞或意外的雪況(維護不佳的著陸區)至關重要。

SLOPE OF THE LANDING
著陸坡度

TAKEOFF AND LANDING COMPATIBILITY
起跳與著陸的相容性

Beginner Table Top Landing:
初學者桌面著陸:

Table Top Landing:桌面著陸:
Tombstone Table Top Landing:
墓碑桌面著陸:

Steep landings eliminate less momentum at the moment of impact. Changes in momentum are the source of “pressure”. In more dramatic changes to momentum, the rider will feel more pressure. Pressure eventually amounts to pain.
陡峭的著陸在撞擊瞬間減少的動量較少。動量的變化是「壓力」的來源。動量變化越劇烈,騎士感受到的壓力越大。壓力最終會轉化為疼痛。

In the example above, both riders have the same trajectory in the air (they used the same takeoff). The “natural force” (exerted by the ground) is always applied perpendicular to its surface. If the rider’s momentum is parallel to the natural force, as in the example on the right, the impact will be great (painful) and little momentum will be transferred to the horizontal plane. Keep in mind that a steep landing will also prolong the direct pull of gravity. Your riders will still accelerate until the slope is reduced. This is intimidating to less skilled riders.
在上述範例中,兩位騎士在空中的軌跡相同(他們使用了相同的起跳點)。「自然力」(由地面施加)總是垂直於其表面施加。如果騎士的動量與自然力平行,如右側範例所示,衝擊力將會很大(疼痛感強烈),且只有少量動量會轉移到水平面。請記住,陡峭的著陸也會延長重力的直接拉力。騎士仍會持續加速,直到坡度降低。這對技術較差的騎士來說是令人畏懼的。

Well-designed jumps can offer the feeling of never even leaving the ground (or never returning to it for that matter). When the landing slope is parallel to the flight trajectory, riders will feel close to no impact force when they touch down.
設計良好的跳躍可以帶來彷彿從未離開地面(或根本從未回到地面)的感覺。當著陸坡度與飛行軌跡平行時,騎士在著地時幾乎感受不到衝擊力。

Instructors should teach their students to anticipate jump trajectories and assess the value of their landings. Watching others ride the jumps can help your students gauge the proper speed and trajectory. Demonstrations speak much louder than words.
教練應該教導學生預判跳躍軌跡並評估著陸的價值。觀察他人騎乘跳躍可以幫助學生判斷適當的速度和軌跡。示範的效果遠勝於言語。

Length of the flat-top: To ride longer jumps, students simply need more speed. Riding at higher speed requires better timing and coordination to safely perform the same
平頂長度:要騎得更長的跳躍,學生只需要更快的速度。以更高速度騎乘需要更好的時機掌握和協調,才能安全地完成相同的

manoeuvres.動作。
Radius of the takeoff transition: The transition is what deflects a rider’s momentum upward.
起跳過渡半徑:過渡段是將騎士的動量向上偏轉的部分。
Tight transitions do so in a short distance. The resultant change in direction is sudden and can throw off a student’s balance. Longer transitions (larger radius) transfer mo-
緊湊的過渡段在短距離內完成。結果方向的改變突然,可能會打亂學生的平衡。較長的過渡段(較大半徑)則將動量轉移得更—


mentum more gradually giving the rider time to adapt to the change in direction.
動作較為緩和,讓騎士有時間適應方向的改變。

In this example, the jump on the left has a dramatically tighter transition than the jump on the right. As a guideline, a snowboard (without a rider) should lie almost flat (only its camber should rise off the snow) on the steepest part of any jump. Even following this guideline, instructors need to understand that riding faster will accentuate the “kicky feel” of any jump.
在這個例子中,左邊的跳台轉折明顯比右邊的跳台更急。作為一個指導原則,單板滑雪板(無騎士)在任何跳台最陡峭的部分應該幾乎平放(只有其弧度部分會離開雪面)。即使遵循這個指導原則,教練也需要了解,騎乘速度越快,跳台的「彈跳感」會越明顯。
Takeoff angle: The final angle of a jump also plays an important role in defining the flight path it provides. The lip angle of a jump has a significant effect on a rider’s axes of rotation. Varying the lip angle can be used to modify tricks (turning upright spins into
起跳角度:跳台的最終角度在定義飛行路徑時也扮演重要角色。跳台的唇角對騎士的旋轉軸有顯著影響。改變唇角可以用來調整技巧(將直立旋轉變成


corked ones).軟木塞旋轉)。
When teaching new tricks to riders, a little digging can go a long way in making the feature work for the trick in mind. If digging were not an option, perhaps learning a dif-
在教導騎士新技巧時,稍微挖掘一下可以大大幫助讓該設施適合想要的技巧。如果無法挖掘,也許學習另一個(適合該設施的)技巧會更有效。


ferent trick (that would work with a given feature) would be more effective instructing.
不同的技巧(適合特定設施)可能會更有效的教學。

HALFPIPE "PICTIONARY"半管「圖像猜謎」

Roll-out deck: This is the flat area at the top of the walls. Riders hike up the pipe on the roll out decks.
出口平台:這是牆頂部的平坦區域。騎士會從出口平台爬上半管。
Flat bottom: The flat bottom is the flat area at the bottom of the pipe. It varies in width throughout the season. A wider flat bottom gives riders more time to set-up between hits. When it gets too wide, riders lose the “trampoline-like” feel of halfpipe riding.
平底:平底是管道底部的平坦區域。其寬度會隨季節變化。較寬的平底讓騎手在兩次跳躍間有更多時間準備。當平底過寬時,騎手會失去半管滑行時那種「彈簧床般」的感覺。

Wall height: The vertical distance from the flat bottom to the lip of the pipe. This factor is controlled by the size of the grooming machine used. “Regular pipes” are generally 3 to 4 metres deep. The word “superpipe” was coined by the makers of the “super pipe dragon”. Their machine can shape a 6-metre transition. The term superpipe is generally attributed to pipes that exceed 5.5 meters ( 16 feet).
牆高:從平底到管口的垂直距離。此參數由整地機的大小所控制。「一般管道」深度通常為 3 到 4 公尺。「超級管」一詞由「super pipe dragon」的製造商創造。他們的機器能塑造 6 公尺的過渡區。一般認為深度超過 5.5 公尺(16 英尺)的管道稱為超級管。

Transitions: The transitions are the curved part of the walls. These must be maintained regularly for the pipe to keep a consistent, smooth shape. Well-maintained transitions are fun and easy to ride. The transitions should reach vertical but not beyond it.
過渡區:過渡區是牆壁的曲面部分。為了保持管道形狀一致且平滑,必須定期維護過渡區。維護良好的過渡區滑行起來既有趣又輕鬆。過渡區應達到垂直但不超過垂直。
Halfpipe shaping machines produce different transitions. The two main shape types are radial and elliptical. Radial transitions are easier to ride, as their rate of ascent is consistent. Elliptical walls have a quick transition at their base. They get steep very quickly and make the pipe look more like a box.
半管成型機製造出不同的過渡形狀。兩種主要的形狀類型是徑向和橢圓形。徑向過渡較容易騎乘,因為其上升速率是一致的。橢圓形牆壁在底部有快速的過渡。它們迅速變陡,使半管看起來更像一個盒子。
Varying the line of approach in the pipe has a substantial effect on the feel of the transitions. Riding straight across the pipe provides the tightest transition possible. Riding steeply down the pipe lengthens the transitions and makes them less “kicky”.
改變進入半管的路線對過渡的感覺有顯著影響。直線穿越半管會產生最緊湊的過渡。陡峭地沿著半管騎行會延長過渡,使其不那麼「彈跳」。

Vert: The vert is the top portion of the wall. “Vert” stands for vertical section. Not all halfpipes have vert and some have plenty of it. The ideal is four to eight inches (10-20 cm ) of vert. There is no need for a long vertical section. In this example, both pipes have the same transition. The left-hand pipe has more vert. Given the same amount of speed, the rider on the right will end up higher over the lip because the pipe just goes to vert. The rider on the left is simply riding uphill for a longer distance before leaving the snow.
垂直牆(Vert):垂直牆是牆壁的頂部部分。「Vert」代表垂直段。並非所有半管都有垂直牆,有些則有很多。理想的垂直牆高度是四到八英吋(10-20 公分)。不需要很長的垂直段。在此範例中,兩個半管的過渡相同。左邊的半管有較多的垂直牆。以相同速度來看,右邊的騎手會因為半管直接到垂直牆而在管口上方停得較高。左邊的騎手則是在離開雪面前,必須沿著坡道騎行較長距離。
Slope of the pipe: The slope of the flat bottom and roll-out decks has an impact on how riding the pipe will feel. In steep pipes, riders need powerful edging ability and plenty of strength to maintain their line across the flat bottom. Pipes that are less steep make it more challenging to maintain speed and can limit the number of hits in one run.
管道的坡度:平底和展開平台的坡度會影響騎乘管道的感受。在陡峭的管道中,騎手需要強大的邊緣控制能力和充足的力量來維持在平底的路線。坡度較緩的管道則使保持速度更具挑戰性,且可能限制一次滑行中的擊打次數。

Length of the pipe: The length of a halfpipe has little effect on how students need to ride for performance. Longer pipes will require more endurance as they prolong the duration of effort.
管道的長度:半管的長度對學生的騎乘表現影響不大。較長的管道會因延長努力時間而需要更多的耐力。

RAIL "PICTIONARY"鐵軌「圖解詞典」

Boxes: Also called “fun-boxes”, boxes are features with a wide sliding surface. Some are made of metal and others are plastic. The plastic ones should have metal coping (that is level with the plastic) along their edges. Boxes can be built in many different shapes to challenge more advanced riders.
盒子:也稱為「趣味盒」,盒子是具有寬闊滑行面的設施。有些是金屬製,有些是塑膠製。塑膠盒的邊緣應該有與塑膠齊平的金屬護邊。盒子可以製成多種不同形狀,以挑戰更高階的騎手。

Rails: Rails are slender metal surfaces or pipes. They can be built in a multitude of shapes and sizes.
Rails:Rails 是細長的金屬表面或管狀物。它們可以製成多種形狀和尺寸。

Shotgun, Single-Barrel and Flat Bar Rails
霰彈槍型、單管型和平板型 Rails

For safety purposes, rails should have solid panels between their supporting legs. The surface must be made of solid steel and be free of burrs. Flat-bars should have rounded edges to prevent board damage or cuts to riders falling on them.
出於安全考量,Rails 在支撐腳之間應設有實心面板。表面必須由實心鋼材製成,且無毛刺。平板型 Rails 的邊緣應做圓角處理,以防止滑板損壞或騎士跌落時割傷。

How a rider must get on the rail can vary.
騎士如何上 Rails 可能會有所不同。
  • “Ride-on” rails have snow piled-up to the level of the rail. Riders do not need to get any air to slide “ride-on” rails.
    「騎乘式」欄杆的雪堆積到與欄杆同高。騎手不需要跳起來就能滑行「騎乘式」欄杆。
  • “Skate-style” rails have no ramp at all. The rider must generate the required lift himself by popping, ollieing or nollieing.
    「滑板風格」欄杆完全沒有斜坡。騎手必須靠自己跳躍、奧利跳(ollie)或諾利跳(nollie)來產生所需的升力。
  • “Gaps” are sometimes found between the ramp (snow) and the rail. Riders must have enough speed to clear the gap and land on the rail.
    有時在斜坡(雪)和欄杆之間會有「空隙」。騎手必須有足夠的速度才能越過空隙並落在欄杆上。

Skate-style and gap rails
滑板風格和空隙欄杆

Ride-on rail: Instructors should pay special attention to the ramp’s condition. “Highways” or ruts on the takeoff can make riders lose their balance before even reaching the rail.
可騎乘滑軌:教練應特別注意斜坡的狀況。起跳處的「高速公路」或車轍可能會讓騎士在還沒到達滑軌前就失去平衡。
Curved rails & boxes: Curved rails add to the fun by gradually varying the plane of the rail. Riders must adjust their stance throughout longer transitions (than kinked rails).
彎曲滑軌與滑箱:彎曲滑軌透過逐漸改變滑軌的平面,增加了趣味性。騎士必須在較長的過渡段(比折角滑軌更長)中持續調整姿勢。

Rainbow shapes provide a similar feeling to jumping. The “weightlessness” allows a rider to spin easily on the rail. Rails that curve to the side are once again more challenging. Riders must now balance through a change in direction (left or right).
彩虹形狀提供類似跳躍的感覺。「失重感」讓騎士能輕鬆在滑軌上旋轉。向側面彎曲的滑軌再次增加挑戰性。騎士現在必須在方向改變(向左或向右)時保持平衡。

" S S SS " and Dragon rails alternate between more than one direction of curve. " S S SS " rails go left and right, “dragon” rails go up and down. t
S S SS 」與龍形滑軌在多個方向間交替彎曲。「 S S SS 」滑軌左右擺動,「龍」滑軌則上下起伏。t
Kinked rails: Kinks are sudden changes in a rail’s shape. Kinks mostly go up or down (side kinks do exist and they are extremely difficult to navigate).
彎曲軌道:彎曲是軌道形狀的突然變化。彎曲大多是向上或向下(側向彎曲確實存在,但非常難以駕馭)。

Kinked rails and boxes challenge student balance. Riders must adapt their stance from section to section. In a 50/50, it is fore and aft balance that deals with vertical kinks. In a boardslide, lateral balance must be adjusted.
彎曲軌道和盒子會挑戰學生的平衡感。騎乘者必須根據不同區段調整姿勢。在 50/50 上,前後平衡用來應對垂直彎曲。在滑板滑行時,則必須調整側向平衡。
Downward kinks eliminate pressure as drops in terrain would, allowing students to air and perhaps change to a new sliding stance (Boardslide to frontside boardslide after the
向下的彎曲會像地形的下降一樣減少壓力,讓學生能夠跳躍,並可能改變滑行姿勢(例如從 Boardslide 轉換到前側 Boardslide)

RAILS軌道
kink for example).例如彎折。
Upward kinks are more challenging. The added pressure from the uphill transition can easily throw a rider off balance.
向上的彎折更具挑戰性。來自上坡過渡的額外壓力很容易讓騎士失去平衡。

“Wall rides” and picnic tables will also be encountered. Boxes and rails with other rails sticking out from their side panels are being used in California. Of course Rail design will continue to evolve and new challenging shapes will come up. Meanwhile, bigger,
還會遇到「牆騎」和野餐桌。在加州,箱子和欄杆的側板上會伸出其他欄杆。當然,欄杆設計會持續演變,新的挑戰性造型也會不斷出現。與此同時,更大、

DOWN AND FLAT-DOWN RAILS higher versions of these shapes will keep on challenging your students.
向下和平向下欄杆這些造型的高版本將持續挑戰你的學生。

HALFPIPE RIDING半管滑行

The following information has been adapted from the Canadian Snowboard Coaching Program - Competition Introduction Reference Manual (2008).
以下資訊改編自加拿大滑雪板教練計畫-競賽入門參考手冊(2008 年)。
The biomechanics of halfpipe riding are similar to that of freeriding; the same riding principles and techniques are used. Standing balanced on both feet, perpendicular to the snow (in the freestyle triangle) is the key.
半管滑行的生物力學與自由滑行相似;使用相同的滑行原則與技巧。雙腳站立平衡,與雪面垂直(在自由式三角區域內)是關鍵。

Confidence & Control自信與控制

As the halfpipe feature itself is a unique part of snowboarding, it will take some gradual increases in height up the wall as riders get used to it. Start small and build muscle memory, balance, and confidence by slowly going further and further up the wall.
由於半管本身是滑雪板運動中獨特的部分,騎手需要逐漸適應牆面的高度。從低處開始,透過慢慢往牆面更高處滑行,建立肌肉記憶、平衡感和自信心。

Key Concepts to Halfpipe Riding
半管騎乘的關鍵概念

Take Off: At the lip of the pipe, the body should be perpendicular with the vert, with the head towards the virtual centre of the transitions.
起跳:在半管的邊緣,身體應與垂直面垂直,頭部朝向過渡區的虛擬中心。

Down Angle: The angle of the edge of the board to the lip of the pipe when exiting - the amount of the angle will change the curve of the air and the speed of the rider.
下角度:滑板邊緣離開半管邊緣時的角度——角度的大小會影響空中軌跡的曲線和騎手的速度。

Riding the Uphill Edge: Always ride the uphill edge of the board (toe edge on frontside wall, and heel edge on backside wall); edge change occurs at the apex of the air.
騎乘上坡邊緣:始終騎乘板子的上坡邊緣(前側牆面用腳趾邊緣,後側牆面用腳跟邊緣);邊緣轉換發生在空中最高點。

Standing On The Board: Maintaining the centre of mass over top of the board will give a stable position and allow the board to accelerate up and down the wall of the pipe.
站在滑板上:保持重心在滑板正中央,能提供穩定的姿勢,並讓滑板在管道牆面上下加速。

Pipe manoeuvres must be performed above the lip. Amplitude (height) above the lip is one of the defining factors in pipe riding and is as important as technical manoeuvres. Speed is a critical factor in halfpipe riding; riders need to be able to ride confidently at high speeds. In order to do any manoeuvres including straight airs, riders must be able to get to the lip of the pipe.
管道動作必須在管口以上完成。管口以上的高度(幅度)是管道滑行的關鍵因素之一,與技術動作同等重要。速度是半管滑行的關鍵因素;滑手必須能夠自信地以高速滑行。為了完成任何動作,包括直空,滑手必須能夠到達管口。

Riders need to know how to maintain and generate speed in the halfpipe. Adjusting the following factors will allow the rider to gain or maintain their speed in the pipe:
滑手需要知道如何在半管中維持和產生速度。調整以下因素將使滑手能夠在管道中獲得或維持速度:
  • Drop-in speed: The speed the rider drops into the pipe
    下落速度:騎手進入管道時的速度
  • Down Angle: The angle of the board when compared to the lip of the pipe. The rider will travel faster when the board is more downhill.
    下坡角度:板子相較於管道邊緣的角度。當板子角度較向下時,騎手會行進得更快。
  • Pumping: Applying pressure to the board against the wall on the down and up transitions to propel rider forward at a faster speed.
    抽壓:在下坡和上坡過渡時,對板子施加壓力於牆面,以推動騎手向前加速。

    To maintain speed in the pipe riders can apply the follow tactics:
    為了在管道中保持速度,騎手可以採用以下策略:
  • Decreasing Edge Angle: The more edge on the wall, the more friction, and the slower a rider goes.
    減少邊緣角度:牆面上的邊緣越多,摩擦力越大,騎手的速度就越慢。
  • Lip-to-Lip Airs: Airs performed that leave from the lip and land at the lip. This will maintain more speed than early takeoffs or pushing off wall and landing lower on wall or in the flat bottom.
    唇對唇空中動作:從唇邊起跳並在唇邊著陸的空中動作。這種方式比提前起跳或從牆面推離並在牆面較低處或平底著陸能保持更高的速度。
  • Waxed snowboard base: A waxed board will decrease the friction on the base, which will help the board run faster.
    打蠟的滑雪板底部:打蠟的滑雪板底部能減少摩擦力,有助於滑雪板跑得更快。

    Halfpipe and quarterpipe riding deserve special attention as all the riders’ forward momentum gets transferred from the horizontal to vertical. Transitions change a rider’s momentum so quickly that the rider must maintain their centre of gravity directly under the snowboard at all times. The centre of gravity must move with the board as it moves up the transition all the way until it is vertical.
    半管和四分之一管騎乘需要特別注意,因為所有騎手的前進動能會從水平轉換到垂直。過渡區會迅速改變騎手的動能,因此騎手必須始終保持重心直接位於滑雪板正下方。重心必須隨著滑雪板沿過渡區向上移動,直到滑雪板垂直為止。

Dropping!下落!

A pipe run always begins with the drop in. Riders need to understand how to effectively and efficiently enter the pipe to be able to have solid lines through and airs out of the pipe. A rider should be able to set the desired line at the drop in and maintain the same line through to the takeoff. Movements for dropping-in:
管道滑行總是從下落開始。騎手需要了解如何有效且高效地進入管道,才能在管道中保持穩定的路線並順利出空中動作。騎手應該能在下落時設定理想路線,並保持相同路線直到起跳點。下落動作包括:
  • 50/50 the coping: Ride parallel to the coping, just on the edge of the pipe.
    50/50 沿著管道邊緣滑行:平行於管道邊緣滑行,緊貼管道邊緣。
  • Roll-in: Use a slight edge angle to enter the pipe. Drop the body over the front of the board while allowing the board and body to roll onto the vertical wall. This movement must be done quickly. In a good roll-in the rider’s head should be at the same height on the wall as his feet.
    滾入:利用輕微的邊緣角度進入管道。將身體向滑板前方傾斜,同時讓滑板和身體滾動到垂直牆面上。這個動作必須迅速完成。良好的滾入時,騎手的頭部應與腳部在牆面上的高度相同。
  • Line: Transfer the centre of gravity back over the centre of the board and set the desired line/edge and maintain it through the transition while keeping the centre of gravity in the centre of the board.
    動作線:將重心移回滑板中心,設定所需的動作線/邊緣,並在過渡過程中保持該動作線,同時保持重心在滑板中心。

Factors affecting line choice:
影響動作線選擇的因素:

Wall height, pipe length, pitch pipe built on, width of pipe walls, trick choice, and snow quality, just to name a few.
牆面高度、管道長度、管道建造的斜度、管壁寬度、技巧選擇以及雪質,僅舉幾例。

Example:範例:
Higher pipe wall = longer pipe = open lines = more speed Small wall height = short pipe length = steeper lines = less speed Small wall height = longer length = flat pitch = open line to build speed  Higher pipe wall = longer pipe = open lines = more speed   Small wall height = short pipe length = steeper lines = less speed   Small wall height = longer length = flat pitch = open line to build speed  {:[" Higher pipe wall = longer pipe = open lines = more speed "],[" Small wall height = short pipe length = steeper lines = less speed "],[" Small wall height = longer length = flat pitch = open line to build speed "]:}\begin{aligned} & \text { Higher pipe wall = longer pipe = open lines = more speed } \\ & \text { Small wall height = short pipe length = steeper lines = less speed } \\ & \text { Small wall height = longer length = flat pitch = open line to build speed } \end{aligned}

Pumping抽水

With a solid edge, the rider can push (pressure the board) against the bottom of the transition to accelerate down and across the pipe using the entire transition to transfer as much momentum toward the opposite wall.
利用堅實的刃邊,騎士可以向過渡底部施壓(壓板),藉此加速沿著管道向下及橫向移動,利用整個過渡區將盡可能多的動量傳遞到對側牆面。

Key points to Pumping:
泵動的重點:
  • Pumping movements are based on feeling and controlling pressure. It takes time and mileage to develop this pressure control skill.
    泵動動作是基於感覺和控制壓力。發展這種壓力控制技巧需要時間和經驗累積。
  • In hard snow conditions, pumping while the board is carving is more effective than pumping from a flat base. The carving edge transfers more force against the solid surface.
    在硬雪條件下,當滑板在刻滑時進行泵動,比從平底基板泵動更有效。刻滑的刃邊能將更多力量傳遞到堅硬的表面。
  • In slushy or soft snow conditions, pushing against a carving edge will cause it to sink and momentum will be lost. A flatter base offers a greater surface area to push against.
    在濕軟或鬆軟的雪況下,推壓雕刻邊緣會使其下沉,導致動能流失。較平坦的底板提供更大的推壓面積。
  • Riders can pump while travelling up or down any transition. Pumping while re-entering the pipe is most effective as gravity is also providing acceleration.
    騎士可以在任何過渡段上下坡時進行泵動。重新進入管道時泵動最為有效,因為重力同時提供加速。

Basic Pipe Manoeuvres: (performed forwards or switch)
基本管道動作:(可正向或反向執行)

Frontside Air: A straight air on the riders FRONTSIDE wall. Up on toe edge, down on heel edge.
前側空中動作:在騎士的前側牆面上做直線空中動作。腳尖邊上升,腳跟邊下降。

Backside Air: A straight air on the riders BACKSIDE wall. Up on heel edge, down on toe edge.
後側空中動作:在騎士的後側牆面上做出直線空中動作。起跳時使用後跟刃,落地時使用腳尖刃。

Frontside Alley-Oop: A straight air on the riders FRONTSIDE wall where the rider turns UP the pipe instead of down. Up on toe edge, down on heel edge.
前側阿里歐普:在騎士的前側牆面上做出直線空中動作,騎士向管壁上方轉而非向下。起跳時使用腳尖刃,落地時使用後跟刃。

Backside Alley-Oop: A straight air on the riders BACKSIDE wall where the rider turns UP the pipe instead of down. Up on heel edge, down on toe edge.
後側阿里歐普:在騎士的後側牆面上做出直線空中動作,騎士向管壁上方轉而非向下。起跳時使用後跟刃,落地時使用腳尖刃。

Air-to-Fakie: Rider rides up the wall on edge and into the air and returns without rotating, now riding switch on the same edge as the take off. These can be performed on either wall, frontside or backside.
空中轉向假騎姿:騎士沿著邊緣騎上牆面並起跳空中,無旋轉地返回,現在以與起跳相同的邊緣騎乘切換姿勢。此動作可在前側或後側牆面執行。

Rotations in the Halfpipe
半管中的旋轉

Rotations performed in the pipe are executed by the same movement timing as rotations off any other feature. The only difference is that 180s, 540s, 900s etc. land regular while 360s, 720s and 1080s land switch.
在半管中執行的旋轉,其動作時機與在其他任何地形上的旋轉相同。唯一的差別是 180 度、540 度、900 度等旋轉會以正腳落地,而 360 度、720 度和 1080 度則以反腳落地。

TACTICS GLOSSARY戰術詞彙表

The following tactics will help you in presenting technical concepts to your students. Remember, many tactics may be associated with more than one skill. Alternate skill focuses have been listed.
以下戰術將幫助你向學生呈現技術概念。請記住,許多戰術可能與多項技能相關。文中列出了不同的技能重點。

POSITION & BALANCE姿勢與平衡

Butter Yoga奶油瑜伽

While standing on flat, groomed terrain (feet strapped in), have students experiment with testing the limits of their balance by Ibalancing over the nose or tail of the snowboard, and adding elements like rotation or edging to increase the difficulty level, and challenge balance. Similar to Flatland Manoeuvres, but static (not sliding).
在平坦且整理過的地面上站立(雙腳綁好固定),讓學生嘗試測試他們平衡的極限,透過在滑雪板的鼻端或尾端保持平衡,並加入旋轉或壓邊等元素來增加難度,挑戰平衡感。類似於平地動作,但為靜態(不滑行)。

Flatland Manoeuvres / "Butters"
Alternate skill focus: Pivot/Steering, Edging, Pressure, Timing & Coordination
平地動作 / 「奶油動作」 交替技能重點:轉軸/操控、壓邊、壓力、時機與協調

While riding on flat, groomed terrain, have students experiment with testing the limits of their balance by balancing over the nose or tail of the snowboard, and adding elements like rotation or edging to increase the difficulty level, and challenge balance.
在平坦且整備良好的地形上滑行時,讓學生嘗試測試他們平衡的極限,例如在滑雪板的前端或尾端保持平衡,並加入旋轉或壓邊等元素,以增加難度並挑戰平衡能力。

Hopping Between the Turns
轉彎間的跳躍

Alternate skill focus: Edging, Pressure
替代技能重點:壓邊、壓力

While completing linked turns, have students lightly hop on two feet during the traverse phase of the turns. Ensure students are taking off and landing on both feet. One to two inches of air beneath the snowboard is sufficient.
在完成連續轉彎時,讓學生在轉彎的橫向滑行階段輕輕用雙腳跳躍。確保學生起跳和落地時都是雙腳著地。滑雪板下方保持一到兩英吋的空中高度即可。

Riding Fore, Aft & Centred
前後及居中騎乘

Have riders shift the centre of mass (COM) over the front foot, back foot, or equally over both feet, while linking turns. This allows riders to feel the differences in fore/aft balance, and find a suitable position for comfort and stability.
讓騎士在連續轉彎時,將重心(COM)移至前腳、後腳或均勻分布於雙腳上。這能讓騎士感受前後平衡的差異,並找到適合舒適與穩定的位置。

Side Slipping 180 Jumps
Alternate skill focus: Pivot/Steering, Edging, Pressure, Timing & Coordination
側滑 180 度跳躍 交替技能重點:樞軸/轉向、刃邊控制、壓力、時機與協調

Have students sideslip on moderate terrain on the heel edge. With weight distributed evenly over both feet, have them flex the lower joints, and extend to hop. During the hop, the body should rotate as one, turning the board 180 degrees. Students should land on the toe edge, facing up hill, with weight still distributed evenly over both feet. Repeat to return to the heel edge. Riders should feel the importance of body alignment and the Neutral Position.
讓學生在中等坡度的地形上以腳跟刃邊側滑。雙腳均勻分配體重,屈曲下肢關節,並伸展跳躍。跳躍過程中,身體應整體旋轉,使滑板轉 180 度。學生應以腳尖刃邊著陸,面向上坡方向,體重仍均勻分布於雙腳。重複動作回到腳跟刃邊。騎士應感受到身體對齊與中立姿勢的重要性。

Sliding 360's On Snow
Alternate skill focus: Pivot/Steering, Edging, Pressure, Timing & Coordination
雪地滑行 360 度 交替技能重點:轉軸/操控、邊緣控制、壓力、時機與協調

On mellow terrain, have students ride with a centred position over both feet. By turning the head, shoulders and hips, have them begin to turn either toward the heel edge or toe edge.
在平緩地形上,讓學生保持雙腳居中姿勢滑行。透過轉動頭部、肩膀和臀部,引導他們開始向腳跟邊或腳尖邊轉向。

Have students continue to turn past 180 degrees and continuing to maintain balance by looking through the rotation with the eyes, and maintaining a centred position. 360’s should be performed in both the frontside and backside directions.
讓學生繼續轉動超過 180 度,並透過眼睛隨著旋轉方向觀察,保持平衡與居中姿勢。360 度旋轉應該在前側與後側方向皆能完成。

Static Jump / "T" Stance
靜態跳躍/「T」字姿勢

On flat terrain and without moving, with both feet strapped in to the snowboard, have students establish a balanced, centred position over the board. Have them flex to lower the body, and extend rapidly, jumping lightly to leave the ground. On landing, ask them to ensure that they are maintaining a position that is aligned and centred by feel both feet contact the snow simultaneously. While riding, try the same movements, focussing on maintaining a position similar to an upside-down " T ".
在平坦地形且不移動的情況下,雙腳綁在滑雪板上,讓學生建立一個平衡且居中的姿勢。讓他們屈膝降低身體,然後迅速伸展,輕輕跳起離地。著地時,請他們確保保持一個對齊且居中的姿勢,感覺雙腳同時接觸雪面。滑行時,嘗試相同的動作,專注於維持類似倒置「T」字形的姿勢。

Switch Riding反向滑行

Alternate skill focus: Pivot/Steering, Edging, Pressure, Timing & Coordination
交替技能重點:轉向/操控、刃邊控制、壓力、時機與協調

On terrain suitable for their ability level, have students link turns in the direction opposite to their natural stance.
在適合其能力等級的地形上,讓學生連續做出與其自然站姿相反方向的轉彎。

Toe to Toe / Heel to Heel
腳趾對腳趾 / 腳跟對腳跟

Alternate skill focus: Pivot/Steering, Edging, Pressure, Timing & Coordination
替代技能重點:樞軸/轉向、刃邊控制、壓力、時機與協調

To enhance balance skills, have students try to ride and complete only toeside turns.
為了增強平衡技巧,讓學生嘗試只用腳趾邊完成轉彎。

Begin with a regular toeside turn, in their natural direction. In the traverse phase, before the edge change, have students complete a sliding frontside 180 (rotating the nose of the snowboard downhill), and then complete a switch, or fakie, toeside turn. Again, in the traverse phase at the end of this turn, complete a sliding 180 (nose of the board rotating downhill), and repeat the sequence. To complete all heelside turns, have riders begin with a heelside turn, and instead of frontside rotations between turns, have them complete backside rotations. For advanced riders, have them attempt the same exercise using hop or ollie 180’s, instead of sliding 180’s.
從一般的腳趾邊轉彎開始,朝他們自然的方向。在橫移階段,於刃邊切換前,讓學生完成一個滑行式前側 180 度轉(將滑雪板的板頭旋轉向下坡方向),接著完成一個反向(switch)或倒滑(fakie)的腳趾邊轉彎。同樣地,在此轉彎結束的橫移階段,再完成一個滑行式 180 度轉(板頭旋轉向下坡方向),並重複此序列。若要完成所有腳跟邊轉彎,讓騎士從腳跟邊轉彎開始,並且在轉彎間不做前側旋轉,而改做後側旋轉。對於進階騎士,則嘗試用跳躍(hop)或奧利(ollie)180 度轉代替滑行式 180 度轉完成相同練習。

PIVOT / STEERING樞軸 / 轉向

Garland / "Chicken-Out" Turns / Fall-Line Pivot Exercise
Garland / 「退縮」轉彎 / 順坡樞軸練習

Alternate skill focus: Edging, Timing & Coordination
交替技能重點:邊緣控制、時機與協調

Have students begin in a sideslip (on either edge), and then shift pressure slightly over the lead foot to establish a slight direction change. To initiate a pivot, have students turn the head, shoulders and hips down the hill, allowing the snowboard to move toward the fall line. Allow the snowboard to flatten, and approach a flat base. As the snowboard approaches the fall line, have students rotate in the opposite direction, away from the fall line, and back to the starting position. Ensure that students are not changing edges in the fall line. Practice multiple times on the toe or heel edge, and then switch to the opposite side. This exercise allows students to feel the effects of rotation on the initiation and completion of the turn.
讓學生從側滑(任一邊緣)開始,然後稍微將壓力轉移到前腳,以建立輕微的方向改變。要啟動樞軸,讓學生將頭部、肩膀和臀部轉向山下,讓滑雪板朝向順坡線移動。讓滑雪板趨於平坦,接近平底狀態。當滑雪板接近順坡線時,讓學生向相反方向旋轉,遠離順坡線,回到起始位置。確保學生在順坡線上不換邊緣。分別在腳尖邊和腳跟邊多次練習,然後換到另一側。此練習讓學生感受旋轉對轉彎啟動與完成的影響。

Fish Turns / Roller Coaster Turns
魚形轉彎 / 雲霄飛車轉彎

Alternate skill focus: Timing & Coordination
替代技能重點:時機與協調

As an analogy to encourage steering at a higher level, have students picture a fish, where the tail always follows the head as the fish swims. Alternatively, they can envision a roller coaster car, where the last car must follow the path of the first car. Have students attempt to recreate this feeling in their snowboarding, by steering progressively with the front foot, followed by the back foot, in a variety of turns.
作為鼓勵更高層次轉向的比喻,讓學生想像一條魚,魚尾總是跟隨著魚頭游動。或者,他們也可以想像一節雲霄飛車車廂,最後一節車廂必須跟隨第一節車廂的路徑。讓學生嘗試在滑雪板上重現這種感覺,先用前腳逐步轉向,接著是後腳,進行各種轉彎。

Headlights on Knees膝蓋上的車頭燈

An analogy to promote the use of the knees in intermediate riders, have them imagine they are riding in the dark, and with spotlights attached to each knee. As they ride, they have to “shine” the light in the direction of travel, helping them to begin to steer the snowboard with the lower body.
一個促進中階騎士使用膝蓋的比喻,讓他們想像自己在黑暗中騎乘,並且每個膝蓋上都裝有探照燈。當他們騎行時,必須將光線「照射」到行進方向,幫助他們開始用下半身來操控滑雪板。

Motor Boat汽艇

Have students imagine they have an outboard motor on the tail of their snowboard. They must hold onto the throttle of the motor, ensuring that they maintain alignment. To turn the “boat” to the heelside, the throttle needs to be pushed toward the toe edge (thus rotating the shoulders and hips to the heelside direction). To turn to the toe edge, the throttle must be pulled toward the heelside, rotating the shoulders and hips toward the toeside.
讓學生想像他們的滑雪板尾部裝有一個舷外馬達。他們必須握住馬達的油門,確保保持身體對齊。要將「船」轉向腳跟邊,油門需要推向腳趾邊(從而旋轉肩膀和臀部朝向腳跟邊方向)。要轉向腳趾邊,油門必須拉向腳跟邊,旋轉肩膀和臀部朝向腳趾邊。

Complete a series of linked turns using this analogy ensuring that alignment and rotation are maintained throughout. Sound effects optional.
使用此類比完成一連串連續轉彎,確保整個過程中保持對齊與旋轉。音效可選擇性添加。

Rail to Rail (Carving)
從邊到邊(雕刻轉彎)

Alternate skill focus: Timing & Coordination, Edging
交替技能重點:時機與協調、邊緣控制

On mellow terrain, have students begin in a straight run. Have them roll onto the toe edge, establishing a carved turn (pencil line track in the snow), and then roll to the heel edge, carving again. Terrain should be flat enough that speed control isn’t difficult, as students aren’t completing full turns, but are simply “rolling” or steering onto edge for a brief period, before switching to the opposite
在平緩地形上,讓學生從直線滑行開始。讓他們滾動至腳尖邊,建立雕刻轉彎(雪地上的鉛筆線軌跡),然後滾動至腳跟邊,再次雕刻轉彎。地形應足夠平坦,使速度控制不困難,因為學生並未完成完整轉彎,而只是短暫「滾動」或操控邊緣,然後切換到相反邊。

edge. Challenge students to feel the knees and feet directing the snowboard to the new edge, and increase the pace of the edge changes as steering skill increases.
邊緣。挑戰學生感受膝蓋和腳引導滑雪板轉向新的邊緣,並隨著轉向技巧的提升,加快邊緣切換的速度。

Static Steering Exercise / Mason Jar
靜態轉向練習 / Mason Jar

With students on a flat area of the hill, and both feet attached to the snowboard, have them isolate the knees and feet and envision a turning motion. Have students “direct” the knees toward the heel edge by both rotating and driving them toward the nose of the snowboard, and in the opposite direction for the toeside. As an analogy, have them imagine an extra-large “Mason Jar” sitting on the snowboard between the feet. The lid of the jar is at knee-level. Have them picture loosening and tightening the jar’s lid with each steering motion.
讓學生站在山坡的平坦區域,雙腳固定在滑雪板上,讓他們專注於膝蓋和腳,想像一個轉彎動作。讓學生透過旋轉並將膝蓋朝向滑雪板鼻端推動,來「引導」膝蓋朝向後跟邊緣,腳趾邊則反方向操作。作為比喻,讓他們想像一個超大號的「Mason Jar」放在雙腳之間的滑雪板上,罐蓋位於膝蓋高度。讓他們想像每次轉向動作都像是在鬆開和旋緊罐蓋。

Static Rotation Exercise
靜態旋轉練習

On flat terrain, and with the snowboard not attached to the feet, have students feel total body rotation as a means to create their first turns, beginning with the head and shoulders, and progressing to the hips, and finally continuing to the knees, feet and the snowboard. Have students try rotation towards the heel edge as well as the toe edge, while ensuring their eyes are focussed forward, over the “nose” of the board.
在平坦地形上,且滑雪板未綁在腳上時,讓學生感受全身旋轉,作為創造他們第一個轉彎的方式,從頭部和肩膀開始,逐漸延伸到臀部,最後持續到膝蓋、腳和滑雪板。讓學生嘗試向腳跟邊以及腳趾邊旋轉,同時確保他們的視線集中在滑雪板「鼻端」的前方。

Twist the Disks扭轉轉盤

Have students practice the Static Rotation Exercise (as above) with the snowboard off, but focus on completing the rotation by slightly turning the feet to affect the snowboard. Have students imaging their binding disks are loosened, allowing them to rotate the binding around the disk, when completing this movement. At higher levels, have students envision this analogy while riding.
讓學生練習靜態旋轉練習(如上所述),滑雪板未綁時進行,但重點是透過稍微轉動腳來完成旋轉,影響滑雪板。讓學生想像他們的綁定轉盤已被鬆開,允許他們在完成此動作時繞著轉盤旋轉綁定。在較高階段,讓學生在滑行時想像這個比喻。

X-TurnsX 型轉彎

Alternate skill focus: Position & Balance, Pressure
替代技能重點:姿勢與平衡、壓力

On flat terrain, with both feet attached to the snowboard, have students perform a small hop, in conjunction with slight rotation of the body toward the toe or heel edge. Once completed a number of times, the resulting pattern in the snow should resemble an " X X XX ".
在平坦地形上,雙腳固定於滑雪板上,讓學生做小跳躍,並同時稍微旋轉身體朝向腳尖邊或腳跟邊。完成多次後,雪地上形成的軌跡應該像一個「 X X XX 」。

To progress, have students feel the effect of using strictly upper-body rotation, and then incorporating lower-body involvement (steering) with the knees and feet. This allows students to feel the effects of a centre pivot point in short radius turns, as well as the us of rotation with lower-body steering. Ensure that alignment is maintained throughout this stationary exercise.
為了進階,讓學生感受僅使用上半身旋轉的效果,接著加入膝蓋和腳的下半身參與(轉向)。這讓學生能體會短半徑轉彎中以中心樞軸點為基礎的動作,以及結合下半身轉向的旋轉運用。確保在此靜止練習中保持身體對齊。

EDGING邊緣處理

Clock Face Analogy時鐘面比喻

As rider ability increases, students should have the ability to engage the new edge earlier in the new turn. Have students imagine a clock face, with one side of the circle representing a turn arc. Use this analogy to point out to them where the new edge should be established
隨著騎乘能力的提升,學生應該能夠在新轉彎中更早地啟動新的邊緣。讓學生想像一個時鐘面盤,圓的一側代表轉彎弧線。利用這個比喻來指出他們應該在哪裡建立新的邊緣

(IE: 10 o’clock and 2 o’clock). An engaged edge is evident through the point at which the snow begins to spray away from the turning arc.
(例如:10 點鐘和 2 點鐘位置)。啟動的邊緣可以從雪開始從轉彎弧線噴散的點看出來。

Drinks on Shoulders肩膀上的飲料

Alternate skill focus: Position & Balance
替代技能重點:姿勢與平衡

As a means of creating angulation, have students ride, envisioning they have drinks balanced on each shoulder. Their goal is to avoid spilling the drinks as they increase the edge angle, by increasing the amount of angulation used.
作為創造傾斜角度的方法,讓學生騎乘時想像肩膀上各平衡著一杯飲料。他們的目標是在增加傾斜角度的同時,避免飲料灑出。

Stop-N-Hop's停止跳躍

Alternate skill focus: Pressure
替代技能重點:壓力

On terrain suitable for ability level, have students sideslip at a moderate speed on either the toe or heel edge. Have students stop by flexing the lower joints, thus increasing the edge angle. After stopping, students should balance on edge, and attempt three hops (either uphill or downhill) by maintaining a balanced position over the edge, and keeping a stable edge grip. Have students try on both the toe and heel edges, as well as hopping both up and downhill.
在適合能力等級的地形上,讓學生以中等速度在腳尖或腳跟邊緣側滑。讓學生透過屈曲下肢關節來停止,從而增加邊緣角度。停止後,學生應該保持邊緣平衡,並嘗試進行三次跳躍(可向上坡或下坡),保持在邊緣上的平衡姿勢,並維持穩定的邊緣抓地力。讓學生嘗試腳尖和腳跟邊緣,以及向上坡和下坡跳躍。

Hop-Carved Turns跳躍雕刻轉彎

Alternate skill focus: Position & Balance, Pressure, Timing & Coordination
替代技能重點:姿勢與平衡、壓力、時機與協調

Have students complete a series of sidecut turns (as described above). During the edge change phase of the turn, have them hop slightly off of both feet at the end of the turn, and land on the new edge at the start of the next turn. The edge change takes place in the air, and students must find a pencil-line carved edge immediately upon landing.
讓學生完成一系列側切轉彎(如上所述)。在轉彎的換刃階段,讓他們在轉彎結束時雙腳稍微跳起,並在下一個轉彎開始時落在新的刃口上。換刃動作在空中完成,學生必須在落地時立即找到鉛筆線雕刻的刃口。

Inverse Traverse反向橫越

Alternate skill focus: Position & Balance
替代技能重點:位置與平衡

An exercise to encourage a commitment to an early edge-set. At the exit from the turn, extend the traverse phase across the hill, and attempt to set the downhill edge and maintain the direction of travel across the hill. Repeat as terrain allows.
一個鼓勵提早壓邊承諾的練習。在出彎時,將橫移階段延伸至山坡上,並嘗試設定下坡邊緣,保持沿山坡的行進方向。視地形允許重複進行。

Pour Water From Boots
Alternate skill focus: Pressure
從靴子倒水 交替技能重點:壓力

An analogy to have students begin to develop smooth application and removal of edge angle in carved turns. Have them imagine their boots are filled with water, and as they begin each turn, they are trying to pour the water in a controlled fashion. As they finish the turn, they are to gradually stop pouring the water, changes, and begin on the opposite turn.
一個比喻,讓學員開始發展在刻滑轉彎中平順地施加與解除邊緣角度。讓他們想像靴子裡裝滿水,當開始每個轉彎時,嘗試以受控的方式倒出水。完成轉彎時,逐漸停止倒水,改變方向,開始另一側的轉彎。

Sidecut Turns側切轉彎

Alternate skill focus: Position & Balance, Pressure
替代技能重點:姿勢與平衡、壓力

On mellow (green) terrain, have students ride in a balanced, centred position. With slight inclination (lean) to the toe edge, have them establish a carved turn, and simply maintain that position, allowing the sidecut of the snowboard to dictate the turn shape. Once the toe turn is completed, gradually return to the centred position, and incline to the heelside, maintaining a carved turn, and again relying on the sidecut of the snowboard to create a completed turn. Safety and speed control are important considerations - ensure that the terrain is flat enough to keep speed to a safe rate.
在平緩(綠色)地形上,讓學生保持平衡且居中的姿勢。稍微傾斜(傾向)腳尖邊緣,讓他們建立一個刻滑轉彎,並保持該姿勢,讓滑雪板的側切面決定轉彎形狀。完成腳尖轉彎後,逐漸回到居中姿勢,並傾向腳跟邊緣,保持刻滑轉彎,同樣依靠滑雪板的側切面完成轉彎。安全與速度控制是重要考量——確保地形足夠平坦,以保持速度在安全範圍內。

Slap Base拍打底板

On suitable terrain for ability levels, have students try to create a quicker edge change by using the ankles to “slap” the base of the board on the snow while changing edges. Have them envision the slapping sound of the edge change. While this may be impossible to achieve, the analogy can be very effective in creating an efficient edge change.
在適合能力等級的地形上,讓學生嘗試透過腳踝「拍打」滑雪板底部於雪面上來加快換邊速度。讓他們想像換邊時拍打的聲音。雖然實際達成此聲音可能不易,但這個比喻對於創造有效率的換邊動作非常有幫助。

Speed Checks速度檢查

Alternate skill focus: Pivot / Steering
替代技能重點:轉軸/轉向

Have students ride with a relatively flat base, allowing the speed to increase. Have them quickly turn the snowboard across the fall line, and apply a maximum amount of edge to briefly slow the snowboard down, and then return to the starting position. Safety is the largest consideration when completing this exercise.
讓學生保持相對平坦的基底滑行,讓速度增加。讓他們快速將滑雪板轉向斜坡下方,並施加最大邊緣力以短暫減速,然後回到起始位置。完成此練習時,安全是最重要的考量。
To create an earlier edge within the turn, have students envision they have sponsors standing along the sides of the run. With each turn, their goal is to show the base of their board to the sponsors standing at the side of the run. This analogy is effective in helping to increase the amount of edge used in the turn. For advanced riders, have them attempt to show the base of the snowboard uphill, creating a quicker edge change, and maximum edge angle.
要在轉彎中提早使用邊緣,讓學生想像他們的贊助商站在滑道兩側。每次轉彎時,他們的目標是向站在滑道側邊的贊助商展示滑雪板的底部。這個比喻能有效幫助增加轉彎時使用的邊緣量。對於進階騎士,讓他們嘗試將滑雪板底部朝向上坡方向展示,創造更快速的邊緣切換和最大邊緣角度。

Spray the Trees噴雪樹林

Alternate skill focus: Pressure, Timing & Coordination
交替技能重點:壓力、時機與協調

To increase the amount of edging students are applying, have them attempt to spray snow to the sides of the run (trees), while riding.
為了增加學生施加的邊緣量,讓他們嘗試在滑行時向滑道兩側(樹林)噴射雪花。

Static Edging Exercise靜態刃邊練習

Alternate skill focus: Position & Balance
交替技能重點:姿勢與平衡

With the front foot attached to the snowboard, and on an area with a slight slope, have students practice edging the snowboard using the hips, knees and ankles. On the heelside, have them focus on “sitting” toward the bindings, as well as flexing the ankle slightly to moderate edge. On the toeside, have students maintain an upright position, with the hips under the shoulders, and move the knees toward the snow to create edge angle.
前腳固定在滑雪板上,並選擇一個有輕微斜度的區域,讓學生練習利用臀部、膝蓋和腳踝來控制滑雪板的刃邊。在後腳跟邊緣時,讓他們專注於「坐向」綁帶方向,同時稍微屈曲腳踝以調節刃邊。在腳趾邊緣時,讓學生保持直立姿勢,臀部位於肩膀正下方,並將膝蓋朝向雪面移動以形成刃邊角度。

PRESSURE壓力

Cowboy Knees牛仔膝蓋

Alternate skill focus: Position & Balance
替代技能重點:姿勢與平衡

Have riders focus on maintaining a stance with knees apart (as if riding a horse), to help to maintain even pressure across the entire length of the snowboard. This also assists in absorption, as their range of motion is increased when the knees are free to flex and extend.
讓騎乘者專注於保持膝蓋分開的站姿(如同騎馬般),以幫助在整個滑雪板長度上保持均勻的壓力。這也有助於吸收衝擊,因為當膝蓋能自由彎曲和伸展時,活動範圍會增加。

Dolphin Turns海豚轉彎

Alternate skill focus: Position & Balance
替代技能重點:姿勢與平衡

To encourage board performance and independent pressuring of the front and back foot, have students perform shorter radius sliding turns. As the student approaches the end of the turn, prior to edge change, have them pressure the tail of the board, and use this pressure to leave the snow, similar to an ollie. In the air, the board is re-directed toward the new edge, and the rider lands with excess pressure on the front foot, and then continues with the following turn. Repeat this sequence for each turn - finish on the tail, change edges in the air, land and start the new turn on the nose of the board.
為了鼓勵滑板的表現以及前後腳的獨立施壓,讓學生進行較短半徑的滑行轉彎。當學生接近轉彎結束、尚未換邊時,讓他們施壓於滑板尾部,並利用這個壓力離開雪面,類似於跳躍(ollie)。在空中,滑板會重新導向新的邊緣,騎士以過度施壓於前腳著陸,然後繼續進行下一個轉彎。每個轉彎都重複這個動作——尾部著地結束,空中換邊,著陸後以滑板頭開始新的轉彎。

Fall-Line Stops落線停止

Alternate skill focus: Position & Balance, Edging
交替技能重點:姿勢與平衡、邊緣控制

To increase student’s understanding of flexion and extension movements, have them straight run on moderate terrain (both feet attached to snowboard). Have students initiate a 90 turn, bringing the snowboard across the fall line, and apply edge and pressure to stop the snowboard. Ask students to try this multiple times, on both edges. Ask students to identify the movements involved in stopping the snowboard - extending the legs to apply pressure, and flexing to control pressures.
為了增加學生對屈伸動作的理解,讓他們在中等坡度地形上直線滑行(雙腳皆綁在滑雪板上)。讓學生啟動 90 度轉彎,將滑雪板橫越落線,並施加邊緣壓力以停止滑雪板。請學生多次嘗試,並在兩個邊緣上練習。請學生辨識停止滑雪板時所涉及的動作——伸展雙腿以施壓,屈曲以控制壓力。

Ollies / Nollies

Alternate skill focus: Position & Balance, Timing & Coordination
替代技能重點:姿勢與平衡、時機與協調

Beginning on flat terrain, have students attempt ollies and nollies as a stationary exercise.
從平地開始,讓學生嘗試以靜止姿勢練習 ollies 和 nollies。

If needed, assist student to shift weight to the tail of the snowboard, while flexing the lower joints. In an explosive motion, extend off of the tail of the snowboard, into the air.
如有需要,協助學生將重心移至滑雪板尾部,同時屈曲下肢關節。以爆發力從滑雪板尾部蹬起,跳躍至空中。

Retract both legs under the body while in the air, and slightly extend to land, landing on both feet equally. To complete a nollies, perform in the opposite direction (springing off the nose of the snowboard). An important consideration when performing ollies/nollies is to ensure that adequate flex is achieved in the lower body, and that the student is using the “spring” in the snowboard to assist in the ollie or nollie.
在空中將雙腿收回至身體下方,並稍微伸展以著陸,雙腳均勻著地。要完成 nollies,則需朝相反方向進行(從滑雪板的前端彈起)。執行 ollies/nollies 時,一個重要的考量是確保下半身有足夠的彎曲度,並且學生能利用滑雪板的「彈力」來輔助完成 ollie 或 nollie。

Pump Turns泵轉

Alternate skill focus: Edging
交替技能重點:邊緣控制

Have students ride at a moderate speed on open terrain, completing large radius sliding or carved turns. As they progress through the turn, have them experiment with vertical movement - flexing and extending to change the pressures affecting the snowboard. As they flex, the edge angle increases, thus decreasing the turn radius. Extending will cause an initial loading of pressure on the snowboard, resulting in a release or rebound when done at greater speeds. This exercise allows students to begin to feel the effects of resultant pressure, as well as increased performance in the snowboard.
讓學生以中等速度在開闊地形上滑行,完成大半徑的滑行轉彎或刻滑轉彎。隨著他們在轉彎過程中的進展,讓他們嘗試垂直移動——屈曲和伸展以改變作用於滑雪板的壓力。當他們屈曲時,邊緣角度會增加,從而減小轉彎半徑。伸展則會導致滑雪板初期承受壓力,當速度較快時會產生釋放或反彈。這個練習讓學生開始感受到合力壓力的效果,以及滑雪板性能的提升。

Small Straight Airs小型直線空中動作

Alternate skill focus: Position & Balance, Timing & Coordination
替代技能重點:姿勢與平衡、時機與協調

Have students ride over undulating terrain, suitable for their ability level, and experiment with rapid extension at the top of bumps or rolls in terrain. Their extension should be timed with the natural un-weighting of riding over a bump, to allow the snowboard to leave the snow. Ensure students are landing with “soft” legs, flexing the hips, knees and ankles to absorb the landing.
讓學生在適合其能力水平的起伏地形上滑行,並嘗試在地形的隆起或起伏頂端快速伸展。伸展的時機應與滑過隆起時自然的減重同步,以使滑雪板能離開雪面。確保學生以「柔軟」的雙腿著陸,屈曲臀部、膝蓋和腳踝來吸收著陸衝擊。

Static Down Un-Weighting
靜態減重

Alternate skill focus: Position & Balance, Pivot/Steering, Edging, Timing & Coordination
替代技能重點:姿勢與平衡、轉軸/操控、刃邊控制、時機與協調

Used to illustrate the concept of down un-weighting. On flat terrain, with the front foot attached to the snowboard only, have students assume a flexed, low position with the back foot on the board, between the bindings. Have them extend and project the body slightly toward the toe edge. Move the back foot out onto the snow to support the body. Start to move back toward the snowboard by flexing the legs, and “retracting” the legs under the body. Move the foot back onto the snowboard, and extend the opposite way, toward the heel edge. Repeat as necessary, allowing students to feel the concept of un-weighting by “pulling” the snowboard off the snow in conjunction with the edge change. Also, have them feel the pressure between the snowboard base and the snow increase as they extend away from the board.
用於說明減重的概念。在平坦地形上,前腳固定在滑雪板上,讓學生採取屈膝、低姿勢,後腳放在滑雪板上,位於綁帶之間。讓他們稍微向腳尖邊伸展並前傾身體。將後腳移出滑雪板,踩在雪面上以支撐身體。開始屈膝,將腿部「收回」至身體下方,向滑雪板靠近。將腳移回滑雪板上,並向相反方向、腳跟邊伸展。視需要重複此動作,讓學生感受透過邊緣變換「拉起」滑雪板離開雪面的減重概念。同時,讓他們感受當身體向外伸展時,滑雪板底部與雪面之間的壓力增加。

TIMING & COORDINATION時機與協調

Counting, Singing, Gates, Pylons
數數、唱歌、門柱、錐桶

Set a rhythmical pattern for riders to follow, either by counting or singing in their head, or with the use of gates or obstacles. This allows riders to begin to develop symmetry between toe and heelside turns.
為騎士設定一個節奏模式,可以透過心中數拍或唱歌,或是利用門檻或障礙物。這讓騎士開始培養腳尖轉彎與腳跟轉彎之間的對稱性。

Follow-Cam Run跟拍鏡頭跑法

Similar to “Top Gun Turns”, but used in a Terrain Park. Have students pair up, with the leading rider setting the course, and the trailing rider following.
類似於「Top Gun 轉彎」,但用於地形公園。讓學生兩人一組,前方的騎士設定路線,後方的騎士跟隨。

Side Slipping to Short Radius Turns
側滑進行短半徑轉彎

Have students begin on a moderate slope by side slipping in a narrow corridor. After side slipping for approximately 15 metres, have them complete a single turn to the opposite edge, and side slip again. Repeat this sequence, reducing the distance the rider is side slipping each time, until they are completing short radius turns in a narrow corridor.
讓學生在中等坡度開始,沿著狹窄的走廊側滑。側滑約 15 公尺後,讓他們完成一次轉彎到對側邊緣,再次側滑。重複此動作,每次減少側滑距離,直到能在狹窄走廊內完成短半徑轉彎。

Slopestyle Run花式滑雪跑道

Have students plan in their head their run through a terrain park, or through a challenging run prior to riding down the run. The challenge to their Timing & Coordination skills lies in accomplishing all of the manoeuvres or direction changes that they had planned.
讓學生在心中規劃他們在地形公園或挑戰性路線上的滑行路線,然後再開始滑行。對他們的時機與協調能力的挑戰在於完成所有他們所規劃的動作或方向變換。

Top Gun Turns頂尖轉彎

Have students ride in pairs, with the front rider setting the path, and the following rider trying to follow. This exercise develops coordination and timing skills in riders, as they are forced to ride out of their natural rhythm or chosen path. Have students switch roles and repeat.
讓學生兩人一組滑行,前方的騎士設定路線,後方的騎士嘗試跟隨。這個練習能培養騎士的協調與時機感,因為他們必須跳脫自然節奏或原本選擇的路線。讓學生交換角色並重複練習。

Tornado Turns龍捲風轉彎

On terrain with a consistent slope, ask students to begin by completing large radius turns.
在坡度一致的地形上,請學生先從完成大半徑轉彎開始。

As they progress down the slope, ask them to begin to speed up the timing of their movements, to allow the radius of turns to begin to decrease to medium, and if suitable, short radius turns over the course of the run. Ask them to try to determine what they had to do to change the radius of the turns.
當他們沿著斜坡前進時,請他們開始加快動作的節奏,讓轉彎的半徑逐漸縮小到中等半徑,如果適合,也可以在滑行過程中嘗試短半徑轉彎。請他們試著判斷為了改變轉彎半徑需要做哪些動作。
Feel free to add your own exercises and drills…
歡迎自由加入您自己的練習和訓練內容…

EQUIPMENT SET-UP 裝備設置

Since the late 70 's when snowboarding involved standing on a plastic “snurfer” or on a wooden sled while holding a rope, the sport has undergone a tremendous evolution.
自從 70 年代末期,當時滑雪板運動還只是站在塑膠「snurfer」或握著繩索坐在木製雪橇上時,這項運動已經經歷了巨大的演變。

CHOOSING THE RIGHT EQUIPMENT
選擇合適的裝備

The following information will facilitate making the best choice.
以下資訊將有助於做出最佳選擇。

1. Riding Skill1. 騎乘技巧

When first learning to ride, look for learning-specific equipment (e.g.: Burton LTR). This kind of board will make it easy to learn. Some companies are currently making boards that feature centred stances, soft flex patterns, topsheet traction, and a bevelled base profile to help minimize edge catches.
初學騎乘時,建議選擇專為學習設計的裝備(例如:Burton LTR)。這類滑板能讓學習過程更輕鬆。一些公司目前製造的滑板具有居中站姿、柔軟的彎曲度、頂板防滑設計,以及斜角底板輪廓,以幫助減少刃邊卡住的情況。

2. Intended Use2. 預期用途

TYPE OF BOARD板型 TYPE OF TERRAN地形類型
Camber / Twin or Directional Shape / Stiffer Flex
弧度 / 雙板或單向造型 / 較硬的彈性
Groomers / Hard Pack (on-piste)
整備雪道/硬雪(場內)
Rocker, Flat or Hybrid / Directional & Tapered Shape
搖擺式、平底或混合式/定向與錐形設計
Varied terrain / backcountry / soft snow (off-piste)
多變地形/野雪區/軟雪(場外)
Camber or Hybrid / Twin Shape / Twin Flex
拱底或混合式/雙尖設計/雙彈性
Park / Freestyle公園 / 自由式
TYPE OF BOARD TYPE OF TERRAN Camber / Twin or Directional Shape / Stiffer Flex Groomers / Hard Pack (on-piste) Rocker, Flat or Hybrid / Directional & Tapered Shape Varied terrain / backcountry / soft snow (off-piste) Camber or Hybrid / Twin Shape / Twin Flex Park / Freestyle| TYPE OF BOARD | TYPE OF TERRAN | | :--- | :--- | | Camber / Twin or Directional Shape / Stiffer Flex | Groomers / Hard Pack (on-piste) | | Rocker, Flat or Hybrid / Directional & Tapered Shape | Varied terrain / backcountry / soft snow (off-piste) | | Camber or Hybrid / Twin Shape / Twin Flex | Park / Freestyle |

3. Foot Size3. 腳的尺寸

The width of the board should accommodate the length of the foot with minimal heel or toe overhang. Considering that a narrower board is more responsive edge to edge, the rider should choose the narrowest board possible that will accommodate the preferred stance and use.
滑雪板的寬度應該能夠容納腳的長度,且腳跟或腳尖的懸空部分要盡量減少。考慮到較窄的滑雪板在邊緣轉換時反應更靈敏,騎乘者應選擇能夠符合偏好站姿和使用需求的最窄滑雪板。

4. Size & Weight
4. 尺寸與體重

These are important factors that will influence your choice of board. A snowboard adapted to your weight will be much easier to handle and allow you to get the most out of it. Most manufacturers will have a recommended weight range for every size of each model.
這些是會影響你選擇滑雪板的重要因素。適合你體重的滑雪板會更容易操控,並讓你發揮出最大的性能。大多數製造商會針對每個型號的每個尺寸提供建議的體重範圍。

BASIC TERMINOLOGY基本術語

Running length有效滑行長度

This is the true measure of the functional length of the board - the length of the edge that is in contact with the snow during a turn. It is commonly measured as the distance from the widest point in the tail to the widest point in the nose.
這是真正衡量滑雪板功能性長度的指標——在轉彎時與雪面接觸的邊緣長度。通常測量方式是從尾部最寬點到頭部最寬點的距離。

Width寬度

The overall width of the board is the distance from edge to edge, usually measured in three places.
滑雪板的整體寬度是指從一邊邊緣到另一邊邊緣的距離,通常會在三個位置進行測量。
  • Nose: The width of the board at the widest point in the nose
    鼻部:板子在鼻部最寬處的寬度
  • Waist: The narrowest point in the middle of the board
    腰部:板子中間最窄的部分
  • Tail: The widest point in the tail of the board
    尾部:板子尾部最寬的部分
The width of a board determines how fast the edge-to-edge transfer can be made in a turn. A wider board will require more time than a narrower board.
滑雪板的寬度決定了在轉彎時從一邊邊緣轉移到另一邊邊緣的速度。較寬的滑雪板所需時間會比較窄的滑雪板長。

Sidecut側切弧度

A snowboard is the most narrow at its waist, about half way between the tip of tail. The transition from a wide tip to the narrow waist, and again to a wide tail is a smooth arc referred to as sidecut. The simplest way to gauge the sidecut is to put the side of the board perpendicular to a wall and measure the gap between the wall and the edge of the board. It can also be seen as curvature in the edge when looking down the length of the board along its base.
滑雪板在腰部最窄,約位於板頭與板尾的中間位置。從寬闊的板頭過渡到狹窄的腰部,再回到寬闊的板尾,形成一個平滑的弧線,稱為側切弧度。判斷側切弧度最簡單的方法是將滑雪板側邊垂直靠在牆上,測量牆面與滑雪板邊緣之間的間隙。從滑雪板底部沿長度方向往下看,也可以看到邊緣的弧度。

The sidecut of a board is usually a section from the circumference of a circle (although some manufacturers may use more complex arc equations). The radius of the circle used to create the sidecut helps to define the natural turning radius of a board - the smaller the radius of the sidecut, the smaller the turning radius of the board. Logically, this translates into a deeper side cut depth.
滑雪板的側切弧度通常是取自圓周的一段(雖然有些製造商可能會使用更複雜的弧線方程式)。用來製造側切弧度的圓的半徑,有助於定義滑雪板的自然轉彎半徑——側切弧度的半徑越小,滑雪板的轉彎半徑也越小。邏輯上,這意味著側切弧度的深度越大。

BOARD BENDS板身弧度

Camber:拱形:

Powerful, poppy, and precise-camber speaks to the core values of board design. Offering a snappy suspension, camber distributes weight evenly over the entire length of the board for smooth, continuous edge control from tip to tail.
強勁、有彈性且精準的拱形設計,體現了滑雪板設計的核心價值。拱形提供靈敏的懸吊效果,將重量均勻分布於整個板身長度,從板頭到板尾實現平順且連續的邊緣控制。

Rocker:反拱:

Rocker overall, including between and outside your feet, enhancing playfulness (through increased pivot) and float in deep snow.
整體搖擺設計,包括腳間及腳外,提升趣味性(透過增加旋轉點)及深雪中的浮力。

Hybrid:混合式:

A blend of camber and rocker offers the best of both worlds. Rocker overall, between or outside your feet, enhancing playfulness and float. Subtle camber zones focus edge-control for crisp snap, added pop, and powerful turns.
結合了凸起與搖擺的設計,兼具兩者優點。整體搖擺設計,包含腳間或腳外,提升趣味性與浮力。細膩的凸起區域專注於邊緣控制,帶來清晰的反應、額外的彈跳力及強勁的轉彎能力。

Flat:平板:

A flat profile between the feet means stability, better balance, and continuous edge control. The tip and tail sometimes kick up with an early rise outside the feet for the catch-free, loose feeling you’d expect from rocker.
雙腳之間的平板輪廓代表穩定性、更佳的平衡感,以及持續的邊緣控制。板頭和板尾有時會在雙腳外側稍微翹起,帶來無勾腳、輕鬆自在的感覺,正如你從搖擺板(rocker)所期待的那樣。

BOARD SHAPES板型

Directional Shape:定向形狀:

The classic snowboard shape, designed to be ridden with a slightly longer nose than tail to concentrate pop in the tail while still giving you plenty of float, flow, and control to rip any terrain or condition.
經典的滑雪板造型,設計時將板頭略長於板尾,以便將彈跳力集中在板尾,同時仍能提供充足的浮力、流暢感和控制力,讓你能在任何地形或條件下盡情馳騁。

Twin Shape:雙向造型:

Perfectly symmetrical for a balanced ride that’s equally versatile when ridden regular or switch. Jib, spin, stomp, and butter with a greater balance of freestyle mobility and cat-like stability no matter which way you point it.
完美對稱,提供平衡的騎乘感受,無論正向或反向騎乘都同樣多功能。無論是滑行、旋轉、著陸還是做出奶油般的動作,都能在自由式的靈活性與貓般的穩定性之間取得更佳平衡。

Tapered:錐形:

A tapered shape means the nose is wider than the tail, promoting smooth turn entry and subdued turn exit, stability at speed, and enhanced deep snow flotation.
錐形設計表示鼻部比尾部寬,有助於順暢進入轉彎並減緩轉彎退出,提升高速穩定性及深雪浮力。

BOARD FLEX板身彈性

Twin Flex:雙重彈性:

The flex is perfectly symmetrical from tip to tail for a balanced ride that’s equally versatile regular or switch.
彈性從板頭到板尾完全對稱,提供平衡的騎乘感受,無論正向或反向騎乘都同樣多功能。

Directional Flex:方向性彈性:

This flex pattern features increased stiffness/pop in the tail and a more forgiving nose that allows riders to easily maintain control through all terrain and conditions.
這種彈性模式在尾部具有較高的剛性和彈跳感,而鼻部則較為寬容,讓騎士能輕鬆掌控各種地形和條件。

BOOTS & BINDINGS靴子與綁帶

The two most important factors to consider when buying boots and binding are:
購買靴子和綁帶時,最重要的兩個考量因素是:
  • Intended use (terrain / style of riding)
    預期用途(地形/騎乘風格)
  • Comfort舒適度

Boots靴子

The choice of boots will depend on your size and weight and your style of riding whether it is Freeride, Park or Carving; boots come in all shapes and form, from super flexible to very stiff.
靴子的選擇將取決於您的尺寸和體重,以及您的騎乘風格,無論是自由騎乘、滑雪公園還是雕刻滑行;靴子有各種形狀和款式,從超柔軟到非常硬挺。

Soft boots軟靴

For use with traditional strap bindings, soft boots provide ample stability and comfort, yet are also soft enough to provide ankle mobility.
用於傳統綁帶固定器時,軟靴提供充足的穩定性和舒適度,同時也足夠柔軟以提供腳踝的靈活性。

Hard boots硬靴

For race boards riding at higher speeds, hard boots provide far more support and stability; they provide a quicker and more precise response when carving, although minimal versatility in varied terrain.
對於以較高速騎乘的賽事滑板,硬殼靴提供更多的支撐與穩定性;在切彎時能提供更快速且精準的反應,儘管在多變地形上的適應性較低。

BINDINGS綁帶

Soft Boot / Strap Bindings
軟靴/綁帶式綁具

Like the soft boots, strap bindings come in many shapes and forms. Various level of stiffness, size and adjustments are offered by all binding manufacturers such as:
像軟靴一樣,綁帶式綁具有許多不同的形狀和款式。所有綁具製造商都提供各種剛性、尺寸和調整選項,例如:
  • Forward lean adjustment前傾角度調整
  • Highback rotation後背板旋轉調整
  • Strap length and height adjustment
    綁帶長度與高度調整
  • Base plate adjustment (canting, toe ramps, etc.)
    底板調整(傾斜、腳趾坡道等)

Hard Boot / Plate Bindings
硬殼靴/底板綁定裝置

Plate bindings are the attachment for hard boots and are often combined with a riser plate as an interface between the bindings and the board. Various level of stiffness, size and adjustments are offered by all plate bindings manufacturers such as:
底板綁定裝置是硬殼靴的固定裝置,通常會與墊高板結合,作為綁定裝置與滑雪板之間的介面。所有底板綁定裝置製造商皆提供不同程度的剛性、尺寸及調整選項,例如:
  • Boot size adjustment靴子尺寸調整
  • Adjustable heel lift可調式後跟墊高
  • Adjustable toe lift可調式前趾墊高
  • Adjustable lateral inclination (commonly called “canting”)
    可調式側傾角(通常稱為「傾斜調整」)

SNOWBOARD, BOOT & BINDING SET UP
滑雪板、靴子與綁帶的設定

It is important to have the equipment set up for optimal performance and comfort. It is important to experiment with the set up of your boots and bindings until you find something that works well for your style of riding.
為了達到最佳的性能與舒適度,設備的設定非常重要。你需要不斷嘗試靴子與綁帶的設定,直到找到最適合你滑行風格的方式。

STANCE WIDTH站姿寬度

There are no right or wrong answers here but remember that too wide or too narrow will impair your ability to make the snowboard perform. Most snowboard manufacturers have recommended stance options printed on the board; this is a great starting point. Do some experimenting to find the stance width that’s most comfortable for you.
這裡沒有絕對的對錯,但請記得站姿過寬或過窄都會影響滑雪板的表現。大多數滑雪板製造商會在板面上標示建議的站姿選項,這是個很好的起點。你可以多做嘗試,找到最適合自己的站姿寬度。

POSITION ON THE BOARD (tip to tail)
板上定位(從頭到尾)

Most snowboard manufacturers have a reference position printed on the board; this position is the optimal position to get the most out of the board (if your board does not have a reference point for stance simply start for the narrowest point of the board (waist) and go equal distance towards the nose and tail). If you need a wider stance simply move the front binding towards the nose the SAME amount as you move the back binding towards the tail and towards the centre of board for a narrower stance.
大多數滑雪板製造商會在板上印有參考定位點;此定位點是讓滑雪板發揮最佳性能的理想位置(如果你的滑雪板沒有標示站姿參考點,請從板最窄的部分(腰部)開始,並向前後兩端等距離調整)。如果需要較寬的站姿,只要將前綁帶向板頭方向移動的距離,與後綁帶向板尾方向移動的距離相同;若要較窄的站姿,則將綁帶往板中心移動。

CENTRING TOE AND HEEL SIDES
腳趾與腳跟側邊置中

It is important to minimize toe and heel overhang in order to reduce drag when putting the board on edge. Start by placing the boot in the binding and placing them both on the board and centre the boot from edge to edge. With the boot pointed straight across the board so there is an equal amount of toe and heel overhang or under hang. If you have small feet (women/kids) you should aim to have your toes as close to the toe edge without going over to avoid unnecessary flexing of the lower joints to put the board on edge. If the board chosen does not allow for minimal overhang of toes and/or heels, consider a wider board.
為了減少將滑雪板傾斜時的阻力,重要的是要將腳趾和腳跟的懸垂部分降到最低。首先將靴子放入綁帶中,並將兩者放置在滑雪板上,從板邊緣到邊緣將靴子置中。靴子應直指板面,使腳趾和腳跟的懸垂或未達邊緣部分相等。如果你的腳較小(女性或兒童),應盡量讓腳趾靠近板頭邊緣但不超出,以避免下肢關節為了將板傾斜而過度彎曲。如果所選的滑雪板無法讓腳趾和/或腳跟的懸垂降到最低,建議考慮使用較寬的滑雪板。

STANCE ANGLES站姿角度

Stance angles are dictated by a number of factors, including riding style, boot size, board width and board type. Similar to stance width; you should try different angles until you find angles that provide a comfortable and efficient position for your style of riding.
站姿角度由多種因素決定,包括騎乘風格、靴子尺寸、滑板寬度及滑板類型。與站姿寬度類似;你應該嘗試不同的角度,直到找到適合你騎乘風格且舒適有效的位置。

Duck Stance:鴨式站姿:

Positive angles on front foot / negative angles on the back foot. For example: +18 degrees front / -6 degrees back.
前腳為正角度/後腳為負角度。例如:前腳+18 度/後腳-6 度。
Good for various riding styles as it allows for versatility between forward and switch directions.
適合各種騎乘風格,因為它允許在正向與反向之間靈活切換。

Due to its versatility this type of stance is most commonly used. The specific stance angles will vary based on your chosen riding style, your physical characteristics, and your equipment.
由於其多功能性,這種類型的站姿是最常見的。具體的站姿角度會根據您選擇的騎乘風格、您的身體特徵以及您的裝備而有所不同。

Forward Angles:正向角度:

Positive angles on front foot and on the back foot. For example: +18 front / +6 back.
前腳和後腳皆為正角度。例如:前腳+18 / 後腳+6。
Mostly used on speed or carving set-ups and race boards (alpine race and snowboardcross).
主要用於速度或雕刻的起步姿勢以及競速板(高山競速和單板越野)。

This stance will allow for a more open position (facing the nose of the board) and more efficient lateral movements from turn to turn, but will sacrifice some of the versatility that is found with a negative back foot angle, particularly as binding angles become more and more extreme (e.g.: on an alpine race board, binding angles may be as high as 60 degrees forward).
這種站姿會讓身體呈現較開放的姿勢(面向板頭),並且在轉彎時能更有效率地進行橫向移動,但會犧牲一些負角度後腳所帶來的多功能性,尤其當綁帶角度越來越極端時(例如:在高山競速板上,綁帶角度可能高達向前 60 度)。

HIGH-BACK ROTATION (soft boots)
高背旋轉(軟靴)

Most strap bindings have the option of rotating the high back. The more the highback is aligned with the heel edge of the board the better the response may be. Experiment to find the position that suits you the best.
大多數帶式綁帶都有調整高背旋轉角度的選項。高背越與板子的後跟邊緣對齊,反應可能越靈敏。請多加嘗試,找到最適合自己的位置。

FORWARD LEAN前傾角度

Most bindings (and hard boots) have forward lean adjustments. Forward lean can create a more direct response to the heel edge, by placing the knee and ankle in a more flexed position. Experiment with varying amounts of forward lean looking for the right balance of comfort and response.
大多數綁帶(以及硬殼靴)都有前傾角度調整功能。前傾角度能讓膝蓋和腳踝處於更彎曲的位置,從而對後跟邊緣產生更直接的反應。請嘗試不同的前傾角度,尋找舒適與反應之間的最佳平衡。

Note: Too much forward lean can lead to have your ankles “locked” in the flexed position, which can lead to a lack of mobility in certain situations. Experiment to find the amount that is best for you.
注意:過度的前傾角度可能會導致腳踝被「鎖定」在彎曲位置,進而在某些情況下限制活動度。請多加嘗試,找到最適合自己的前傾角度。

BASEPLATE TOE RAMPS底板腳尖斜坡

Many bindings incorporate “toe ramps”, which ensure a solid connection on the toeside edge between the boot and board. Ensure that the toe ramp is aligned properly for boot size and does not create overhang.
許多綁帶設有「腳尖斜坡」,可確保靴子與滑板在腳尖邊緣之間有穩固的連接。請確保腳尖斜坡與靴子尺寸對齊,且不會產生懸垂。

CARE & MAINTENANCE保養與維護

Once you have chosen your board, proper care and maintenance will enhance its performance and longevity. Basic tools and materials for proper maintenance:
選擇好滑板後,適當的保養與維護將提升其性能與使用壽命。基本的保養工具與材料包括:
  • Electric hot waxing iron
    電熱打蠟熨斗
  • Variety of waxes for different temperatures
    適用不同溫度的多種蠟
  • Plastic scraper塑膠刮板
  • Stiff nylon brush (to remove wax from the structure in your base)
    硬尼龍刷(用於清除底層結構上的蠟)
  • Soft nylon brush (to polish your wax after scrapping and stiff brushing)
    軟尼龍刷(用於刮除和硬刷後拋光蠟層)
  • Rags (to clean base before waxing and remove final wax residue from brushing)
    抹布(用於上蠟前清潔底層及刷除最後的蠟層殘留)
  • 90-88 degree edger or square block (for edge sharpening)
    90-88 度邊緣器或方形磨塊(用於磨利邊緣)
  • Medium fine soft bronze/brass brush (to clean metal shards from your edging file/block after each pass)
    中細軟青銅/黃銅刷(用於每次使用邊緣銼刀/磨塊後清除金屬碎屑)
Supplementary tools and material for advanced maintenance:
進階維修用輔助工具與材料:
  • 12" bastard file12 吋粗銼刀
  • 4" bastard file (or specialized file adapted for an edger)
    4 吋粗銼刀(或適用於刃磨機的專用銼刀)
  • Honing stone磨刀石
  • Sandpaper (80-120 silicon carbide grit)
    砂紙(80-120 號碳化矽砂粒)
  • Wax remover蠟質去除劑
  • Epoxy glue環氧膠
  • 3" clear tape3 吋透明膠帶
  • C-clamps and wood blocks
    C 型夾和木塊
  • Abrasive nylon pads研磨尼龍墊
  • Polyethylene (flakes, wire, candle, etc.)
    聚乙烯(薄片、線材、蠟燭等)
  • Appropriate apparatus to apply the polyethylene
    適用於塗佈聚乙烯的裝置

BOARD TUNING滑雪板調整

Snowboard manufacturers use a variety of base grinding and final factory base treatment methods. However, both new boards and used boards should undergo regular maintenance for better performance and increased longevity.
滑雪板製造商會使用各種底板研磨及最終工廠底板處理方法。然而,無論是新板還是二手板,都應定期進行保養,以提升性能並延長使用壽命。

1. Cleaning the base
1. 清潔底板

Before working on the base, clean the base to remove dirt that has accumulated during transportation or regular use. Don’t forget to clean the top surface, too. Use a wax solvent and a clean rag to remove the dirt build-up. A soft brush may be used to further remove dirt lodged in the small scratches on the base.
在處理底板之前,先清潔底板以去除運輸或日常使用中累積的髒汙。別忘了也要清潔板面的頂部。使用除蠟劑和乾淨的布擦拭,去除髒汙。也可以使用軟毛刷,進一步清除卡在底板細小刮痕中的髒汙。
Note: Since the wax remover will remove some of the beneficial wax that has already penetrated the base during previous treatments, it is important to always wax your board after using solvents on the base. Avoid using wax remover near open flames.
注意:由於去蠟劑會去除部分先前處理中已滲透到底層的有益蠟,因此在使用溶劑處理底層後,務必重新打蠟。避免在明火附近使用去蠟劑。

2. Check the Edges
2. 檢查邊緣

Repair修復

If you damage an edge, it should be repaired in the following manner:
如果邊緣受損,應按照以下方式進行修復:
  • Pull out the damaged portion or push it back in (depending on the problem) to restore the original shape of the edge.
    拉出損壞的部分或將其推回(視問題而定),以恢復邊緣的原始形狀。
  • Remove any burrs or bumps caused during impact by sanding.
    用砂紙磨平因撞擊而產生的毛刺或凸起。
  • Dry the area thoroughly (either overnight and/or with hair dryer).
    徹底將該區域吹乾(可過夜或使用吹風機)。
  • Clean the damaged area with acetone.
    用丙酮清潔損壞區域。
  • Fill the cavities with epoxy (injected if possible).
    用環氧樹脂填充空洞(如果可能,請注入)。
  • Sandwich the top plate and base around the affected area with clear tape, wood, and c-clamps. Let dry thoroughly.
    在受影響區域周圍用透明膠帶、木板和 C 型夾將頂板和底座夾緊。讓其徹底乾燥。
  • Remove clamps, wood and tape, re-sand and sharpen.
    移除夾具、木板和膠帶,重新打磨並磨尖。
Note: It is recommended that a professional do this type of work.
注意:建議由專業人士進行此類工作。

3. Check the Base
3. 檢查底座

a) Types of Bases
a) 底座類型

Most bases are made of polyethylene. Depending on how the polyethylene is made, the final product will be one of the following:
大多數底座是由聚乙烯製成。根據聚乙烯的製造方式,最終產品將會是以下其中一種:

i) Extruded polyethylene which:
i) 擠出聚乙烯,其特性為:
  • Is less expensive成本較低
  • Is difficult to structure and wax
    難以成型和打蠟
  • Has a poorer performance性能較差
    ii) Sintered polyethylene which:
    ii) 燒結聚乙烯,其:
  • Is more expensive較為昂貴
  • Is highly porous making it easy to
    高度多孔,易於
  • Structure and wax結構與蠟質
  • Has good to excellent performance
    具有良好至優異的性能

    iii) Sintered polyethylene with graphite or other product combinations which:
    iii) 含石墨或其他產品組合的燒結聚乙烯,其特性為:
  • Have similar qualities to regular sintered bases but respond optimally within smaller temperature ranges.
    具有與一般燒結底板相似的特性,但在較小的溫度範圍內反應最佳。

b) Shape of base (edge-to-edge)
b) 底板形狀(邊緣對邊緣)

Flat bases are beneficial for alpine and race boards since they allow quicker edge to edge transitions and generate more speed.
平底板對於高山滑雪板和競賽滑雪板有利,因為它們能更快地完成邊緣轉換並產生更高的速度。
Slightly convex (“bevelled”) bases are beneficial for freestyle and all around boards. They provide a more fluid edge-to-edge transition, which is highly desirable for un-groomed, freestyle and all-mountain terrain.
略微凸起(「斜角」)的底板對自由式和全能滑雪板有益。它們提供更流暢的邊緣轉換,這對未整備的地形、自由式及全山地形非常理想。

c) Base repairc) 底板修復

Small scratches usually do little more than affect the aesthetics of the board. Large, deep scratches and gouges, however, can do serious damage to a board if they are left un-repaired. Besides affecting the board’s performance, humidity may seep through the gouges and cause the board to de-laminate. Bases can be repaired in the following manner:
小刮痕通常只會影響滑雪板的外觀。然而,大而深的刮痕和凹痕如果不修復,可能會對滑雪板造成嚴重損害。除了影響滑雪板的性能外,濕氣可能會滲入凹痕,導致滑雪板分層。底板可依照以下方式修復:

1) Dry out the area to be repaired thoroughly (use a blow dryer and/or overnight drying).
1) 徹底將需修復區域烘乾(使用吹風機和/或隔夜晾乾)。

2) Clean the area to be repaired
2) 清理待修復區域

  • Use a wax solvent and a rag
    使用蠟溶劑和抹布
  • Remove any jagged edges with a sharp knife or razor blade
    用鋒利的刀或剃刀片去除任何鋸齒狀邊緣
  • Sand lightly with silicon carbide sandpaper.
    用矽化碳砂紙輕輕打磨。
  1. Fill the hole or gouge with hot liquid polyethylene obtained in one of the following manners:
    使用以下任一方式取得的熱熔聚乙烯填補洞穴或凹痕:
  • P P quadP\quad \mathrm{P}-Tex repair gun (usually available in most ski shops)
    P P quadP\quad \mathrm{P} -Tex 修補槍(通常在大多數滑雪用品店可購得)
  • Melting a P-Tex candle or P-Tex wafers with an acetylene torch
    使用乙炔噴燈熔化 P-Tex 蠟燭或 P-Tex 蠟片
  • Lighting a P-Tex candle on fire and allowing it to drip into the hole (least desirable method due to presence of carbon resulting from the direct burning).
    點燃 P-Tex 蠟燭並讓其滴入洞中(此方法最不理想,因直接燃燒會產生碳)

4) Let dry, scrape and sand smooth.
4) 讓其乾燥,刮除並打磨平滑。

Note: It is recommended that a professional do this type of work.
注意:建議由專業人士進行此類工作。

4. Sharpening4. 磨鋒

Sharp edges are crucial for good control on hard pack conditions. To sharpen the edges of the board, secure the board firmly in some type of vice and follow these steps:
銳利的邊緣對於硬雪條件下的良好控制至關重要。要磨鋒滑雪板的邊緣,請將滑雪板牢固固定在某種虎鉗中,然後按照以下步驟操作:
Note: The ideal edge-to-edge base profile should be flat or slightly bevelled. If your base varies considerably from this, have it base ground at your local snowboarding shop.
注意:理想的全邊緣底板輪廓應該是平坦或略帶斜角。如果您的底板與此差異較大,請到當地的滑雪板店進行底板研磨。

a) Base Edge Filing
a) 底板邊緣銼磨

  • Place the file diagonally 3 / 4 3 / 4 3//43 / 4 distance across the board.
    將銼刀斜放,跨越滑雪板的 3 / 4 3 / 4 3//43 / 4 距離。
  • Apply pressure directly above the edge and base with both hands.
    雙手直接在邊緣和底板上方施加壓力。
  • Use long, even strokes from one end to the other.
    使用長而均勻的筆觸,從一端到另一端。
  • Remove metal shards from the base AND the file after each pass
    每次使用後,從底座和銼刀上移除金屬碎屑。
  • Avoid stopping and starting in the same place each time.
    避免每次都在同一個地方停下又重新開始。
  • Continue until a smooth edge is obtained.
    持續修磨直到獲得平滑的邊緣。
  • Repeat on the other edge.
    在另一邊重複相同動作。

    b) Side Edge Filing
    b) 側邊修磨
To finally bring out that sharp edge and to maintain an 88-89-degree angle, use a short file attached to a holding device.
最後,使用一把短銼刀並固定在夾持裝置上,以打造銳利的邊緣並維持 88-89 度的角度。
  • Apply even pressure with your thumbs while using long even strokes from tip to tail.
    使用大拇指施加均勻壓力,並以從尖端到尾部的長而均勻的筆觸進行操作。
  • Remove metal shards from the base AND the file after each pass
    每次來回後,從底部和銼刀上移除金屬碎屑。
  • Avoid stopping and starting in the same place each time.
    避免每次都在同一位置停下再開始。
  • Continue until a smooth, sharp edge is obtained.
    持續操作直到獲得光滑且銳利的邊緣。
  • Repeat on the other side.
    重複另一側。

c) De-burring and Detuning
c) 去毛刺與調音

After the edges are sharp and the base is correct, the rough edge, or burr, left by filing should be removed with a honing stone. Also, on most boards, the last few centimetres of the contact edge should be dulled, since a sharp tip or tail can catch on the snow.
當邊緣變得銳利且底部正確後,應使用磨刀石去除銼刀留下的粗糙邊緣或毛刺。此外,在大多數滑雪板上,接觸邊緣的最後幾公分應該鈍化,因為銳利的板頭或板尾可能會勾住雪面。

5. Structuring5. 結構處理

A polished “smooth” surface can be slower than a surface that has been textured with many small grooves. The process of making these grooves is called structuring and is usually finer for cold weather or mid winter snow and is generally applied longitudinally, wetter spring or slushier snow requires deeper grooves and are generally applied in a V shape out towards the edges. A professional at a reputable shop should do structuring with appropriate equipment such as a diamond stone base grinder.
經過拋光的「光滑」表面,速度可能比不上帶有許多細小溝槽的表面。製作這些溝槽的過程稱為結構化,通常在寒冷天氣或冬季中期的雪地上,溝槽較細且多沿縱向排列;而較濕潤的春季或泥濘雪地則需要較深的溝槽,且通常以 V 字形向邊緣延伸。專業且信譽良好的店家應使用適當設備,如鑽石石基底磨床,來進行結構化。

6. Waxing6. 打蠟

To prevent the base from drying out (which makes it slower and more susceptible to damage) lubricate it with wax on a regular basis. To obtain optimal results, follow this sequence:
為防止底板乾燥(會使速度變慢且更易受損),應定期以蠟潤滑。為達最佳效果,請依照以下步驟:
  • Using the iron, melt the wax onto the base of the board dripping it onto one section.
    使用熨斗將蠟熔化,滴在滑雪板底部的一個區域。
  • In a circular motion, further melt the wax into this section. (Never let the iron sit on one spot)
    以圓周運動,將蠟進一步融入此區域。(切勿讓熨斗停留在同一處)
  • Place your free hand on the top sheet as a temperature gage. When you feel warmth on the top sheet, the base has been successfully impregnated with the wax.
    將空著的手放在最上層的板面上作為溫度感測器。當你感覺到最上層板面有溫熱感時,表示底板已成功被蠟浸透。
  • Allow wax to cool slowly to room temperature. Scrape off the excess wax with a plastic scraper.
    讓蠟慢慢冷卻至室溫。使用塑膠刮刀刮除多餘的蠟。
  • Finish this process by brushing the base from tip to tail with a stiff nylon brush to clean the wax off of the structure of the base followed by brushing the base from tip to tail with a soft nylon brush to polish the base.
    完成此程序後,先用硬尼龍刷由板尖刷到板尾,清除底板結構上的蠟,再用軟尼龍刷由板尖刷到板尾,拋光底板。

    Note: Temperatures exceeding 140 degrees Celsius could damage the base. Avoid heating the wax until it begins to smoke.
    注意:溫度超過攝氏 140 度可能會損壞底座。避免加熱蠟直到開始冒煙。

TERMINOLOGY術語

Air to Fakie

Trick in the halfpipe, quarter pipe or wall ride feature. Riding up the “feature” and riding back down switch with no rotation involved.
在半管、四分之一管或牆面騎乘特徵上的技巧。騎上「特徵」後,無旋轉地切換騎乘方向再騎下來。

Alley-Oop空中接力

Any manoeuvre in the halfpipe, with a rotation of 180 degrees or more in an uphill direction. Rotating backside on the frontside wall or rotating frontside on the backside wall.
在半管中,任何向上坡方向旋轉 180 度或以上的動作。於前側牆面向後旋轉,或於後側牆面向前旋轉。

Angulation角度

The lateral angle formed between joints of the body to achieve edging.
身體關節之間形成的側向角度,以達成邊緣控制。

Backside Air背側空中動作

Any air performed on the backside (heel side) wall of the halfpipe.
任何在半管背側(腳跟側)牆面上完成的空中動作。

Backside Rotation背側旋轉

Rotations performed where the back of the body faces the direction of travel during the first 180 degrees of rotation.
在旋轉的前 180 度中,身體背面朝向行進方向所執行的旋轉。

Backside Wall背側牆面

The wall behind a rider in a halfpipe, the left wall for regular-footers and the right wall for goofy-footers.
騎手在半管中的背牆,對於常規腳騎手是左牆,對於反腳騎手是右牆。

Bevel倒角

The degree of angle to which the edges of a snowboard can be tuned.
滑雪板邊緣可調整的角度度數。

Biomechanics生物力學

The study of the body and how it produces motion.
身體的研究以及它如何產生運動。

Blindside

Any rotation where the snowboarder cannot see the path of travel on take-off or landing.
任何在起跳或著陸時,滑雪板手無法看到行進路徑的旋轉。

Boardslide

A manoeuvre performed on a rail or box with the snowboard oriented at 90 degrees (perpendicular) to the rail and sliding flat on the base.
一種在鐵軌或箱子上進行的動作,滑雪板以 90 度(垂直)角度於鐵軌上,並以底板平滑滑行。

Bonk

The act of hitting an object with the snowboard.
用滑雪板撞擊物體的動作。

Base of Support (BOS)
支撐基底(BOS)

Usually refers to the feet and/or what they are attached to i.e., the snowboard.
通常指的是腳部和/或它們所連接的部分,即滑雪板。

Cab

Refers to rotational manoeuvres performed in the switch (opposite to natural direction) - frontside direction. For example, a "cab 360 " would be a 360 degree rotation where the rider takes off and lands “switch” and starts the rotation with his frontside leading the spin for the first 180 degrees.
指的是在反向(與自然方向相反)—前側方向進行的旋轉動作。例如,「cab 360」是指騎手以「switch」姿勢起跳和著陸,並以前側帶動旋轉的 360 度旋轉,前 180 度的旋轉由前側引導。

Canting傾斜調整

A tilt of the binding in relation to the top surface of the board medially or laterally (inside/outside of foot) and/or from toe to heel.
綁定相對於板面頂部向內側或外側(腳的內側/外側)以及/或從腳趾到腳跟的傾斜角度。

Carving雕刻

Turns with no steering angle, riding a pure edge leaving a “pencil” line on the slope.
無轉向角的轉彎,純粹以邊緣滑行,在坡面上留下「鉛筆」線。

Centre of Mass (COM)
質心(COM)

The three-dimensional balance point of an object. The point at which the upper body mass balances with the lower body mass.
物體的三維平衡點。上半身質量與下半身質量平衡的點。

Coping護邊

The edge of the lip that runs the length of a halfpipe wall.
沿著半管牆壁長度延伸的唇邊邊緣。

Counter-Rotation反向旋轉

The upper- and lower-body rotating against each other. The upper body rotates in the opposite direction to the lower body.
上半身與下半身相反方向旋轉。上半身的旋轉方向與下半身相反。

Down Un-Weighting向下去重

Un-weighting produced by a dynamic retraction of the legs.
去重是由腿部的動態收縮產生的。

Duck Stance鴨式站姿

A term used to describe positive angles on the front foot and negative angles on the back foot.
用來描述前腳呈正角度、後腳呈負角度的術語。

Edge Angle邊緣角度

The lateral angle formed between the base of the board and the slope.
滑雪板底部與斜坡之間形成的側向角度。

Effective Edge有效邊緣

The length of the metal edge of the snowboard that touches the ground. The part of the edge that is used to make a turn does not include the edge of the tip and tail.
滑雪板金屬邊緣接觸地面的長度。用來轉彎的邊緣部分不包括板頭和板尾的邊緣。

Extension伸展

Lengthening the body or limbs. Opposite of flexion.
延長身體或四肢。與屈曲相反。

External Forces外力

Natural physical influences exerted on the rider from an outside source, i.e. incline, terrain, snow conditions, etc.
來自外部來源對騎士施加的自然物理影響,例如坡度、地形、雪況等。

Fall Line落差線

An imaginary line following the general or greater slope. On any hill, there is at least one fall line.
一條沿著大致或較大坡度的假想線。在任何山丘上,至少會有一條落差線。

Flexion屈曲

Bending of joints. Opposite of extension.
關節的彎曲。與伸展相反。

Freeriding自由騎乘

Snowboarding on all types of terrain.
在各種地形上滑雪板。

Front Foot前腳

The foot mounted closest to the nose, a regular-footer’s left foot and a goofy-footer’s right foot.
靠近板頭安裝的腳,正腳者為左腳,反腳者為右腳。

Frontside Air

Any air performed on the frontside wall (toe side) of the halfpipe.
任何在半管前側牆(腳尖側)上完成的空中動作。

Frontside Rotation前側旋轉

A spin where the rider’s frontside of the body faces down the hill during the 180 of the rotation.
在旋轉 180 度時,騎手身體的前側朝向山下的旋轉動作。

Frontside Wall前側牆

The halfpipe wall in front of the rider: the right wall for regu-lar-footers and the left wall for goofy-footers.
騎士前方的半管牆壁:對於常規腳騎士是右側牆壁,對於反腳騎士是左側牆壁。

Goofy Foot反腳騎士

Riding a snowboard with the right foot in the forward position.
以右腳在前方位置騎乘滑雪板。

Grab抓板動作

To grab the edge of the snowboard with one or both hands.
用一隻或雙手抓住滑雪板的邊緣。

Halfpipe半管

A snow structure built for freestyle snowboarding consisting of opposing radial transition walls of the same height and size. Used to perform tricks by travelling back and forth from wall to wall while moving down the fall line.
一種為自由式單板滑雪而建造的雪地結構,由兩面相對的放射狀過渡牆組成,兩牆高度與大小相同。滑雪者藉由沿著坡度線來回從一面牆滑到另一面牆,以執行各種技巧。

Heel Edge後跟邊緣

The edge at which the heels rest (one of two edges).
腳跟所踩的邊緣(兩個邊緣之一)。

Impulse衝力

The product of force applied over time.
力與時間的乘積。

Inclination傾斜角

The natural movement of the vertical axis toward the inside of a turn to counteract external forces.
垂直軸自然向轉彎內側移動,以抵消外力。

Inertia慣性

Property of remaining at rest or continuing in constant motion unless acted upon by outside forces. (Newton’s First Law.)
除非受到外力作用,否則保持靜止或持續以恆定速度運動的性質。(牛頓第一定律)

Invert倒轉

A trick where the snowboard travels higher than the shoulders at some point in the manoeuvre.
一種技巧,滑雪板在動作過程中某個時刻會高過肩膀。

JibJib(障礙滑行)

A type of riding which closely resembles street skating. Sliding rails, bonking trees, and performing flat ground tricks.
一種騎乘方式,非常類似街頭滑板。滑行於欄杆、撞擊樹木,並執行平地技巧。

Leash繫繩

A retention device used to attach the snowboard to the front foot so that it does not run away.
用於將滑雪板固定在前腳上的固定裝置,以防止滑雪板滑走。

Lip唇緣

The top edge portion of a take off or halfpipe wall.
起跳台或半管牆的頂部邊緣部分。

Momentum動量

The energy of a body in motion. The product of mass times velocity.
運動中物體的能量。質量乘以速度的乘積。

Nollie

Like an Ollie, only the spring is off the nose of the board instead of the tail. (See Ollie)
類似 Ollie,但彈跳點在滑板的前端而非尾端。(參見 Ollie)

Nose板頭

The front tip of the snowboard.
滑雪板的前端尖端。

Nose Press板頭壓

To ride on the nose of the snowboard with the tail of the board in the air.
用滑雪板的板頭騎行,板尾懸空。

Ollie

A method of becoming airborne from a rider’s own efforts rather than using a jump. In one continuous motion.
一種靠騎士自身力量起跳的方式,而非利用跳躍。動作連貫流暢。

Open Position開放姿勢

A body position in which the chest faces the direction of travel. In a turn it faces more toward the nose of the snowboard.
一種身體姿勢,胸部朝向前進方向。在轉彎時,胸部會更朝向滑雪板的前端。

Passive Un-Weighting被動去重力化

A weighting or un-weighting produced by external forces. Produced when riding over terrain features such as bumps or rollers and allowing the lower joints to move passively.
由外力產生的加重或去重力化。當騎乘經過地形特徵如顛簸或滾軸時,允許下方關節被動移動而產生。

Pedagogy教學法

Science of education.教育科學。

Pivot Point樞軸點

The point along the length of the board around which the board turns can be altered by moving the weight forward or backward on the board.
沿著滑板長度方向,滑板旋轉的支點可以透過將配重向前或向後移動來改變。

Pivoting轉向

Turning the board around the vertical axis of the rider.
繞著騎手的垂直軸旋轉滑板。

Pressure Control壓力控制

Controlling pressure on or against the board by use of flexion and extension of the legs. Upper body action may also modify pressure to the board.
透過腿部的屈伸來控制對滑板施加的壓力。上半身動作也可能改變對滑板的壓力。

Projection投影

A movement of the COM in the direction of travel to produce a turning impulse that is transferred to the board.
質心(COM)沿行進方向的移動,產生一個轉向脈衝並傳遞到滑板上。

Quarterpipe四分之一管

A halfpipe with only one wall.
只有一面牆的半管。

Rear Hand後腳

The hand closest to the tail of the snowboard.
靠近滑雪板尾端的腳。

Rear Foot後腳

The foot mounted closest to the tail.
安裝在靠近尾端位置的腳。

Regular Foot常規腳位

Riding a snowboard with the left foot in the forward position.
以左腳在前方的位置騎乘滑雪板。

Revert反轉

To switch from riding fakie to forward, or from forward to fakie, usually while the snowboard is still touching the ground.
從倒滑(fakie)切換到正向騎乘,或從正向切換到倒滑,通常是在滑雪板仍接觸地面時進行。

Rotation旋轉

The force applied by rotating the body in the direction of the turn.
身體朝轉彎方向施加的力量。

Shifty轉體

A trick without a grab where the upper torso and lower body are twisted in opposite directions then returned to normal.
一種沒有抓握的技巧,上半身與下半身朝相反方向扭轉,然後恢復正常。

Slipping / Skidding滑動/打滑

A sideways movement of the board on the snow.
滑板在雪地上的側向移動。

Snowboarding滑雪板運動

The act of riding a plank down a snowy slope while looking good. May encounter fallen trees, metal pipes, slippery puck board and sweet jumps.
騎著滑板在雪坡上滑行,同時展現帥氣姿態的行為。可能會遇到倒下的樹木、金屬管、滑溜的冰球板和精彩的跳躍。

Stance姿勢

The position of the body on the snowboard.
身體在滑雪板上的位置。

Steering轉向

The combination of pivoting the feet and edging the snowboard.
腳部旋轉與滑雪板邊緣控制的結合。

Steering Angle轉向角

The angle formed between the longitudinal axis of the board and the direction of travel of the rider. Present in sliding turns only carved turns have no steering angle.
板子縱軸與騎乘者行進方向所形成的角度。僅存在於滑行轉彎中,刻劃轉彎則沒有轉向角。

Style風格

The visual impression of the movements.
動作所呈現的視覺印象。

Switchstance / Switch

Performing a trick while riding backwards, on the opposite direction of the natural stance. Specific term given to a manoeuvre performed exactly like riding forwards with the only difference that the rider is going backwards as if she were a goofy footer instead of a regular-footer, or viceversa. Any trick may be performed switch.
在相反於自然站姿的方向上,倒著騎乘時所做的動作。這是一個特定術語,用來形容一個動作,執行方式與正向騎乘完全相同,唯一的差別是騎士是倒著騎,就像是以 goofy 腳站姿騎乘的騎士倒著騎,或是 regular 腳站姿騎士倒著騎。任何動作都可以以 switch 方式執行。

Tail

The rear tip of the snowboard.
滑雪板的後端尖端。

Tail Grab尾巴抓握

The rear hand grabs the tail of the snowboard.
後手抓住滑雪板的尾部。

Tail Press尾巴壓

To ride on the tail of the snowboard with the nose of the board in the air.
用滑雪板的尾部騎行,板頭翹起離地。

Technique技巧

The selection and application of bio-mechanical principles to snowboarding. (Biomechanics is the application of the mechanical principles to human motion.)
將生物力學原理選擇並應用於滑雪板運動。(生物力學是將力學原理應用於人體運動的學科。)

Toe Edge腳尖邊

The toe side of the board. The edge on which the toes of the boots rest. (One of two edges.)
滑雪板的腳尖側。靴子腳趾所踩的邊緣。(兩個邊緣之一。)

Transition過渡段

The radial curved section of a halfpipe wall between the flat bottom and the vertical or landing of a jump or rail feature. Used to gain speed, catch air, and to land.
半管牆面中,位於平底與垂直面或跳台、欄杆特徵著陸處之間的弧形曲面。用於加速、跳躍及著陸。

Traverse橫越

Sliding forward across a slope at an angle to the fall line. Riding perpendicular to the fall line. Traversing from wall to wall in the halfpipe.
沿著斜坡以斜角滑行。垂直於落線滑行。在半管中從一側牆壁橫越到另一側牆壁。

Twin Tip雙尖板

A type of snowboard with turned up tip and tail. The board may be ridden in either direction.
一種滑雪板,前後端都向上翹起。此板可向任一方向滑行。

Un-weighting減重

A reduction in the pressure of the board on the snow.
滑雪板對雪面的壓力減少。

Up Un-weighting向上去重

An un-weighting of the board produced by an extension of the legs.
由腿部延伸產生的板面去重。

Vert垂直面

The vertical top portion of a wall in a halfpipe that allows the snowboarder to fly straight up into the air as opposed to out of the pipe or into the pipe.
半管牆壁的垂直頂部區域,讓滑雪板手能夠直上飛入空中,而不是飛出管外或飛入管內。

Wall牆面

The wall of a halfpipe comprised of a transition and a vertical section.
半管的牆面由過渡段和垂直段組成。

Weight Change重量轉移

A shift of some or all of the weight from one part of the board to another.
將部分或全部重量從滑板的一部分轉移到另一部分。

Weighting加重

Increasing board pressure against the snow.
增加滑雪板對雪面的壓力。

CADS: FUN, INCLUSION, RESPECT
CADS:樂趣、包容、尊重

Canadian Adaptive Snowsports is the Canadian association of ski and snowboard instructors for persons living with a disability. CADS is also the umbrella organization of approximately 100 not-for-profit programs supporting persons living with disability who ski and snowboard across 11 divisions (or provinces) in Canada.
Canadian Adaptive Snowsports 是加拿大為身障人士提供滑雪和滑雪板教學的協會。CADS 同時也是約有 100 個非營利計畫的總體組織,這些計畫支援全加拿大 11 個區域(或省份)中身障人士的滑雪和滑雪板活動。

CADS operates in partnership with the Canadian Association of Snowboard Instructors (CASI), Canada~Snowboard (C~S), the Canadian Ski Instructor’s alliance (CSIA) and with Alpine Canada Alpin (ACA). To aide instructors, CADS has developed an instructor certification system with 4 levels.
CADS 與加拿大滑雪板教練協會(CASI)、Canada~Snowboard(C~S)、加拿大滑雪教練聯盟(CSIA)及加拿大高山滑雪協會(ACA)合作運作。為協助教練,CADS 制定了一套包含四個等級的教練認證系統。

The CADS certification curriculum addresses the needs of persons living with Visual Impairment, with an Autism Spectrum Disorder or Cognitive Impairment, amputation or spinal cord injuries.
CADS 認證課程針對視覺障礙、自閉症光譜障礙或認知障礙、截肢或脊髓損傷者的需求進行設計。
A CADS Certification Course will enable an instructor to:
CADS 認證課程將使教練能夠:
  1. Assess the abilities of a client living with a disability
    評估身障客戶的能力
  2. Determine the needs for adaptive equipment
    確定適應性設備的需求
  3. Determine the need for adaptive teaching techniques
    確定適應性教學技巧的需求
2016 marks the start of an exciting new chapter in CADS as we roll out the CADS Level 1 Snowboard Certification. We welcome any interested program, instructor, or ski school to join us in providing exceptional experiences to all adaptive riders.
2016 年標誌著 CADS 一個令人振奮的新篇章,我們推出了 CADS 第一級單板滑雪認證。我們歡迎任何有興趣的計畫、教練或滑雪學校加入我們,共同為所有適應性滑雪者提供卓越的體驗。

CREDITS版權聲明

Technical Coordinator技術協調員

Jeff Chandler

Concept & Design概念與設計

Jeff Chandler

Photography攝影
Andrew Jay PhotographyAndrew Jay 攝影
Allison Kennedy Davies
Gavin Crawford
Andrei Mortila

Working Group & Contributors
工作小組與貢獻者

Luc Belanger, Alexandre Burr, Jeff Chandler, Jamie Forbes, Adam Gardner, Simon Holden, Paul Howard, Yukiko Kawada, Mellen Jay, John Smits, Breen Trott
Luc Belanger、Alexandre Burr、Jeff Chandler、Jamie Forbes、Adam Gardner、Simon Holden、Paul Howard、Yukiko Kawada、Mellen Jay、John Smits、Breen Trott

And a special thanks to all previous National Technical Team and Technical & Educational Committee members who have contributed to this teaching manual over the years.
特別感謝過去所有曾為本教學手冊做出貢獻的國家技術團隊及技術與教育委員會成員。

Demonstrators示威者

Luc Belanger, Jeff Chandler, Kai Chandler, Jamie Forbes, Simon Holden, Mellen Jay, Laura Price, Jaron Pauls, Fernando Pomar, Laura Price, Reuben Schroeter, John Smits, Breen Trott, Dane Verity
Luc Belanger、Jeff Chandler、Kai Chandler、Jamie Forbes、Simon Holden、Mellen Jay、Laura Price、Jaron Pauls、Fernando Pomar、Laura Price、Reuben Schroeter、John Smits、Breen Trott、Dane Verity
Thanks to the following resorts…
感謝以下度假村…

Big White Ski Resort, British Columbia
Big White Ski Resort,卑詩省

Blue Mountain, Ontario藍山,安大略省

References參考資料

Canadian Ski Instructors Alliance: Canadian Ski Teaching, 2011
加拿大滑雪教練聯盟:Canadian Ski Teaching,2011

Canada~Snowboard Coaching Program:
加拿大滑雪板教練計畫:

Competition Introduction Coaching Manual
競賽介紹教練手冊

Competition Development Coaching Manual
競賽發展教練手冊

Snowboard Instruction New Zealand:
紐西蘭滑雪板教學:

Teaching Manual, 2010教學手冊,2010 年
American Association Of Snowboard Instructors:
美國單板滑雪教練協會:

Snowboard Teaching Manual
單板滑雪教學手冊

Professional Mountain Bike Instructors Association:
專業山地自行車教練協會:

Teaching Manual教學手冊
And a special thank you to those not included in this list.
特別感謝未列入此名單的所有人。

CANADIAN ASSOCIATION OF SNOWBOARD INSTRUCTORS
加拿大滑雪板教練協會